AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE
OPERACIN Y
MANTENIMEINTO
EQUIPO:
UN (1) MECANISMO ESPESADOR DE RELAVES DE ALTA
DENSIDAD WESTECH HiDENSITYTM DE 40M DIA. X 6,5M
MODELO PT240

PARA:
SOCIEDAD MINERA EL BROCAL S.A.A.
LIMA, PERU

SUMINISTRADO POR:
WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC.
SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH

WESTECH JOB NUMBER 21261A

JULIO 2011

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 PORTADA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

UN (1) MECANISMO ESPESADOR DE ALTA DENISIDAD WESTECH

HiDENSITYTM DE 40 METROS DE DIMENTRO Y UN TANQUE TIPO
ANCHOR CHANNEL DE 40 METROS DE DIMETRO.
(MODELO WESTEH PT-240)

ELABORADO PARA:
SOCIEDADMINERA EL BROCAL S.A.A.
LIMA, PERU
NMERO DE ORDEN DE COMPRA: 020-900-23783

REPRESENTADO POR:
GOLDEX S.A.
ATTN: GODOFREDO BARRIOS FUENTES
CALLETORRIGIANOPIETRO #379
SAN BORJA, LIMA 41 PERU
TELFONO: 011-511-225-7585
FAX: 011-511-225-7587
CEL: 011-511-999-44-2546
gbarrios@goldex.com.pe

CONSULTURA DE ENSAYOS DE PROCESO:

PASTETHICK ASSOCIATES
SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH
TELFONO: (801) 573-7318

FABRICANTE:
WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC.
3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE
SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH84115
TELFONO: (801) 265-1000
FAX: (801) 265-1080

NMERO DE REFERENCIA WESTECH: 21261A

JULIO 2011

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 VISIN DEL MANUAL
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

El presente manual describe la instalacin, operacin y mantenimiento de un

Espesador de Relaves de Alta Densidad WesTech HiDensityTM suministrado
para El Brocal en Lima, Per para la disposicin de relaves. Para asegurar la
conservacin de la garanta, WesTech recomienda que este Manual de
Operacin y Mantenimiento sea completamente ledo y entendido. Este manual
se divide en las siguientes secciones:

I. Introduccin

II. Garanta

III. Informacin General

IV. Unidad de Accionamiento del Espesador

V. Instrucciones de Instalacin

VI. Arranque y Operacin

VII. Mantenimiento y Piezas

VIII. Accesorios

IX. Anexos

Todos los equipos, incluyendo los tems suministrados por terceros, deben ser
mantenidos de acuerdo a los procedimientos de operacin y mantenimiento de
los fabricantes presentados en los anexos de este manual para asegurar la
cobertura de fallas posibles mientras la unidad se encuentre todava bajo
garanta junto con la operacin libre de averas para el tiempo de vida del
equipo.

Motivado a que la informacin anexada se basa en las instrucciones disponibles

al momento de la impresin de este manual, WesTech se reserva el derecho
de hacer cambios subsecuentes al manual sin la obligacin de actualizar las
copias existentes.

COPYRIGHT

Los contenidos de este manual son de propiedad confidencial de WesTech

Engineering, Inc. La circulacin, distribucin o reproduccin de este manual,
total o parcial sin permiso por escrito est legalmente prohibido. La posesin
de este manual no confiere ni transfiere ningn derecho, que pueda ser
perjudicial a los intereses de WesTech.

Copyright 2011

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 TABLA DE CONTENIDO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

PORTADA
VISIN DEL MANUAL
TABLA DE CONTENIDO

INTRODUCCIN
Descripcin del Proceso
Reologa
Descripcin del Espesador

GARANTA

INFORMACIN DEL EQUIPO

Precauciones Generales
Faltantes, Discrepancias y Encargos de Campo
Recepcin del Equipo

UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO DEL ESPESADOR

GENERAL
Introduccin
Recepcin e Inspeccin
Encargos de Campo y Modificaciones
Almacenamiento y Durabilidad de la Pintura
Advertencia del Tratamiento a Chorro Abrasivo
Advertencia de la Lubricacin
Advertencia de la Configuracin del Control de Torque
Advertencia de Mantenimiento y Operacin

INSTALACIN
Izamiento de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Instalacin de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Advertencia de la Soldadura
Arranque

MANTENIMIENTO
Ensamblaje/Desensamble de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Lubricacin de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Mantenimiento Anual de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Mantenimiento Semanal de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Lubricacin de Accesorios
Hoja de Mantenimiento
Procedimiento de Requisicin de Repuestos

OPERACIN
Instrucciones de Operacin Unidad de Accionamiento
Solucin de Problemas de la Unidad de Accionamiento

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 TABLA DE CONTENIDO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ACCESORIOS
Reductor Intermediario de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Motor Reductor de la Unidad de Accionamiento
21355 Lista de Piezas de la Unidad de Accionamiento

ANEXOS

PLANES DE LA UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO

D357S002 Cage Drive Assembly Elevation
D357S003 Cage Drive Assembly Plan
ASMDIAG-21261A Assembly Diagram
DRV103 Drive Assembly Procedures
LUBETAG-21261A Lubrication Tags
900-611D Drive Shimming Procedure

DISPOSITIVO DE CONTROL DE TORQUE

E12D Electrical Schematic

INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIN
Secuencia Sugerida de Montaje
Instalacin de la columna central y ubicacin del tubo de torque
Procedimiento sugerido de aplicacin del grout
Montaje de la canal de ancla del Tanque
Marcas de Referencia
Instalacin de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Instalacin del tubo de torque
Puente, Plataforma, Pasamano y Entramado
Instalacin del Pozo y Tubo de Alimentacin
Verificacin final de la Nivelacin
Instalacin de los Brazos Raspadores
Instalacin de los Piquetes, Soportes de los Piquetes y Raspador del
Cono
Instalacin Elctrica
Tratamiento de Superficie
tems Miscelneos

ARRANQUE Y OPERACIN
Instrucciones de Seguridad
Arranque del Mecanismo
Arranque y Operacin del Proceso
Requerimientos del floculante
Filosofa de Control
Solucin de Problemas del Arranque
Alarmas de Torque Alto y Seales de Advertencia
Procedimiento de Parada

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 TABLA DE CONTENIDO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANTENIMIENTO Y PIEZAS
Mantenimiento del Equipo
Condiciones de Emergencia y Solucin de Problemas
Precauciones de Almacenamiento
Explicacin de Lista y Nmero de Piezas
21472 Mechanism Index& Specifications
21692 Mechanism General Assembly
21069 Thickened Tailings Thickener Control Panel Layout
21307 PLC Panel Layout
Procedimiento de Requisicin de Repuestos
Lista de Repuestos Recomendada

ACCESORIOS
Informacin Elctrica y del PLC
Medidor de Flujo Magntico
Sensor del Nivel del Lecho Ultrasnico
Transmisor de Presin de la cama

ANEXOS
Tarjeta de lnea del producto

PLANES DEL MECANISMO

B100 Tailings Thickener General Notes
D101 Tailings Thickener General Arrangement Tank Cutaway
View
D102 Tailings Thickener General Arrangement Elevation View
D103 Tailings Thickener General Arrangement Plan View
D104 Tailings Thickener General Arrangement General Details
B105 Surface Preparation & Painting Submerged
B106 Surface Preparation & Painting Nonsubmerged
B107 Surface Preparation & Painting Drive Unit
1110 Tailings Thickener General Assembly
1111 Tailings Thickener General Assembly Bridge & Platform
1112 Tailings Thickener General Assembly Bridge & Platform
1113 Tailings Thickener General Assembly Influent & Feedwell
1114 Tailings Thickener General Assembly Mechanism
1115 Tailings Thickener General Assembly - Mechanism

PLANES DEL TANQUE

200 Tank General Arrangement General Notes
201 Tank General Arrangement Foundation Loads
202 Tank General Arrangement Plan View
203 Anchor Channel Ring Assembly
204 Tank General Arrangement Elevation View
210 Shell General Erection
211 Bridge Supports Erection

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 TABLA DE CONTENIDO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

212 Erection Details Launder & DropBoxes

PLANES ELCTRICOS

E10D Panel LayOut

E11D Electrical Schematic
E12D Electrical Schematic
E13D Electrical Schematic / Annunciation Contacts
E14D Field Wiring Diagram
E15D Field Wiring Diagram
E16D PLC Panel Layout
E17D Electrical Schematic
E18D Electrical Schematic
E19D Electrical Schematic
E20D Electrical Schematic
E21D Electrical Schematic
E22D Electrical Schematic
E23D Electrical Schematic
E24D Annunciation Contacts / TB Layout
E25D Field Wiring Diagram
E26D Field Wiring Diagram
E27D Field Wiring Diagram
PID
PID01 Piping & Instrumentation Symbols
PID02 Piping & Instrumentation Symbols
PID03 Suggested Piping & Instrument Diagram
PID04 Suggested Piping & Instrument Diagram
PFID101 Suggested Piping & Instrument Diagram

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

INTRODUCCIN

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 DESCRIPCIN DEL PROCESO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

DESCRIPCIN DEL PROCESO

El Espesador de relaves de alta densidad WesTech HiDensityTM de 40 m de

dimetro est diseado para espesar los relaves producidos por la mina. En
el proceso, se adiciona floculante al pozo de alimentacin del espesador de
relaves, el cual maximiza la tasa de sedimentacin de slidos y la
concentracin de slidos en el flujo debajo.

La floculacin de slidos se mejora con la dilucin de la pulpa, realizada en

el pozo de alimentacin de auto dilucin WesTech MultiPortTM. El pozo de
alimentacin est diseado para usar el flujo de sobra del espesador para
diluir la alimentacin del espesador. La dilucin de la alimentacin optimiza
la floculacin y a su vez maximiza el flujo de sedimentacin de slidos.

El espesador de relaves de alta densidad difiere de un espesador

convencional y espesadores de alta tasa de sedimentacin (High Rate), por
la proporcin de un tiempo de retencin de slidos relativamente altos en la
cama decantado. La cama es raspado con un mecanismo diseado para
realizar la remocin de agua retenida en la cama y mover el material
espesado para las bombas de descargas. En este proyecto, no se dispone de
elevacin de los brazos raspadores. Una capacidad alta de torque de
raspado asegura la mayora de las condiciones de lodo que pueden ser
raspados satisfactoriamente.

Los relaves del espesador se descarga mediante la utilizacin de bombas

centrfugas.

El espesador de relaves de alta densidad se controla mediante:

(1) Medicin del flujo volumtrico y la densidad de la alimentacin para

determinar el flujo msico, lo que controla la adicin de floculante para
mantener una dosificacin dada (gramos de floculante por tonelada de
slido seco),

(2) Medicin del nivel del lecho en el espesador y/o presin para controlar la
tasa de remocin del flujo debajo para mantener un tiempo de residencia
deseado en la cama del espesador.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 DESCRIPCIN DEL PROCESO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

BALANCE DE MASA

Flujo de Flujo
Alimentacin
Sobra Debajo
Lodo (m/h) 3,805 3,052 753
Porcentaje de Slidos (%) 20.0% 0.0% 65.0%
Gravedad Especfica (GE) 1.16 1.00 1.80

Gravedad Especfica del Slido: 3.17

El espesamiento de slidos a una alta concentracin asociada con la

condicin de esto espesador es la nica funcin de un espesador de relaves
de alta densidad. El espesador debe tambin descarga los relaves espesados
para la prxima etapa en el proceso de manipulacin y disposicin. La
geometra del tanque, el diseo de los brazos raspadores y la unidad de
accionamiento son factores importantes para la remocin satisfactoria del
slido espesado. Para proveer una base para el entendimiento de la
mecnica, diseo del proceso y procedimientos de operacin del sistema del
flujo debajo, esta seccin discute la reologa de relaves espesados. La
viscosidad y otras propiedades reolgicas distinguen la relaves espesados de
los lodos sedimentados manejados por espesadores convencionales y Alta
Densidad. La naturaleza de estas propiedades y como estas son afectadas
para factores como temperatura, qumica del agua y mineraloga de los
relaves son explicadas.

Al estudiar el material contenido en esta seccin, el lector podr entender:

Las propiedades reolgicas de relaves espesados y como estas

propiedades controlan la operacin del espesador de relaves y el
sistema de bombeo aguas abajo.
Como la densidad y la viscosidad de los relaves espesados son
controladas.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

REOLOGA

El proyecto del espesador para descargar un flujo debajo no sedimentable

de concentracin de slidos alta esta basado en una compresin de la
reologa de los relaves espesados. La reologa es el estudio del flujo de
materia e incluye propiedades con viscosidad y elasticidad. Por ejemplo,
agua y aceite de motor tiene diferentes propiedades de flujo: el agua cae
por un embudo ms rpido que el aceite de motor, motores ms grandes
son necesarios para accionar bombas para aceite que de agua y segn la
temperatura disminuye, el flujo de aceite puede progresivamente quedar
mas lento mientras no es observada ninguna diferencia para el agua. La
ciencia de la reologa describe las propiedades fsicas que justifican el
comportamiento del agua y el aceite en estos ejemplos.

Tanto los espesadores convencionales como las de alta densidad (High-Rate)

producen lodos sedimentables. Como su nombre lo describe, los slidos en
los lodos sedimentables se asentarn si no son agitados o mantenidos en
movimiento de alguna forma. Lodos sedimentables presentan propiedades
de flujo parecidas con el agua. El flujo debajo (como lodos no
sedimentables) de los espesadores de relaves espesados es ms anlogo al
motor de aceite cuando es comparado con lodos sedimentables parecidos
con el agua. El proyecto y la operacin de los espesadores estn basados en
la comprensin de porque los relaves espesados fluye de ese modo. En esta
seccin se presentan definiciones de reologa con algunas descripciones
matemticas, pero solamente lo necesario para presentar el fundamento
para la descripcin de los relaves espesados.

La naturaleza de la viscosidad Suspensiones Newtonianas

Tome en consideracin el agua fluyendo libremente montaa abajo despus

de una tempestad. Ahora visualice el agua sustituida por barro espeso, una
suspensin de tierra y agua producida por la lluvia. La tasa de flujo del agua
ser mayor que para el barro. La diferencia de flujo ocurre porque hay
mucho ms friccin interna en el barro que en el agua. Las pequeas
partculas de tierra saltando deslizando contra otra provocan friccin,
disminuyendo la velocidad del flujo. La corriente de agua movindose ms
rpido tambin tiene friccin interna, ms de interaccin de molcula a
molcula, sin la presencia de partculas de tierra. La friccin es ms baja que
para la corriente de barro y la tasa de flujo es ms alta. La propiedad
reolgica de viscosidad es una medida de la friccin interna de un fluido.

El movimiento de cualquier fluido esta descrito en trminos reolgicos como

cizallamiento. El cizallamiento ocurre cuando un fluido, como el agua o el
barro, esta en movimiento. Entre ms friccin, ms cantidad de fuerza es
necesaria para mantener el movimiento (cizallamiento).

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Isaac Newton defini la viscosidad. Visualice dos planos paralelos de fluido

(agua, aceite, barro etc.) Segn lo mostrado en la figura separado por una
distancia X y moviendo para la misma direccin en diferentes velocidades.
Estos planos son anlogos a capas planas de molculas, movindose a
diferentes velocidades una con respecto a la otra. Newton concluye que la
fuerza necesaria para mantener esta diferencia en la velocidad era
proporcional al gradiente de velocidad entre dos planos. En trminos
matemticos, esta representado por la siguiente ecuacin

Planos paralelos de un fluido

El trmino F/A es llamado de tensin de cizallamiento, la fuerza por unidad

de rea (presin) requerida para producir una diferencia de velocidades de
dos planos paralelos de un fluido. El trmino dv/dx es el gradiente de
velocidad, tambin llamado tasa de cizallamiento. El factor es la constante
de proporcionalidad. Al arreglar, se puede expresar como la razn de la
tensin de cizallamiento a la tasa de cizallamiento. El factor es constante
cuando la temperatura es constante. La unidad comnmente usada para la
tensin de cizallamiento es Pascal (Pa). La unidad de taza de cizallamiento
es el inverso de segundo (s-1). La unidad de es Pascal por Segundo (Pa.s).
La descripcin funcional de estos trminos puede ser descrita abajo:

El cizallamiento ocurre cuando un fluido, tal como el flujo debajo de

un espesador, se mueve por ejemplo durante el bombeo o fluye en
una lnea de tubera. Mayor cizallamiento ser relacionado a una
mayor tasa de cizallamiento.
La tensin de cizallamiento es la presin contra la cual el relaves
espesados debe moverse, tal y como la friccin en una tubera.

Al graficar la tensin de cizallamiento versus la tasa de cizallamiento, resulta

una lnea recta de inclinacin , como se muestra en la figura graph A. Este
tipo de grfico es llamado de curva de flujo, la cual ofrece una valiosa
informacin acerca de la reologa de un fluido.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Existen muchos fluidos para el cual a una temperatura dada es constante,

en cuyo caso una presin dada (tensin de cizallamiento) producir
solamente una tasa de cizallamiento. Un fluido con este comportamiento es
llamado de Newtoniano y es la viscosidad. El agua, por ejemplo, es un
fluido Newtoniano.

Debido a la viscosidad ser constante, si la presin causa una duplicacin del

flujo (una montaa mas inclinada, o una bomba de mayor potencia), la tasa
de flujo se duplicar tambin. Otros ejemplos de fluidos Newtonianos
incluyen aceite y la solucin de polmeros usada para la floculacin. Relaves
espesado tambin muestra propiedad Newtoniana de una viscosidad
constante si los slidos sedimentan cuando el lodo no est en movimiento,
tal y como fluyendo a travs de tuberas. Otro ejemplo es la corriente de
alimentacin al espesador de relaves.

En la figura, Graph B, la viscosidad () se grafica contra la tasa de

cizallamiento para un fluido Newtoniano. La curva resultante es una
horizontal, ilustrando viscosidad constate de una solucin Newtoniana sobre
un rango de velocidades de flujo (tasas de cizallamiento).

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

La interaccin de partculas como factor para generar suspensiones

no Newtonianas

El fluido que no se comporta de acuerdo a la definicin de Newton de

viscosidad a una temperatura constante es llamado No Newtoniano. La
viscosidad de este tipo de fluido no es constante sobre un rango de tasas de
corte (flujo). El cizallamiento (flujo) a la tensin de cizallamiento no es cero,
y si un nmero finito, lo que implica que existe una fuerza necesaria
igualmente cuando el fluido no est en movimiento. El flujo debajo de un
espesador de relaves espesados es un fluido no Newtoniano. Para entender
estas propiedades, tan diferentes de aquellas del agua y el lodo
sedimentable, se examina la suspensin en un nivel de partcula individual.
Vase la siguiente figura. La corriente de relaves que sale de la planta de
procesos es una suspensin de algunas partculas gruesas en una dispersin
de partculas de tamao muy finas y coloidales. Las partculas coloidales
poseen generalmente menos de 2 micrmetros en dimetro. Juntas estas
partculas gruesas y finas conforman la distribucin de tamaos de
partculas de los relaves.

Las molculas de agua, las partculas coloidales y las partculas con dimetro
menor que 20 micrmetros interactan para producir el carcter reolgico
del lodo de los relaves, tales como la viscosidad. Adems de las fuerzas de
atraccin y repulsin entre las molculas de agua, existen interacciones
entre las partculas slidas.

Las formas principales de interaccin entre partculas coloidales en agua son

del tipo interacciones de Van der Waals, repulsin de Brn e interaccin de
la capa doble. Las fuerzas de Van der Waals existen debido a la asimetra de
la distribucin de cargas en las molculas que conforman las partcula. La
repulsin de Brn ocurre a distancias muy cortas entre las partculas.
Partculas coloidales y arcillosas absorben iones creando lo que se conoce
como la capa doble elctrica. Estas superficies cargadas interactan
dependiendo de la naturaleza y la concentracin de los iones absorbidos.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Interacciones entre partculas slidas son clasificadas como hidrodinmicas y

de contacto directo. En la interaccin hidrodinmica, el movimiento relativo
de partculas induce el flujo que disipa la energa de la viscosidad. La
energa disipada de esta forma es levemente mayor que la obtenida si el
volumen ocupado por las partculas es substituido por el fluido. Por esta
razn la viscosidad de suspensin es mayor que para el fluido puro y
aumenta con el aumento de contenido de volumen de slidos. En contacto
directo hay efectos de friccin pura y disipacin de energa debido a
colisiones.

Las interacciones de partculas se combinan para producir la viscosidad de

una suspensin. Por la proximidad de las partculas resultado de la densidad
alta, las interacciones son mucho ms fuertes que en una suspensin
newtoniana, como un lodo sedimentable o agua en que hay solamente una
interaccin molcula a molcula.

Curvas de Fluidos No Newtonianos

Un fluido no newtoniano generalmente es definido como aquel para que

cuando la tasa de cizallamiento es cambiada, la tensin de cizallamiento no
cambia en la misma proporcin. Retornando al flujo de barro bajando por la
montaa, si la tasa de flujo crece (aumento de la tasa de cizallamiento), la
presin (tensin de cizallamiento) asociado con el aumento de diferencia de
velocidad entre los planos de deslizantes de barro es mucho menos
proporcional. Refirindose a la definicin de viscosidad, el trmino, no es
constante. La curva de flujo para un fluido no newtoniano no es recta, sino
una curva para arriba o para abajo segn lo mostrado en el grfico C y D.

Pinturas y otras emulsiones son ejemplos de fluidos no newtonianos. El

flujo debajo de un espesador de relaves de alta densidad tambin muestra
propiedades no newtonianas. Lo que hace una suspensin de slidos
mostrar una curva de flujo que no es recta no es comprendido
completamente. Sin embargo, el fenmeno esta relacionado al tamao,

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

forma y composicin qumica de las partculas. Conforme las partculas se

mueven (tasa de cizallamiento) en relacin a las otras, las fuerzas
resultantes (tensin de cizallamiento) que es desarrollada entre las
partculas es menor o mayor que la necesaria para mantener el movimiento.

Diferente de los fluidos newtonianos, la viscosidad de un fluido no

newtoniano no es constante y cambia segn la variacin de la tasa de
cizallamiento. Esto es mostrado en la figura, graph E arriba. La viscosidad
para este tipo de fluido debe ser medida en una tasa de cizallamiento
especfica y es llamada de una viscosidad aparente.

Cuando la viscosidad disminuye con el aumento de la tasa de cizallamiento,

el fluido es llamado diluente de cizallamiento. Pinturas y emulsiones son
ejemplos de fluidos diluentes. Muchos flujo debajo de espesadores de
relaves de alta densidad tambin muestran el comportamiento de diluente
de cizallamiento como esta aplicacin. Por ejemplo, a medida que el flujo
debajo del espesador es bombeado (cizallado) en la bomba centrfuga del
flujo debajo, la viscosidad disminuye (Cizallamiento se diluye). El
cizallamiento introduce una energa que rompe el enlace entre las partculas
finas causando un cambio en la viscosidad. Esta ruptura de enlace puede ser
una funcin de tasa de cizallamiento en el caso de los relaves espesados
diluentes de cizallamiento o tiempo de cizallamiento para materiales
tixotrpicos. Dependiendo si y cuan rpidamente los enlaces son
restablecidos la viscosidad y el lmite elstico pueden recuperarse completa
o parcialmente una vez que el cizallamiento haya parado.

Lo opuesto tambin puede suceder donde la viscosidad aumenta con el

aumento de la tasa de cizallamiento que se refiere a un espesador de
cizallamiento. Relaves arcillosos, almidn de maz en el agua y mezclas de
agua y arena son ejemplos. Generalmente este tipo de propiedad no se
aplica a relaves minerales.

LMITE ELSTICO

Otra caracterstica de algunos fluidos no newtonianos es el comportamiento

de un slido bajo condiciones estticas. Cierta cantidad de fuerza debe ser
aplicada en forma presin para el fluido antes que el mismo fluya. Esta
presin es llamada de lmite elstico.

El lmite elstico es la tensin (unidades de presin) que debe ser aplicada a

unos relaves espesados fluido para iniciar el cizallamiento (deformacin o
flujo). Considere los relaves fluidos como una red de partculas slidas,
cerrada en un lugar por varias de las interacciones descritas arriba y esta
red debe ser quebrada para que el flujo ocurra. La fuerza o presin
necesaria para quebrar la red es el lmite elstico. Conforme la
concentracin de slidos, concentracin de iones, temperatura y cambios as

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

sucesivamente, la resistencia de la red cambia resultando en diferentes

lmites elsticos. Cuando suspensiones de slidos se tornan suficientemente
concentradas, las partculas finas (partculas tpicamente con un dimetro
menor a 20 micrmetros) forman enlaces a travs de interacciones
electroestticas. La teora no es bien entendida y varios intelectuales han
investigado y propuesto mecanismos. Este enlace resulta en una red
continua que se quiebra cuando una presin mnima es aplicada, que es el
lmite elstico. Salsa hecha de tomates (extracto de tomate) es un buen
ejemplo de un fluido con lmite elstico. La salsa de tomate no fluir del
frasco hasta que se aplique una fuerza suficiente al balacear el frasco para
superar el lmite elstico. El flujo debajo del espesador de relaves
espesados tambin tiene un lmite elstico. Si el flujo debajo del espesador
es recolectado en un balde y tirado en el piso, los relaves espesados formar
una pila con cierta altura. La siguiente foto muestra relaves que mantienen
una forma porque la traccin o fuerza producida por la gravedad es
insuficiente para sobrepasar las fuerzas internas (lmite elstico) y provocar
una cada de la pila. Repitiendo este experimento con el alimento del
espesador de relaves espesados, que es un fluido newtoniano sin lmite
elstico no resultar en una pila definida.

La curva de flujo para relaves espesados con lmite elstico y un

comportamiento de dilucin de cizallamiento son diferentes que lo mostrado
para el fluido newtoniano en que la lnea alcanza el punto tensin de
cizallamiento cero versus tasa de cizallamiento cero. En la condicin de tasa
de cizallamiento cero (condicin de no flujo), existe una tensin de
cizallamiento finita (lmite elstico). Si el lmite elstico es superado por
presin suficiente (tal como gravedad o por bombeo), el flujo comenzar (la
tasa de cizallamiento aumentar).

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Existen varios modelos disponibles para describir un fluido con lmite

elstico, pero el modelo del plstico de Bingham ofrece la mejor descripcin
conceptual.

Donde = Tensin de Cizallamiento

0 = Lmite Elstico

= Viscosidad
= Tasa de Cizallamiento

El modelo Bingham es una descripcin idealizada de relaves espesados

formadas con relaves espesados. Realmente la curva del flujo mostrar el
carcter diluente espesante de cizallamiento, as como tambin el lmite
elstico.

REOLOGA DE LOS RELAVES ESPESADOS DEL BROCAL

La siguiente figura muestra una curva de flujo tpica de los relaves

espesados que fue usada para proyectar el espesador. Para curvas como la
obtenidas para estas relaves espesados, el lmite esttico se determina por
la proyeccin de la curva a la condicin de tasa de cizallamiento cero (La
intercepcin de la curva con el eje de la ordenada Y).

Curva Tpica de Lmite Elstico

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Existen otras propiedades No Newtonianas donde algunos fluidos presentan

un cambio en la viscosidad con el tiempo bajo condiciones de tasa de
cizallamiento constante. Para materiales tixotrpicos, el fluido experimenta
un descenso de la viscosidad con el tiempo.

El anlisis de los datos de la curva de flujo revela muchas caractersticas de

los relaves espesados. Por ejemplo, la capacidad para diluir el cizallamiento.
La diferencia entre el comportamiento de las curvas superior e inferior
muestra una dilucin del cizallamiento durante las medidas del viscosmetro.

CURVA DE LMITE ELSTICO

La curva de lmite elstico es importante para la proyeccin apropiada del

espesador de alta densidad. La curva se desarrolla mediante la medicin de
la tensin de cizallamiento para diferentes densidades, y la graficacin de
los resultados como tensin de cizallamiento versus densidad. La siguiente
figura es un ejemplo de la curva de lmite elstico para relaves espesados.
Los lmites elsticos para lodos (suspensiones sedimentables) alcanza el
valor de cero. A medida que la concentracin de slidos o densidad
aumenta, el lmite elstico se incrementa rpidamente y la suspensin se
vuelve cada vez ms no sedimentable (relaves espesados).

Curva Tpica de Lmite Elstico

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

El entendimiento de la reologa de suspensiones es importante debido a que

la presencia de un lmite elstico y el acompaamiento de una viscosidad
relativamente alta limitan el desempeo de un espesador y el sistema de
bombeo y tuberas. El espesador del El Brocal est proyectado para espesar
y descargar un flujo debajo con caractersticas de relaves espesados en el
rango de condiciones que todava puede ser transportada con bomba
centrfuga. Similarmente, las bombas y tuberas que descargan el flujo
debajo en el sitio de disposicin final estn tambin proyectadas para
transportar un flujo debajo de alta viscosidad; Los controles descritos
posteriormente en este documento son colocados especficamente para
asegurar que tanto el espesador como el sistema de bombeo estn dentro
de los parmetros del proyecto.

FACTORES QUE DETERMINAN LAS PROPIEDADES REOLGICAS

Para operar un espesador de alta densidad de la mejor forma se exige la

comprensin de que el carcter reolgico del flujo debajo puede ser
afectado por muchos factores. Las propiedades reolgicas de los relaves
espesados (esto es el lmite elstico y la viscosidad) son simplemente los
efectos de mezcla resultante de interacciones de partculas arcillosas que
ocurren a nivel microscpico dentro de los relaves espesados fluida de
densidad alta. A nivel microscpico, los factores que afectan la manera en
que las partculas de lodo se orientan y consecuentemente interactan con
las otras, son largamente de naturaleza qumica y fsica. Las propiedades
exhibidas por relaves espesados son dependientes de varias condiciones
incluyendo, temperatura, mineraloga, distribucin del tamao de la
partcula, pH, tipo y concentracin de los materiales disueltos en una fase
lquida, formato de la pelcula y concentracin de slidos. El modelo de
relaves espesados como red de partculas pequeas interactuando por causa
de la proximidad y de la presencia de una carga elctrica de la superficie
ofrece una base para la comprensin del efecto de esas propiedades.

Temperatura La viscosidad del agua disminuye con el aumento de la

temperatura. Relaves espesados tienen la suspensin de partculas
slidas en agua, as la viscosidad disminuir con el aumento de la
temperatura.

Mineraloga La naturaleza de las partculas slidas muy pequeas,

en el rango menor a 20 micrmetros, deben tener una carga elctrica
de superficie (generalmente negativa). El tipo y concentracin de esta
carga es en parte dependiente de la naturaleza de las molculas de
superficie de las partculas slidas que son generalmente identificadas
por anlisis qumicas (mineraloga) de los slidos. Esta carga de
superficie es un factor importante en la creacin de la red entre las

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

partculas finas que cuentan para la naturaleza de no sedimentacin

de los relaves espesados.

Qumica del agua de proceso - La carga de superficies de la partcula

slida es afectada por el tipo y concentracin de las especies inicas
disueltas en la fase acuosa de los relaves espesados. Iones de carga
positiva (cationes) e iones de carga negativa (aniones) interactan
con las molculas en la superficie de la partcula para producir una
carga de red. Es esta la carga que determina la resistencia de la red
de interaccin de slidos y de esta forma propiedades como
viscosidad y lmite elstico. El pH que representa la concentracin de
iones de hidrgeno con carga positiva es una medida familiar de la
naturaleza inica de la fase lquida.

Distribucin de tamao de la partcula - Si una partcula slida es

considerada de forma esfrica, segn el dimetro disminuye, el rea
de la superficie y todos los efectos de carga asociados aumentan por
un factor de cuatro. Entonces distribuciones de tamao de partculas
ms finas significan reas de superficie ms grandes para la misma
masa de slidos. Como una regla, para todos los otros parmetros
(esto es, mineraloga, qumica del agua, concentracin, etc.) siendo
igual una distribucin de tamao de partcula ms fina exhibir
viscosidad y lmite elstico ms altos que una distribucin de tamao
de partculas ms gruesa. El cambio en la fraccin de gruesa puede
influir seriamente en la concentracin de slidos del flujo debajo pero
los relaves espesados resultante tendr aproximadamente la misma
reologa. Por la razn de operar en el rgimen de pasta, el espesador
de pasta tambin puede manipular los slidos gruesos con
segregacin limitada.

Forma de la partcula El rea de superficie de una partcula y todos

los efectos elctricos asociados es una funcin de la forma de la
partcula. La forma tambin afecta la orientacin de partcula a
partcula (esto es, agujas, placas planas, esferoides, etc.) que es un
parmetro afectando el grado de interaccin elctrica y por esta razn
las propiedades reolgicas de relaves espesados.

Histrico de Cizallamiento - segn lo descrito arriba el fenmeno de

dilucin de cizallamiento esta basado en la reorientacin de las
partculas slidas y consecuentemente en una reforma de la red
basada elctricamente que crea viscosidad y un lmite elstico. En
algunos casos despus de pasar por cizallamiento (como flujo en una
tubera) la red de partculas se reforma el estado original con las
propiedades originales de reologa. En otros casos, la red que pas
por cizallamiento no recupera las propiedades originales y una nueva
viscosidad o lmite elstico es exhibida. Una pasta no puede ser

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

completamente descrita sin el conocimiento del histrico de

cizallamiento
MEDICIN DE LA REOLOGA

Viscosmetro

Un viscosmetro mide la friccin que resiste la tendencia de una suspensin

para fluir. El viscosmetro y el eje de medicin deben generar datos por el
cual el lmite elstico de una muestra dada pueda ser generado.
Tpicamente, estos datos sern una correlacin de la tensin de
cizallamiento con la tasa de cizallamiento. La condicin del material durante
la medicin puede tener un efecto significante sobre los resultados.
Temperatura, tipo y dosificacin de la floculante, tasas de cizallamiento
usadas en el ensayo, distribucin de tamao de partcula y la naturaleza de
las partculas se combinan para determinar la viscosidad y el lmite elstico.
Variables fsicas, como el modelo del viscosmetro, tipo y dimensiones del
tipo, tamao del recipiente de muestra y la tcnica de preparacin de
muestra afectan la viscosidad real del material que est siendo medida e
deben ser identificadas por un conjunto especfico de datos reolgicos. Por
estos factores es improbable que dos diferentes viscosmetros produzcan los
mismos resultados absolutos. Comparacin de datos exigen viscosmetros
correlacionados.

Viscosimetro de Vane

Ensayo de Slump

El ensayo de Slump es un modo simple y rpido para monitorear la

reologa de los relaves espesados. Un cilindro es llenado con una muestra de
relaves espesados. El cilindro es elevado verticalmente, liberando los relaves
espesados que cae con la forma cilndrica original. La distancia entre la cima
de la pila resultante de relaves espesados y la altura del cilindro es llamada
de la cada del lodo. La figura abajo ilustra la medida de una cada del lodo.
El ensayo de cada del lodo es una prueba de indicacin visual del lmite

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

elstico de los relaves espesados. Segn el lmite elstico aumenta, la cada

del lodo disminuye. Similarmente lmites elsticos ms bajos corresponden a
la cada del lodo ms altos. Existen formulas disponibles para calcular el
lmite elstico.

Caida del Lodo

Slump
`

PROYECTO PARA LA REMOCIN DE RELAVES ESPESADOS

El proceso para concentrar una corriente de relaves al nivel que las

caractersticas de relaves espesados sean alcanzadas es principalmente una
funcin de la floculacin y el tiempo de residencia de los slidos en la cama
de lodo. La geometra fsica del espesador de alta densidad, abajo del rea
del recipiente de alimentacin, no es otro factor en la formacin de relaves
espesados, como lo son el suministrar tiempo de residencia necesario y la
tasa de trasbordo. Tampoco son factores importantes la configuracin de las
bombas de flujo debajo o de la lnea de succin. Proveyendo la floculacin
apropiada, el rea suficiente para acomodar la velocidad de sedimentacin
de los slidos y volumen suficiente para el tiempo de residencia necesario y
profundidad suficiente para compresin, los relaves espesados sern
producida en el tanque con fondo plano, o tanque cuadrado o en un pozal.
La geometra apropiada, torque y proyecto de limpieza son esenciales para
hacer la aplicacin operar segn el proyecto del proceso para producir la
densidad del flujo debajo deseada.

Para espesadores de alta densidad, la comprensin la curva del lmite

elstico es parmetro de proyecto clave. El lmite elstico aumenta
rpidamente a medida que aumenta la densidad. Experiencia con otros
espesadores de alta densidad de residuos muestra que un lmite elstico
mximo (y por esta razn, densidad mxima) puede ser descargado. Para
proyectar el espesador se desarrolla una curva tpica del lmite esttico para
el slido alimentado. Usando el banco de datos de histricos el lmite
elstico mximo que podra ser descargado fue identificado. A partir de las
curvas del lmite elstico, este lmite elstico correspondi a la densidad del
flujo debajo esperado. El bombeo aguas abajo, tubera y local de depsito

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 REOLOGA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

de residuos fueron entonces proyectados basados sobre el lmite elstico y

densidad.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 DESCRIPCIN DEL ESPESADOR
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

DESCRIPCIN DEL ESPESADOR

A continuacin se describen los principales componentes del Espesador de alta

densidad WesTech HiDensityTM:

Tanque del Espesador

Objetivos:
Contener el proceso
Proveer el volumen/tiempo de residencia para que ocurra el
espesamiento.
Proveer un medio de recoleccin y drenaje del flujo de sobra
clarificado y los relaves espesados del flujo debajo.
Proveer soporte para la superestructura

Descripcin:
El tanque del Espesador tiene un dimetro de 40 metros por 6,5 metros de
altura lateral, fabricacin de acero, vigas radiales y diseo de fondo rugoso.
Hay un total de 404 vigas radiales y 190 piernas. La inclinacin del fondo del
tanque es 14 grados. En el centro del tanque se encuentra el cono de descarga
con una inclinacin de 45 grados. La salida del flujo debajo est ubicada en
el cono de descarga.

Mecanismo Raspador

Objetivos:
Maximizar el volumen activo del Espesador y alcanzar el tiempo de
residencia que es disponible para la consolidacin de los relaves.
Minimizar la formacin de remolino central bajo las condiciones del
proyecto.
Facilitar la consolidacin de los relav3es espesados (retirada de agua)
mediante un patrn para el escape del lquido.
Mantener caractersticas de flujo de los relaves espesados en el tanque.
Reducir el tonelaje de lodo muerto en el fondo del tanque.
Prevenir el bloqueo de la tubera de descarga.

Descripcin:
El mecanismo raspador consiste de una unidad de accionamiento, columna
central, tubo de torque, piquetes de remocin de agua, soporte de los piquetes
y laminas raspadoras que barre el rea del fondo del tanque. El centro del rea
de descarga tambin contiene un raspador del cono que auxilia a prevenir el
bloqueo posible.

Las lminas raspadoras, instaladas en los brazos raspadores sobre postes de

extensin, se instalan para asistir en el movimiento de los relaves espesados al
medio del tanque.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 DESCRIPCIN DEL ESPESADOR
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Los piquetes de remocin de agua son instalados en el tope de los brazos

raspadores y extendidos verticalmente dentro del tanque. Estos son
soportados por acoples al tubo de torque. El propsito de los piquetes es abrir
los Canales en el lodo a la medida que giran, permitiendo el escape de
espacios de agua retenidos en los relaves espesados.

Columna Central

Objetivos:
Proveer soporte para la unidad de accionamiento, el mecanismo
raspador y el puente.

Descripcin:
La columna central consiste de un eje cilndrico largo con bridas en ambos
extremos. Uno de los extremos bridados es asegurado a la fundacin de los
pernos de anclaje mientras que el otro extremo est atornillado directamente a
la unidad de accionamiento.

Tubo de Torque

Objetivo:
Transferir la fuerza rotacional desde la unidad de accionamiento a los
brazos raspadores.

Descripcin:
El tubo de torque es un eje cilndrico largo que se ajusta de forma concntrica
sobre la columna central. El tope del tubo de torque se conecta a la unidad de
accionamiento y el fondo se conecta a los brazos raspadores y al raspador del
cono.

Unidad de Accionamiento

Objetivos:
Proveer los medios para el giro del mecanismo raspador a travs de los
relaves espesados.
Proveer la medida del torque requerido para rodar el mecanismo
Proveer el sistema de proteccin de alarma y corte de energa para los
casos que el torque se torna muy alto

Descripcin:
La unidad de accionamiento consiste de un engranaje de anillo accionado por
piones. Los reductores del engranaje son energizados por motores elctricos
que en cuanto giran accionan los piones. Hay un inversor de frecuencia para
controlar los motores y el sistema que proporciona los puntos de alarma y

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 DESCRIPCIN DEL ESPESADOR
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

corte y transmitir la seal de control de la unidad para fines de control.

Puente
Objetivos
Proveer el acceso a la unidad de accionamiento

Descripcin:
El puente consiste de una estructura tipo cercha soportada sobre el tanque y la
columna central. Esta posee una pasarela que se extiende en la mitad de la
longitud del puente, un rea de trabajo alrededor de la unidad de
accionamiento y un monorriel.

Descarga del Flujo Debajo

Objetivos:
Proporcionar los medios de remocin de los relaves espesados a partir
por el flujo debajo del espesador
Proporcionar los medios para bloqueo estar clarificado

Descripcin:
Los bocales de la tubera en el fondo del tanque del espesador, cerca del
centro se utilizan para descargar el flujo debajo del espesador de alta
densidad. El espesador de alta densidad es descargado mediante el uso de una
bomba centrfuga. La velocidad a la cual la bomba remueve los relaves
espesados del espesador se utiliza para controlar el nivel y densidad en el
espesador. Se dispone usualmente de una salida primaria como punto de
drenaje con un segundo punto disponible en caso de bloque de la salida
principal. Bocales adicionales son suministrados oportunamente para la
circulacin del flujo debajo.

Pozo de Alimentacin

El pozo de alimentacin Multiport WesTech se disea con los siguientes

objetivos:
Prevenir el corto circuito de la alimentacin al flujo de sobra
Retener la alimentacin para favorecer la generacin de flculos
Asegurar el grado de agitacin que beneficia la floculacin
Diluir la alimentacin a una concentracin ptima para la floculacin

Descripcin:
El pozo de alimentacin es circular y est ubicado en el centro del tanque
alrededor de la columna central y el tubo de torque y es soportado por el
puente del Espesador. El pozo de alimentacin es sumergido en la solucin
durante todo el tiempo con un borde libre pequeo que se extiende sobre la
superficie libre del lquido. Un anillo deflector es instalado en la porcin del
fondo del pozo de alimentacin. La alimentacin de pulpa entra al pozo de

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 DESCRIPCIN DEL ESPESADOR
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

alimentacin tangencialmente.
El pozo de alimentacin con auto dilucin tiene aberturas al nivel de la
superficie del lquido que permiten el flujo del agua de dilucin dentro del pozo
de alimentacin. Estas aberturas se dimensionan para diluir la alimentacin a
la concentracin ptima para una floculacin ms eficiente, produciendo una
claridad del sobrenadante y velocidades de sedimentacin ptimas.

Canal del Flujo de Sobra

Objetivos:
Mantener el nivel de de operacin en el espesador
Recolectar la solucin clarificada y dirigirla al bocal de descarga

Descripcin:
El canal del flujo de sobra con un vertedero triangular recolecta el flujo de
sobra. El canal encamina el flujo de sobra para una caja de drenaje donde un
tubo en la lateral del tanque remueve el mismo del espesador. El canal se
disea para asegurar una descarga uniforme del flujo de sobra alrededor de la
circunferencia del espesador para utilizar la zona de clarificacin completa.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

GARANTA

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 GARANTA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO
GARANTA

Los equipos WesTech estn respaldados por la reputacin de la que goza

WesTech como fabricante de calidad y por muchos aos de experiencia en el
diseo de equipos confiables.

Los equipos fabricados y vendidos por WesTech Engineering, Inc. y que se

han pagado ntegramente cuentan con la siguiente garanta:

Para el beneficio del usuario original, WesTech garantiza que todos los
equipos nuevos fabricados por WesTech Engineering, Inc. estn libres de
defectos de material y fabricacin, y que reemplazar o reparar en cualquiera
de sus fbricas u otro lugar que ste designe, cualquier parte o pieza que le
sean devueltas, una vez que WesTech haya comprobado mediante una
evaluacin que dicha parte o pieza fall bajo condiciones de uso y servicio
normal por parte del usuario. Esta garanta ser vlida durante un (1) ao
luego de la puesta en funcionamiento inicial o durante dieciocho (18) meses a
partir de la fecha de embarque al comprador, lo que ocurra primero. Dicha
reparacin o reemplazo ser completamente gratuita en el caso de todas las
piezas, con excepcin de materiales tales como la resina, materiales filtrantes
y similares, los cuales son consumibles y normalmente se reemplazan durante
el mantenimiento, en cuyo caso la reparacin o reemplazo estar sujeta al
pago de un cargo a prorrata que estar basado en el estimado que realice
WesTech del porcentaje o de la vida til normal de la pieza. La obligacin de
WesTech bajo esta garanta est condicionada a la recepcin oportuna de una
notificacin en la que se indique los defectos encontrados, la que en ningn
caso se enviar pasados treinta (30) das luego del vencimiento del perodo de
la garanta, y est limitada a la reparacin o reemplazo de las piezas, tal como
se ha indicado anteriormente.

ESTA GARANTA ES OTORGADA EXPRESAMENTE POR WESTECH Y ACEPTADA

POR EL COMPRADOR EN REEMPLAZO DE TODAS LAS DEMS GARANTAS,
INCLUYENDO LAS GARANTIAS DE COMERCIABILIDAD E IDONEIDAD PARA UN
FIN ESPECFICO, YA SEAN ESCRITAS, ORALES, EXPRESAS, IMPLCITAS O
CONTEMPLADAS POR LEY. WESTECH NO ASUME NI AUTORIZA A NINGUNA
OTRA PERSONA A ASUMIR EN SU REPRESENTACIN CUALQUIER OTRA
RESPONSABILIDAD CON RESPECTO A SU EQUIPO. WESTECH NO SE
RESPONSABILIZAR POR EL DESGASTE OCASIONADO POR EL USO NORMAL
NI POR NINGN DAO O GASTO CONTINGENTE, INCIDENTAL O INDIRECTO
CAUSADO POR LA INOPERATIVIDAD PARCIAL O TOTAL DE SU EQUIPO,
CUALQUIERA SEA EL MOTIVO.

Esta garanta no ser aplicable a aquellos equipos o sus piezas que hayan sido
alterados o reparados fuera de la fbrica de WesTech o que hayan sido
daados como resultado de la instalacin o aplicacin inapropiadas o que
hayan sido objeto de un mal uso, abuso, negligencia o accidente.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 GARANTA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO
Esta garanta es aplicable nicamente a los equipos fabricados o vendidos por
Westech Engineering, Inc.

WesTech Enginneering, Inc. no otorga ninguna garanta con respecto a

piezas, accesorios o componentes fabricados por terceros. Tales piezas estn
cubiertas por la garanta que otorgan sus respectivos fabricantes.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

INFORMACIN
DEL EQUIPO

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 PRECAUCIONES GENERALES
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

PRECAUCIONES GENERALES

Las instrucciones de instalacin que se anexan en este manual, se entregan

con el fin de ayudar al montaje y ajuste de este mecanismo y el tanque. Estos
son procedimientos sugeridos y no pretenden reemplazar la experiencia del
personal de campo asignado a la tarea de instalar y montar el mismo.
Sugerimos que se estudien estas instrucciones, antes de instalar, montar y/o
ajustar el equipo.

Para montar este equipo ser necesario instalar, ajustar y mantener ciertos
accesorios que no son fabricados por WesTech. Estos accesorios deben ser
almacenados, manejados, ajustados y mantenidos de acuerdo con las
instrucciones del fabricante respectivo. Lo antes expuesto es absolutamente
necesario para asegurar el cumplimiento cabal de la garanta correspondiente.
Westech no aceptar ninguna responsabilidad por daos a equipos que no
hayan sido manipulados de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante
respectivo.

LISTA DE EMBALAJE

La lista de embalaje del contratista se compone de una planilla que contiene

una lista pormenorizada de todas las piezas y partes.

Esta lista de embalaje contiene lo siguiente:

1. Descripcin de la pieza.

2. Cuando corresponda, los pernos y tuercas que van en bolsas, llevarn el

nmero de tem escrito en la bolsa.

3. Cantidad de piezas por unidad ensamblada.

4. Cantidad total de piezas despachadas.

5. Indicacin del despacho directo del proveedor o fabricante.

6. Fecha y nmero de proyecto del despacho.

La lista de embalaje se encontrar dentro de unas de las cajas que se

despache directamente desde Salt Lake City, Utah, y deber permanecer en un
lugar seguro de fcil acceso. Muchos contratistas prefieren conservar esta lista
en algn tipo de carpeta o archivador para protegerla y poder consultarla
rpidamente

Durante la instalacin, la lista resulta particularmente til si se trata de

localizar piezas y fijadores pequeos. En coordinacin con los planes de

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PRECAUCIONES GENERALES
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

instalacin, etiquetado de equipos y marcacin de partes, la lista de embalaje

se convierte en una herramienta de instalacin muy importante.

ETIQUETAS DEL EQUIPO:

Cada parte que se despache va etiquetada o identificada convenientemente. Lo

normal es que todas las partes lleven marcado el nmero de obra y nmero de
tem. Las partes marcadas recibidas llevarn una etiqueta que diga, por
ejemplo, D120A" o bien tem 203", la que podra ser referenciado de forma
cruzada con la lista de embalaje y los diseos generales de instalacin.

PINTURA:

El material suministrado para este proyecto ha recibido un proceso de

preparacin de superficie y pintura en conformidad con los planes y
especificaciones contractuales.

Cualquier hendidura, dao y/o raspadura causadas por la carga y descarga

deben ser INMEDIATAMENTE retocadas en campo, antes del almacenaje.

Al menos que se especifique en los documentos del contrato, WesTech no se

responsabilizar por la condicin de las superficies con pintura de fondo o
acabado despus de la salida del despacho de nuestras fbricas. Los clientes
son invitados a inspeccionar los revestimientos en nuestras fbricas para
verificacin de la preparacin de la superficie y la aplicacin de la pintura antes
del despacho. WesTech no asume responsabilidad por la preparacin de la
superficie en campo o retoques de daos de pintura durante el embarque. La
aplicacin de pintura en superficies que requieran retoques o pintura de
elementos de fijacin deber ser realizada por la contratista del cliente
despus de la instalacin del mecanismo.

NOTA: DURABILIDAD DE LA PINTURA DE FONDO

En el caso que el equipo suministrado haya sido pintado solo con una capa de
fondo, esta notificacin deber tomarse en cuenta. Las pinturas de fondo
aplicadas en fbrica solo sirven como una capa de cohesin, entre la superficie
metlica y el acabado final protector y sirve solo como un acabado protector
mnimo.

Es recomendable la aplicacin del acabado final sobre la pintura de fondo

dentro del perodo de tiempo especificado por el fabricante de la pintura.
Westech no puede ser responsable por pinturas de fondo que se han
deteriorado por el tiempo y exposicin.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PRECAUCIONES GENERALES
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ELEMENTOS DE FIJACIN:

Todos los elementos de fijacin para la instalacin en acero inoxidable, en caso

de ser suministrados, debern ser lubrificados durante el montaje. La falta de
lubricacin causar retrasos significativos durante el montaje y el
mantenimiento.

MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Mantenga el Manual de Operacin y Mantenimiento en un lugar apropiado para

que los operadores puedan familiarizarse con el mismo y tenerlo como
referencia. Este manual es intil si el los operadores y supervisores no tienen
acceso.

ASISTENCIA ADICIONAL:

Si se encuentra un problema en la instalacin y operacin del equipo que no

pueda ser solucionado por lo referido en este manual, sintase libre de
contactar a WesTech Engineering, Inc.

WesTech Engineering, Inc.

3665 South West Temple
Salt Lake City, Utah 84115
Telfono: (801) 265-1000
Fax: (801) 265-1080

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 FALTANTES, DISCREPANCIAS Y ENCARGOS DE CAMPO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

FALTANTES, DISCREPANCIAS Y ENCARGOS DE CAMPO

Se agradece la notificacin inmediata a WesTech Engineering, Inc., si

cualquier discrepancia de fabricacin o faltantes son detectados con el equipo,
una vez que ningn encargo o cobranza de campo para modificaciones y
reemplazo de faltantes ser aceptada a menos que sea autorizado por escrito
por nuestro representante.

Las piezas de acero fabricadas e ensamblajes suministrados por WesTech

Engineerring, Inc. se fabrican con las mejores prcticas operacionales y
estndares. Sin embargo, pueden ocurrir desajustes o trabajos imperfectos, en
cuyo caso la novena edicin del Cdigo de la Prctica Estndar AISC del
Instituto Americano de la Construccin en Acero ASD, aplicar para la
instalacin del equipo, de acuerdo a como se lee a continuacin:

7.14. Correcciones y errores

La correccin de desajustes menores motivados a cantidades moderadas

de ensanchamiento, desprendimiento de lascas, soldadura o corte, y el
diseo de elementos en lnea con pasadores, sern consideradas como
operaciones normales de montaje. Los errores que no puedan ser
corregidos por los medios procedentes o que requieran cambios mayores
en componentes o configuracin de la conexin, debern ser relatados
inmediatamente para los representantes por la empresa de montaje
designados por el propietario para el diseo y la construccin y el
Fabricante, para habilitar quien quiera que sea el responsable para
corregir el error o aprobar el mtodo ms eficiente y econmico de
correccin a ser usado por terceros

La poltica de la Compaa dictamina que ningn encargo de campo ser

permitido sin aprobacin anticipada. La autorizacin escrita debe ser dada en
la forma de una Solicitud de Inspeccin y Cambio de Trabajo de WesTech con
trazabilidad del nmero de garanta. El nmero de trazabilidad de la garanta
ser emitido cuando la extensin de tales modificaciones y el precio para la
realizacin de las mismas hayan sido previamente acordados.

En general, cuando las piezas requieren reemplazo, y se acepta esto como

necesario, WesTech suministrar piezas nuevas. La contratista deber
remover la pieza defectuosa e instalar la pieza de reemplazo a un costo
previamente aceptado por WesTech.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 RECEPECIN DEL EQUIPO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

RECEPCIN DEL EQUIPO

En el momento de la recepcin del equipo, es necesario acusar cualquier dao

en los documentos del despacho. Esto debe ser realizado a manera de
contribuir en la asignacin de responsabilidades a la parte apropiada de todos
los involucrados en el proceso de despacho y recibimiento.

Cuando se recibe un despacho, los siguientes procedimientos se deben seguir.

Estos procedimientos se listan en la Gua de Embarque de WesTech. La
compaa de recibimiento debe firmar la Gua de Embarque, para probar que la
entrega de los bienes fue realizada. Si los procedimientos siguientes no son
seguidos, WesTech no se responsabilizar por cualquier falta o dao en el
despacho.

PROCEDIMIENTO DE RECEPCIN

A. Antes de firmar la Gua de Despacho (Bill Of Lading) y recibir los bienes

contenidas en la misma, y ANTES de la retirada del conductor, haga lo
siguiente:

1. Despus de la inspeccin del despacho, NOTE cualquier dao o

falta (de acuerdo a lo que est listado en el Gua de Despacho).
Sea tan detallista como sea necesario.

2. Haga al conductor firmar el acuse de recibo con cualquier

notificacin.

3. Retenga una copia del Gua de Despacho para uso en la

formulacin del reclamo al agente logstico.

4. Si existe algn dao, notifique a WesTech (801) 265-1000

INMEDIATAMENTE para que puedan ser programadas con el
transportista, si es necesario, visitas para inspeccionar las piezas
daadas por el agente.

B. DESPUS de firmar el Gua de Despacho y recibir el despacho, haga lo

siguiente:

1. Use la lista de empaque adjunta para inspeccionar nuevamente el

despacho completo para detectar faltantes o daos ocultos.
2. NOTIFIQUE a WesTech dentro de tres (03) das hbiles de la fecha
de recibimiento, de cualquier falta o dao oculto.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 UNIDAD DE
ACCIONAMIENTO
DEL ESPESADOR

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 COPYRIGHT

Los contenidos de este manual son de propiedad

confidencial de WesTech Engineering, Inc. La
circulacin, distribucin o reproduccin de este
manual, total o parcial sin permiso por escrito
est legalmente prohibido. La posesin de este
manual no confiere ni transfiere ningn derecho,
que pueda ser perjudicial a los intereses de
WesTech.
 TABLA DE CONTENIDO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

GENERAL
Introduccin
Recepcin e Inspeccin
Encargos y Modificaciones de Campo
Almacenamiento y Durabilidad de la Pintura
Almacenamiento de Pre-Instalacin
Almacenamiento despus que la Unidad ha sido instalada o en
operacin
Advertencia de Tratamiento a Chorro Abrasivo
Advertencia de Lubricacin
Advertencia de la Configuracin del Control de Torque
Advertencia de Mantenimiento y Operacin

INSTALACIN
Elevacin de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Instalacin de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Advertencia de la Soldadura
Arranque

MANTENIMIENTO
Desmontaje/Montaje de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Lubricacin de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Mantenimiento Anual de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Mantenimiento Semanal de la Unidad de Accionamiento
Lubricacin de Accesorios
Reductor (lubricado en aceite)
Hoja de Mantenimiento
Procedimiento de Requisicin de Repuestos
Nmeros de temes
Nmeros de Piezas

OPERACIN
Instrucciones de Operacin Unidad de Accionamiento
Unidad de Accionamiento sin unidad de Accionamiento
Solucin de Problemas de la Unidad de Accionamiento
 TABLA DE CONTENIDO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ANEXOS

Accesorios

Numero de temes Numero de Pagna

103 Drive Intermediate Reducer 8
105 Drive Gearmotor 12

Lista de Piezas

21355 Drive Parts List

Planes

D357S002 Cage Drive Assembly Elevation

D357S003 Cage Drive Assembly -- Plan
ASMDIAG-21261A Assembly Diagram
DRV103 Drive Assembly Procedures
LUBETAG-21261A Lubrication Tags
900-611D Drive Shimming Procedure

Dispositivo de Control de Torque

E12D Electrical Schematic (Suggested)

Electronic Load Cell Torque Box
 GENERAL

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

INTRODUCCIN

Lea completamente y familiarcese con las instrucciones de este manual antes que
la unidad de accionamiento sea instalada, ajustada u operada. La unidad
accionadora, incluyendo el equipo accesorio suministrado pero no fabricado por
WesTech, debe ser almacenado, instalado, operado y mantenido de acuerdo con
estas instrucciones, para asegurar un tiempo de vida prolongado del equipo y el
cubrimiento completo de la garanta.

Las instrucciones en este manual estn basadas en informaciones disponibles en el

momento de la emisin de este manual. WesTech se reserva el derecho de hacer
cambios subsecuentes al manual sin la obligacin de actualizar las copias
existentes.

RECIBIMIENTO E INSPECCIN

La unidad de accionamiento ha sido exhaustivamente verificada e inspeccionada

antes del envo. No obstante, antes de aceptar la remesa, verifique todos los temes
con relacin a la lista de empaque para comprobar cualquier falta de material e
inspeccione con la finalidad de evidenciar cualquier dao fsico. En cualquiera de los
casos citados, notifique al transportador haciendo observaciones en los documentos
de embarque y tambin notifique inmediatamente al gerente del proyecto de
WesTech.

Inspeccione si hay daos en las superficies pintadas. WesTech no asumir la

responsabilidad por dao o retoque de campo, que existan sobre las superficies
pintadas en el transporte. Se les solicita a los clientes inspeccionar la pintura de la
unidad de accionamiento en la fbrica de WesTech para acompaamiento de la
aplicacin y preparacin apropiada antes del transporte. La pintura de campo de los
elementos de fijacin y otros retoques de las superficies pintadas sern por cuenta
del cliente.

Mantenga un registro de todos los reclamos y correspondencia (fotografas son

recomendadas).

Si la unidad de accionamiento no es instalada inmediatamente, consulte abajo las

instrucciones de almacenamiento en la seccin Almacenamiento y durabilidad de la
pintura.
 GENERAL

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ENCARGOS Y MODIFICACIONES DE CAMPO

WesTech no anticipa problemas con la instalacin de la unidad de accionamiento.

Sin embargo, debido a la naturaleza del acero fabricado, una cierta cantidad de
pequeos ajustes y trabajo de adaptacin puede ser exigido por el montador. Tal
trabajo es una parte normal de la instalacin, especialmente con la substitucin de
unidades de accionamientos reformadas.

El cdigo de la prctica estndar contenido en la dcima tercera edicin del

Manual de la Construccin del Instituto Americano del Acero, se aplicar durante el
montaje de este equipo. Se aconseja conforme sigue:

7.14. Correcciones y errores

La correccin de desajustes menores motivados a cantidades moderadas de

ensanchamiento, desprendimiento de lascas, soldadura o corte, y el diseo
de elementos en lnea con pasadores, sern consideradas como operaciones
normales de montaje. Los errores que no puedan ser corregidos por los
medios procedentes o que requieran cambios mayores en componentes o
configuracin de la conexin, debern ser relatados inmediatamente para los
representantes por la empresa de montaje designados por el propietario para
el diseo y la construccin y el Fabricante, para habilitar quien quiera que
sea el responsable para corregir el error o aprobar el mtodo ms eficiente y
econmico de correccin a ser usado por terceros

Comentario:

Como se hace referencia en esta seccin, el trmino moderado se refiere a

la cantidad de ensanchamiento, desprendimiento de lascas, soldadura o corte
que debe ser realizado sobre el proyecto como un todo, y no la cantidad que
es requerida en una localizacin individual. No se pretende dirigir las
limitaciones en la cantidad de material que es removida por ensanchamiento
en un orificio atornillado individual, por ejemplo, que se limita por el tamao
del agujero pasante y los requerimientos de tolerancia en las especificaciones
AISC y RCSC.

El instalador debe informar a WesTech inmediatamente sobre cualquier problema

debido al error de fabricacin o ingeniera que no pueda ser corregido por un ajuste
menor o trabajo de adaptacin.

Antes del inicio de cualquier re-trabajo, el instalador debe obtener un

nmero de rastreo de la garanta WesTech, que debe incluir un lmite de
costo. La poltica de WesTech dicta que ningn encargo de campo debe ser
pago sin la aprobacin previa de WesTech y un nmero de rastreo de la
garanta.
 GENERAL

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

El nmero de rastreo de la garanta ser emitido cuando la extensin de tales

modificaciones y el precio para la ejecucin de estas modificaciones sean
acordados. En general, cuando las piezas exigen substitucin y WesTech esta de
acuerdo en que el reemplazo es necesario, WesTech suministrar las piezas. El
contratado remover las piezas con defecto y sustituir las piezas a un costo
acordado entre las dos partes.

ALMACENAMIENTO Y DURABILIDAD DE LA PINTURA

Almacenamiento de Pre-Instalacin:

Si la unidad de accionamiento ser almacenada o estar fuera de uso por ms de

treinta das, los siguientes procedimientos debern ser seguidos para proteger la
unidad contra la corrosin y mantener la garanta.

A. Si es posible, almacene la unidad de accionamiento en un ambiente cerrado a

nivel de la superficie en un lugar seco y bien ventilado con una temperatura
relativamente constante. La unidad de accionamiento deber ser
adecuadamente apoyada para prevenir la distorsin de la caja del engranaje
principal. La unidad debe estar a por lo menos 15 cm (6 pulgadas) del piso.

B. Si la unidad motriz tiene que ser almacenada al aire libre:

1. Almacene la unidad motriz en un rea que est fuera del camino de equipos
en movimiento. Cubra la unidad motriz con una lona que permita la
ventilacin adecuada, drenaje y acceso para inspeccin. Coloque la unidad en
un rea protegida del viento, incidencia directa de luz solar, lluvia y nieve.

(Obs.: no deben ser usadas cubiertas de plstico porque tienden a acumular

condensacin.)

2. Certifquese que los orificios enroscados en las cajas del terminal del motor
estn tapados. Si el motor esta equipado con un calentador, debe ser
alimentada energa temporal al calentador de modo que la temperatura del
motor permanezca regularmente constante.

C. Lubrique la unidad de accionamiento con lubricantes apropiados segn lo

mostrado en el diseo de etiquetas de lubricacin.

D. Semanalmente, haga funcionar la unidad de accionamiento por un perodo

mnimo de una hora alimentando energa temporal para revestir toda la
superficie del engranaje y rodamientos con aceite (para las unidades
lubricadas con aceite) o grasa (Para las unidades lubricadas con grasa). El
condensado debe ser drenado por lo menos semanalmente de la vlvula de
drenaje de aceite (Para unidades lubricadas con aceite). Certifquese que los
orificios del goteo estn limpios para drenar el producto de condensacin
libremente (Para unidades lubricadas con aceite). Ejecute un ensayo con
meghmetro de los rodamientos del motor cuando la unidad de
 GENERAL

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

accionamiento sea recibida y antes de la partida. Antes del ensayo del

meghmetro, desconecte cualquier equipo electrnico sensible tales como
variadores de frecuencia de velocidad (VFD) o controles del motor.

E. Inspeccione si hay daos en las superficies pintadas. Aplique un

revestimiento de proteccin adecuado en las reas pintadas daadas.

F. Para instrucciones de almacenamiento del motor, reductor u otro equipo

accesorio, consulte las respectivas instrucciones del fabricante en la seccin
de Equipo accesorio de este manual.

Almacenamiento despus que la unidad motriz haya sido instalada y operando:

Si la unidad motriz esta desconectada y permanece fuera de operacin por un

perodo de ms de 30 das, las siguientes instrucciones deben ser seguidas.

A. Corte la electricidad para el motor de la unidad motriz excepto para los

calentadores (Si es suministrado).

B. Siga los pasos C-F en la seccin Almacenamiento de pre-instalacin en este

manual.

C. Ejecute un ensayo de meghmetro en los rodamientos del motor cuando la

unidad de accionamiento es sacada de la operacin y antes de ser colocada
nuevamente en operacin. Antes del ensayo del meghmetro, desconecte
cualquier equipo electrnico sensible tales como variadores de frecuencia de
velocidad (VFD) o controladores del motor. La lectura mnima debe ser de 1
(UN) megahm para motores calculados en 600 volts y menos. Cualquier
cada abajo de este punto necesita de secado elctrico o mecnico de los
rodamientos del motor.

ADVERTENCIA DEL TRATAMIENTO A CHORRO

La unidad de accionamiento WesTech (incluyendo el motor y el reductor) debe ser

completamente cubierta o sellada para protegerla contra arena y polvo cuando el
tratamiento a chorro este siendo ejecutado en las proximidades.

Todas las aberturas externas y reas entre la caja, el cubo del engranaje y la
cobertura de la unidad de accionamiento deben ser cubiertas o tapadas. Despus
del tratamiento a chorro y antes de la partida verifique una muestra de aceite para
certificarse que la arena no penetr en la unidad motriz y no contamin el aceite.
Las muestras pueden ser tomadas a travs de las vlvulas de drenaje. Si hay arena
en el aceite, drene completamente y rellene nuevamente con la cantidad listada en
la etiqueta del lubricante.

La no observacin de esta advertencia conllevar a la prdida de la

garanta de la unidad
 GENERAL

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ADVERTENCIA DE LA LUBRICACIN

No opere la unidad de accionamiento, incluyendo el motor y el reductor, sin

lubricacin apropiada. Para instrucciones de lubricacin, consulte lubricacin de la
unidad motriz en la seccin mantenimiento de este manual.

La no observacin de esta advertencia conllevar a la prdida de la

garanta de la unidad.

ADVERTENCIA DE LA CONFIGURACIN DEL SISTEMA DE CONTROL DE

TORQUE

No alterar las posiciones de los puntos de ajuste (set points) de fbrica de los
actuadores tipo llave lmite en la caja de torque. Esto puede causar daos serios al
mecanismo raspador y a la unidad de accionamiento. La seal del transmisor de 4-
20 mA es ajustada y calibrada en la fbrica de WesTech. Por encima de la
condicin de corte del torque se requiere el re-arranque manual, o el reajuste del
circuito de corte trabado que previene el re-arranque automtico de las unidades
con el motor. Las unidades con llaves selectoras manual/apagado/automtico
deben ser verificadas para asegurar la proteccin apropiada del torque cuando son
configuradas en los modos de operacin automtico y manual. Si el ajuste del
control del torque necesita ser cambiado, entre en contacto con el Gerente del
Proyecto de WesTech.

Las partes rotativas de la unidad de accionamiento y la caja pueden destruir el

electroducto si se instala muy cerca de la unidad de accionamiento Por encima de la
condicin de corte del torque se requiere el re-arranque manual, o el reajuste del
circuito de corte trabado que previene el re-arranque automtico de las unidades
con el motor

La no observacin de esta advertencia conllevar a la prdida de la

garanta de la unidad.

ADVERTENCIA DE MANTENIMIENTO Y OPERACIN

Para prevenir heridas del personal, solamente empleados entrenados deben tener
permitido el trabajo alrededor de la unidad de accionamiento. Bloquee toda la
energa elctrica antes de ejecutar el mantenimiento en cualquier pieza mvil de la
unidad motriz. Empleados entrenados en las reas de la unidad de accionamiento
deben vestir equipos de seguridad adecuados con anteojos de seguridad, zapatos
de seguridad, cascos, etc.

Mantenga manos, ropas, etc. lejos de las piezas mviles. Inspeccione el equipo en
una semanalmente y busque cualquier irregularidad. Cuide de estas irregularidades
oportunamente.
 GENERAL

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Si el clarificador o espesador es parado motivado a un alto torque, no abrir el

dispositivo de control de torque. La energa se almacena en el tren de la unidad de
accionamiento y el resorte del sistema de control de torque. Esta energa
almacenada deber ser liberada antes de experimentar cualquier mantenimiento o
reparo. (Referirse a la seccin Solucin de Problemas de la Unidad Accionadora)

La no observacin de esta advertencia conllevar a la prdida de la

garanta de la unidad.
 INSTALACIN

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ELEVACIN DE LA UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO

Eleve la unidad de accionamiento usando los cncamos suministrados en la base de

la unidad. Mantenga la unidad de accionamiento tan nivelada como sea posible
durante la elevacin. Barras separadoras pueden ser necesarias para evitar que los
cables de izamiento toquen otras partes de la unidad lo que puede causar dao.
Cualquier cncamo instalado sobre los componentes individuales (Motor, reductor
etc.) es para elevar aquellos componentes solamente durante el montaje o
desmontaje y no son para elevar la unidad de accionamiento como un todo.

INSTALACIN DE LA UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO

Certifquese que ambas superficies de montaje estn limpias y libres de detritos

externos. Posicione la unidad de accionamiento sobre la estructura de la pasarela
(para unidades accionadas por eje) o la columna central (para unidades accionadas
por columna). La unidad motriz debe estar fijada libremente a la estructura de la
pasarela o la columna central.

La verificacin final de la nivelacin ser completada despus que todos los tems
proyectados para colgar de la unidad de accionamiento estn instalados. (Consulte
la seccin verificacin final de la nivelacin del manual de instalacin del equipo
clarificador/espesador y esbozo del procedimiento del procedimiento de calzo).

Lubrique la unidad de accionamiento de acuerdo con las instrucciones de

Lubricacin de la unidad de accionamiento en la seccin mantenimiento de este
manual. El equipo accesorio (motor, reductor, etc.) debe ser lubricado de acuerdo
con las respectivas instrucciones del fabricante (Consulte la seccin Equipo
accesorio de este manual).

Conecte el motor de la unidad para la direccin de rotacin adecuada tal y

como se muestra en el dibujo de Arreglo General/Montaje de la Unidad de
Accionamiento. (Consulte la flecha indicativa de la direccin de rotacin
sobre la etiqueta de identificacin ubicada sobre la unidad). WesTech no
aceptar responsabilidad por ningn dao causado por la rotacin de la
unidad en la direccin errada. En unidad de accionamiento con varios
piones, certifquese que todos los motores estn conectados para rotar en
la misma direccin. Esto se hace mediante la remocin de todos los
motores y la confirmacin de que todos giran en la misma direccin. En el
caso que los motores no arranquen en la misma direccin, daos severos
sern causados a la unidad.

Conecte la alarma del motor y las lleves elctricas tipo lmite de corte en el
dispositivo de control del torque (Consulte el esquema elctrico sugerido o el
diagrama de cableado del panel WesTech). El transmisor de torque, si es
suministrado, es calibrado para corresponder con la escala del indicador de torque
visual. Consulte los diseos de Arreglo General para verificar los valores de torque
de alarma y parada del motor.
 INSTALACIN

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ADVERTENCIA DEL PROCESO DE SOLDADURA

Si es requerida la realizacin de soldadura de campo despus de la instalacin de la

unidad de accionamiento, NO permita que la corriente pase a travs de las esferas
del rodamiento de precisin. Esto resultar en una descarga de chispas entre las
esferas del rodamiento de precisin y las pistas de deslice que destruirn el
montaje de la del rodamiento de precisin. NO SOLDE SOBRE LA PROPIA UNIDAD
DE ACCIONAMIENTO. Fije la tierra de la soldadura directamente a la parte a ser
soldada.

La no observacin de esta advertencia conllevar a la prdida de la

garanta de la unidad

ARRANQUE

Antes de arrancar la unidad de accionamiento, certifquese que el tanque y el curso

del mecanismo estn libres de cualquier detrito y obstruccin. Verifique la
lubricacin adecuada de la unidad de accionamiento y el equipo accesorio. Ejecute
una prueba en el cableado del motor para certificarse que no haya fugas de
corriente elctrica entre el cableado. Desconecte cualquier equipo electrnico
sensible antes de ejecutar la prueba con el meghmetro. Verifique si esta con la
rotacin correcta del mecanismo y cualquier interferencia.

Para unidades de accionamiento con equipos para elevacin, el mecanismo de

elevacin debe elevar los brazos raspadores al torque pre-ajustado. Cuando el
dispositivo de elevacin es usado, verifique los espacios en las posiciones de sube
baja de los brazos rapadores.

Observe la unidad de accionamiento y otros mecanismos para una operacin

apropiada y no obstruida. Ahora el tanque esta pronto para recibir el afluente. Un
aumento gradual en el torque indicado es normal conforme el afluente este siendo
alimentado. Cualquier movimiento irregular o sacudida en la operacin de los
brazos del rastrillo deben ser inmediatamente investigados y remediados. Una
cantidad menor de balanceo es normal para la operacin en un tanque vaco.

Verifique la llave elctrica de la alarma y el cableado de la llave de parada. Una

alarma debe sonar y el motor se debe apagar cuando estos interruptores estn
activados. Un rel de enganche que es iniciado manualmente debe ser usado en el
cableado de control para prevenir el mecanismo (clarificador, espesador, etc.) de
relajar y se sobrecargarse varias veces sin resolver la causa de la sobrecarga
 MANTENIMIENTO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MONTAJE Y DESMONTAJE DE LA UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO

Consulte el diagrama anexo de montaje y procedimientos de montaje de la unidad

de accionamiento en el caso de desmontaje de la unidad de accionamiento para
propsitos de mantenimiento.

LUBRICACIN DE LA UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO

El rodamiento superior y principal se embala con grasa en la fbrica de WesTech

antes del proceso de despacho. Para la lubricacin apropiada, grasa fresca, que sea
compatible con la grasa inicialmente usada en la fbrica por WesTech, debe ser
adicionada en las cantidades mostradas en el diseo de las etiquetas de lubricacin.
La grasa se aplicar a una frecuencia de dos veces como se muestra en el esbozo
de la etiqueta de lubricacin para las primeras 500 horas de operacin, por lo tanto
la grasa usada durante el desgaste es reemplazada. La etiqueta de lubricacin que
se graba en el tope de la tapa de la caja de torque indica el tipo de grasa usada
para que la planta pueda buscar una grasa compatible.

La aplicacin de grasa se debe realizar como se indica a continuacin: La

lubricacin del punto #1 es realizada girando tan rpido como lo recomienda el
bombeo normal. Todos los otros puntos son girados tan lento como sea posible
para que la grasa sea aplicada lentamente. Una onza es aproximadamente 5
aplicaciones de pistola de grasa. Motivado a que los tamaos de la pistola vara, el
operador deber determinar el nmero de disparos de grasa por onza para su
pistola de grasa. Por lo tanto, cuando 2 oz. se exigen semanalmente o
mensualmente, un bombeo lento se deber aplicar por un dcimo de revolucin.
Esto es aproximadamente 1 disparo lento cada dos minutos que resultaran en la
distribucin uniforme de la grasa alrededor del rodamiento del engranaje principal
mas bien que causar charcos de grasa en un punto de la cara del pin.

El engranaje principal y el rodamiento inferior son lubricados con aceite. El aceite

ser drenado antes del embarque. El aceite deber ser adicionado antes de la
unidad de accionamiento ser ajustada para la partida. Por favor consulte la tabla de
Aceites de Engranaje Recomendados en la Seccin de Mantenimiento de este
manual. Despus de la adicin de aceite, verifique el visor local del nivel de aceite.
El nivel de aceite deber estar en la mitad de indicador.

Nota: Algunos motores exigen grasa (vea el diseo LUBETAG para la cantidad y
frecuencia). Motores que exigen grasa necesitan cambio normalmente una vez por
ao. La mayora de los motores de pequeo HP tienen cojinetes que son sellados
para la vida til y no exigen lubricacin. NO use la misma grasa para el motor
que fue usada en cojinetes y engranajes
 MANTENIMIENTO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ACEITES RECOMENDADOS PARA ENGRANAJES

TEMPERATURA 14 F a 104 F 32 F a 120 F 50 F a 140 F

AMBIENTE (-10 C a 40 C) (0 C a 50 C) (10 C a 60 C)

Grado de AGMA 4 EP AGMA 5 EP AGMA 6 EP

Viscosidad o or or
ISO 150 ISO 220 ISO 320
FABRICANTE LUBRICANTE LUBRICANTE LUBRICANTE
EXXON CO. Spartan EP 150 Spartan EP 220 Spartan EP 320
B.P. OIL CO. Energol GR-XP Energol GR-XP Energol GR-XP
GULF OIL CORP. 150 220 320
LUBRICATION EP Lubricant HD EP Lubricant HD EP Lubricant HD
ENGR. MOBIL OIL 150 220 320
CO. Almasol 604 Almasol 607 Almasol 605
SHELL OIL CO. Mobilgear 600 Mobilgear 600 XP Mobilgear 600 XP
CHEVRON CORP. XP 150 220 320
Omala Oil Co. Omala Oil Co. Omala Oil Co.
150 220 320
MEROPA ISO MEROPA ISO 220 MEROPA 320
150

ACEITES SINTTICOS EQUIVALENTES

TEMPERATURA 14 F a 140 F
AMBIENTE (-10C a 60C)
Grado de Viscosidad ISO 320
FABRICANTE LUBRICANTE
LUBRICATION ENGR. INC. Monolec 9320
MOBIL OIL CO. Mobilgear SHC320
AMSOIL SGM
CHEVRON CORP. TEGRA ISO 320
 MANTENIMIENTO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

WesTech sabe por experiencia que los aceites sintticos tienen mejor desempeo
y duran mas tiempo que los aceites regulares. El aceite sinttico tiene las siguientes
ventajas: se separa ms fcilmente del agua, tiene una capa lmite ms fuerte lo
que resulta en una mejor lubricacin y generalmente una vida til ms larga. Se
recomienda que el consumidor cambie el aceite mineral del engranaje anualmente
(despus de las 500 horas iniciales del perodo de ejecucin) o haga un anlisis en
un laboratorio independiente para intervalos de servicio extendido.

Aceites sintticos pueden ser usados por perodos de tres a cinco aos basados en
anlisis de laboratorio anuales y recomendaciones provenientes de proveedores
locales.

ADVERTENCIA

No mezcle aceite mineral de engranaje con aceite sinttico sin consultar el

proveedor del aceite. Esto puede afectar de forma adversa el desempeo del
lubricante. Daos de los componentes de la unidad motriz pueden resultar e aceites
no compatibles.

MANTENIMIENTO ANUAL DE LA UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO

Pare y detenga la alimentacin de energa a la unidad de accionamiento. Verifique y

reajuste todos los elementos de fijacin expuestos de la unidad de accionamiento
(Para los valores de torque de los elementos de fijacin, consulte el esbozo de los
Procedimientos de Montaje de la Unidad de Accionamiento)

Las muestras de aceite debern ser enviadas para anlisis de laboratorios. El

reemplazo del aceite en la carcasa de la unidad deber ser fundamentada en los
resultados de los anlisis de laboratorio.

MANTENIMEINTO SEMANAL DE LA UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO

Deben ser seguidas las instrucciones para la lubricacin y la lista recomendada de

lubricantes (aceite y grasa) como se especifican. Esto le proveer un prolongado
tiempo de vida y una operacin libre de averas a la unidad de accionamiento.

Verifique el nivel de aceite de la unidad de accionamiento semanalmente. El nivel

de aceite deber estar a la mitad del visor de vidrio. Reemplace aceite segn sea
requerido. Consulte la seccin de LUBRICACIN en la categora de
MANTENIMIENTO y PARTES de este manual.

Si el aceite se encuentra notablemente descolorado, deber ser drenado y filtrado a

travs de una tela de malla fina. Cualquier sedimento o contaminantes deber ser
medido y registrado para evitar la contaminacin futura. Alguna decoloracin
ocurrir debido a la disolucin normal de la grasa por el contacto con el aceite.
Cambie en aceite si resulta necesario.
 MANTENIMIENTO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Verifique la unidad de accionamiento para la condensacin acumulada al menos

semanalmente y diariamente para reas de alta humedad. Cualquier condensacin
deber ser rpidamente removida para prevenir la acumulacin de la humedad en
la caja y engranaje principal de la unidad de accionamiento.
 MANTENIMIENTO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

LUBRICACIN DE ACCESORIOS

Reductor (Lubricado con aceite):

Todos los reductores lubricados con aceite son enviados llenos de aceite de
engranaje ISO 150 al nivel de aceite correcto. Adicione aceite ISO 150 a los
reductores si es necesario de acuerdo con el diseo de la Etiqueta de Lubricacin y
la Placa de Lubricacin. Para informacin adicional, consulte las instrucciones del
fabricante suministradas en este manual.

REQUERIMIENTOS DE MANTENIMIENTO INTERVALOS INICIALES FECHA

INTERRUPTIVOS
Drenaje y Llenado de la Cavidad/Cavidades de 0 hours
Aceite (Antes de la Operacin)
Drenaje y Reemplazo de aceite 500 hours

REQUERIMIENTOS DE MANTENIMIENTO
PREVENTIVO
Aplicacin de aceite al redactor BNA M
Aplicacin de aceite al moto reductor SEW M
Aplicacin de grasa al rodamiento superior M
Aplicacin de aceite al engranaje W
principal/rodamiento inferior
Aplicacin de grasa al rodamiento principal W

REQUERIMIENTOS DE INSPECCIN

Inspeccin de la firmeza de los elementos de M/A

fijacin
Inspeccin visual del desgaste de la unidad de W/A
accionamiento
Verificacin del drenaje de condensado W
Verificacin del drenaje de particulados S
Inspeccin/Reparacin de pintura de la unidad A
de accionamiento
Inspeccin del Dispositivo de control de A
torque

A - ANUALMENTE, S - SEMANALMENTE, M - MENSUALMENTE, W - SEMANALMENTE,

D - DIARIAMENTE
 MANTENIMIENTO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Consulte el Resumen de Lubricacin y Mantenimiento del Equipo para verificacin

de las instrucciones de inspeccin y mantenimiento.

PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA REQUISICIN DE REPUESTOS Y PIEZAS DE

REEMPLAZO

Los repuestos y piezas de reemplazo pueden ser solicitados al Departamento de

piezas a:

WESTECH EQUIPAMENTOS INDUSTRIAIS LTDA.

Rua Marqus de Paranagu, 360 CEP 01303-050
So Paulo, SP - Brasil
Telefono: (55 11) 3129-5226
Fax: (55 11) 3129-5118

SERVICIO 24 HORAS/EMERGENCIA
(801) 265-1000 8:00 am to 5:00 pm
(801) 263-4093 5:00 pm to 8:00 am

E-MAIL: westech@westech.com.br
WEB: www.westech-inc.com

Si necesita hablar directamente con un representante de partes y repuestos en las

horas laborales (6:00 AM a 5:00 PM MST), marque (801) 265-1007, ext. 172 o 173
y un representante WesTech tomar su orden.

Si Usted necesita enviar va fax su orden, enve su solicitud al (801) 265-1080. Un

representante de WesTech procesar su orden hacindole saber que ya hemos
recibido su orden, bien sea va fax o a travs de un llamada telefnica.

Para usar la lnea 24 horas de servicio/emergencia, marque (801) 267-4220 y

espere cuatro tonos altos. A continuacin marque su nmero telefnico para poder
contactarle. Un representante WesTech responder dentro de una (1) hora.

Si lo prefiere, puede enviarnos su lista de parte va correo electrnico a

westech@westech.com.br Un representante de WesTech procesar su orden
hacindole saber que ya hemos recibido su orden, bien sea va fax o a travs de
una llamada telefnica.

Acuse de Recibo
Los repuestos tambin pueden ser solicitados directamente a travs nuestra pagina
web (www.westech-inc.com). Simplemente dirjase a la pgina web, de un click en
Parts and Service, luego en Contact the WesTech Spare Parts Departmen y
rellene el formulario en linea. Un representante de WesTech procesar su solicitud y
le enviar un Acuse de Recibo de la solicitud, o retornar con una llamada
telefnica para confirmar que la solicitud fue recibida.
 MANTENIMIENTO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

En caso de se requiera asistencia complementar en la determinacin de los

repuestos que son apropiados para su situacin particular, por favor entre en
contacto con el Departamento de Piezas y Repuestos de WesTech.

Con la finalidad de evitar retrasos en la obtencin de las piezas de reemplazo o

repuestos correctos para su equipo, asegrese de suministrar la informacin
siguiente en su solicitud:

1. Identificar el equipo mediante el nmero del proyecto. Su equipo se identifica

de la siguiente manera:

WesTech Job No.: 21261A

Tipo de Equipo: Espesador
Nombre del Proyecto/Cliente:
MINERA BROCAL

2. Identifique la pieza por el nombre y suministre el nmero del diseo en el

cual la referida pieza aparece.

3. Identifique el nmero de la pieza.

4. Identifique el tamao e incluya todas las dimensiones pertinentes (tales

como dimetro exterior, longitud, espesor, dimetro interno, inclinacin,
etc.) a la medida de lo posible.

5. En caso de las piezas solicitadas ser de naturaleza elctrica, suministre todos

los datos pertinentes tales como: voltaje, amperaje, potencia, ciclos,
frecuencia, factor de potencia y otras informaciones dadas en la placa de
identificacin de la pieza o incluida en el catlogo de la pieza.

6. Enviar ambas, la orden de compra escrita o la solicitud de cotizacin,

formadas e impresas con el nombre completo de la persona contacto para
que WesTech conozca a quien contactar para esclarecimientos adicionales de
la requisicin que resulten necesarios. TODAS LAS RDENES VERBALES
DEBERN SER REGISTRADAS POR ESCRITO.

7. Suministre la direccin de retorno y la direccin de entrega.

8. Suministre el mtodo preferido para el envo (por ejemplo: UPS, envo

terrestre, envo ferroviario, envo areo expreso, etc.).

9. Muestre la cantidad deseada.

10. Suministre las instrucciones para la facturacin adecuada.

11. Todos las rdenes repuestos y piezas de reposicin sern sujetas a una valor
mnimo de orden de $100,00.

Nmeros de tem:
 MANTENIMIENTO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Un nmero de tem que identifica a la pieza se muestra en el diseo de montaje.

(Consulte el segmento de muestra del diseo de Arreglo General y la presentacin
de la Lista de piezas en la pgina siguiente). Los nmeros de temes en crculos son
mostrados en el diseo con flechas apuntando para cada pieza. En la lista de
piezas, los nmeros de tem son encontrados en la columna ubicada a la izquierda
de la lista de piezas. Los nmeros de tem son nmeros de tres dgitos. El primer
dgito es el nmero de la pgina de la lista de piezas. El segundo y tercer dgito son
el nmero de la lnea en la pgina en que la pieza esta listada.

Nmeros de la pieza:

Los nmeros de la pieza identifican los nmeros de los diseos de fabricacin. Los
diseos de fabricacin no estn incluidos en este manual de operacin y
mantenimiento.
 MANTENIMIENTO

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

PARTS LIST
 OPERACIN

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

INSTRUCCIONES DE OPERACIN UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO

Inspeccione la unidad para verificar la lubricacin apropiada a partir del diseo de

las etiquetas de lubricacin e instrucciones de lubricacin.

Unidad motriz sin dispositivo de elevacin:

Observe el mecanismo raspador para uniformidad de la operacin. Cualquier

movimiento irregular, accin de levante y trabamiento o friccin deben ser
investigados y ajustados.

Consulte el manual de mantenimiento y operacin del clarificador/espesador para

mayores informaciones.
 OPERACIN

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

RESOLUCIN DE PROBLEMAS DE LA UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO

Lea y comprenda la advertencia de operacin y mantenimiento en la seccin

general de este manual, antes de cualquier inspeccin y bsqueda de solucin de
problemas. Hay muchas condiciones peligrosas acerca de la unidad motriz con
riesgos de choque elctrico, riesgo relacionado a equipos giratorios, etc.

Problema Causas Posibles Acciones Correctivas

No rotacin del motor (1) Los cables terminales (1) Verifique que las
estn sueltos o no conexiones y el cableado
conectados correctamente. estn correctamente.
(2) Los fusibles se han (2) Corrija la causa de la
quemado. sobre carga y reemplace
(3) Los interruptores del los fusibles.
circuito se han cado. (3) Reinicie y verifique
(4) Devanados quemados los amperios durante el
debido a la sobrecarga, funcionamiento.
ventilacin inadecuada o (4) Verifique todo lo
suministro incorrecto de aplicable, elimine la
energa. causa y luego reemplace
(5) Temperaturas el motor.
excesivamente bajas que (5) Suministre
causan que los lubricantes calentamiento temporal.
fluyan con menos facilidad. Cambie para un
lubricante de viscosidad
ms baja. O asegrese
de un funcionamiento
continuo.
Sobrecalentamiento del (1) El motor se ha (1) Remover la condicin
Motor sobrecargado. de sobrecarga.
(2) La operacin del motor (2) Verificar el suministro
con el voltaje errado. de voltaje y conecte el
cableado del motor
correctamente.
Operacin del motor (1) El Acople est (1) Alinear el acople.
con ruido excesivo desalineado (2) Corregir el espacio de
(2) Las mitades del acople acuerdo con las
estn muy cercanas. especificaciones.
(3) Los rodamientos se (3) Reemplace los
encuentran desgastados. rodamientos
(4) El ventilador est desgastados.
daado. (4) Reemplace el
(5) La cubierta del ventilador.
ventilador est deformada. (5) Repare o reemplace
(6) Los elementos de la cubierta del ventilador.
fijacin estn sueltos. (6) Apriete los elementos
de fijacin
 OPERACIN

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Resolucin de problemas de la unidad de accionamiento (continuacin)

Problema Causas Posibles Acciones Correctivas

El mecanismo no gira (1) El Pasador de cizalla (1) Reemplace el
est daado (si esta pasador de cizalla.
previsto). (2) Reemplace los
(2) El acople entre el motor acoples daados.
y el redactor se ha daado. (3) Reemplace la llave
(3) Llave rota o deslizada rota entre los
entre los componentes del componentes del tren de
tren de accionamiento. accionamiento.
La no operacin (1) Cableado incorrecto. (1) Corrija el cableado.
correcta del dispositivo (2) Verifique si las piezas (2) Contacte a WesTech
de control de torque estn dobladas, quebradas o para asistencia.
desconectadas. (3) Reemplace las piezas
Antes de intentar (3) Tornillo de retencin del daadas o quebradas.
cualquier trabajo en la brazo de torque daado o (4) Remueva y repare o
caja de torque, doblado. solicite reemplazo para
contacte a WesTech WesTech. Consulte la
para asistencia. lista de piezas para la
obtencin del nmero de
*El ajuste sin tem.
autorizacin de la caja
de torque podr violar
la garanta del equipo.
El dispositivo de control (1) Los raspadores se (1) Remover los slidos
de torque muestra un encuentran presos en acumulados.
torque alto. exceso de lodo. (2) Corregir la causa de
(2) Interferencia del brazo la interferencia del
debido a objeto externo. raspador.
(3) Underflow atascado. (3) Desatasque el flujo
(4) Problemas operacionales del Underflow.
del Espesador/Clarificador. (4) Corrija los problemas
(5) Rodamientos del eje operacionales.
pin desconectados debido (5) Suministre
a la presencia de calentamiento temporal o
condensado o corrosin. reemplace las partes
corrodas.
 OPERACIN

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Resolucin de problemas de la unidad de accionamiento (continuacin)

Problema Causas Posibles Acciones Correctivas

Funcionamiento con (1) Falta de Lubricacin. (1) Verificar y adicionar
Ruido y Vibraciones (2) Elementos de fijacin grasa/aceite segn sea
Excesivas del Reductor sueltos. requerido. (Consulte
o la Unidad de (3) Acoples sueltos. etiquetas de lubricacin)
Accionamiento (2) Apriete los elementos
de fijacin.
(3) Apriete los acoples.
Sobrecalentamiento del (1) Sobrecarga del (1) Incremente la taza
Reductor** Reductor. de bombeo y minimice el
(2) Lubricante o cantidad de porcentaje de slidos en
lubricante incorrecta. el tanque.
(2) Contacte a WesTech
para asistencia. Puede
ser requerida una
revisin general del
reductor.
Fuga del Lubricante del (1) Desgates de los sellos o (1) Repare o reemplace
Reductor el eje. los sellos y el eje.
(2) Lubricante excesivo. (2) Reduzca la frecuencia
(3) Contaminacin con de re-lubricacin.
agua. (3) Encuentre y corrija la
(4) Los elementos de fuente de contaminacin
fijacin del redactor estn con agua.
sueltos. (4) Apriete los elementos
de fijacin.
Engranaje (1) Falta de Lubricante. (1) Verifique los dientes
Principal/Rodamiento (2) Agua condensada en la del engranaje y adiciones
Principal hacienda ruido cavidad del grasa/aceite segn sea
engranaje/rodamiento. requerido (Consulte la
Etiqueta de Lubricacin).
(2) Drene el agua
condensada.
 OPERACIN

AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANUAL DE INSTALACIN, OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Resolucin de problemas de la unidad de accionamiento (continuacin)

Problema Causas Posibles Acciones Correctivas

Cambio de Color del (1) Mezcla de condensado (1) Drene el condensado
Aceite Lubricante en el con aceite. semanalmente o a la
visor de vidrio (2) Disolucin de grasa en el medida que las
(Lechoso, Marrn aceite. condiciones locales lo
Oscuro o Negro) (3) Entrada de agua de requieran.
lavado al engranaje (2) Adiciones 14 oz. de
principal. grasa al rodamiento
(4) Oxidacin del aceite. principal durante una
rotacin.
(3) No lave el tope del
engranaje/rodamiento
principal.
(4) Cambie el aceite.
Nota: Si el aceite cambia
de color, drene y
reemplace todo el aceite
(Consulte Etiquetas de
Lubricacin)

** Los reductores cicloidales Sumitono tienen una tolerancia de aumento de

temperatura de 105 F por encima de la temperatura ambiente en el caso de que la
fluctuacin de la temperatura sea pequea. Si la temperatura aumenta
rpidamente, adicione lubricante o aceite en las cantidades recomendadas
(Consulte las Instrucciones de Lubricacin del Fabricante del Reductor).
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

DRAWINGS

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3625 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

SEW
GEARMOTOR

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3625 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
Constant Speed Gearmotors R/F/K/S

2002
Product
Catalog

Up to 98% Efficient Superior Uptime Long Life Low Maintenance Compact Design Modular Components Custom Assembled
 Parallel Helical Gear Units

R..DT../DV..BM(G) RF..DT../DV..

R..R..DT../DV..

RX..DT../DV.. RM..DT../DV..

USCS 0102 37
 Service Factor 1.0
Constant Speed Gear Reducers R/F/K/S Input Speed 1750 rpm
R87 AM213 AM215 AM254 AM256
Output Input Output Input Output Output Input Output Output Input Output Output Input Output Output
Ratio Speed Power Torque Stages Power Torque OHL Power Torque OHL Power Torque OHL Power Torque OHL
i na Pemax Tamax Pe Ta FRa Pe Ta FRa Pe Ta FRa Pe Ta FRa
rpm HP lb-in Pri. Sec. HP lb-in lb HP lb-in lb HP lb-in lb HP lb-in lb
124.97 14 3.19 13700 3 - 3.19 13700 3800 3.19 13700 3800 - - - - - -
118.43 15 3.33 13700 3 - 3.33 13700 3800 3.33 13700 3800 - - - - - -
103.65 17 3.86 13700 3 - 3.86 13700 3800 3.86 13700 3800 - - - - - -
93.38 19 4.26 13700 3 - 4.26 13700 3800 4.26 13700 3800 4.26 13700 3800 4.26 13700 3800
81.92 21 4.92 13700 3 - 4.92 13700 3650 4.92 13700 3650 4.92 13700 3650 4.92 13700 3650
63.68 27 6.25 13700 3 - 6.25 13700 2950 6.25 13700 2950 - - - - - -
60.35 29 6.52 13700 3 - 6.52 13700 2810 6.52 13700 2810 - - - - - -
52.82 33 7.45 13700 3 - 7.50 13600 2500 7.45 13700 2480 - - - - - -
47.58 37 8.25 13700 3 - 7.50 12300 3920 8.25 13700 3800 8.25 13700 3800 8.25 13700 3800
41.74 42 9.44 13700 3 - 7.50 10700 3830 9.44 13700 3650 9.44 13700 3650 9.44 13700 3650
36.84 48 10.77 13700 3 - 7.50 9470 3710 10 12700 3510 10.77 13700 3440 10.77 13700 3440
32.66 54 12.10 13700 3 - 7.50 8410 3600 10 11200 3440 12.10 13700 3290 12.10 13700 3290
27.88 63 13.70 13300 3 - 7.50 7170 3470 10 9650 3330 13.70 13300 3110 13.70 13300 3110
27.84 63 13.97 13700 2 - 7.50 7260 3470 10 9820 3310 - - - - - -
23.40 75 16.63 13700 2 - 7.50 6110 3310 10 8230 3200 - - - - - -
21.51 81 17.56 13300 2 - 7.50 5620 3240 10 7520 3130 15 11100 2900 17.56 13300 2770
19.10 92 18.89 12700 2 - 7.50 5000 3150 10 6680 3040 15 9820 2860 18.89 12700 2680
17.08 102 20.48 12300 2 - 7.50 4430 3060 10 5970 2950 15 8760 2790 20 12000 2590
15.35 114 21.94 11900 2 - 7.50 3980 2970 10 5350 2880 15 7880 2720 20 10800 2540
13.33 131 24.07 11300 2 - 7.50 3450 2860 10 4650 2770 15 6860 2630 20 9380 2480
11.93 147 25.27 10900 2 - 7.50 3100 2770 10 4160 2700 15 6110 2570 20 8410 2430
9.90 177 30.59 10400 2 - 7.50 2570 2610 10 3450 2570 15 5090 2450 20 6950 2340
9.14 191 33.25 10700 2 - 7.50 2390 2590 10 3190 2540 15 4690 2450 20 6420 2390
8.22 213 35.91 10300 2 - 7.50 2120 2500 10 2880 2450 15 4250 2390 20 5800 2320
7.13 245 37.24 9470 2 - 7.50 1860 2390 10 2480 2360 15 3670 2300 20 5000 2230
6.39 274 39.90 9030 2 - 7.50 1650 2320 10 2210 2270 15 3270 2230 20 4470 2170
5.30 330 42.56 8050 2 - 7.50 1360 2180 10 1860 2160 15 2700 2120 20 3720 2060

R87 AM284 AM286

Output Input Power Output Input Power Output Output OHL Input Power Output Output OHL
Ratio Speed Pemax Torque Stages Pe Torque FRa Pe Torque FRa
i na Tamax Ta Ta
rpm HP lb-in Pri. Sec. HP lb-in lb HP lb-in lb
36.84 48 10.77 13700 3 - 10.77 13700 3440 10.77 13700 3440
32.66 54 12.10 13700 3 - 12.10 13700 3290 12.10 13700 3290
27.88 63 13.70 13300 3 - 13.70 13300 3110 13.70 13300 3110
17.08 102 20.48 12300 2 - 20.48 12300 2570 20.48 12300 2570
15.35 114 21.94 11900 2 - 21.94 11900 2480 21.94 11900 2480
13.33 131 24.07 11300 2 - 24.07 11300 2360 24.07 11300 2360
11.93 147 25.27 10900 2 - 25 10400 2320 25.27 10900 2270
9.90 177 30.59 10400 2 - 25 8580 2250 30 10200 2140
9.14 191 33.25 10700 2 - 25 7970 2300 30 9470 2230
8.22 213 35.91 10300 2 - 25 7170 2250 30 8500 2180
7.13 245 37.24 9470 2 - 25 6200 2170 30 7350 2120
6.39 274 39.90 9030 2 - 25 5530 2120 30 6590 2060
5.30 330 42.56 8050 2 - 25 4600 2020 30 5440 1980

Please consult your SEW-Eurodrive Assembly Center for additional speed (RPM) selections and dimension pages not listed.

147 R.. AM..

 USE IF DRE MOTOR
DR Series AC Motors/Brakemotors
5 Technical data of 4-pole high efficiency motors

5.4 Technical data of 4-pole high efficiency motors

1800 rpm - S1
IN TA/TN
PN Code
nN cos 100% IA/IN JMot m
TN 230V 460V 575V Letter
Motor type TH/TN
[HP]
[rpm] [A] [%]1) [10-3 lb-ft2] [lb]2)
[lb-in]
0.25 1.9
DRS71S43) 1700 0.9 0.45 0.36 0.69 72.0 4.2 G 11.6 17.2
8.93 1.9
0.33 1.9
DRS71S43) 1700 1.24 0.62 0.49 0.69 72.0 4.2 G 11.6 17.2
12.3 1.9
0.5 1.9
DRS71S43) 1700 1.84 0.92 0.74 0.69 72.0 4.2 G 11.6 17.2
18.5 1.9
0.75 2.2
DRS71M43) 1690 2.5 1.25 1.0 0.71 74.0 4.3 G 16.8 20.1
27.4 2.1
1 3
DRE80M4 1740 2.9 1.44 1.15 0.78 82.5 7.1 K 51 31.5
36.2 2.1
1.5 3.6
DRE90M4 1740 4.5 2.25 1.8 0.73 84.0 7.7 L 84.3 40.6
53.1 2.9
2 3.4
DRE90L4 1740 5.7 2.85 2.3 0.77 85.5 7.5 K 103 47.4
72.5 3.0
3 4
DRE100L4 1735 8.0 4.0 3.2 0.79 87.5 8.1 K 161 63.9
107 3.3
5 2.5
DRE100LC4 1750 12.9 6.5 5.2 0.83 87.5 7.6 J 213 68.4
177 2.3
5.4 2.9
DRE132S4 1765 13.8 6.9 5.5 0.81 88.5 8.7 K 451 102
190 2.5
7.5 2.5
DRE132M4 1755 18 9 7.2 0.85 89.5 8.1 J 605 132
265 1.6
10 2.1
DRE132MC4 1770 24.5 12.3 9.8 0.82 89.5 8.7 K 807 138
358 1.6
12.5 3
DRE160M4 1770 31 15.4 12.3 0.82 91.0 8 J 1068 196
438 2.2
15 2.9
DRE160MC4 1780 36.5 18.3 14.6 0.82 91.7 8.2 J 1401 207
522 2
20 2.6
DRE180M4 1775 47.5 24 19 0.86 91.7 7.4 H 2636 304
716 1.9
25 2.9
DRE180L4 1775 60 30 24 0.84 93.0 8.1 J 3087 335
885 2.2
30 2.4
DRE180LC4 1780 71 35.5 28.5 0.84 93.0 7.6 J 3990 355
1044 1.8
40 2.6
DRE200L4 1780 99 49.5 39.5 0.82 93.0 7.4 J 5605 573
1424 2.1
50 2.7
DRE225S4 1775 119 59 47.5 0.84 93.0 7.2 H 6958 650
1761 2.0
60 2.8
DRE225M4 1780 142 71 57 0.85 93.6 7.3 H 8146 694
2124 1.9
1) Efficiency levels according to IEC 60034-2-1 Ed. 1 (2007) / PLL from Residual Losses, NEMA MG1 and/or DoE
2) Applies for foot-mounted motor (DRS and DRE.../FL..)
3) Standard efficiency motor

US DoE CC056A applies to DRE, DRP and DVE motors

40 MOT1 AC Motors
 DR Series AC Motors/Brakemotors
Technical data of 4-pole high efficiency motors
5

Z0 2
PN
TN
nN BE.. TB BG1) JMot_BE m_BE
Motor type BGE2)
[HP]
3
[rpm] [lb-in]3) [1/h] [10-3 lb-ft2] [lb]4)
[lb-in]
0.25 4800 4
DRS71S45) 1700 BE05 22 14.7 22.5
8.93 7600
0.33 4800
DRS71S45) 1700 BE05 31 14.7 22.5
12.3 7600 5
0.5 4800
DRS71S45) 1700 BE05 44 14.7 22.5
18.5 7600

DRS71M45)
0.75
1690 BE1 88
3300
19.9 25.8 6
27.4 8800
1 2800
DRE80M4 1740 BE1 88 54.6 38.1
36.2 7200 7
1.5 2400
DRE90M4 1740 BE2 124 95 50.7
53.1 6400
2 2400 8
DRE90L4 1740 BE2 177 115 57.3
72.5 6400
3 -
DRE100L4
107
1735 BE5 248
3000
175 77.2 9
5 -
DRE100LC4 1750 BE5 354 228 81.6
177 3000
5.4 -
10
DRE132S4 1765 BE5 487 463 121
190 2200
7.5 - 11
DRE132M4 1755 BE11 708 629 165
265 1600
10 -
DRE132MC4 1770 BE11 974 843 172
358 1200 12
12.5 -
DRE160M4 1770 BE20 1328 1187 253
438 1000

DRE160MC4
15
1780 BE20 1328
-
1520 264 13
522 900
20 -
DRE180M4 1775 BE20 1770 2778 374
716 800 14
25 -
DRE180L4 1775 BE30 2655 3420 423
885 590
30 - 15
DRE180LC4 1780 BE30 2655 4322 441
1044 520
40 BE30 26556) - 5938 661
DRE200L4
1424
1780
BE32 35407) 550 6151 695 16
50 BE30 26556) - 7291 738
DRE225S4 1775 7)
1761 BE32 4425 320 7505 771
60 BE30 26556) - 8479 782
17
DRE225M4 1780
2124 BE32 53107) 270 8692 815
1) Operation with BG brake control system 18
2) Operation with BGE brake control system
3) Standard braking torque for IEC brakemotor
19
4) Applies for foot-mounted motor (DRS and DRE..BE../FI..)
5) Standard efficiency motor
6) Alternate reduced brake torque 20
7) Double-disc brake
21
US DoE CC056A applies to DRE, DRP and DVE motors
22

MOT1 AC Motors 41
 Mounting Positions

Mounting Positions and Important Order Information

General information on mounting positions
Mounting position designation
SEW differentiates between six mounting positions M1 M6 for geared motors. The following figure shows
the spatial arrangement of the gear units in mounting positions M1 M6.

M6 M6

M1 M1
M2 M2
M5 M5
M4 M4

R..
M3 M3

M6
M6 M1
M2
M2
M1

M5
M5 M4
M4

F..
M3 M3

M6

M1
M1 M6
M2 M2
M5
M5
M4
K..
M4 W..
S.. M3
M3

Fig. 8: Depiction of mounting positions M1 M6

USCS 0102 7
General Information

Introduction Abbreviations
The SEW-Eurodrive Parallel Helical Gear Units are designed for continuous duty The following abbreviations are used in the selection tables:
under difficult operating conditions. Only materials of the highest quality are
used in the manufacture of the units. These units have the following standard fB Service Factor
construction features:
FRa Permissible output overhung load (lb) at the midpoint of the output
Helical gearing in compliance with ANSI/AGMA Standard 2001-B88. shaft extension

Gears are carburized to a hardness of 58 - 62 RC for durability. FRe Permissible input overhung load (lb) at the midpoint of the input
shaft extension
Gearcase and flanges of high strength gray cast iron SAE Class 30.
i Gear unit ratio
Double-lip oil seals on output shaft with additional inner seal made of
Viton. na Output speed in rpm

Captured keys on input and output shafts. ne Input speed in rpm

Foot mounted, flange mounted, or foot/flange mounted. Pa Rated output power (Hp)

Efficiency Pe Calculated power input into the gear unit (Hp)

Pe is calculated from Ta max by taking into account the gear
The efficiency of the gear units is primarily determined by the gearing and units efficiency under standard operating conditions. For cal-
bearing friction, and ranges from approximately 95% for 3 stages of gear culated Pe less than .2Hp, a dash () is shown in the respective
reduction to 98% for single stage gear reduction. selection tables since the actual values are subject to large
variations.

Output Power, Torque, and Speed Pn Motor rated power (HP)

The details on power, torque, and speed given in the selection tables always refer Ta Output torque (lb-in.) with reference to the driving motor
to the mounting position M1 or similar mounting position for standard features,
standard ambient conditions, and standard lubricants. The output speeds have Ta max Maximum permissible output torque (lb-in.) at fB = 1.0
been rounded up or down. The actual output speed may vary slightly due to the
motor frame size, the loading, or the supply voltage. Dimension Page Notes
Design Variations The dimensions shown for the motors of frame size greater than 225 may vary
slightly. Please have these dimensions confirmed when ordering these units.
In addition to the foot or flange mount versions shown in the accompanying
pages, the Parallel Helical Gear Units type R37-R87 are also available with the The dimension sheets are valid for standard units with various basic features. In
combination foot/flange mount. Additionally more than one flange size may be particular, motor accessories such as canopies, ventilators, etc. will alter the basic
available for the flange mounted version. Please see the respective dimension dimensions. Please refer to the respective accessory dimension pages for addi-
pages for available flange sizes. tional dimensions.

These gear units are available with an extended output shaft bearing housing The Parallel Helical Gear Units from size 67, as well as motors from frame size
designated as RM. The RM gear units are primarily used for agitation applica- DV112 are supplied with lifting eye bolts which can be removed. Smaller gear
tions. With the exception of output overhung and axial loads the data of the RM units and motors do not have lifting eye bolts.
gear units corresponds to those of the R-series of the same size.
Certified dimension sheets are available from your SEW-Eurodrive Assembly
Additional features available for the Parallel Gear units are: Center.

Adapters for IEC or NEMA C-Face motors.

Adapters for mounting servomotors.

Motor mounting platforms and scoops.
Adapters for torque limiting couplings.
Corrosion protection.

Please contact your SEW-Eurodrive representative for additional information.

Viton is a registered trademark of DuPont Dow Elastomers

38 USCS 0102
 Service Factoring

Unit Selection
In order to select the most suitable gear unit it is essential that a thorough JL
Inertia acceleration factor =
knowledge of the characteristics of the driven machine are known. The gear units Jm
are normally designed for constant torque load and only a few starts/stops. If
these conditions do not exist, it is necessary to determine a service factor, fB, Where: JL = Reflected Load Inertia
from the start/stop frequency, Load Class, and the daily operating time as shown Jm = Motor Inertia
in the diagram below.
All external load inertias, J, must be reflected back to the input side of the gear
For gearmotors, the appropriate service factor taken from the diagram is then unit.
compared with the service factor given with each speed/power combination listed
in the gearmotor selection tables. To ensure a long, trouble free service life it is 1
essential that the unit selected has a service factor equal to, or greater than, that Example: JL = J
determined from the diagram. (Gear Ratio) 2

Included in the number of starts and stops per hour must be all regenerative brake
Load Classification actions and the speed changes from high to low speed as experienced with
multi-speed motors.
I = Uniform load. Permissible inertia acceleration factor 0.2
II = Moderate shock load. Permissible inertia acceleration factor 3.0 Example: Load Class I with 200 starts and stops per hour and operating time of
24 hours per day gives fB = 1.36.
III = Heavy shock load. Permissible inertia acceleration factor 10

For inertia acceleration factor > 10, please contact your nearest SEW-Eurodrive AGMA
representative.
For Service Factors using AGMA criteria, please refer to the guidelines on page
35.

USCS 0102 39
 Service Factoring
Using AGMA Criteria

SEW-Eurodrive gear units may be service factored using criteria set forth in AGMA uses service factors for electric motors, turbines, and hydraulic motors
the various AGMA Standards. as listed by the chart below.

For: a) Parallel Helical (type R and F) gearmotors. In the chart, the reducer loading may be classified as follows:
b) Right angle Helical-Bevel (type K) gearmotors.
(1) Uniform Load. Recurrent shock loads do not exceed the nominal
AGMA uses service classes I, II, and III, which are based on: specified input or prime mover power.

Class I: Steady loads not exceeding normal rating and 8-10 hours (2) Moderate Shock Load. Recurrent shock loads do not exceed 1.25
running time per day. the nominal specified input or prime mover power.
Service Factor 1.0 minimum
(3) Heavy Shock Load. Recurrent shock loads do not exceed
Class II: a. Steady loads not exceeding normal rating and 24 hours 1.50 the nominal specified input or prime mover power.
running time per day.
b. Moderate shock loads, not exceeding 1.25 Rated Load (4) Extreme Shock Load. Recurrent shock loads do not exceed 1.75 the
Torque and 8-10 hours running time per day. nominal specified input or prime mover power.
Service Factor 1.4 minimum
NOTE: The magnitude of any recurrent shock loads should be estimated or
Class III: a. Moderate shock loads, 1.25 Rated Load Torque and 24 determined through test by the system designer. Recurrent shock loads can be
hours running time per day. of such a short duration that they may not be reflected in motor amperage read-
b. Heavy shock loads, exceeding 1.25 Rated Load Torque ings. In these cases actual loads are usually determined by strain gaging the
and 8-10 hours running time per day. driven shaft of the machine.
Service Factor 2.0 minimum
Duration of Service Uniform Moderate Heavy Extreme
Reference AGMA Standard 6019-E89 for Service Class listings by applica- (Hours per Day) Load Shock Shock Shock
tion.
Occasional .5 hour 1.00 1.25
Less than 3 hours 1.00 1.00 1.25 1.50
3-10 hours 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75
Over 10 hours 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00

When the prime mover is a single or multi-cylinder engine, the service factors
must be modified by the following:

Steam and Gas Single Multi-

Turbines, Hydraulic Cylinder Cylinder
or Electric Motor Engines Engines

1.00 1.50 1.25

1.25 1.75 1.50
1.50 2.00 1.75
1.75 2.25 2.00
2.00 2.50 2.25
2.25 2.75 2.50
2.50 3.00 2.75
2.75 3.25 3.00
3.00 3.50 3.25

Starting conditions where peak loads exceed 200% of rated load and applica-
tions with frequent starts and stops require special load analysis.

Service Factor listings by application may be found in:

AGMA 6010-E88 for types R, F and K reducers.

AGMA 6034-B92 for type S reducers and gearmotors.

USCS 0102 35
Technical Data
Lubrication

Each gear unit is supplied from the factory with the correct grade and quantity of lubricant for the specified mounting position. The following lubricants are supplied
from our North American Facilities. Under special circumstances such as high or low ambient temperatures optional oils should be used.

Standard Oil Optional Oil

USA USA

Ambient Ambient
Gear Units Type Manufacturer Temperature Gear Units Type Manufacturer Temperature
C C
R..17 167 Mobilgear 630 [M] Mobil Oil Corp. 0 to +40
R..17 167 Mobilgear 629 [M] -15 to +25
CANADA Mobil Oil Corp.
R..17 167 Mobil SHC630 [S] -40 to +40
Tribol 800/220
R..17 Shell Oil Co. 0 to +40
[S] R..17 167 Mobil SHC629 [S] -30 to +50
Omala 220
R..27 167 Shell Oil Co. 0 to +40 CANADA
[M]
[M]Mineral Oil Omala RL220
R..27 167 Shell Oil Co. -30 to +80
[S] Synthetic Oil [S]

[M]Mineral Oil
[S] Synthetic Oil
For ball and roller bearings of gear units the following greases are recommended:
Mineral Grease Synthetic Grease
Ambient Ambient
Type Manufacturer Temperature Type Manufacturer Temperature
C C
Mobilux EP2 Mobil Oil Corp. -20 to +40 Mobiltemp SHC 32 Mobil Oil Corp. -45 to +60
Alvania Grease R3 Shell Oil Co. -30 to +60

158 USCS 0102

Design and Operating Notes Constant Speed Gear Reducers R/F/K/S

Lubricant fill quantities

The specified fill quantities are guide values. The precise values vary depending on the stages and gear ratio. When filling, it
is essential to check the oil level plug since this indicates the precise oil capacity.

The following tables show guide values for lubricant fill quantities depending on the mounting position M1 M6.
Helical (R) gear units

Fill Quantities
Gear Unit M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Gallons Liters Gallons Liters Gallons Liters Gallons Liters Gallons Liters Gallons Liters
RX57 0.16 0.6 0.21 0.8 0.34 1.3 0.34 1.3 0.24 0.9 0.24 0.9
RX67 0.21 0.8 0.21 0.8 0.45 1.7 0.50 1.9 0.29 1.1 0.29 1.1
RX77 0.29 1.1 0.40 1.5 0.69 2.6 0.71 2.7 0.42 1.6 0.42 1.6
RX87 0.45 1.7 0.66 2.5 1.27 4.8 1.27 4.8 0.77 2.9 0.77 2.9
RX97 0.55 2.1 0.90 3.4 1.95 7.4 1.85 7.0 1.27 4.8 1.27 4.8
RX107 1.03 3.9 1.48 5.6 3.06 11.6 3.14 11.9 2.03 7.7 2.03 7.7
RXF57 0.13 0.5 0.21 0.8 0.29 1.1 0.29 1.1 0.18 0.7 0.18 0.7
RXF67 0.18 0.7 0.21 0.8 0.40 1.5 0.45 1.7 0.26 1.0 0.26 1.0
RXF77 0.24 0.9 0.40 1.5 0.63 2.4 0.53 2.0 0.42 1.6 0.42 1.6
RXF87 0.42 1.6 0.66 2.5 1.29 4.9 1.24 4.7 0.77 2.9 0.77 2.9
RXF97 0.55 2.1 0.95 3.6 1.87 7.1 1.85 7.0 1.27 4.8 1.27 4.8
RXF107 0.82 3.1 1.56 5.9 2.96 11.2 2.77 10.5 1.90 7.2 1.90 7.2

Fill Quantities
1) 1) 2) 2)
Gear Unit M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Gallons Liters Gallons Liters Gallons Liters Gallons Liters Gallons Liters Gallons Liters
R17/R17F 0.07 0.25 0.15 0.55 0.09 0.35 0.15 0.55 0.09 0.35 0.09 0.35
R27/R27F 0.07 (0.11) 0.25 (0.4) 0.18 0.70 0.13 0.50 0.18 0.70 0.13 0.50 0.13 0.50
R37/R37F 0.08 (0.25) 0.3 (0.95) 0.22 0.85 0.25 0.95 0.28 1.05 0.20 0.75 0.25 0.95
R47/R47F 0.18 (0.40) 0.7 (1.5) 0.42 1.60 0.40 1.5 0.44 1.65 0.40 1.5 0.40 1.5
R57/R57F 0.21 (0.45) 0.8 (1.7) 0.50 1.90 0.45 1.7 0.55 2.1 0.45 1.7 0.45 1.7
R67/R67F 0.29 (0.61) 1.1 (2.3) 0.69 (0.92) 2.6 (3.5) 0.74 2.8 0.84 3.2 0.48 1.8 0.53 2.0
R77/R77F 0.32 (0.79) 1.2 (3) 1.00 (1.08) 3.8 (4.1) 0.95 3.6 1.08 4.1 0.66 2.5 0.90 3.4
R87/R87F 0.61 (1.58) 2.3 (6) 1.77 (2.16) 6.7 (8.2) 1.90 7.2 2.03 7.7 1.66 6.3 1.72 6.5
R97 1.21 (2.59) 4.6 (9.8) 3.09 (3.70) 11.7 (14) 3.09 11.7 3.54 13.4 2.98 11.3 3.09 11.7
R107 1.58 (3.62) 6 (13.7) 4.30 16.3 4.46 16.9 5.07 19.2 3.48 13.2 4.20 15.9
R137 2.64 (6.60) 10 (25) 7.39 28.0 7.79 29.5 8.32 31.5 6.60 25.0 6.60 25.0
R147 4.07 (10.56) 15.4 (40) 12.28 46.5 12.67 48.0 13.73 52.0 10.43 39.5 10.82 41.0
R167 7.13 (18.48) 27 (70) 21.65 82.0 20.59 78.0 23.23 88.0 17.42 66.0 18.22 69.0
RF17 0.07 0.25 0.15 0.55 0.09 0.35 0.15 0.55 0.09 0.35 0.09 0.35
RF27 0.07 (0.11) 0.25 (0.4) 0.18 0.70 0.13 0.50 0.18 0.7 0.113 0.50 0.13 0.50
RF37 0.09 (0.25) 0.35 (0.95) 0.24 0.90 0.25 0.95 0.28 1.05 0.20 0.75 0.25 0.95
RF47 0.17 (0.40) 0.65 (1.5) 0.42 1.60 0.40 1.5 0.44 1.65 0.40 1.5 0.40 1.5
RF/RM57 0.21 (0.45) 0.8 (1.7) 0.48 1.80 0.45 1.7 0.53 2.0 0.45 1.7 0.45 1.7
RF/RM67 0.32 (0.66) 1.2 (2.5) 0.71 (0.95) 2.7 (3.6) 0.71 2.7 0.82 3.1 0.50 1.9 0.55 2.1
RF/RM77 0.32 (0.69) 1.2 (2.6) 1 (1.08) 3.8 (4.1) 0.87 3.3 1.08 4.1 0.63 2.4 0.79 3.0
RF/RM87 0.63 (1.58) 2.4 (6) 1.8 (2.09) 6.8 (7.9) 1.87 7.1 2.03 7.7 1.66 6.3 1.69 6.4
RF/RM97 1.35 (2.69) 5.1 (10.2) 3.14 (3.70) 11.9 (14) 2.96 11.2 3.70 14.0 2.96 11.2 3.12 11.8
RF/RM107 1.66 (3.93) 6.3( 14.9) 4.20 15.9 4.49 17.0 5.07 19.2 3.46 13.1 4.20 15.9
RF/RM137 2.51 (6.60) 9.5 (25) 7.13 27.0 7.66 29.0 8.58 32.5 6.60 25.0 6.60 25.0
RF/RM147 4.33 (11.09) 16.4 (42) 12.41 47.0 12.67 48.0 13.73 52.0 11.09 42.0 11.09 42.0
RF/RM167 6.86 (18.48) 26 (70) 21.65 82.0 20.59 78.0 23.23 88.0 17.16 65.0 18.74 71.0

1)
On compound gear units the primary (larger) gear unit is provided with the oil quantity in parenthesis.
2)
On compound gear units having mounting positions M3, M5, or M6 the secondary (smaller) gear unit is provided with the oil filling of the M1 flanged
mounting position.

Lubricants 78
16827120.book Page 440 Wednesday, December 2, 2009 12:03 PM

SEW-EURODRIVEDriving the world

How were driving the world

With a global presence With drives and With comprehensive With industry-leading
that offers responsive controls that knowledge in virtually training and 24-hour
and reliable solutions. automatically improve every branch of technical support,
Anywhere. your productivity. industry today. nationwide.

SEW-EURODRIVE
Driving the world

With a worldwide With uncompromising With innovative With online information

service network that quality that reduces technology that solves and software updates,
is always close at hand. the cost and complexity problems today. via the Internet, available
of daily operations. around the clock.

SEW-EURODRIVE ... Wherever you are, we are

North America:
Midwest Region Northeast Region Southeast Region Southwest Region Western Region
Assembly Center Assembly Center Assembly Center Assembly Center Assembly Center
SEW-EURODRIVE, Inc. SEW-EURODRIVE, Inc. SEW-EURODRIVE, Inc. SEW-EURODRIVE, Inc. SEW-EURODRIVE, Inc.
Troy, OH Bridgeport, NJ Lyman, SC Dallas, TX Hayward, CA
Tel. (937) 335-0036 Tel. (856) 467-2277 Tel. (864) 439-7537 Tel. (214) 330-4824 Tel. (510) 487-3560
Fax (937) 332-0038 FAX (856) 845-3179 Fax (864) 439-7830 Fax (214) 330-4724 Fax (510) 487-6463
cstroy@seweurodrive.com csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com cslyman@seweurodrive.com csdallas@seweurodrive.com cshayward@seweurodrive.com

Mexico Canada
SEW-EURODRIVE Sales and SEW-EURODRIVE Co. SEW-EURODRIVE Co. SEW-EURODRIVE Co.
Distribution SA de CV of Canada Ltd. of Canada Ltd. of Canada Ltd.
Queretaro, Mexico Bramalea, Ontario Delta, B.C. LaSalle, Quebec
Tel. (011) 52-422-103-0300 Tel. (905) 791-1553 Tel. (604) 946-5535 Tel. (514) 367-1124
Fax (011) 52-422-103-0301 Fax (905) 791-2999 Fax (604) 946-2513 Fax (514) 367-3677 www.seweurodrive.com (U.S.)
scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx marketing@sew-eurodrive.ca marketing@sew-eurodrive.ca marketing@sew-eurodrive.ca www.seweurodrive.ca (Canada)
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

LOAD CELL
TORQUE
BOX

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3625 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
LOAD CELL
Do not alter the factory-set positions of the torque limits in the torque box. This
can cause serious damage to the drive and rake mechanism. The 4-20 mA
transmitter signal (if provided) is set and calibrated in WesTechs manufacturing
shops. Over torque cutout requires manual restart, or reset of a latched cutout
circuit that prevents auto restart of units with the motor. Units with hand/off/auto
selector switches must be checked to insure proper torque protection when set in
auto and hand modes. Contact the WesTech drive group if the torque control
setting needs to be changed.

Failure to observe this warning will void the drive warranty.

It is recommended to manually test the limit switches on the electronic torque

control device twice a year, to make sure the controls and torque control limits
are working properly. This can be done by compressing the load cell and torque
arm tab with a c-clamp. Making sure that the alarm activates and the cutout stops
the drive mechanism until the mechanism is manually reset.
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

DRIVE
INTERMEDIATE
REDUCER

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3625 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
MANUALE DI INSTALLAZIONE USO E 300 SERIES GEARBOXES INSTALLATION, HANDBUCH FR INSTALLATION, BETRIEB NOTICE D'INSTALLATION, D'UTILISATION ET
MANUTENZIONE RIDUTTORI SERIE 300 OPERATION, AND SERVICE MANUAL UND WARTUNG GETRIEBE SERIE 300 D'ENTRETIEN REDUCTEURS SERIE 300

Paragrafo Pagina
Heading Page
Abschnitt Seite
Paragraphe Page

Descrizione Description Beschreibung Description

1 Condizioni di fornitura Conditions of supply Auslieferung Conditions de fourniture 2

Trasporto Shipment Transport Transport 3

Stoccaggio Storage Lagerung Stockage 3

2 Norme per l'installazione Installation Installation Instructions d'installation 4

Posizioni di montaggio Mounting position Montagepositionen Position fonctionnement 4

Esecuzione riduttori Serie 300 300 Series gearbox mountings Ausfhrung Getriebe Serie 300 Execution reducteurs Srie 300 10

Esecuzione con flangia Flange mounting Ausfhrung mit Flansch Execution avec bride 10

Esecuzione con albero Splined female shaft mounting Ausfhrung mit Execution avec arbre femelle 13
femmina scanalato Nutaufnahmewelle cannele

Esecuzioni con piedi di supporto Foot mounting Ausfhrung mit Standfssen Execution avec pattes de support 14

Versione pendolare Shaft mounting design Aufsteckmontage Version montage flottant 15

3 Collegamenti Couplings Anschlsse Liaisons 16

Collegamenti in entrata Input couplings Anschlsse am Eingang Liaisons a l'entree 18

Installazione motoriduttore Installation of gearmotors Installation Getriebemotor Installation motoreducteur 24

4 Lubrificazione Lubrication Schmierung Lubrification 29

5 Messa in funzione Start-up Inbetriebnahme Mise en route 37

6 Manutenzione Maintenance Wartung Entretien 38

Revisioni Revisions nderungen Rvisions

Le edizioni dei cataloghi che su- For catalogue editions that inclu- Der nderungstatus ist auf jedem Les ditions des catalogues qui
biscono revisioni, riportano al de revised material, the latest re- Blatt unten, in der Mitte enthalten. subissent des rvisions prsen-
centro in basso delle pagine che levant revision index is shown at Auf Seite 40 ist eine bersicht tent au centre, du bas des pages
hanno subito delle modifiche, il bottom centre of the modified pa- der berichtigten Seiten enthalten. ayant subi des modifications, le
relativo ultimo indice di revisione. ges. The list of pages with revi- Die nderung des Katalogs ist dernier indice de rvision. La liste
Lelenco delle pagine interessate sions is shown on page 40. The auf der letztch. Seite des Ein- des pages concernes par les r-
alle relative revisioni a pag.40. index of catalogue revisions ap- bands unten in der Mitte sichtlich. visions se trouve page 40.
Lindice di revisione del catalogo pears at bottom centre of back Lindice de rvision du catalogue
riportato nella IVa di copertina cover page. se trouve la IVme page de co-
in basso al centro. uverture en bas au centre.

Il Gruppo Bonfiglioli, sensibile ai proble- Bonfiglioli Group, in its commitment to Die Gruppe Bonfiglioli denkt umwelt- Le Groupe Bonfiglioli, sensible aux
mi dell'ambiente e all'ecologia, ha rea- environment to environmental bewut: Vorliegender Katalog ist problmes de prservation de
lizzato le pagine di questo catalogo in preservation, have printed these auf Altpapier gedruckt. l'environnement, a imprim ce cata-
carta raciclata. pages on recycled paper. logue sur du papier recycl.

1
 MANUALE DI INSTALLAZIONE USO E 300 SERIES GEARBOXES INSTALLATION, HANDBUCH FR INSTALLATION, BETRIEB NOTICE D'INSTALLATION, D'UTILISATION ET
MANUTENZIONE RIDUTTORI SERIE 300 OPERATION, AND SERVICE MANUAL UND WARTUNG GETRIEBE SERIE 300 D'ENTRETIEN REDUCTEURS SERIE 300

1 - CONDIZIONI DI 1 - SUPPLY CONDITIONS 1 - LIEFERBEDINGUNGEN 1 - CONDITIONS DE

FORNITURA LIVRAISON

I riduttori vengono forniti Gearboxes are supplied as Die Getriebe werden folgen- Les rducteurs sont livrs
come segue: follows: dermaen geliefert: comme suit:

a) gi predisposti per essere a) ready for installation in the a) bereits fr die Installation in a) dj adapts pour l'installa-
installati nella posizione di mounting position speci- der Einbaulage gem tion dans la position d'as-
montaggio come definito fied on order; Auftrag bereit; semblage dfinie en cours
in fase di ordine; de commande;
b) senza olio lubrificante ed b) dry; inner parts are pro- b) ohne Schmierl und in- b) sans huile lubrifiante et
internamente protetti con tected by a film of the oil nen mit einem l, das fr protgs l'intrieur avec
un film d'olio usato per il used for final testing (type die Endabnahmeprfung un film d'huile utilise lors
collaudo finale (tipo SHELL ENSIS OIL N); verwendet wurde, ber- de l'essai final (type
SHELL ENSIS OIL N); zogen (Typ SHELL EN- SHELL ENSIS OIL N);
SIS OIL N);
c) verniciati con vernice di fon- c) painted with antioxidant wa- c) mit einer grauen, vor Oxy- c) peints avec une couche de
do antiossidante all'acqua ter primer in the colour grey dation durch Wasser scht- fond de protection antioxy-
di colore grigio (tipo Idrayon (type Idrayon Primer-Ral zenden Grundlackierung dant l'eau, de coloris gris
Primer-Ral 7042/C441). 7042/C441). berzogen (Typ Idrayon (type idrayon Primer-Ral
Le superfici di accoppia- Mating surfaces are not Primer Ral 7042/C441). 7042/C441).
mento non sono verniciate. painted. Die Verbindungsflchen Les surfaces d'accouple-
La verniciatura finale a Final coat is to be applied sind nicht lackiert. ment ne sont pas peintes.
cura del cliente; by the Customer; Die Endlackierung geht zu La peinture de finition doit
Lasten des Kunden; tre ralise par le client;

d) collaudati secondo specifi- d) tested to in-house specifica- d) gem werksinterner Spe- d) essays d'aprs les spci-
che interne; tions; zifikationen geprft; fications internes;
e) appositamente imballati; e) suitably packed; e) in angemessener Weise e) dment emballs;
verpackt;
f) provvisti di dadi e bulloni f) complete with mounting f) mit Muttern und Schrauben f) pourvus d'crous et de bou-
per montaggio motori elet- nuts and bolts for IEC fr die Montage an Elektro- lons pour l'assemblage aux
trici versione IEC; electric motors; motoren der Version IEC; moteurs lectriques, version
CEI;
g) gi provvisti di lubrificante g) life-lubed gearboxes are g) die mit Dauerschmierung, g) dj pourvus de lubrifiant
per quelli a lubrificazione factory filled with oil. bereits mit Schmiermittel pour ceux lubrification
permanente. ausgestattet. permanente.

2
MANUALE DI INSTALLAZIONE USO E 300 SERIES GEARBOXES INSTALLATION, HANDBUCH FR INSTALLATION, BETRIEB NOTICE D'INSTALLATION, D'UTILISATION ET
MANUTENZIONE RIDUTTORI SERIE 300 OPERATION, AND SERVICE MANUAL UND WARTUNG GETRIEBE SERIE 300 D'ENTRETIEN REDUCTEURS SERIE 300

4 - LUBRIFICAZIONE 4 - LUBRICATION 4 - SCHMIERUNG 4 - LUBRIFICATION

(prima della messa in (prior to start-up) (Von Inbetriebnahme) (avant la mise en route)
funzione)
La lubrificazione normale in Standard lubrication is oilbath. Die Schmierung erfolgt nor- La lubrification normale s'ef-
bagno dolio. A seconda Respect the specifications mal im lbad. fectue en bain d'huile.
dellapplicazione se in impian- given below for fixed and mo- Je nach Einsatz, d.h. Festan- Selon l'application, installation
to fisso o su macchina mobile bile machines: lage oder bewegliche Maschi- fixe ou quipement mobile, se
attenersi alle seguenti tabelle: ne, sollte man sich an folgen- reporter aux tableaux sui-
de Tabellen halten: vants:
1) Macchine mobili: oli a 1) Mobile machinery: 1) Bewegliche Maschinen: 1) Machines mobiles:
norme SAE 80 W/90 con SAE 80W/90 olis with l gem. Norm SAE 80 W/90 Huiles aux normes SAE VG
caratteristiche API GL5. API GL5 properties mit Eigenschaften API GL5 150 avec caractristiques
API GL5.
2) Impianti industriali: oli a 2) Industrial machinery: 2) Industrieanlagen: 2) Installations industrielles:
norme ISO VG 150 con ISO VG 150 oils with l gem. Norm ISO VG 150 Huiles aux normes ISO VG
caratteristiche E.P. E.P. properties mit Eigenschaften E.P. 150 avec caractristiques
E.P.
Nella tabella seguente sono The following table lists the In der nachfolgenden Tabelle Sur le tableau suivant on a re-
riportati le marche pi diffuse most common brands of lubri- sind die blichsten Schmier- port les marques les plus r-
di lubrificanti con i tipi di oli cant and the types recom- mittelmarken aufgefhrt, mit pandues de lubrifiants avec les
consigliati per applicazioni mended for normal applications. Angabe der empfohlenen l- types d'huile conseills pour
normali. sorten fr normalen Einsatz. des applications normales.

IMPIANTI INDUSTRIALI / INDUSTRIAL PLANTS INDUSTRIEANLAGEN / MACCHINE MOBILI / MOBILE MACHINES

INSTALLATIONS INDUSTRIELLES BEWEGLICHE MASCHINEN / MACHINES MOBILES
norme ISO .. con caratteristiche E.P. norme SAE .. con caratteristiche API GL5
ISO standard .. E.P. grade SAE standard .. API GL5 grade
ISO-Normen .. E.P.-Merkmalen SAE-Normen .. mit API GL5-Merkmalen
normes ISO .. avec caractristiques E.P. normes SAE .. avec caractristiques API GL5

Temperatura ambiente
Ambient temperature
Temperaturbereiche -10C / +30C +20C / +45C -10C / +30C +20C / +45C
Temprature ambiante

ISO VG 150 ISO VG 220 SAE 80W/90 SAE 85W/140

AGIP BLASIA 150 BLASIA 220 ROTRA MP ROTRA MP
BLASIA S150 BLASIA S 220
ARAL DEGOL BG 150 DEGOL BG 220 GETRIEBEOL HYP GETRIEBEOL HYP
BP - MACH ENERGOL GR XP 150 ENERGOL GR XP 220 HYPOGEAR EP HYPOGEAR EP
ERNESYN HTX 220
CASTROL ALPHA SP 150 ALPHA SP 220 HYPOY HYPOY
EDWN.L. GEAR COMPOUND UNIVERSAL GEAR UNIVERSAL GEAR
CHEVRON N.L. GEAR COMPOUND 220
150 LUBRICANTE LUBRICANTE
ELF REDUCTELF SP 150 REDUCTELF SP 220 TRANSELF8 TRANSELF8
ESSO SPARTAN EP 150 SPARTAN EP 220 GEAR OIL GX GEAR OIL GX
GLYCOLUBE 150 GLYCOLUBE 220 PONTONIC MP PONTONIC MP
FINA GIRAN 150 GIRAN 220
I.P. MELLANA 150 MELLANA 220 PONTIAX HD PONTIAX HD
PONTIAX HDS PONTIAX HDS
KLBER LAMORA 150 LAMORA 220
SYNTHESO D150 EP SYNTHESO D220 EP
MOBILGEAR 629 MOBILGEAR 630 MOBILUBE HD MOBILUBE HD
MOBIL
SHC 629 SHC 630
OMALA EP 150 OMALA EP 220 SPIRAX HD SPIRAX HD
SHELL TIVELA OIL WA-SA TIVELA OIL WB

TOTAL CARTER EP 150 CARTER EP 220 TRANSMISSION TM TRANSMISSION TM

Temperatura sulla carcassa, que- The temperature of the gear case, Gehusetemperatur, an der Wrms- La temprature sur la carcasse;
sta non deve superare nel punto which should not exceed 70-75Cat ten Stelle max. 70-75C. l'chauffement maximum de celle-ci
pi caldo i 70-75C the hottest point. ne devant pas dpasser les 70-75C.

Oli a base sintetica Synthetic oil Synthetische le Huiles base synthetique

LUBRIFICAZIONE FRENI BRAKES LUBRICATION BREMSE SCHMIERUNG FREINS LUBRIFICATION

I freni idraulici a dischi multipli The hydraulically operated Die hydraulischen Lamellen- Les freins hydrauliques dis-
hanno lubrificazione unica multidisc brakes are lubri- bremsen werden ber die ques multiples sont lubrifi
con il riduttore. cated by the same oil as the Schmierung des Unterset- avec la mme huile que les
gearbox. zungsgetriebes geschmiert. rducteurs.

29
 MANUALE DI INSTALLAZIONE USO E 300 SERIES GEARBOXES INSTALLATION, HANDBUCH FR INSTALLATION, BETRIEB NOTICE D'INSTALLATION, D'UTILISATION ET
MANUTENZIONE RIDUTTORI SERIE 300 OPERATION, AND SERVICE MANUAL UND WARTUNG GETRIEBE SERIE 300 D'ENTRETIEN REDUCTEURS SERIE 300

STADIO RIDUZIONE A VITE SENZA FINE (3/VF) / WORM REDUCTION MODULE (3/VF)
SCHNECKENBERSETZUNGSSTUFE (3/VF) / ETAGE DE REDUCTION A VIS SANS FIN (3/VF)
STADIO RIDUZIONE AD ASSI ORTOGONALI (3/A) / HELICAL BEVEL REDUCTION MODULE (3/A)
KEGELRADBERSETZUNGSSTUFE (3/A) / ETAGE DE REDUCTION A AXES ORTHOGONAUX (3/A)

0 C / +20 C +20 C / +40 C

Tipo di carico / Type of Load Olio minerale Olio sintetico Olio minerale Olio sintetico
Mineral oil Synthetic oil Mineral oil Synthetic oil
Art der Belastung / Type de charge Minerall Synthesel Minerall Synthesel
Huile minrale Huile synthtique Huile minrale Huile synthtique
ISO VG ISO VG ISO VG ISO VG
Carico leggero / Light load / Leicht / Charge lgre 150 150 220 220

Carico medio / Medium load / Normal / Charge moyenne 150 150 320 220

Carico pesante / Heavy load / Schwer / Charge lourde 220 220 460 320

Per applicazioni particolari For particular applications like:

Fr speziellle Einsatzbedin- Dans le cas d'applications parti-
come temperature particolar- high temperature running con-
gungen, wie sehr hohe Tem- culires avec des tempratures
mente elevate, requisiti di non ditions, noninflammable oil, etc.
peraturen, Notwendigkeit der leves...o la non inflammabi-
infiammabilit dellolio, ecc. contact Trasmital Technical
Verwendung von nicht ent- lit de l'huile est requise,...etc.,
interpellare lUfficio tecnico Departements.
flammbarem l, usw. setzen contacter le service technique
TRASMITAL. Sie sich bitte mit dem techni- TRASMITAL.
schen Bro von Trasmital in
Verbindung.
La temperatura massima Maximum operating oil tem- Die maximale ltemperatur La temprature maximum de
dellolio in esercizio conti- perature must never exceed darf im Dauerbetrieb 85C l'huile en fonctionnement
nuo non deve comunque 85 C. nicht berschreiten. continu ne doit de toute fa-
superare gli 85C. on pas dpasser 85C.

RIEMPIMENTO FILLING EINFLLEN REMPLISSAGE

I riduttori vengono forniti Gearboxes are supplied Die Getriebe werden ohne Les rducteurs sont livrs
senza olio lubrificante. without oil. Schmierl ausgeliefert. sans huile de lubrification.

Tutti i riduttori sono provvisti All gearboxes are equipped Alle Getriebe sind mit Fllstop- Tous les rducteurs sont
dei tappi di carico, livello, sfia- with filler, lever, breather, and fen, Fllstandanzeige, Entlf- quips de bouchons de rem-
to e scarico olio. drain plugs. To fill the gearbox tung und lablass ausgestattet. plissage, niveau, reniflard et
Per effettuare il riempimento secure it in its exact working Zum Einfllen des ls muss vidange d'huile.
olio occorre avere il riduttore position, unscrew the oil filler sich das Getriebe in der genau- Pour effectuer le remplissage
nella esatta posizione di fun- plug, and add oil until it is visi- en Betriebsposition befinden, d'huile il faut prsenter le
zionamento, svitare il tappo di ble in the level window. The dann den Nachfllstopfen lsen rducteur dans la position
carico olio e riempire fino al li- position of the window will ob- und bis zum korrekten Fllstand exacte de fonctionnement,
vello la cui posizione dipende viously depend on whether auffllen, der von der Einbaula- dvisser le bouchon de rem-
dal tipo di montaggio: orizzon- the unit is mounted horizon- ge abhngt: senkrecht oder plissage d'huile et remplir jus-
tale o verticale. tally or vertically. waagerecht. Zum Ablassen des qu'au niveau dpendant du
Per lo scarico svitare il tappo To drain, remove the mag- l den magnetischen Ablas- type de montage: horizontal
di scarico magnetico e lascia- netic drain plug and drain off stopfen entfernen und das l ou vertical.
re defluire lolio. oil. If possible, drain while the abfliessen lassen. Pour la vidange dvisser le
Per agevolare loperazione oil is hot and remove the filler Dieser Vorgang ist einfacher, bouchon magntique de vi-
sarebbe meglio che lolio fos- plug from the top of the gear- wenn das l noch warm ist und dange et laisser couler l'huile.
se ancora caldo e che si sia box to give optimum oil flow. bei abgeschraubtem Nachfll- Pour faciliter l'opration il est
smontato anche un tappo po- stopfen, damit die Luft besser prfrable que l'huile soit en-
sizionato in alto nel riduttore nachfliesst. core chaude et qu'un autre
per avere una circolazione di bouchon positionn en hau-
aria. teur soit t pour permettre
une circulation d'air.

NOTA: per i riduttori con freno, Note: In gearboxes with Anmerkung: Fr Getriebe mit NOTA: Pour les rducteurs
la lubrificazione del freno co- brakes, brake lubrication is Bremse, entspricht die Schmie- quips de frein, la lubrifica-
mune a quella del riduttore. provided by the gearbox lubri- rung der Bremse auf jeden Fall tion de ce dernier est com-
cant. der Getriebeschmierung. mune avec celle du rducteur.

30
MANUALE DI INSTALLAZIONE USO E 300 SERIES GEARBOXES INSTALLATION, HANDBUCH FR INSTALLATION, BETRIEB NOTICE D'INSTALLATION, D'UTILISATION ET
MANUTENZIONE RIDUTTORI SERIE 300 OPERATION, AND SERVICE MANUAL UND WARTUNG GETRIEBE SERIE 300 D'ENTRETIEN REDUCTEURS SERIE 300

5 - MESSA IN FUNZIONE 5 - START-UP 5 - INBETRIEBNAHME 5 - MISE EN ROUTE

Prima di avviare il riduttore Before starting the gearbox, Von Inbetriebnahme des Ge- Avant la mise en route, vri-
controllare: check the exact position of triebes folgendes kontrollie- fier:
- Esatto posizionamento tap- the oil plug and check that the ren: - La position exacte des
pi olio. breather is not blocked by dirt - Korrekte Position des l- bouchons.
or paint. stopfens.
- Tappo sfiato che non sia - Que le bouchon reniflard ne
ostruito da sporcizia o verni- If the breather is blocked, - Entlftungsstopfen darf nicht soit pas obstru par des im-
ce. La sua chiusura provoca pressure can build up inside von Schmutz oder Lack ver- purits ou de la peinture.
sovrapressione allinterno del the gearbox and blow out the stopft sein.Ist er geschlos- Son obstruction provoque
riduttore con conseguente seal rings. sen, dann fhrt dies zu une surpression l'intrieur
espulsione degli anelli di te- If possible, start up the gear- berdruck im Getriebe und du rducteur avec pour
nuta. box without load and at low die Dichtringe lsen sich. consquence l'extrusion
- Avviare il riduttore possibil- speed. - Das Getriebe mglichstoh- des bagues d'tancht.
mente senza carico e quando Check that the gearbox runs ne Last und, falls mglich, - Procder au dmarrage du
possibile a bassa velocit. smoothly and does not gener- mitgeringer Geschwindig- rducteur si possible vide
- Verificare che il funziona- ate excessive noise; keitanfahren. et ventuellement basse
mento sia regolare ed in After the first few hours oper- - Kontrollieren, ob der Be- vitesse.
assenza di eccessiva rumo- ation, check the temperature trieb gleichmssig und - Vrifier que le fonctionne-
rosit. of the gearbox casing. ohne Strgerusche erfolgt. ment est normal et sans-
Dopo le prime ore di esercizio At its hottest point it should Nach den ersten Betriebs- bruit excessif.
verificare: not exceed 70-75C. stunden: Aprs les premires heures
- Temperatura sulla carcassa, Also check that all bolts are - Temperatur am Gehuse- de fonctionnement, vrifier:
questa non deve superare tight. prfen: sie darf an der heis- - La temprature sur le car-
nel punto pi caldo i sesten Stelle 70-75C nicht ter - celle-ci ne doit pas d-
70-75C. berschreiten. passer au point le plus
- Esatto serraggio viti. - Prfen ob alle Schrauben chaud 70-75C.
gut angezogen sind. - Le bon serrage des vis.

37
 MANUALE DI INSTALLAZIONE USO E 300 SERIES GEARBOXES INSTALLATION, HANDBUCH FR INSTALLATION, BETRIEB NOTICE D'INSTALLATION, D'UTILISATION ET
MANUTENZIONE RIDUTTORI SERIE 300 OPERATION, AND SERVICE MANUAL UND WARTUNG GETRIEBE SERIE 300 D'ENTRETIEN REDUCTEURS SERIE 300

6 - MANUTENZIONE 6 - MAINTENANCE 6 - WARTUNG 6 - ENTRETIEN

In condizioni di normale eser- Gearboxes are virtually main- Unter normalen Betriebsbe- Dans les conditions normales
cizio il riduttore non necessita tenance free under normal dingungen berdaf das Getrie- d'utilisation le rducteur ne n-
di manutenzione. operating conditions. The only be keiner Wartung. Nur der cessite pas d'entretien. Seul
Sono solo da effettuare le periodic operations required lstand sollte regelmssig sont effectuer les contrles
normali verifiche di livello e are checks on oil level and oil geprft und das l muss ge- habituels de niveau et la vi-
cambio olio come segue: changes as follows: wechselt werden: dange de l'huile comme suit:
Cambio olio Oil Changes lwechsel Vidange d'huile
Effettuare il primo cambio olio Change the oil first after Den ersten lwechsel nach Effectuer la premire vidange
circa dopo 100150 ore di la- 100-150 hours operation. ca. 100-150 Betriebsstunden aprs 100/150 heurs de tra-
voro. Subsequently, change the oil vornehmen, dann alle 2000 vail environ.
Successivamente effettuare il only every 2000-3000 hours bis 300 Betriebsstunden je Puis successivement toutes
cambio ogni 20003000 ore a operation depending on appli- nach Einsatz, oder minde- les 2000-3000 heurs selon le
seconda degli impieghi o al- cation. Alternatively change stens einmal im Jahr. Es type d'utilisation ou au mini-
meno una volta allanno. oil once a year. empfiehlt sich, die lstand mum une fois l'an.
buona norma comunque Check the oil level in the einmal im Monat zu kontrollie- Il est toutefois conseill de
controllare il livello una volta gearbox every month and top ren und, falls ntig, nachfl- contrler le niveau une fois
al mese per funzionamento up as necessary. len. par mois et faire l'appoint
intermittente, pi frequente- d'huile si ncessaire.
mente per funzionamento in
continuo e aggiungere olio se
necessario.
Nota: sempre opportuno Note: We recommend that Anmerkung: Es ist stets Remarque: Il est toujours op-
procedere al cambio degli you also change the oil seals empfehlenswert, die Dichtrin- portun de procder au chan-
anelli di tenuta, quando: on the following occasions: ge auszutauschen, wenn: gement des joints
- lanello di tenuta viene - whenever the seal rings are - der Dichtring ausgebaut d'tanchit, lorsque:
smontato; removed; wird - Le joint a t dmont.
- quando si fa una revisione - whenever the gearbox is - wenn das Getriebe berholt - On procde une rvision
del riduttore; serviced/reconditioned; wird du rducteur.
- riposizionare lanello di tenu- - at least once a year with - bei Antrieb mit Elektromotor Replacer le nouveau joint de
ta in modo che il labbro di electric motor drives. mindestens einmal jhrlich. faon que les bords ne travail-
tenuta del nuovo anello non When fitting new seals, avoid Den Dichtring so einsetzen, lent pas sur la mme piste de
lavori sulla stessa pista di locating the lip of the new seal da die Dichtlippe des neuen glissement que le joint prc-
scorrimento dellanello pre- in exactly the same place as Rings nicht an der gleichen dent.
cedente. that of the old seal. Stelle ansetzt, wie jene des
alten Rings.
Nota: se il riduttore dovesse Note: Fill a gearbox com- Anmerkung: Sollte das Ge- Remarque: Si par ncessit
rimanere fermo per lunghi pe- pletely with oil before any long triebe ber lngere Zeitrume le reducteur devait rester ar-
riodi si consiglia di riempirlo idle period. Drain to the nor- stehen, dann wird empfohlen, rt pour de longues prio-
completamente di olio che mal level prior to re-starting es vollstnding mit l zu fl- des, il est conseill de remplir
sar riportato al giusto livello operation. len und den korrekten Fll- compltement d'huile.
quando questo verr rimesso stand erst bei erneuter La mise niveau sera ef-
in esercizio. Inbetriebnahme wiederherzu- fectue lors de la remise en
stellen. route du rducteur.

38
 1000 Worldwide Boulevard Hebron, KY 41048-8632
859-334-3333 Fax: 859-334-8888 www.bonfiglioliusa.com
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

PARTS LIST

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3625 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 Weight Qty Qty
Item Part Number Dwg Electrical Line
No. Drawing Number Rev Description of Parts Location
Material Per Per Per
Rev
Order Assy Order
DRIVE FABRICATION/ASSEMBLY NOTES 0
0
D357S002-21261A C CAGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY - ELEVATION B
D357S003-21261A B CAGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY - PLAN A
0
TOTAL DRIVE WEIGHT = 35,897 LBS A
0
REFERENCE DRAWINGS: 0
0
TAG21261A 0 NAME TAG 1 1 0
A60B-001A E FABRICATION AREA CLEANING REQUIREMENTS - "D" 0
DRV103 E DRIVE ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES 0
DRV105 B SEALANT/ADHESIVE SPECIFICATION 0
P24Z-024A-DRVSTD A WESTECH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - DRIVES 0
ASMDIAG21261A A ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM 1 1 A
LUBETAG21261A 0 EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION TAG 1 1 0
MS-0303A 0 DRIVE ROTATION DIRECTION STICKER 1 1 0
MS-0305A 0 STORAGE PROCEDURE STICKER 1 1 0
MS-0312A 0 KEEP HANDS CLEAR STICKER 4 4 0
MS-0313A 0 KEEP HANDS AWAY FROM GEARS STICKER 1 1 0
MS-0314A 0 MOVING PARTS BELOW DECK STICKER 1 1 0
MS-0384A 0 LUBRICATION & INSPECTION TAG 1 1 0
0
RAKE DRIVE - 15 HP, RAKE SPEED: .06 RPM 0
0
0
3,660,660 NM (2,700,000 FT-LBS) FULL DIAL TORQUE 100% 0
3,660,660,NM (2,700,000 FT-LBS) DUTY RATED TORQUE 100% 0
3,294,594 NM (2,430,000 FT-LBS) CUTOUT TORQUE 90% 0
1,830,330 NM (1,350,000 FT-LBS) HIGH ALARM TORQUE 50% 0
1,464,264 NM (1,080,000 FT-LBS) ALARM TORQUE 40% 0
0
0
0
SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING: 0
DRIVE STANDARD PER THE COATING SUBMITTAL DATA SHEET 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ASSEMBLY FASTENER MATERIAL: ASTM A449 ZINC PLATED STEEL 0
HARDENED FLAT WASHERS TO BE F436 OR A325 ZP STL 0
0
SOCIEDAD MINERA 0
EL BROCAL, SAA 0
SAND ISIDRO - LIMA, PERU 0
(1) 40M DIA. CLARIFIER DRIVE UNIT 0
04/25/11 MR MPW BKH Assembly Description Total Weight this Page/ lbs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
CAGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

EQUIPMENT PARTS LIST 8057 100"

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21355 21261A 0 C
QF-00-051 Printed by- MGIOMETTA Printed on- August 4, 2011 11:08 AM 12/19/03
 Weight Qty Qty
Item Part Number Dwg Electrical Line
No. Drawing Number Rev Description of Parts Location
Material Per Per Per
Rev
Order Assy Order
101 TORQUE CONTROL DEVICE (W/SCALE) SS 20 1 1 0
TORQUE CONTROL DEVICE ( NO SCALE) (NO ITEM 108) SS 60 3 3 0
LOAD CELL 1000 4 4 0
0
103 SECONDARY SPEED REDUCER CI/STL 5,948 4 4 A
119-060A 0 REDUCER SHAFT MODIFICATION 4 4 0
105 GEAR MOTOR CI/STL 1,320 4 4 0
0
108 312-447D 0 REDUCER SPACER ADAPTER STL 1,024 4 4 0
109 109-318B B BEARING HOUSING ADAPTER STL 336 4 4 0
110 900-580B03 0 GUARD SS 12 4 4 0
111 111-356B 0 TORQUE ARM STL 72 4 4 0
112 312-156C05 0 UPPER BEARING HOUSING (CASTING) STL 168 4 4 0
312-181C 0 UPPER BEARING HOUSING (MACHINING & ASSEMBLY) STL 4 4 0
113 RR-0002A 0 RETAINING RING, 3 3/4" EXT STL 4 4 0
114 MS-0194A 0 LOWER SHAFT SEAL, BRG HSG NBR/STL 4 4 4 0
115 MS-0289A 0 UPPER SHAFT SEAL, BRG HSG NBR/STL 4 4 4 0
116 BR-0053A 0 BALL BEARING, DEEP GROOVE STL 48 8 8 0
117 0 RETAINING RING (2 15/16" EXT) STL 4 4 0
118 UPPER BEARING LUBE LINE (112 TO 412) BRS/CU 4 4 0
119 GREASE FITTING 1/4" NPT STL 4 4 0
120 120-210C 0 REDUCER SHAFT ADAPTER STL 136 4 4 0
121 121-045C A UPPER BEARING SHAFT STL 128 4 4 0
122 122S005C 0 PINION SHAFT ALLOY STL 3,708 4 4 A
0
124 PINION BEARING ALLOY STL 44 4 4 0
0
126 MS-0154A 0 PRESSURE RELIEF FITTING STL 4 4 A
127 RR-0018A 0 RETAINING RING 5 3/4" INT STL 4 4 0
128 KEY 14mm x 9mm x 110mm (UPPER BEARING SHAFT) STL 4 4 0
0
130 CAPSCREW HEX HD M16x2 x 90mm W/LW (109 TO 103) ZP STL 16 16 0
131 CAPSCREW SOCKET HD 3/4 x 1 1/2 W/LW (120 TO 105) ZP STL 4 4 0
0
133 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8 x 1 1/2 W/LW (120 TO 121) ZP STL 32 32 0
134 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1/4 x 1 W/LW (110 TO 411) ZP STL 8 8 0
0
A
0
138 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8 x 2 W/LW (411, 112 TO 109) ZP STL 32 32 0
0
140 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/4 x 2 W/LW (103 TO 108) ZP STL 120 120 0
141 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8 x 2 1/2 W/N,LW (105 TO 111) ZP STL 16 16 0
142 CAPSCREW SOCKET HD 7/8 x 2 W/LW (122 TO 103) ZP STL 4 4 0
0
144 HEX NUT 7/8 W/LW (108 TO 410) ZP STL 20 20 0
145 CAPSCREW HEX HD 7/8 x 3 1/2" W/N,LW (108 TO 408) ZP STL 28 28 0
146 312-447D-E 0 ADAPTER SPACER ACCESS COVER STL 4 4 0
147 312-447D-D 0 ADAPTER SPACER ACCESS GASKET NEOP 4 4 0
148 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/8 x 1 W/LW ZP STL 32 32 0
04/25/11 MR MPW BKH Assembly Description Total Weight 13032 this Page/ lbs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
CAGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

EQUIPMENT PARTS LIST 8057 100"

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21355 21261A 1 B
QF-00-051 Printed by- MGIOMETTA Printed on- August 4, 2011 11:08 AM 12/19/03
 Weight Qty Qty
Item Part Number Dwg Electrical Line
No. Drawing Number Rev Description of Parts Location
Material Per Per Per
Rev
Order Assy Order
0
0
403 403S001C05 A GEAR/BEARING, 100", INTERNAL, 5,750 1 1 0
0
0
406 406S001D C GEAR HUB STL 9,265 1 1 A
0
408 408S004D 0 GEAR HOUSING STL 6,433 1 1 0
0
410 410S004D 0 HOUSING COVER STL 783 1 1 0
411 312-157C05 A TORQUE BOX ADAPTER SPACER STL 216 4 4 0
312-033B05 0 TORQUE BOX ADAPTER SPACER BURNOUT 4 4 0
412 412-308C 0 TORQUE CONTROL ADAPTER STL 364 4 4 0
0
0
415 MS-0066A 0 O-RING NEOP 29 29 0
416 MS-0382A 0 SEAL STRIP NEOP 29 29 0
0
418 LUBE LINE (403 TO 408 & 412) BRS/CU 4 4 0
419 GREASE FITTING 1/4" NPT STL 4 4 0
420 BANDING 304SS 29 29 0
BUCKLE 304SS 1 1 0
0
0
424 CAPSCREW HEX HD 7/8" x 5 1/2" (403 TO 408) STL 36 36 0
0
426 445-320B-A 0 INSPECTION PORT COVER STL 2 1 1 A
428 445-320B-B 0 INSPECTION PORT COVER GASKET NEOP 1 1 A
0
0
431 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8 x 2" W/N,LW (410 TO 408) STL 16 16 0
0
0
0
435 CAPSCREW HEX HD 7/8 x 6" W/HDND FW (406 TO 403) STL 72 72 0
436 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1/2 x 1 1/2 W/N,LW (412 TO 411) STL 32 32 0
0
0
440 HEX NUT 3/8" W/LW (449 & 450 TO 410) STL 2 2 0
441 PIPE PLUG 1 1/2 NPT STL 1 1 0
442 442-054B 0 OIL FILL PIPE STL 8 1 1 0
443 CONDENSATE/OIL DRAIN PIPING (FULL CPLG WITH 1 1/2 NPT X 10 NIPP STL 4 1 1 0
PIPE FULL COUPLING 1 1/2 NPT STL 2 2 0
444 444-055B 0 OIL FILL CAP W/DIPSTICK 1 1/2" NPT STL 1 1 1 0
445 VA-0008A 0 CONDENSATE/OIL DRAIN VALVE BRZ 1 1 1 0
446 445-267B-A 0 PINION INSPECTION PORT COVER STL 32 4 4 0
447 445-267B-B 0 PINION INSPECTION PORT GASKET NEOP 4 4 0
448 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/8 x 1" W/LW (446 & 447 TO 408) STL 34 34 A
449 445-319B-A 0 INSPECTION PORT COVER STL 6 1 1 A
450 445-319B-B 0 INSPECTION PORT GASKET NEOP 1 1 A
04/25/11 MR MPW BKH Assembly Description Total Weight 22865 this Page/ lbs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
CAGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

EQUIPMENT PARTS LIST 8057 100"

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21355 21261A 2 B
QF-00-051 Printed by- MGIOMETTA Printed on- August 4, 2011 11:08 AM 12/19/03
 Weight Qty Qty
Item Part Number Dwg Electrical Line
No. Drawing Number Rev Description of Parts Location
Material Per Per Per
Rev
Order Assy Order
***** SPARE PARTS ***** 0
**PRE COMMISSIONING, COMMISSIONING, AND START UP** 0
0
0
915 MS-0066A B O-RING SEAL NEOP 29 29 0
0
916 MS-0382A 0 SEAL STRIP NEOP 29 29 0
0
0
**ONE YEAR OPERATION** 0
0
0
9124 PINION BEARING ALLOY STL 4 4 0
0
9147 312-447D-D 0 ADAPTER SPACER ACCESS PORT GASKET NEOP 4 4 0
0
9415 MS-0066A B O-RING SEAL NEOP 29 29 0
0
9416 MS-0382A 0 SEAL STRIP NEOP 29 29 0
0
9447 445-267B-B 0 PINION INSPECTION PORT GASKET NEOP 4 4 0
0
9450 445-272B07-B A INSPECTION PORT GASKET NEOP 1 1 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
04/25/11 MR MPW BKH Assembly Description Total Weight this Page/ lbs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
CAGE DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

EQUIPMENT PARTS LIST 8057 100"

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21355 21261A 3 0
QF-00-051 Printed by- MGIOMETTA Printed on- August 4, 2011 11:08 AM 12/19/03
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

INSTRUCCIONES
DE INSTALACIN

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 SECUENCIA DE INSTALACIN SUGERIDA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

SECUENCIA DE INSTALACIN SUGERIDA

Diseo de Referencia: Consulte el Diseo de Disposicin General e Instalacin

General en la Seccin de Anexos.

La secuencia listada a continuacin es solamente sugerida y no debe tomar

precedencia ante la experiencia del montador. En todos los casos el montador
debe usar las mejores prcticas para la construccin. Detalles de estas
secuencia son listadas en las siguientes pginas:

1. Instalar la Columna Central y Colocar el Tubo de Torque

2. Procedimiento de aplicacin de la lechada Sugerido
3. Instalar el Tanque Canal de Ancla
4. Instalar los Puntos de Referencia
5. Instalar la Unidad de Accionamiento
6. Instalar el Tubo de Torque
7. Instalar el Puente, Plataforma, Pasamano y Entramado
8. Instalar Pozo de Alimentacin y Tubo de Alimentacin
9. Verificacin Final de la Nivelacin
10.Instalar Brazos Raspadores
11.Instalar Piquetes, Soportes de los Piquetes y Raspador del Cono de
Descarga
12.Instalar tems Elctricos
13.tems Miscelneos

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 LOCALIZACIN DE LA COLUMNA CENTRAL
Y EL TUBO DE TORQUE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

COLUMNA CENTRAL

Trabaja estas instrucciones junto con los planes 1110, 1114 & 1115.

NOTA: Se recomienda que la columna central sea instalada sobre las

fundaciones antes del tiempo de instalacin del tanque.

1. Inspeccione la columna para certificarse de que no ocurrieron daos

durante el despacho. Realice la alineacin de la columna con la lnea
central de la pasarela utilizando el corte en V sobre la brida de fondo de
la columna central.

2. Baje la columna central sobre los pernos de anclaje previamente

instalados. Use tornillos de elevacin con fundas para nivelar y sondear.
Asegrese de que la columna esta nivelada en las dos direcciones (a 90
grados).

3. Apriete ligeramente las tuercas superiores de los pernos de anclaje. Las

tuercas pueden ser apretadas despus que la aplicacin de la lechada es
finalizada y la misma se ha endurecida. Nota: Remueva los tornillos
elevados despus de la lechada haberse endurecida. Por favor consulte
el procedimiento sugerido para la aplicacin de la lechada de GES Tech
Group.

LOCALIZACIN DEL TUBO DE TORQUE

1. Despus de la instalacin y nivelacin de la columna central, eleve el

tubo de torque y localcelo sobre la columna central. Dejar el tubo de
torque en condicin de bloqueo temporal sobre el piso del tanque, el
cual est al mismo nivel de altura de las lminas raspadoras mas
internas.

2. Proceder con la instalacin de la unidad de accionamiento.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO SUGERIDO PARA
LA APLICACIN DE LA LECHADA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

PROCEDIMIENTO SUGERIDO PARA LA APLICACIN DEL GROUT

El siguiente procedimiento de aplicacin de la lechada de GES TECH GROUP se

recomienda ser seguida para la aplicacin del material de la columna central.

INTRODUCCIN

Las plataformas instaladas sobre bases con aplicacin de lechada son

requeridos generalmente cuando el equipo soportado genera vibracin
mecnica debido a fuerzas no balanceadas o mecanismos de pulsacin de gas.
Estas fuerzas mecnicas son producidas por masas en rotacin o reciprocantes
que no son completamente balanceadas por pesos contadores especiales y
pueden tambin ser generadas por pulsaciones de gases.

En general, equipos reciprocantes, tales como motores y compresores

producen fuerzas y momentos significantemente desbalanceados que pueden
tener un impacto adverso sobre el equipo. En orden para resistir estas fuerzas
no balanceadas, se soporta el equipo sobre una base inerte. La conexin entre
la plataforma de fijacin del equipo y esta base inerte consiste de una base de
lechada. Igualmente, columnas estructurales de carga pesada no deben ser
soportadas sobre pernos de nivelacin sino sobre una capa adicional de
lechada. En ambos casos, la capa de lechada debe ser aplicada de una manera
especfica con la finalidad de producir una conexin slida.

Las plataformas de fijacin del equipo deben ser soportados por

tornillos de elevacin, u otro mtodo aprobado, durante el curado de la
lechada. Despus del proceso de curado, los tornillos son removidos y
los pernos de anclaje son ajustados para la especificacin de torque
final. En la configuracin final, la aplicacin de lechada soporta el peso
de la plataforma del equipo y cualquier fuerza de sujecin generada
por los pernos de anclaje.

Bajo ninguna circunstancia algn soporte de apoyo, tales como

paquetes de cua, se deben mantener sellando la capa de lechada
curada cuando los pernos de anclaje son apretados.

Este procedimiento se describe en las secciones siguientes, incluyendo cinco

diagramas detallados.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO SUGERIDO PARA
LA APLICACIN DE LA LECHADA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Material Lechada

La lechada baja de la plataforma de fijacin del equipo tiene la intencin de

actuar como un adaptador entre la superficie rugosa del bloque inerte de la
fundacin y la superficie de acero irregular de la plataforma. El objetivo es
crear una unidad monoltica consistente del sistema de fundacin de la
plataforma y la base inerte. Cuando esta unidad monoltica es fabricada
apropiadamente, la maquina exhibir la ms alta frecuencia natural,
mantendr el alineamiento y la nivelacin, y experimentar los menores costos
de mantenimiento del ciclo de vida.

Los procedimientos de aplicacin de la lechada tienen el propsito de crear

soporte uniforme y 100% libre de fallas bajo los componentes de la
plataforma. Los tornillos de engate son usados para nivelar la plataforma de la
maquina y llevar el peso completo de la maquina durante la aplicacin y cura
de la lechada. Despus de la cura de la lechada, los tornillos de elevacin son
removidos y los pernos de anclaje son apretados al torque especificado. En
este punto, la capa de lechada lleva el peso completo de la maquina y el total
combinado de todas las tensiones aplicadas por los pernos de anclaje.

Bajo ninguna circunstancia deben ser dejados paquetes de cuas,

tornillos de engate, u otro soporte firme dentro de la capa de lechada
despus de la cura.

La capa de lechada debe ser aproximadamente de 1,0 a 1,5 (25 a 36 mm) de

espesor con la finalidad de soportar apropiadamente las tensiones compresivas
relacionadas con este tipo de maquinas.

Existen lechadas no metlicos y no contraibles conforme se citan a

continuacin:

Lechadas Epxicos:

Estos son los mejores productos para aplicaciones crticas, fuerzas

desbalanceadas pesadas tales como compresores, o cuando existen
deficiencias posibles en las fundaciones. Este tipo de lechada soportar
realmente el esfuerzo de la tensin y actuar como un adhesivo entre la
plataforma y el bloque inerte. Estas lechadas son particularmente efectivos en
problemas de correccin con pernos de anclaje subdimensionados o
insuficientes o cuando el bloque inerte es muy pequeo.

Chalkfast Red, Philadelphia Resins,

Msterflow 648 CP Plus

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO SUGERIDO PARA
LA APLICACIN DE LA LECHADA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Otras Lechadas Aceptables: Estas lechadas son aceptables bajo la mayora de

condiciones normales. Estas lechadas no soportan fuerzas de tensin y por lo
tanto, dependern del diseo de los pernos de anclaje, disposicin e
instalacin.

Set-Grout: Mster Builders,

Sonogrout: Someborn-Rexnord,
Euco-NS: Eclic Chemical Co.
Stupreme: Giffford-Hill/American Admixtures,
Crystex: L&M Construction Chemical Co.,
Sure-Grip CGrout: Dayton Superior Corp.
Hurngrout: A.C. Horn Inc,
Five Star Grout: U.S. Grout Corp,

La lechada ser aplicado desde un extremo de las vigas a la otra en una

manera continua. Las fallas pueden ser evitadas al asegurar que la lechada
fluye debajo de las vigas de la plataforma y que hay un cabezal de presin de
5/16 (7 mm) sobre el exterior, aproximadamente la mitad superior de la
espesura de la brida de fondo de la viga. La vibracin no debe ser usada una
vez que esta resultar generalmente en fallas entre la superficie de la brida y
la capa de lechada.

Procedimiento

Nivelacin del Skid del Equipo

1. La superficie expuesta de la fundacin debe ser preparada para la

aplicacin de la lechada. Se debe tambin limpiar y preferiblemente
vaciar con un limpiador al vaco. Cualquier aceite impregnado en el

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO SUGERIDO PARA
LA APLICACIN DE LA LECHADA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

concreto debe ser removido y reubicado.

2. La porcin de los tornillos de elevacin y los pernos de anclaje debajo de

la brida de la plataforma inferior se debe recubrir con un antiadherente,
tal y como grasa comn.

3. Transferir el soporte del peso de la plataforma a los tornillos de

elevacin mediante la aplicacin del torque cuidadosamente y
uniformemente todos los tornillos. Nivele con precisin la plataforma,
utilizando los tornillos de elevacin, a las especificaciones del fabricante
(si es aplicable).

4. La Plataforma debe ahora ser uniformemente soportado sobre

los tornillos de elevacin a la elevacin apropiada con un espacio
de claridad por debajo las bridas de fondo del skid igual
aproximadamente 1 a 1,5 (25 a 35 mm).

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO SUGERIDO PARA
LA APLICACIN DE LA LECHADA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Figura 3: La lechada es aplicado en el espacio debajo de las bridas del skid

1. La lechada se prepara preferiblemente mediante medios mecnicos, en

una cantidad suficiente para que el proceso de aplicacin pueda
proceder sin interrupcin. La lechada se aplica desde un extremo de la
plataforma al otro con rodillos y alambres usados para asegurar que la
lechada esta fluyendo dentro y bajo de las bridas de fondo y alrededor
de los pernos de anclaje y los tornillos de elevacin. El antiadherente
evitar que la lechada forme adherencia con las secciones expuestas con
los pernos, consecuentemente permitiendo la extensin de los pernos en
los pernos de anclaje y la remocin de los tornillos de elevacin.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO SUGERIDO PARA
LA APLICACIN DE LA LECHADA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

2. Durante el proceso de aplicacin de la lechada, el peso completo de la

plataforma est reposando sobre los tornillos de elevacin. Es
sumamente importante que el soporte de los tornillos de elevacin sea
uniforme y no deformar la plataforma bajo ninguna circunstancia.

3. El curado de lechada cementosos requerir 72 horas en ambientes

calientes y hmedos. Se recomienda que las lechadas cementosas sean
cubiertos con material plstico para mantener una cura de baja
humedad.

4. Las lechadas epxicas tendrn un tiempo de cura que depender del

producto y la temperatura.

5. Para ambos tipos, lechadas cementosas y epxicas, se deben seguir las

recomendaciones del fabricante para preparacin, aplicacin y cura.

Figura 4: Remocin de los Tornillos de Elevacin

1. Despus del tiempo recomendado de cura, los tornillos de elevacin son

retirados y los orificios son rellenos con Silicn sellante para prevenir la
penetracin de humedad a la superficie de concreto inferior. Las formas
son removidas desde el exterior.

2. En este punto, el peso completo de la plataforma est reposando

uniformemente sobre la capa de lechada.

Nota: Ningn punto de apoyo, tales como conjunto de calce, tornillos de

elevacin o cuas, puede mantenerse en la capa de grout en este

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO SUGERIDO PARA
LA APLICACIN DE LA LECHADA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

momento.

3. El chafln observado en la figura 4, se puede obtener mediante la

instalacin de un listn de chafln sobre la forma externa a la elevacin
apropiada.

Figura 5: Finalizacin de la instalacin

1. Despus del tiempo de cura especificado, los pernos de anclaje son

apretados al torque especificado y de la manera especificada.

2. Es importante enfatizar que en este punto del procedimiento, el peso

completo de la plataforma y la fuerza de tensin total de los pernos de
anclaje es transmitida a travs de la capa de lechada. Ningn punto de
apoyo que transmita cargas concentradas, tales como cuas, conjunto
de calce, tornillos de elevacin, agregados grandes, etc., debe ser
incrustado en la capa de lechada.

3. La figura 5 muestra que los pernos de anclaje estn dentro de las fundas
que le permite al perno de anclaje se extender, creando la fuerza de
sujecin necesaria. La porcin inferior del perno est asegurada
profundamente dentro del bloque inerte. La especificacin de diseo del
perno de anclaje est ms all del alcance de este procedimiento pero
se desea enfatizar que las fundas, como son mostradas arriba, son
altamente recomendadas.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO SUGERIDO PARA
LA APLICACIN DE LA LECHADA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Procedimiento de Ensayos

La calidad de la lechada puede ser evaluada despus que los pernos de anclaje
hayan sido instalados al valor de torque especificado. Usando un martillo, la
brida de fondo de la plataforma debe ser golpeada fuertemente cada 10 cm.
(6). Este deber sonar como golpear un bloque principal slido. Si existe
alguna falla bajo el punto de impacto, esto deber producir un sonido de
campana. Este proceso se conoce como sonido de la plataforma.

Una prueba ms precisa, que involucra equipos de ensayos de vibracin, podr

ser realizado si el cliente posee un analizador de vibracin Channel FFT. Un
acelermetro es ubicado sobre el bloque de la fundacin y el otro sobre la
brida de fondo de la plataforma. Luego la amplitud de las seales pueden ser
comparadas y la efectividad de la lechada evaluada. El mtodo del analizador
FFT tiene la ventaja de identificar rpidamente la fuente de cualquier problema
de vibracin.

Procedimiento de Reparacin

Si fallas serie son ubicadas bajo la brida base de la plataforma, ests podrn
ser reparadas por la inyeccin de lechada epxica mediante graseras. La
extensin de la falla se determina a partir de los golpes del martillo. Dos
orificios son taladrados dentro de la falla, uno en cada extremo. La lechada
epxica es colocado dentro de la pistola de grasa y la falla es rellena hasta que
la lechada salga por el otro orificio. El segundo orificio es necesario para evitar
la elevacin de la plataforma como resultado de la presin hidrulica. Se
recomienda que la lechada sea inyectado lentamente para evitar la formacin
de presin interna. Cuando la lechada sale por el segundo orificio, el proceso
de inyeccin se detiene y se espera por al menos un tiempo de curado de 72
horas. Tanto la conexin de llenado como el orificio de alivio debern ser
aplanados.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO SUGERIDO PARA
LA APLICACIN DE LA LECHADA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

INSTALACIN DEL TANQUE DE CANAL ANCLA

Antes del inicio de la instalacin se recomienda la revisin completa y el

entendimiento de los diseos y lista de piezas.

El procedimiento siguiente de instalacin es solamente una gua sugerida, y no

tiene la intencin de contener todas los detalles incluidos o reemplazar el
conocimiento y experiencia de un montador de tanque competente.

1. El contratista de las fundaciones instalar la canal ancla en la fundacin de

concreto. La canal ancla ser plano y nivelado dentro de una variacin total de
1/8 pulgadas.

2. Levantar e instalar las planchas del primer anillo del casco. No soldar al
canal ancla.

3. Soldar con costura vertical sobre las planchas del primer anillo del casco.

4. Levantar e instalar las planchas del segundo anillo del casco.

5. Soldar con costura vertical las chapas del segundo anillo del caso.

6. Soldar con costura de circunferencia entre las chapas del primer y segundo
anillo del casco.

7. Repita los pasos del tem 4 al tem 6 para los anillos 3, 4 y 5.

8. Instalar y soldar el canal del flujo de sobra y la caja de descarga al casco.

9. Instalar y soldar el perfil angular superior del casco. El retraso entre el perfil
angular y el casco puede ser variado para mantener el nivel.

10. Soldar con costura de ngulo el primer anillo del casco y el canal de ancla.

11. Instalar y soldar boquillas y bocas de visita en el tanque.

12. Cerrar temporalmente todas las aberturas de efluente y afluente dentro del
tanque y realice el ensayo de estanqueidad mediante el llenado inmediato
despus que todas las soldaduras hayan sido finalizadas. Examine
cuidadosamente para la deteccin de fugas y realice los reparos necesarios.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 INSTALACIN DEL TANQUE CANAL DE ANCLA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

NOTA: El Sello del Canal de Ancla se necesitar instalar en tiempo apropiados

para permitir el proceso de curado antes de la prueba hidrosttica. El Sello
del Canal de Ancla ser suministrado e instalado por terceros.

La contratista debe usar herramientas de instalacin y ajustes estndares de la

industria de montaje de tanques. Esto incluye pero no esta limitado al uso de
tuercas sin rosca, las placas de retencin y punciones del montaje.
Procedimientos de correccin de soldadura y ereccin deben ser usados para
minimizar la contraccin, uso de bandas y levantamiento perpendicular. La
redondez y verticalidad del tanque debern regirse por los estndares API 650
y debe ser de responsabilidad de la contratista.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 MARCAS DE REFERENCIA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MARCAS DE REFERENCIA

Use un lser de nivelacin de tipo giratorio, horizontal, de auto nivelacin o un

topgrafo para colocar marcas de referencia en la pared del tanque en 4
lugares, separadas en 90 (consulte la figura de marca de referencia). Las
marcas deben ser localizadas a 45 grados de la lnea central de la pasarela.
Posicione las marcas a aproximadamente 60,96 centmetros arriba del piso.
Todas estas marcas deben estar en la misma elevacin. Ellas sern usadas
ms tarde para nivelar la unidad de accionamiento del espesador.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 INSTALACIN DE LA UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

CONSULTE INSTALACIN DE LA UNIDAD DE

ACCIONAMIENTO EN LA SECCIN DE LA UNIDAD DE
ACCCIONAMIENTO DEL ESPESADOR

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PUENTE, PLATAFORMA,
PASAMANO Y ENTRAMADO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

INSTALACIN DEL TUBO DE TORQUE

Trabaje estas instrucciones con los planes 1114 y 1115

1. Despus de la instalacin de la unidad de accionamiento, suba el tubo

de torque y acople el mismo a las conexiones de la unidad usando
pernos de ajuste vertical.

2. Remueva el bloqueo. Verifique nuevamente la claridad entre el tubo de

torque y la columna central. Ajuste el tubo de torque para
concentricidad uniforme en relacin a la columna conforme requerido.

3. Cuando se finalicen todos los ajustes, apriete completamente los pernos

de conexin en el tope del tubo de torque. Verifique nuevamente la
claridad despus de todos los elementos de fijacin hayan sido
completamente apretados. Un ajuste ligero adicional podr ser
requerido.

NOTA: Puede ser necesario realizar ajustes verticales sobre el tubo de torque
despus que los brazos raspadores sean instalados. Esto puede ser hecho
mediante la localizacin de gatos mecnicos bajo las cuatro esquinas del tubo
de torque, aflojando los elementos de fijacin montados y usando los pernos
de ajuste vertical junto con los gatos para subir o bajar el tubo de torque.
Debe ser tomado cuidado con la concentricidad del tubo de torque en relacin
a la columna central. Apriete todos los elementos de fijacin despus de los
ajustes.

4. Despus que la unidad de accionamiento haya sido nivelada, atornille las

placas de ajustes en el lugar usando los orificios horizontales en la
unidad. Suelde las placas de ajuste al tubo de torque asegurndose del
aterramiento apropiado que evitar la corriente de la operacin a travs
de los rodamientos de la unidad.

5. Despus que la unidad de accionamiento y los brazos raspadores hayan

sido nivelados y soldados en el lugar, instalar los bloques guas entre el
tubo de torque y la columna central. Es recomendable conservar un
espacio de 50 a 75 mm entre el rodete de UHMW y la columna central

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PUENTE, PLATAFORMA,
PASAMANO Y ENTRAMADO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

PUENTE, PLATAFORMA, PASAMANO Y ENTRAMADO

Trabaja estas instrucciones con los planes 1110, 1111 y 1112.

1. Inspeccione las superficies de montaje y conexiones del puente, soporte

del puente y unidad de accionamiento. Limpie y remueva cualquier
material externo.

2. El puente, la plataforma y las secciones del monorriel fueron

despachados desmontados al campo y en secciones. Ensamble la
configuracin del puente completo en el piso. Certifique que todos fue
atornillado y soldado despus del montaje conforme el diseo 1111.

3. Despus del montaje del puente, retenga el puente sobre el nivel del
piso adyacente al tanque.

4. Ice el puente ensamblado y conctelo al tanque. En el extremo de la

plataforma, conecte a la superficie del montaje de la unidad de
accionamiento con las placas de deslice y las arandelas suministradas.
En el extremo de la pasarela, conecte a los soportes del puente en la
pared del tanque.

NOTA: Debe ser tomado cuidados durante la elevacin y colocacin del puente
para evitar exceso de tensin o flexin de los componentes.

5. Verifique segn sea necesario, la nivelacin y calce de la estructura del

puente. Apriete los tornillos. Asegrese de que las placas de deslice
estn instaladas en el soporte del puente y la unidad de accionamiento.

6. Instalar el pasamano sobre el puente.

7. Instalar el entramado del piso sobre el puente.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 SISTEMA Y POZO DE ALIMENTACIN
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

SISTEMA Y POZO DE ALIMENTACIN

Consulte los planes 1112 y 1113

1. Ensamble las secciones de arco del pozo de alimentacin como un

bloque temporalmente a nivel del piso del tanque, arreglando dichas
secciones alrededor de la columna central con los puertos de dilucin en
la parte superior.

2. Utilizando los diseos de montaje como referencia, atornille las vigas de

soporte del pozo de alimentacin a la estructura del puente. Certifquese
de que la configuracin instalada coincide con lo mostrado en los diseos
de montaje.

3. Si es posible, atornille todos los arcos del pozo de alimentacin en

conjunto.

4. Ice el pozo de alimentacin ensamblado y atornllelo a las vigas de

soporte. (Si todas las secciones del pozo de alimentacin no pudiesen
ser atornilladas juntas, atornille las secciones de arco a los soportes.
Certifique de que desde las secciones individuales hasta todas las
secciones del pozo de alimentacin han sido instaladas y que todas las
conexiones han sido apretadas). Asegrese de soportar el pozo de
alimentacin en varias posiciones con el uso de las barras espaciadoras,
para que el pozo de alimentacin no sea deformado, as como tambin
las vigas no sean cargadas desigualmente durante el montaje.

5. Ajuste la nivelacin del pozo de alimentacin y la concentricidad del

mismo en relacin a la columna central. Apriete todos los tornillos de
conexin. Verifique la elevacin del pozo de alimentacin con respecto al
nivel de agua para asegurar una configuracin apropiada del equipo.

6. Este pozo de alimentacin ha sido suministrado con placas para bloquear

los puertos de dilucin del pozo. Las placas de cobertura deben ser
posicionadas conforme las condiciones de operacin de partida
especificadas para el espesador.

7. Ice y atornille las tuberas de alimentacin a las bridas de alimentacin

ubicadas en la pared del tanque y a la brida de alimentacin del pozo de
alimentacin.

8. Asegure que el soporte de las tuberas de alimentacin estn instalados

conforme el plan 1112.

9. Instale la tubera y vlvulas de floculante conforme se presenta en los

planes 1112 y 1113.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 VERIFICACIN FINAL DE LA NIVELACIN
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

VERIFICACIN FINAL DE LA NIVELACIN

EL objetivo de la verificacin final de nivel e chequear si la unidad de

accionamiento esta nivelada. Se har verificando el nivel en varios puntos
alrededor del tanque lo que ir a asegurar la operacin apropiada y extender
la va del rodamiento de la unidad de accionamiento.

1. Fueron realizadas marcas de referencia previamente durante la

inspeccin del tanque. Ahora, estas cuatro marcas de nivel (a 90 grados
de distancia) sern ahora usadas para verificar la nivelacin de la unidad
de accionamiento.

2. Use la base magntica y brazos para un indicador de medicin para

montar un puntero a lser. Posicione el lser en la placa plana de la
seccin del tubo de torque donde los brazos raspadores sern
conectados. Apunte el lser de modo que el rayo acierte la pared del
tanque prximo a una de las marcas de referencia previamente
colocadas en el tanque. Gire la unidad de accionamiento y pare el lser
en la marca de referencia en el lado opuesto del tanque. Certifique que
la unidad de accionamiento se encuentra lubricada antes de la
operacin.

Si la energa no esta disponible, remueva la cubierta del ventilador y

gire la unidad motriz girando los ventiladores. No empuje el eje o mueva
de otra forma el eje o lser durante el procedimiento de nivelacin.

3. Consultando los planes, compare la diferencia en las dimensiones entre

las marcas de referencia del lser en los lados opuestos del tanque.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 VERIFICACIN FINAL DE LA NIVELACIN
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

4. La diferencia entre las dos dimensiones observadas (d1 menos d2) no

debe exceder 19 mm. Si la tolerancia dada es excedida, debe ser hecho
el ajuste del nivel de la unidad de accionamiento.

5. Si el calce es necesario, repita las instrucciones de la seccin

INSTALACIN DE LA UNIDAD ACCIONAMIENTO. Use tornillos de
suspensin bajo la unidad de accionamiento. Este procedimiento verifica
y ajusta el nivel del rodamiento interno de la unidad, lo que no es
posible hasta esta etapa del trabajo de montaje. Calce hasta que los
niveles de tolerancia sean alcanzados. (Las tolerancias estn en la
figura debajo.)

6. Repita el proceso en las dos marcas de referencia restantes.

7. Al hacer el ajuste final, se debe tener cuidado al apretar los tornillos de

montaje de la unidad accionamiento por igual. Apretar desigualmente
puede causar deformacin en las pistas del rodamiento, provocando una
disminucin de la vida til del engranaje.

8. La vida til mxima del engranaje principal de la unidad de

accionamiento depende de la nivelacin apropiada. La nivelacin final
exacta no es prctica, sin embargo, esta debe ser lo mas exacta posible.
Conforme el dimetro del mecanismo aumenta, se torna
progresivamente difcil para obtener un ajuste exacto.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 VERIFICACIN FINAL DE LA NIVELACIN
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

TOLERANCE TOLERANCE
TANK DIAMETER TANK DIAMETER
(d1 minus d2) (d1 minus d2)
IN FEET IN METERS
IN INCHES IN MM
0' - 50' DIA. 0 15.24m DIA 1/4" 6.35mm

> 50' & < 75' DIA. >15.24m & < 22.86m DIA 3/8" 9.525mm

> 75' & < 100' DIA. >22.86m & < 30.48m DIA 1/2" 12.7mm

> 100' & < 125' DIA. >30.48m & < 38.1m DIA 5/8" 15.875mm

> 125' & < 150' DIA. >38.1m & < 45.72m DIA 3/4" 19.05mm

> 150' & < 175' DIA. >45.72m & < 53.34m DIA 7/8" 22.225mm

> 175' & < 200' DIA. >53.34m & < 60.96m DIA 1" 25.4mm

> 200' & < 225' DIA. >60.96m & < 68.58m DIA 1 1/8" 28.575mm

> 225' & < 250' DIA. >68.58m & < 76.2m DIA 1 1/4" 31.75mm

> 250' & < 275' DIA. >76.2m & < 83.82m DIA 1 3/8" 34.925mm

> 275' & < 300' DIA. >83.82m & < 91.44m DIA 1 1/2" 38.1mm

> 300' & < 350' DIA. >91.44m & < 106.68m DIA 1 5/8" 41.275mm

> 350' & < 400' DIA. >106.68m & < 121.92m DIA 1 3/4" 44.45mm

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 BRAZOS, CONO RASPADOR Y PIQUETES
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

INSTALACIN DE LOS BRAZOS DEL MECANISMO

Trabaje estas instrucciones con los planes 1114 y 11115.

1. Suelde en conjunto de las tres secciones de los brazos largos.

2. Posicione los brazos largos y componentes del raspador en el tanque, en

lnea con sus posiciones de conexin al tubo de torque y en bloque.

3. Ajuste los brazos raspadores para instilacin en la inclinacin del fondo

del tanque. Se requerir soldadura de campo despus del ajuste final de
la nivelacin.

4. Si no ha sido finalizada, complete la verificacin final de la nivelacin del

tanque.

5. Ahora que la unidad esta nivelada con la tolerancia deseada, re-ajuste

los brazos largos para barrer el tanque idnticamente. Contine con el
mismo reajuste para los brazos cortos.

6. Se recomienda de se haga lo siguiente para los brazos largos y cortos:

Ajuste el espacio entre el centro de las lminas raspadores y el piso del
tanque a 150 mm. Realice el ajuste por elevacin de los brazos y la lnea
de tensin al tubo de torque. Gire los brazos opuestos a la misma
ubicacin donde el primer brazo fue ajustado. Ajuste el segundo brazo
para la misma distancia del fondo del tanque del primer tanque.

Una buena manera de hacer esto es colocar una pila de tierra en frente
de un brazo y raspar el nivel de la pila con el mecanismo. Luego, gire el
brazo opuesto a la misma posicin y ajstelo para raspar la pila de
tierra.

7. Coloque los soportes de los piquetes por encima de los brazos largos
certificando que los orificios en los soportes se alinean por encima con
los sostenedores de los piquetes sobre los brazos raspadores. Atornille el
soporte de los piquetes al tubo de torque. Atornille la placa base al
fondo de los soportes de los piquetes y colquelo sobre los brazos
raspadores.

8. Asegure permanentemente los brazos con soldadura de campo: la base

de los brazos raspadores al tubo de torque y la placa base del soporte
de los piquetes a los brazos raspadores.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 BRAZOS, CONO RASPADOR Y PIQUETES
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

RASPADOR DEL CONO Y PIQUETES

Trabaje estas instrucciones con los planes 1114 y 1115.

1. Coloque los raspadores del cono en la zanja de lodo. Atornille el cono

raspador a las placas de conexin del tubo de torque.

2. Coloque los piquetes ms externos sobre los brazos raspadores y

atornllelos en el lugar.

3. Colocar los piquetes del medio a travs el orificio en el soporte de los

piquetes y atornllelos al brazo raspador.

4. Coloque los tensores sobre los soportes de los piquetes. Ensarte la

cuerda de cable a travs del ojo sobre el brazo raspador, luego ensarte
ambos extremos de la cuerda de cable a travs de la tubera de HDPE.
Ate los extremos de los cables a las mordazas sobre los tensores.
Apriete los tensores.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 INSTALACIN ELCTRICA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

INSTALACIN ELCTRICA

1. Instale el panel de control sobre el pasamano del puente o conforme

orientaciones del propietario.

2. El control de la unidad de accionamiento Torkmatic es configurado en

fbrica, pero debe ser verificado en campo en su respectivo momento
para operacin y cableado apropiado.

3. No altere las posiciones de ajuste de las llaves lmite una vez que se
pueden ocasionar daos al mecanismo. Cualquier alteracin de las llaves
lmite debe ser realizada por un representante de la fbrica o con
autorizacin escrita de WesTech. La falta de seguimiento a esta
instruccin violar la garanta del equipo.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 TRATAMIENTO DE SUPERFICIE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

TRATAMIENTO DE SUPERFICIE

1. Todos los temes de metales ferrosos son suministrados con preparacin

de superficie y pintura como se muestra en el documento de Preparacin
de Superficie y Pintura, encontrado en la seccin de anexos.

2. La unidad de accionamiento ha recibido aplicacin en fbrica

TNEMEC1074-K3686 o acabamiento final equivalente epoxy-poliamida.

3. Despus de la finalizacin de la instalacin del mecanismo, la contratista

deber completar la pintura final de todos los componentes de acero en
concordancia con las especificaciones del proyecto.

ADVERTENCIA: No pinte la unidad de accionamiento. El dispositivo de torque

tiene partes mviles que en caso de ser pintados pueden causar sobre carga y
provocar daos en el mecanismo.

4. Si el acabamiento final es por WesTech o terceros, retoques finales

resultaran necesarios. En este caso, la pintura de retoque no ser
realizada por WesTech.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 TEMS MISCELANEOS
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

TEMS MISCELANEOS

1. Si no ha sido finalizado, complete la instalacin del entramado sobre la

plataforma del puente y pasarela.

2. Si no ha sido finalizado, instale la tubera de floculante sobre la pasarela

y el pozo de alimentacin conforme los planes 1112 y 1113.

3. Asegrese de que la unidad de accionamiento esta lubricada antes de la

operacin.

4. Gire el mecanismo para asegurar la operacin apropiada y direccin de

rotacin.

5. Instale los medidores de flujo magntico y los medidores de densidad

sobre la alimentacin y las lneas del flujo debajo conforme las
instrucciones del fabricante.

6. Instale el sensor de presin del lecho sobre la brida suministrada en el

cono de descarga del tanque conforme las instrucciones del fabricante.

7. Instale el sensor de nivel ultrasnico conforme las instrucciones del

fabricante.

8. Asegrese que el PLC est instalado, sintonizado y trabajando

apropiadamente.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

ARRANQUE Y
OPERACIN

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD

1. Solamente se debe permitir trabajar alrededor de este equipo a

operadores que han sido entrenados en procedimientos de seguridad.
Limite el acceso a personas autorizadas.

2. Para prevenir heridas personales, el mecanismo y accesorios deben ser

parados antes de ejecutar cualquier mantenimiento o ajuste. Bloquee la
energa antes de ejecutar el mantenimiento.

3. Tenga cuidado cerca de piezas mviles. Mantenga manos, vestuario,

etc., lejos de las piezas mviles.

4. Posicione seales de "Advertencia" en el rea de las piezas mviles.

5. Nunca permita que personas que hayan bebido alcohol, usado drogas o
estn debilitadas por cualquier otro motivo hacer mantenimiento o
reparar la unidad.

6. Inspeccione frecuentemente el equipo para saber se hay tornillos sueltos

o mal funcionamiento del equipo. Arregle los problemas
inmediatamente.

7. Es importante que la seguridad del operador este enfatizada. NO

ejecute mantenimientos o reparaciones en piezas en movimiento!

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 ARRANQUE DEL MECANISMO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ARRANQUE DEL MECANISMO

Una verificacin completa del mecanismo entero debe ser ejecutada primero.
Se sugiere que sean solicitadas visitas programadas para un representante de
servicio entrenado de WesTech para ejecutar la inspeccin final antes del
llenado del tanque y de la puesta en servicio del mecanismo.

Lo siguiente se aplica cuando el mecanismo este listo para partir. Inspeccione

si hay cualquier obstruccin del tanque o en la trayectoria del mecanismo.
Arranque la unidad con el tanque an vaco. Observe cuidadosamente si la
rotacin del mecanismo est correcta y posibles interferencias. Verifique si
ocurre la correcta operacin del control de torque o de los ajustes de corte (los
ajustes son dados en la seccin de PLANES DE MONTAJE DE LA UNIDAD DE
ACCIONAMIENTO). Consulte la seccin UNIDAD ACCIONAMIENTO DEL
ESPESADOR de este manual para mayores informaciones. En un porcentaje
dado de ajustes (especificado en la siguiente descripcin de lazos de control),
primero, una situacin de alarma debe ocurrir (bocina, y/ o luces, etc.) y
seguidamente el corte del motor. A partir del corte del motor, el mecanismo no
debe reiniciar hasta que el operador haya apretado fsicamente el botn de
reinicio. Consulte la seccin de la UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO DEL MOTOR
para informaciones sobre el tipo y nmeros de llaves suministradas con la
unidad. Estas llaves son activadas similarmente a las llaves de la alarma y de
corte. Si la unidad no opera en los ajustes dados, verifique la correcta
instalacin del cableado en campo. Si el control de torque continua operando
incorrectamente, llame a WesTech.

Cuando las configuraciones de ajuste del control de torque estn correctas,

permita al mecanismo continuar operando por varias revoluciones. Esto les
permitir a los operadores la ventaja de observar el mecanismo y todos los
componentes en operacin. Tan pronto se verifique que la unidad fue instalada
correctamente, queda lista para la introduccin del afluente. Recuerde que
operacin y partida adecuadas dependen de una regla principal: Retirar los
slidos en la misma proporcin que son alimentados en el tanque. Los tanques
no son proyectados como unidades de depsito. De otra forma, los slidos
acumulados sobrecargarn el mecanismo, resultando en desconexin del
equipo.

REGISTRE TODAS LAS LECTURAS Y OBSERVACIONES DURANTE LA

PARTIDA PARA UNA POSIBLE REFERENCIA FUTURA

REMOCIN DEL AGUA / PARADA

Aproximadamente una vez al ao, la unidad debe ser retirada de servicio y el

agua debe ser removida. Esto le permite al personal de la planta la
oportunidad de inspeccionar todas las piezas del mecanismo, ejecutar ajustes y
mantenimiento de los componentes sumergidos, retoques de pintura, etc. En

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 ARRANQUE DEL MECANISMO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

caso de anticipar, la unidad quedar fuera de servicio por un perodo

extendido. Consulte a PRECAUCIONES DE ALMACENAMIENTO a largo plazo en
la seccin de PIEZAS Y MANTENIMIENTO de este manual.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 ARRANQUE DEL PROCESO Y OPERACIN
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE MANTENIMIETO Y OPERACIN

PROCEDIMIENTO DE ARRANQUE DEL PROCESO

Preparacin Mecnica

Este procedimiento es una descripcin del proceso de partida del espesador y

se asume que el equipo haya sido preparado por adelanto incluyendo, por
ejemplo:

Nivelacin de los Raspadores,

Motores de la Unidad de Accionamiento y la Bomba Lubricados,
Bombas y anillos de sellos operables,
Protectores Instalados,
Planta de Floculante mecnicamente funcional,
Lazos de Control operables y afinados.

Preparacin del Proceso

La partida ocurrir con el espesador repleto de agua para el vertimiento del

flujo de sobra. Los siguientes pasos pueden ser tomados cuando sea apropiado
o despus que el tanque haya sido lleno de agua.

Prepare el(los) local(es) que recibir el flujo debajo y el flujo de sobra

del espesador durante la partida.
o Probablemente habr perodos en que el flujo debajo este
sedimentando pulpa y no relaves espesados a la medida que la
floculacin sea sometida al proceso control y el depsito de la
cama aumente. El sitio de disposicin tendr que recibir el flujo
debajo si esto ocurre.
o Podr haber perodos cuando el flujo de sobra tenga bastantes
slidos suspendidos a la medida que la floculacin sea sometida al
proceso de control.

Verifique si el tanque est limpio.

o Desechos de construccin en el tanque, como astas de soldadura
y cortes de metal, es comn y puede trabar los raspadores o
tapar la tubera del flujo debajo si no es removido.
o Verifique que la alimentacin, canales del flujo de sobra y las
tuberas de flujo debajo estn limpias y libres de desechos.
o Una forma efectiva de verificar si la tubera est abierta y
desobstruida es haciendo fluir agua.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 ARRANQUE DEL PROCESO Y OPERACIN
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE MANTENIMIETO Y OPERACIN

Limpie todo el equipo para una operacin segura.

o Remueva trabas y limpie etiquetas de seguridad.
o Alimente energa a todo el equipo (por ejemplo, bombas listas
para operar).
o Verifique si el sensor de nivel del lecho est limpio y funcional.

Abra los puertos del pozo de alimentacin en sus posiciones nominales:

o Varios puertos han sido suministrados, pero no todos sern
necesariamente usados.
o Conforme se procede con el arranque, la seleccin de los puertos
y sus grados de apertura pueden ser cambiados dependiendo de
la efectividad de la floculacin observada. Esto no se espera que
ocurra en todo los casos.

Inicie el mecanismo de los brazos raspadores

o Verifique que el sistema de medicin de torque est operando y el
torque est en el nivel mnimo.
o Ajuste la velocidad de los raspadores al valor nominal para la
partida.

Observe la localizacin y posicin de todas las vlvulas en las lneas de

alimentacin, flujo de sobra y flujo debajo:
o Observe la localizacin de las vlvulas de bloqueo instaladas;
tambin lneas que deben tener vlvulas de bloqueo instaladas.
o Saber la localizacin de las vlvulas ayudar a una reaccin rpida
de los operadores para hacer los cambios.

Verifique si el suministro suficiente de floculantes esta en vigor.

Abra las vlvulas de floculante para el pozo de alimentacin que sern

usados en el arranque.
o Varios puntos de adicin fueron suministrados, pero ni todos
sern necesariamente usados.
o Segn la partida procede, la eleccin de los puntos de adiccin
puede cambiar dependiendo de la efectividad observada de la
floculacin.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 ARRANQUE DEL PROCESO Y OPERACIN
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE MANTENIMIETO Y OPERACIN

Partida inicial

Verifique si las vlvulas de descarga de flujo de sobra y/ bombas estn

listas para recibir el flujo de sobra.
Inicie la alimentacin de agua para el espesador si todava no esta en
progreso.
Arranque las bombas de flujo de sobra.
Inicie la bomba de floculante para inyectar floculante en el depsito de
alimentacin.
Opere manualmente la bomba de floculante y ajuste para la tasa
nominal esperada para la tasa de alimentacin de arranque.
Inicie la alimentacin para el espesador en el control manual a la tasa de
flujo nominal.
Conforme la alimentacin es introducida para el espesador, acompae el
pozo de alimentacin para saber si hay efectividad en la floculacin.
o Observe visualmente la floculacin que se lleva a cabo en el pozo
de alimentacin.
o Acompae las partculas de flculos sedimentando y la claridad
del sobrenadante.
o Son necesarias muchas visitas al pozo de alimentacin por el
operador para hacer observaciones; a la medida que los
operadores prestan atencin a la floculacin en el pozo de
alimentacin, ellos conocern la mejor dosis de floculante y
entonces confiarn en el control automtico.

Ajuste el controlador del floculante para automtico y ajuste la dosis del

floculante cuando la tasa de alimentacin y efectividad de la floculacin
sean establecidos.
o El uso del control de floculacin automtica depende de las
condiciones de la planta como la variabilidad de la tasa del influjo
de alimentacin y distribucin de tamao de la partcula.
o Los arranques son frecuentemente en un ambiente de cambio de
equipos y condiciones de alimentacin y el operador debe ser
cuidadoso acerca del uso muy temprano del control automtico
del floculante en el proceso de arranque.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 ARRANQUE DEL PROCESO Y OPERACIN
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE MANTENIMIETO Y OPERACIN

Formacin de la cama y Concentracin de Slidos del flujo debajo

Arranque la descarga del flujo debajo conforme comienza la formacin

de la cama de slidos y lentamente transfiera el flujo debajo para el
lugar de descarte.
o El punto de arranque de la bomba de flujo debajo depende de la
tasa de alimentacin.
o Si el monitoreo muestra una acumulacin de partculas gruesas,
se puede requerir que las bombas sean arrancadas antes de los
relaves espesados ser formados.
o Ajuste la tasa de remocin del flujo debajo y vea cmo el nivel de
del lecho aumenta lentamente en el perodo de 2-3 das.

A pesar que del nivel nominal de la cama sea el objetivo de la partida

inicial, el nivel operacional real de la cama ser el exigido para producir
las condiciones deseadas para el flujo debajo. Este nivel podr fluctuar.
No permita que el nivel de la cama exceda el valor mximo.
Monitoree el torque durante la formacin del lecho.
o El torque del espesador puede mudar dependiendo del nivel de la
cama y la distribucin de tamao de partculas de slidos.
o Mantngase atento a la tendencia de ascensin en el torque y
considere la toma de acciones cuando el torque comience a crecer
arriba de 50% del proyecto nominal para la operacin
dependiendo de lo que este ocurriendo con la tasa de
alimentacin, floculacin, etc.

Monitoree el cambio de la reologa conforme la cama se forme y las

transiciones del flujo debajo sedimentando de pulpa a relaves espesados
fluidos.
o Colecte muestras y mida la cada del lodo para monitorear la
reologa del flujo debajo y la relacin con la densidad de flujo
debajo medida.
o No exceda el lmite superior para la cada de presin de transporte
de la tubera.

Verifique la tasa de slidos dentro y fuera para monitorear el desarrollo

del inventario.
Regla cardinal: slidos dentro = slidos fuera; la mayora de los
problemas de espesadores estn asociados con la acumulacin de
slidos.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REQUERIMIENTOS DE FLOCULANTE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

REQUERIMIENTOS DE FLOCULANTES PARA ESPESADORES DE PASTA

Los espesadores de alta densidad usan floculantes para reducir el tamao del
equipo y mejorar el desempeo. En particular, el desarrollo de floculantes
sintticos de polmero de cadena larga ha resultado en grandes pasos para la
tecnologa y desempeo de espesadores. La habilidad de estos floculantes para
producir flculos de rpida sedimentacin y clarificar el flujo de sobra ha
permitido la optimizacin del tamao y diseo del espesador.

La evolucin de espesadores convencionales de grande dimetro (sin los

floculantes de polmero) para los espesadores modernos de hoy, inici con la
introduccin del espesador de alta densidad. Este espesador usa dimetros y
depsitos de alimentacin significativamente menores que los espesadores
convencionales. Espesadores y clarificadores de alta densidad han reducido
adicionalmente el dimetro del espesador a cerca del mnimo limitado
hidrulicamente.
High-rate clarifier-thickener
(Ultrasep)
typ max dia 32 ft
60o cone
WesTech Deep Bed paste thickener
typ max dia 79 ft
30o cone

For reference:
Conventional non-paste thickener ,
9o cone

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REQUERIMIENTOS DE FLOCULANTE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Los espesadores que producen relaves espesados tambin tienen la ventaja de

las altas tasas de sedimentacin producidas por floculantes de polmero
modernos. Comparado con el espesador de alta-tasa y espesador clarificador
de alta tasa, espesadores tales como el espesador de pasta WesTech Deep
Bed poseen dimetros relativamente menores y tambin producen flujo
debajo de altas concentraciones de slido.

Los floculantes modernos producen flculos que no son solamente de rpida

sedimentacin, sino tambin relativamente fuertes. La retirada de agua de la
suspensin en espesadores de relaves espesados produce un flujo debajo con
un grado aproximado de contenido de agua parecido al formado en tortas de
filtro. El espesador de relaves espesados del El Brocal est proyectado para
tener una altura de relaves espesados de aproximadamente 6 a 7 metros, la
cual provee el tiempo de retencin de slidos y compresin necesaria para la
produccin de relaves espesados. La resistencia de los flculos puede
determinar el lmite de espesamiento que es posible. Tan pronto los flculos se
quiebren, el proceso de floculacin se detendr. La liberacin de agua
virtualmente se detiene cuando esta no se encuentra aislada de los slidos.
Esto es, una vez que los flculos son destruidos, la suspensin de finos no
libera el agua. Es por esto que los finos en toneladas relaves convencionales no
se consolida ni secan y se conservan hmedos por aos.

Trminos Sistema floculante

Los siguientes trminos deben ser familiares cuando se lea este manual y se
discuta el sistema floculante:

Floculante (polmero catinico, polmero aninico) = molcula de cadena

larga de carbono con locales activos cargados usados para juntar partculas
slidas y para crear flculos que asientan produciendo un sobrenadante limpio.

Solucin floculante = el floculante es normalmente diluido con el agua del

proceso a cerca de 0,1 a 0,5 gramos de floculante seco por litro de agua. Esta
solucin es frecuentemente diluida adicionalmente antes de entrar en el
espesador.

Sobrenadante (flujo de sobra) = solucin de la cual los slidos se asentaron

y que se descargan por la seccin superior del espesador. Tambin citado
como flujo de sobra.

Flculos = partculas slidas mantenidas juntas por el floculante. El grupo de

partculas acta como una partcula ms larga para tasas de sedimentacin
ms rpidas.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REQUERIMIENTOS DE FLOCULANTE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Dosificacin = Se refiere a la cantidad del floculante basado en la tasa de

flujo de la corriente de alimentacin. Las unidades son generalmente gramos
(floculantes secos) por toneladas (relaves slidos secos), g/t.

Dosis = se refiere a la tasa de flujo de la solucin del floculante.

Punto de dosis = Esto se refiere al lugar en que el floculante se adiciona a la

corriente de alimentacin, generalmente el pozo de alimentacin. Hay
mltiples puntos de dosis alrededor del pozo de alimentacin para permitir la
mejora del sistema floculante.

Intensidad de la mezcla = para formar apropiadamente flculos es necesario

mezclar la corriente de alimentacin y el floculante juntos. La intensidad y la
duracin de la mezcla en el pozo de alimentacin dependen de que puntos de
dosificacin sean usados.

Asentamiento de flujo = se refiere al peso de slidos secos que pasan a

travs de un rea de unidad sobre un perodo de tiempo. Esto es calculado a
partir de la wt% de slidos en la pulpa de la alimentacin y la tasa de
sedimentacin despus de la floculacin; generalmente las unidades son
tph/m2.

El proceso de floculacin

La floculacin de relaves espesados de slidos con un polmero exige la

dosificacin apropiada de floculante aninico y catinico, la concentracin de
slidos de la alimentacin y la mezcla dependiente del sistema. Estos cuatro
parmetros fueron investigados durante en ensayos de escala piloto a partir
del cual el espesador fue proyectado. Los ensayos de sedimentacin identifican
el mejor wt% de slidos en la alimentacin y a tasa de sedimentacin como
una funcin del tipo y dosificacin de floculante. La relacin entre el wt% de
slidos en la alimentacin y la tasa de flujo de sedimentacin para cualquier
dosis de floculante generalmente pasa por una condicin ms favorable o
punto ptimo. El aumento de wt% de slidos para elevar el flujo es solamente
benfico para un punto despus del cual los slidos empiezan a obstruir la
sedimentacin disminuyendo la tasa de flujo despus que la condicin ms
favorable ha sido alcanzada. Proyectar un espesador para esta operacin
mejora las dimensiones del espesador y el consumo de floculante.

La recomendacin de dosificacin esta basada en el ensayo de sedimentacin

pero debe ser mejorada posteriormente en la unidad de escala industrial. La
tasa de de sedimentacin versus las curvas de dosificacin generalmente
pasan por una dosificacin limite que debe ser alcanzada antes que la
sedimentacin significante ocurra. Entonces hay una porcin lineal de la curva
que muestra el crecimiento fijo en la tasa de sedimentacin con aumento de la

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REQUERIMIENTOS DE FLOCULANTE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

dosificacin. Esto contina hasta el punto de rendimiento decreciente, punto

para el cual floculante adicional no aumenta la tasa de sedimentacin.

Estas pruebas establecen el lmite de carga hidrulica para el proyecto del

espesador y las condiciones recomendadas de operacin. Durante el perodo de
arranque del espesador, estas condiciones recomendadas deben ser verificadas
y las condiciones de operacin optimizadas identificadas.

La optimizacin a escala industrial es ms que solamente la seleccin de la

dosificacin de floculacin, por el contrario envuelve otros parmetros. La
alteracin del volumen de la dosis de floculante que es alimentado para cada
punto de dosis mudar el factor de mezcla. La floculacin de relaves depende
de la dosificacin y de la intensidad y duracin de la mezcla suministrada.
Cambios en los pasos de la dosificacin del floculante pueden ser ejecutados
en combinacin con ajustes para la mezcla. La mezcla da la oportunidad para
que el floculante y los slidos choquen, razn por la cual la duracin y la
intensidad de la mezcla son importantes.

El objeto de la mezcla es proveer colisiones para enlazar los slidos a las

molculas floculantes y permitir el crecimiento de los flculos. Si la intensidad
de mezcla no es lo suficientemente grande, entonces las colisiones no sern
tan efectivas y algunas partculas no sern colectadas. Por otro lado, si la
intensidad es muy alta entonces las partculas colisionarn dems y no se
agarraran o los flculos se quebraran. La intensidad de la mezcla es controlada
por donde el floculante es introducido a la corriente de alimentacin. Los
locales de dosis ms prximos a la entrada de alimentacin del pozo de
alimentacin normalmente dan la mejor mezcla. Puntos de dosis opuestos a la
entrada daran menos intensidad. La dosificacin en diferentes puntos es
frecuentemente efectiva para primero iniciar el crecimiento de los flculos al
dosificar una porcin de flujo de floculante en el primer punto. Luego al
adicionar el restante del volumen del floculante para el segundo (tercero o
cuarto) punto de dosis, el floculante colecta los flculos menores para formar
agregados ms grandes de mejor sedimentacin.

Ajuste de la dosificacin del floculante

La decisin para cambiar la dosificacin de floculante y ajustar la intensidad de

mezcla para compensar el pobre desempeo del espesador depende de varias
observaciones. A continuacin, algunas observaciones generales usadas en el
control apropiado del espesador:

1. Comparar la dosis actual con la tendencia histrica del circuito del

espesador. La dosificacin no debe variar, a menos que haya un cambio
significante de alimentacin.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REQUERIMIENTOS DE FLOCULANTE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

a. Si la dosificacin es similar a la tendencia actual, trate de

modificar la intensidad de la mezcla antes de incrementar la dosis.
Si esto no corrige el desempeo del espesador entonces considere
aumentar el nivel de dosificacin del floculante.
b. Si la dosificacin es menor que la tendencia actual intente
aumentar las dosis.

2. La proporcin de separacin corriente para el flujo de floculante para

cada punto de dosis puede ser modificado para mudar la intensidad de
la mezcla.

3. Inspeccione el tipo de slidos perdidos por el flujo de sobra.

a. Slidos no floculados o slidos no capturados aparece como agua

nublosa
i. Considera el aumento de la intensidad de la mezcla.
ii. Considera el aumento de la dosis de floculante aninico.

b. Flculos de tamaos pequeo aparece como slido fino discreto

suspendido en agua relativamente clara.
i. Considere cambiar la intensidad de la mezcla.
ii. Considera aumentar la dosis de floculante.

c. Flculos de grande tamao

i. Generalmente resulta en el nivel de la cama de relaves
espesados siendo muy alto o en condiciones
operacionales no asociada al floculante.
ii. Despus bajar el la altura de la cama, el sistema debe ser
mejorado nuevamente y probablemente se necesitar
reducir la dosificacin de floculante.
iii. Considerar la reduccin de la dosificacin del coagulante

Monitoreo de la claridad del flujo de sobra

Mejoras en la claridad del flujo de sobra resultante de cambios de dosificacin

de floculante no sern observadas en el canal de descarga del flujo de sobra
hasta que el tiempo de residencia del sobrenadante sea excedido. Este atraso
en la respuesta de la claridad (cuando sea observado en el vertedero del flujo
de sobra) puede llevar a floculacin excedente por causa de la dosificacin del
floculante en la alimentacin muy rpidamente por parte del operador sin
permitir que transcurra el tiempo suficiente despus de cada cambio para
evaluar apropiadamente el efecto de cada cambio. El tiempo entre el cambio
en la dosificacin de floculante y cuando la mejora alcanza el flujo de sobra es
normalmente dentro de un intervalo de 45 a 60 minutos. Este perodo es muy

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REQUERIMIENTOS DE FLOCULANTE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

largo para mejorar el espesador. El operador necesita aprender a usar la

observacin del pozo de alimentacin por causa de los resultados de los
cambios ante el cambio de la dosificacin del floculante y punto de adicin son
los primeros a ser observados en el pozo de alimentacin. Con la espuma
siendo un problema y restringiendo la visibilidad en el pozo de alimentacin,
una colecta de muestras del pozo de alimentacin puede ser usada para
observar la respuesta del sistema floculante a los cambios del reactivo.

La dosis (g/t) es ajustada manualmente en la sala de control. El aumento en la

dosificacin de floculante algunas veces puede compensar las condiciones
pobres de mezcla pero esto aumentar los costos operacionales. Se debe
tomar cuidado para mejorar la mezcla (tasas de flujo para cada punto de
dosis) en adicin a la dosificacin. La divisin del flujo floculante entre los
puntos de dosis es efectuada en el espesador. Si la claridad del flujo de sobra
no es satisfactoria, entonces las siguientes cuestiones ayudarn en la mejora
del circuito.

1. Verifique el flujo de sobra para ver si la claridad pobre es por causa de

partculas finas no capturadas (no colectadas por el floculante para
construir flculos) o flculos siendo cargados sobre el flujo de sobra.

a. Flculos en el flujo de sobra pueden estar por varias razones

i. El nivel de la cama del espesador est dentro de los lmites

estndar operacionales? Si la cama est muy alto el flujo de
sobra se tornar turbio. El nivel de la cama debe estar por lo
menos de 1 a 2 metros abajo del fondo del pozo de
alimentacin.
ii. Hubo un aumento en la carga hidrulica de los espesadores
(aumento de la tasa de flujo volumtrico)? La carga hidrulica
del proyecto debe haber sido excedida lo que significa que la
tasa de elevacin del agua es ms rpida que la tasa de
asentamiento de slidos y que los flculos estn siendo cargados
para el flujo de sobra. La tasa de elevacin de agua es
determinada por la tasa de flujo volumtrico del flujo de sobra
dividida por el rea de seccin transversal del espesador. Si la
tasa de elevacin aumenta significativamente entonces la
velocidad ascendente puede ser ms rpida que la tasa de
asentamiento de los slidos floculados y los flculos sern
cargados junto con el flujo de sobra.
iii. Si los flculos son de tamao fino entonces el floculante necesita
ser mejorado.
(1) Verifique la proporcin de dosis de floculante en cada
punto de dosificacin.
(2) Si la mezcla fue mejorada entonces se necesitar
incrementar la dosis.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REQUERIMIENTOS DE FLOCULANTE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

b. Si los slidos del flujo de sobra son finos no capturados

i. Verifique y consulte si las bombas floculantes estn operando y
que el flujo para los espesadores esta en la tasa de flujo
esperada. La planta de floculante debe tener algn problema.
ii. La concentracin de slidos de la alimentacin cayo
significantemente? Corrientes de relaves con concentraciones de
slidos muy bajas son ms difciles para flocular y algunas veces
las partculas finas no son capturadas. La estrategia de control
bajara la tasa de flujo del floculante conforme la concentracin
de slidos disminuye pero hay un valor ms bajo para la dosis
que ser adicionada. Este lmite ms bajo es ajustado por exigir
ms floculante por tonelada de slidos secos para colectar los
slidos en una alimentacin de concentracin muy baja de
slidos. Potencialmente, bajo contenido slido puede exigir el
aumento de esta dosificacin de ajuste ms baja. Si los slidos
son bajos por un largo tiempo, entonces considere desconectar
el floculante, as no habr una acumulacin en el sistema y
apenas permite una claridad pobre al circular a travs del
sistema.
iii. La excavacin puede estar produciendo residuos que son ms
difciles para flocular y el sistema floculante debe ser mejorado.

2. Una vez que el nivel de la cama y la carga hidrulica hayan sido

verificados y ninguna mejora adicional haya sido alcanzada, entonces la
dosificacin y mezcla del floculante (puntos de dosis) pueden ser
abordados segn fue discutido arriba, y repetir como sigue:
a. Cambie apenas un parmetro por vez, el floculante catinico, el
floculante aninico y la mezcla.
b. Despus de seleccionar una nueva dosificacin, la mezcla debe
ser seleccionada nuevamente. Puede haber un cambio necesario
en la mezcla.
c. La mejora de la mezcla puede ser usada al contrario del aumento
de la dosificacin en muchos casos.
i. Establezca la operacin actual al mostrar y observar el pozo de
alimentacin para crear un punto de inicio para investigacin
adicional. Esta puede ser una clasificacin relativa de la limpidez
o medicin cuantificada. Tambin observe las tasas de flujo
actuales para cada punto de dosis.
ii. Para determinar si un cambio significante en la intensidad/
duracin de la mezcla mejorar la claridad.
(1) Si el flujo de floculante completo esta actualmente siendo
enviado para alimentar la entrada del punto de dosis,

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 REQUERIMIENTOS DE FLOCULANTE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

entonces enve la mitad del flujo para la entrada y mitad

para el lado opuesto del pozo de alimentacin.
(2) Despus de un par de minutos evale la claridad del pozo
de alimentacin como antes y compare las informaciones
de base colectada al respecto de las condiciones previas.
(3) Si la claridad esta mejor o cerca del mismo, entonces
considere deslocalizar ms flujo de floculante para el lado
ms profundo del depsito y menos para la entrada de
alimentacin.
(4) Si la claridad mejora, entonces para la corriente de
alimentacin actual, la condicin base tena mucha
mezcla y un mejor ajuste de flujo entre los dos puntos de
dosificacin podra ser encontrado.
(5) Si la claridad es peor que la base, entonces las
condiciones base fueron ms prximas para el ajuste de
mezcla mejorada y condicin de parmetro adicional debe
ser probado ms prximo al asentamiento de la base.
(6) La proporcin de la tasa de flujo puede ser modificada en
un paso de cambio pequeo, hasta conseguir la condicin
que traiga la mejor condicin de claridad.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 FILOSOFA DE CONTROL
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

FILOSOFA DE CONTROL

Trabaje esta filosofa de control junto con los planes:

21261A PID03-PID04
21261A PFID101

Los controles estn centralizados en una sala de control en que seales

indicando la operacin del espesamiento y equipos asociados (tasa de flujo,
medidas de densidad, estatus de operacin de bombas, y otras). En la sala de
controle, operadores entrenados monitorean tales mediciones automticas y
cuando los controles automticos necesitan de intervencin, los operadores
cambian los puntos ajustados y responden a las alarmas.

A pesar que la sala de control ofrece un lugar para que los operadores
monitoreen la operacin y hagan ajustes, cualquier espesador necesita de
inspeccin visual peridica fuera de la sala de control y alrededor del sistema
espesador para asegurar si los controles automticos estn reportando la
operacin apropiada.

OBJETIVOS DE CONTROL

El objetivo de control principal es el de operar el espesador para separar agua

y relaves, produciendo un flujo debajo con las caractersticas de relaves
espesados (una suspensin no sedimentable) para disposicin final de
superficie.

Otros objetivos incluyen:

Producir una concentracin de slidos de flujo debajo tan alta cuanto a
la mxima dentro del intervalo aceptable para bombeo.
Mantener un nivel aceptable de slidos suspendidos en el flujo de sobra.
Combinar el uso de floculante con los requisitos de alimentacin, basado
en el flujo de masa
Mantener un inventario completo de barro constante controlando la tasa
de flujo debajo

Estos objetivos asumen una tasa de alimentacin relativamente constante,

distribucin del tamao de partcula y caractersticas del espesador.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 FILOSOFA DE CONTROL
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

LAZOS DE CONTROL

Alimentacin del Espesador de Alta Densidad

La tasa de flujo de relaves producida por la planta debe ser recibida por el
espesador que fue proyectado para la aplicacin, que es fundamentalmente un
equipo de operacin continua que se basa en una alimentacin no floculada
bien definida. El sistema de floculacin y desempeo operarn mejor bajo
condiciones de alimentacin relativamente estables.

Adicin de Floculante

Los dos ms importantes tipos de controles para el desempeo del proceso

(efectividad de la floculacin, claridad del flujo de sobra, densidad del flujo
debajo) son:
Inyeccin de floculante (Lazos de Control 1 y 2)
Altura de la cama (Lazo de Control 3)

Lazo de Control 1
Dosis Requerida de Floculante

Descripcin: La dosis de floculante vinculada a la dosificacin, expresada en

g/t de slidos en base seca, es la proporcin de la tasa de adicin del
floculante para el flujo de masa de la alimentacin. La dosificacin es
suministrada por el operador. Seales de entrada de medidor de flujo de
alimentacin y medidor de densidad son usadas para calcular el flujo de masa
(PV1).

El lazo de control de ajuste de adicin comprobante (CV1) en un control de

alimentacin proporcional a la tasa de flujo de masa para mantener la
dosificacin necesaria (SV1) que ser digitada por el operador. La salida del
controlador es enviada para las bombas de floculante.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 FILOSOFA DE CONTROL
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Comentarios: Cambios de dosificacin son hechos manualmente (el tiempo de

respuesta puede ser de varias horas) y no automticamente. A diferencia de
un espesador convencional, el espesador de alta densidad tiene un tiempo
significante de atraso entre el cambio en la dosis de floculante (tal como podra
ser causada por el cambio del tamao de partcula) y los resultados en la
densidad y reologa del flujo debajo (como puede ser indicado por el torque del
raspador).

La dosis del floculante esta sobre el control del operador que puede mudarla en
respuesta a como el espesador esta operando. Por ejemplo, si observaciones
manuales del flculo muestran que las tasas de asentamiento o claridad de
flujo de sobra estn fuera de la especificacin, el operador tiene la opcin de
aumentar o disminuir la dosis de floculante. Habr una dosificacin mxima
especificada que el operador no puede sobrepasar para evitar una sper
floculacin, a ser determinada durante la partida

Lazo de Control 1
Control de la Bomba de Dosificacin de Floculante

Descripcin: la cantidad de floculante calculado en el lazo del control 1 es

bombeado para los puntos de adicin de floculante en el pozo de alimentacin
por una bomba dedicada a la adicin de floculante (y una bomba de reserva)
La variable de control (CV1) generada por el Lazo de control 1 se torna el
punto de ajuste (SV2) para que la tasa de flujo de floculante (PV2) se

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 FILOSOFA DE CONTROL
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

compare, controlando la velocidad variable del motor (CV2) en la bomba de

dosificacin del floculante.

La tasa de flujo de floculante aninico es calculado conforme sigue:

Tasa de flujo de Floculante (l/hr) = [flujo de masa de slido en alimentacin

(t/hr) x dosificacin (g/mt)] / Concentracin de Floculante (g/l)]

Donde: Dosificacin (g/mt) = SV1 (digitado por el operador)

Comentarios: El floculante puede ser distribuido para varios puntos en el pozo

de alimentacin o tubo de alimentacin. El cambio de punto de adicin es
hecho de forma manual normalmente en la partida por la observacin de punto
ms efectivo para adicionar el floculante. Una vez que los puntos de adicin del
floculante estn definidos, no es usual mudarlos a menos que ocurran grandes
variaciones en la naturaleza de alimentacin de slidos.

El control del flujo de floculante puede ser operado de diferentes modos,

incluyendo:

Manual: El operador ajusta la velocidad de la bomba.

Automtico: El operador fija el punto de ajuste de tasa de flujo para mantener

una tasa de flujo constante.

Control: Los lazos de control 1 y 2 son usados para controlar la adicin de

polmero aninico automticamente basado en el flujo de la masa de slidos
alimentada.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 FILOSOFA DE CONTROL
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Lazo de Control 2
Control del Nivel del Lecho

Descripcin: El lazo de control de nivel de la cama es el responsable por el

cambio en la densidad del flujo debajo. Para una alimentacin floculada
apropiadamente la densidad del flujo debajo es determinada por la cantidad de
tiempo gastado por los slidos en la cama. El nivel de la cama corresponde a
este tiempo de residencia. Durante operaciones de estado estable y una
concentracin de slidos en la alimentacin sin interrupcin, conforme el nivel
de la cama aumenta, la densidad del flujo debajo aumenta; y a medida que la
altura del lecho disminuye, la densidad del flujo debajo disminuye. El Nivel de
la cama puede ser inferido por la presin ejercida por el lecho que ser medido
y transmitido para la sala de control. Conforme aumente la experiencia del
operador, el mismo ser capaz de asociar la presin de la cama con el nivel del
mismo.

PV3
Bed Pressure

SV3 OS3
Level Set Point Torque Offset
Control Loop 3
Bed Level Control

CV3
U/F Pump VFD
Speed

En el lazo de control N 3 el nivel de la cama del espesador (PV3) es medido y

comparado con el punto de ajuste (SV3). La salida de la variable de control del
lazo da una seal de referencia en la velocidad (CV3) al variador de velocidad
de las unidades motrices de las bombas de descarga flujo debajo del
espesador.

El transmisor de torque indicando que el torque del raspador del espesador

suministrar un parmetro de compensacin (OS3) para el control de velocidad
de la bomba VFD (variable frequency drive), si el torque aumenta arriba de la
2 alarma (consulte Puntos ajustados y fajas operacionales para el valor
nominal de la 2 alarma). La velocidad de referencia de la bomba de flujo
debajo ser elevada hasta 80% del mximo valor para el nivel de la cama ms
bajo y despus el torque. Esta porcin del lazo de control debe ser considerada
un recurso de falla segura que ocurrir automticamente en el caso en que los
operadores no estn monitoreando el acumulado del torque. En una operacin
apropiada se deben realizar acciones cuando el torque se comienza a elevar

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 FILOSOFA DE CONTROL
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

arriba de la segunda alarma y probablemente tomar este control manual de

bombas de flujo debajo antes de la compensacin automtica (OS3) sea
activada como el inicio de la segunda alarma.

Un sensor de altura de la cama ultrasnico puede suministrar otro parmetro

de sustentacin (no notado en el diagrama del lazo de control de mostrado
anteriormente). La lectura del sensor de nivel puede alertar el operador si el
nivel de la cama se esta aproximando del un nivel inferior del valor mximo. El
operador puede entonces tomar las debidas medidas para bajar el nivel de la
cama a un nivel apropiado. Esta accin solo debe ser necesaria durante
tiempos de alteracin del proceso de la planta.

6.5m

feedwell
4.5m

% of Span

100% Max mud level

determined at startup Nominal mud level

0% Min mud level

Max, nominal, min mud level

determined at startup

El punto de ajuste de la cama (SV3) puede ser expreso como un porcentaje de

extensin dentro de 0-100% dentro del rango sobre el cual la altura de la
cama es medida. Consulte Puntos de Ajuste y Rangos de Operacin para el
nivel de la cama nominal que aplica para este espesador.

En el modo de seguimiento de la alimentacin, el punto de ajuste de la cama

genera una seal (CV3) para las bombas de flujo debajo. Esta seal se torna
un punto de ajuste para la operacin de la bomba.

La velocidad de la bomba de flujo debajo aumenta para un aumento en el nivel

de la cama y disminuye con el descenso en el nivel.

La siguiente ecuacin es la ecuacin base y define el control de la tasa de la

bomba de flujo debajo en respuesta a cambios en la altura de la cama:

(1) Flujo debajo (m/hr)= [Nivel de la cama Medido (%)/Nivel de la cama

del Punto de Ajuste(%)]x Punto de Ajuste del Flujo debajo (m/hr)

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 FILOSOFA DE CONTROL
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

El punto de ajuste del flujo debajo se especifica en Puntos de Ajuste y Rangos

de Operacin

La tasa del flujo debajo est directamente correlacionada con la velocidad de la

bomba en el lazo de control.

Existen otras variables que pueden afectar la correlacin de la velocidad de la

bomba con el nivel de la cama tal como la formacin de vacos. Si hay
cambios en el nivel de la cama, de acuerdo con la ecuacin (1) se crea un
cambio en la tasa de bombeo. Este cambio puede ser modificado por la
digitacin por parte del operador del factor K para ser ms alto o ms bajo
que el cambio producido por el sistema de control automtico conforme se
muestra en la ecuacin (2).

(2) Nuevo flujo debajo (m/hr) = [Cambio en el Flujo Debajo (de la

ecuacin (1)] x K

Si K=1, el nuevo flujo debajo ser determinado por la ecuacin

(1),
Si K<1, el cambio de la velocidad de flujo ser ms bajo que el
determinado por la ecuacin (1),
Si K>1, el cambio de la velocidad de flujo ser ms alto que el
determinado por la ecuacin (1),

Otras Consideraciones:

La experiencia puede mostrar que la densidad del flujo debajo o una medida
directa del nivel (medicin del nivel ultrasnico) pueden ser usadas para
controlar la velocidad de la bomba del flujo debajo y usa esta referencia como
respaldos de la operacin del lazo de control 3. Conforme opere el espesador,
este lazo puede ser adicionado en el futuro.

Comentario: La funcin de control de nivel de lodo es para producir la

concentracin de slidos necesarios de flujo debajo y reologa adecuada para la
disposicin final. Las caractersticas de flujo debajo necesarias son resultado
del proyecto del espesador. Igualmente importante es el proyecto de la tubera
de transporte hasta el lugar de disposicin para manejar la reologa esperada.
El operador usar el lazo de control 3 para producir las caractersticas
deseadas de flujo debajo. Tambin puede ser ocasionalmente preferible para
que el operador controle el nivel manualmente operando en una tasa constante
de flujo debajo.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 FILOSOFA DE CONTROL
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Control de torque del raspador

Descripcin: El torque del raspador es medido por la caja de torque

WesTech. Un corte redundante de motor para proteccin es tambin
suministrado en el sistema de empaquetadura de potencia hidrulica. En este
proyecto no estn contemplados elevadores del mecanismo.

La unidad de accionamiento del raspador ser capaz de ser operada localmente

por el operador (Start/Stop/Reset). La indicacin de torque local as como de
una seal de torque proporcional 4- 20 m ser enviada al DCS.

El operador debe tomar las decisiones en el proceso de operacin basado en

el torque del raspador

Alarmas
Unidad de Accionamiento (Torque de Servicio= 3,660,660 Nm)
1 alarma en 40% (1,464,264 Nm)
2 alarma en 55% (1,830,830 Nm)
Corte del motor en 90% (3,294,594Nm)

Comentarios: Por causa que la estructura del raspador esta sumergida en la

cama de lodo todo el tiempo, el torque se torna una medicin de la
consistencia da barro (viscosidad, lmite elstico) y para un grado, contenido
de slidos. Cambios en el torque pueden dar informacin significante sobre la
cama formada.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 SOLUCIN DE PROBLEMAS DEL ARRANQUE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

SOLUCIN DE PROBLEMAS DEL ARRANQUE

En general, la mayora de los problemas pueden ser evitados al monitorear las

condiciones de bombeo del flujo debajo, efectividad de la floculacin y el
torque. Los problemas del espesador de alta densidad (HiDensity) no ocurren
rpidamente y si son monitoreadas e interpretadas las seales de advertencia
dadas, se pueden tomar las decisiones adecuadas a tiempo.

Torque alto

La no correccin de la causa de torque alto podra eventualmente resultar en

una parada de la unidad de accionamiento y el espesor quedar fuera de lnea
para la remocin del barro por lavado. Este es un proceso largo y costoso.
Torque alto es causado por lo siguiente:

Acumulacin de muchos slidos en el espesador

o El remedio es remover la mayor parte de los slidos de lo que
esta siendo introducido en el espesador al aumentar la tasa de
bombeo del flujo debajo, disminuyendo la tasa de alimentacin o
ambas.
o Verificar el nivel de la cama - si es alto, tomar acciones para
disminuir dicho nivel.
o Verificar la operacin apropiada y tasa de flujo de la bomba de
flujo debajo- si el torque fue arriba de 50% la bomba de flujo
debajo debe ser operada en la velocidad mxima. Si la bomba no
esta operando apropiadamente pare la alimentacin del espesador
hasta que el problema de bombeo pueda ser corregido. Si la
bomba esta operando pero hay poco o ningn flujo, debe haber
un bloqueo en la lnea de descarga. Pare la alimentacin del
espesador hasta que el problema sea corregido.
o Aumentos en la tasa de remocin del flujo debajo no deben vaciar
la cama rpidamente porque una rpida retirada puede causar
huecos de ratn (espacios vacos en el medio de la cama).

Densidad del flujo debajo muy alta

o Esto puede ser causado por una alta cantidad de material gruesos
en el espesador o por slidos que hayan sido decantados a una
alta concentracin de slidos. La solucin es remover los relaves
espesados de ms alta densidad.
o Busque tendencias de ascensin en el torque y considere tomar
acciones cuando el torque se comience a elevar 50% arriba del
proyecto nominal para la operacin dependiendo de lo que este
ocurriendo en la tasa de alimentacin, floculacin, etc.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 SOLUCIN DE PROBLEMAS DEL ARRANQUE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Torque alto de la unidad de accionamiento tambin puede ser causado

por problemas mecnicos pero estos no son tpicos y deben ser
investigados solamente despus que las causas del proceso hayan sido
eliminada

Mecanismo estropeado

Si el mecanismo se desconecta por causa del torque alto, investigue

inmediatamente si la evidencia muestra que hubo una alta sobrecarga de lodo:
Aumente inmediatamente la tasa de remocin de flujo debajo para el
mximo para disminuir el inventario de la cama
Pare la corriente de alimentacin hasta que el mecanismo haya sido
reiniciado
Intente re-arrancar la unidad

Baja concentracin de slidos en el flujo debajo

El espesador de alta densidad (HiDensity) es proyectado para producir una

concentracin de slidos de flujo debajo en el rango de relaves espesados (sin
asentamiento) pero no tan alta que el material no pueda ser bombeado. La
concentracin de slidos y aquella asociada con estas condiciones y el aumento
o disminucin de esta concentracin esta basado en la reologa.
Condiciones de desorden en el sistema de alimentacin o floculacin
resultarn en un flujo debajo bajo en slidos despus de un perodo
igual al tiempo de residencia de la cama. Literalmente desordenes de
alimentacin de un turno sern observados durante el prximo turno en
el flujo debajo. El flujo debajo debe retornar para densidades de flujo
debajo apropiadas despus de un trabajo adecuado en el material de la
cama en su trayectoria a travs del lecho para la descarga de flujo
debajo. Si ningn perodo de desorden puede ser identificado una
apariencia baja de slidos, entonces una accin adicional puede ser
necesaria.
Aumente el inventario de la cama segn lo indicado por el nivel de la
cama de lodo.
Verifique si la floculacin es adecuada si es inadecuada, la floculacin
puede ser la razn para la baja concentracin de slidos en el flujo
debajo. Esta condicin estar presente por varias horas (por causa del
largo tiempo de residencia de los slidos en la cama) y tomar una
cantidad igual de tiempo para corregir despus que el floculante haya
sido restaurado correctamente.
Con partculas gruesas excesivas, la partida con el tanque completo
puede causar substancias viscosas en el exterior y gruesas en el fondo,
extendiendo el tiempo para que la cama se consolide

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 SOLUCIN DE PROBLEMAS DEL ARRANQUE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Alta concentracin de slidos en el flujo debajo

El espesador de alta densidad (HiDensity) es proyectado para producir una

concentracin de slidos de flujo debajo en el rango de relaves espesados (sin
asentamiento), pero no tan alta que el material no pueda ser bombeado. La
concentracin de slidos es aquella asociada con estas condiciones y el
aumento o disminucin de esta concentracin esta basado en la reologa.

Baje el inventario de la cama segn lo indicado por el nivel de la cama

del lodo. Debido a la dinmica del lodo, la densidad del flujo debajo ms
baja puede no ocurrir tan pronto cuando el nivel apropiado de la cama
sea alcanzado. Habr un perodo de atraso de hasta 12-14 horas.
Acciones correctivas deben ser iniciadas precozmente para tener tiempo
de retornar la unidad para las condiciones objetivo del flujo debajo.
Frecuentemente el flujo debajo asociado con nuevas condiciones
operacionales solamente ser observado en la descarga despus que
todos los slidos en el espesador hayan sido removidos.
Verifique si hay una proporcin alta de partculas gruesas en el flujo
debajo, considerando el efecto en la densidad del flujo debajo.
Raramente la distribucin de tamao de partculas gruesas resultar en
un flujo debajo de densidad ms alta, peor puede no resultar en
propiedades reolgicas elevadas.

Claridad insatisfactoria del flujo de sobra

Asumiendo que el tamao de partcula y/ o la mineraloga no mudaron

significantemente, el primer paso en la investigacin de claridad insatisfactoria
es colectar una muestra de la alimentacin de lo diluido y de lo floculado. Si los
floculados de la muestra estn apropiadamente y claramente aceptables,
entonces el sistema de floculacin debe ser investigado por una o ms
condiciones:
La solucin floculante fue preparada desapropiadamente, tal como la
concentracin de polmero de la solucin puede ser muy baja.
o La tasa de dosis del floculante puede ser aumentada para
compensar la baja concentracin.
Si la dosis del floculante es muy baja, consulte la seccin de
REQUISITOS DEL FLOCULANTE en este manual para abordar cuestiones
como:
o Aumente la dosis del floculante en pequeos incrementos
buscando una mejora en la floculacin.
o Cambie los puntos de adicin del floculante.
o Puntos de dosis del depsito de alimentacin y puntos de aguas
arriba para el pozo de alimentacin son seleccionados para dar

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 SOLUCIN DE PROBLEMAS DEL ARRANQUE
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

una mezcla apropiada para generar flculos aceptables y para

barrido de partculas ultra-finas de sobrenadante.

La concentracin de slidos de la alimentacin est fuera del rango

ptimo
o Abra o cierre los puertos de dilucin conforme sea requerido para
aumentar o disminuir la concentracin de la alimentacin.
o Antes de ajustar los puertos de dilucin trate de identificar si el
cambio en la concentracin de slidos de la alimentacin es
solamente para perodos cortos de sustentacin de la planta o si
ser experimentado para un perodo significante de tiempo. Si la
condicin ser para un perodo largo, los cambios en la dilucin
sern necesarios.
o Antes de ejecutar este procedimiento, realice ensayos de
laboratorio para identificar el rango de slidos en la alimentacin
ptimos para las nuevas condiciones de la planta del material
alimentado.

Taponamiento del tubo de flujo debajo

El flujo debajo est muy viscoso.

Considere usar el sistema de dilucin del flujo debajo hasta que el flujo
debajo retorne a una viscosidad aceptable
Asiente partculas gruesas para la salida durante la alimentacin inicial
de los relaves espesados fluidas en el tanque, provocando acumulacin.
Monitoree el flujo debajo colectando muestras para verificar si la
fraccin de partculas gruesas es significantemente ms alta que para la
alimentacin.
Bombee el flujo debajo peridicamente para el control.

Falla de energa

Por la razn del lodo ser no segregante y el torque de operacin ser alto, fallas
de energa son menos que un problema que para espesador de alta tasa.
Algunas pocas horas no producen serios problemas en el reinicio (para la
alimentacin y floculacin) pero esto ser determinado por la acumulacin en
el torque cuando el mecanismo sea reiniciado. Si el torque esta alto y no
vuelve al nominal, entonces la tasa de descarga flujo debajo puede necesitar
ser aumentada para disminuir la altura de la cama.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 ALARMAS DE ALTO TORQUE Y
SEALES DE ADVERTENCIA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

ALARMAS DE ALTO TORQUE Y SEALES DE ADVERTENCIA

La unidad de accionamiento del espesador esta equipada con alarmas para

alertar el operador que el torque de la unidad de accionamiento excedi los
lmites pre-ajustados. Hay dos alarmas, una para 40 % de torque y otra
alarma que suena en 55%. La desconexin del motor se ajusta en 90%.

Si el torque aumenta para el primer punto de ajuste (40% de torque) se debe

tomar una accin por los largos perodos de retencin que el espesador de alta
densidad opera. No tomar las debidas precauciones puede resultar en un
alcance del lmite de desconexin y el la salida de operacin del espesador de
lnea para ser lavado. Este es un proceso largo y costoso.

El problema de alto torque se debe normalmente a los relaves espesados con

alto lmite elstico causado por el exceso de nivel de la cama o tiempo extra de
residencia. Cuando la primera alarma suene, el operador debe iniciar la accin
reparadora. La siguiente lista de acciones es recomendada:

1. Evale las condiciones actuales del espesador de los relaves espesados

a. Verifique el nivel de la cama confirme manualmente. Compare con el
procedimiento operacional descrito.
b. Verifique la reologa del flujo debajo cada de presin de la lnea de
descarga, confirme con la cada del lodo. Conducir un cono de
abatimiento permitir al operador inspeccionar visualmente el flujo
debajo. Presencia excesiva de partculas gruesas puede ser vista o
sentida.
c. Dosificacin de floculante compare con las dosificaciones objetivos
normales.
d. Instrumento de presin o nivel de la cama funcionando apropiadamente.
e. Datos de tendencias recientes para desordenes significantes.
f. Desempeo de descarga de flujo debajo, descarga tph = alimentacin
tph.

2. Revise los datos de desempeo del espesador para ver si hay una
tendencia que pueda ser identificada que este contribuyendo para el
torque alto.
a. Alto nivel de la cama.
b. Dificultad de descargar el flujo debajo causando un aumento del nivel de
la cama.
c. Desordenes recientes de la planta permitiendo cambios significantes en
la alimentacin de slidos como partculas gruesas.
d. Instrumentos de nivel o presin de la cama no estn funcionando
apropiadamente dando error en la lectura y permitindole a la cama
acumularse sin el conocimiento del operador.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 ALARMAS DE ALTO TORQUE Y
SEALES DE ADVERTENCIA
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

3. Accin correctiva
a. La accin general a ser ejecutada es disminuir el nivel de la cama al
aumentar la tasa de bombeo del flujo debajo. Esto ayudar de dos
formas:
i. Reducir el tiempo de residencia de los slidos para producir
relaves espesados con lmite elstico menor. Nota: habr un
atraso (horas) entre cuando el nivel ms bajo de la cama es
alcanzado y cuando el lmite elstico menor del flujo debajo es
visto. Por esta razn es importante comenzar la reduccin del
nivel del lecho ms temprano de este proceso de modo que el
torque no contine acumulndose. El nivel de la cama no debe ser
reducido rpidamente, puede provocar espacios de vacos
conocidos como huecos de ratn. Un hueco del ratn es cuando
el flujo debajo es tomado principalmente del centro de la cama.
Los rastrillos no son capaces de mantener con una tasa de
descarga y el flujo debajo debe ser retirado del centro de la cama
en ves de alrededor del dimetro completo del espesador. Si el
hueco del ratn se produce entonces el flujo debajo tendr una
baja densidad an si existe un problema de torque alto.
ii. Si la tasa de flujo del flujo debajo es administrada correctamente
el barro en el rea del brazo del rastrillo ser removida. Este
material puede contener un exceso de partculas gruesas y
contribuir para el problema de torque alto. El beneficio principal
ser remover los relaves espesados uniformemente por todo el
dimetro del espesador.

b. Agua de dilucin puede ser necesaria para permitir el bombeo del flujo
aumentado de slidos de alto lmite elstico durante la extraccin de la
cama. El agua de dilucin es adicionada aguas arriba de las bombas de
descarga de flujo debajo y debe ser suficiente apenas para reducir la
densidad de los relaves espesados en 1 o 2 puntos porcentuales
c. Basado en informacin recogida sobre la operacin del espesador de alta
densidad (Paso 1) ejecute la accin correctiva para eliminar la raz del
problema de torque.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO DE DESCONEXIN
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

PROCEDIMIENTO DE DESCONEXIN

Hay dos procedimientos comunes de desconexin del espesador

Procedimiento 1:

Desconecte la alimentacin para el espesador. Use el sistema de retirada de

barro y/o drenaje del piso (si esta presente) para drenar completamente el
tanque del espesador. Se debe permitir que el mecanismo gire mientras el
mecanismo este siendo drenado. Esto asegurar que poco lodo permanezca en
el piso del espesador cuando el lquido est saliendo y consecuentemente un
trabajo menor de limpieza ser necesario. Conforme el nivel de lquido cae en
el tanque, observe cuidadosamente el indicador del mecanismo de torque. El
mecanismo del espesador est proyectado para ser balanceado cuando sea
sumergido. En algunos espesadores, el mecanismo se puede inclinar
levemente segn los brazos del rastrillo, se tornan sumergidos. Esto puede
hacer con que las lminas del rastrillo en un brazo se arrastre en el piso
levemente. Si el indicador del torque muestra un salto sbito en el torque
conforme el tanque est drenando, esto estar siendo provocado
probablemente por una condicin de desbalanceo. Contine drenando el
tanque con el mecanismo desconectado.

Cuando el tanque est completamente drenado, una manguera de presin alta

puede ser usada para lavar el barro remaneciente para el piso en el
drenaje/pozo de lodo. El mecanismo tambin debe ser rociado para ayudar en
la inspeccin
.
CUIDADO: Si una pequea cantidad de lquido es permitida de permanecer en
el tanque esta puede cubrir el pozo de lodo u otros drenajes en el piso del
espesador. El personal que trabaje en el tanque debe ser muy cuidadoso para
localizar y marcar cualquier pozo obscurecido o drenajes de barro para evitar
heridas o tropiezos accidentales.

Procedimiento 2:

Si el espesador tiene el agua retirada ms rpidamente que el sistema de

retirada de lodo y/o drenaje puede acomodar temporalmente bombas
adicionales para aumentar la velocidad de drenaje del tanque. Mientras tanto
cualquier bomba o manguera bajada en el tanque exigir que el mecanismo
sea desconectado. Nuevamente la alimentacin para el espesador debe ser
desconectada primero. Si es posible, use apenas el sistema de retirada de lodo
para iniciar la retirada del agua del tanque. Esto permitir que el mecanismo
permanezca en operacin y contine moviendo el lodo sedimentado para la
salida. Permita al mecanismo y al sistema de retirada de lodo que remueva un
mximo de capa de lodo del tanque si es posible, antes de usar bombas
adicionales. Cuando bombas adicionales y/o mangueras son introducidas en el

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO DE DESCONEXIN
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

tanque, el mecanismo debe ser desconectado. Observe los mismos cuidados y

mtodos conforme se destacan en el Procedimiento 1 y complete la retirada de
agua en el tanque.

O & M - 21261A REV. 8-2-11

 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MANTENIMIENTO
Y PIEZAS

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 MANTENIMIENTO DEL EQUIPO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MANTENIMIENTO DEL EQUIPO

1. Todos los tornillos y tuercas deben ser mantenidos apretados y

conservados con los alineamientos y ajustes originales. La inspeccin
debe ser realizada mensualmente.

2. Examine todas las piezas de desgaste semanalmente para determinar si

ocurri algn desgaste excesivo.

3. Mantenga el mecanismo y los alrededores limpios y libres de cualquier

acumulacin de residuos o escombro.

4. Para el mantenimiento necesario sobre la unidad de accionamiento, por

favor consulte la seccin de la UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO DEL
ESPESADOR de este manual.

5. Si la energa es cortada o si el mecanismo es parado por cualquier razn

por un perodo mayor que 30 minutos, desve el flujo hasta que el
mecanismo arranque nuevamente.

6. En la medida que las verificaciones de rutina sean realizadas, se

recomienda atencin especial al sonido de la operacin del mecanismo.
Cualquier sonido irregular o inusual debe ser investigado
inmediatamente debido que el mismo podra ser una indicacin de un
problema.

7. Cualquier movimiento de sacudida o irregular debe ser investigado

inmediatamente, siendo la causa determinada y remediada. El
mecanismo no se debe permitir continuar en operacin si el problema
persiste.

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 CONDICIONES DE EMERGENCA Y
SOLUCIN DE PROBLEMAS
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

CONDICIONES DE EMERGENCIA:

Una condicin de emergencia puede ser definida como aquella situacin, la

cual pudiera interferir drsticamente con la operacin del mecanismo, y que
pudiera requerir de una solucin inmediata. Todo procedimiento de emergencia
operativo para el equipo cubierto por este manual, debe necesariamente estar
coordinado con el plan maestro de tratamiento de toda la planta. Eso
depender del grado de automatizacin que haya sido provisto, la
disponibilidad de vas alternas de tratamiento, y de la prioridad anexa al flujo
de mantenimiento.

Emergencias externas tales como falla de la energa elctrica, repentino

aumento del flujo que exceda las condiciones de diseo, o falla de una parte de
los sistemas de tratamiento, son condiciones que debern ser tratadas en el
plan maestro.

Emergencias internas dentro de la unidad sern indicadas, si la alarma de

sobrecarga suena o los motores de la unidad motriz se detienen.

PROECDIMIENTOS DE EMERGNCIA

1. Derive o detenga inmediatamente la alimentacin y abra la lnea de

descarga de lodos para drenar cualquier acumulacin de lodos.

2. Si es posible, permita al mecanismo continuar operando mientras no sea

indicado ningn aumento de torque. Esto podra resultar en una
eliminacin del torque acumulado.

3. Si la sobrecarga es muy alta y la llave de corte induce la parada del

mecanismo, ser necesario drenar el tanque y evacuar el lodo.

SOLUCIN DE PROBLEMAS:

1. LA ALARMA DE SOBRECARGA SUENA O LA UNIDAD DE ACIONAMIENTO

PARA

a. Esta condicin es probablemente ocasionada por la excesiva

acumulacin de slidos en el fondo del tanque, como resultado de una
velocidad de descarga del lodo menor que la velocidad de introduccin
de slidos en la alimentacin. Un ajuste deber ser realizado en la
velocidad de entrada de la alimentacin. Inmediatamente haga una
derivacin en la alimentacin y abra la lnea de la corriente de flujo
debajo para eliminar la acumulacin de slidos. Permita que el

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 CONDICIONES DE EMERGENCA Y
SOLUCIN DE PROBLEMAS
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

mecanismo contine operando, de ser posible. Si la sobrecarga es tan

pesada, de tal forma que los interruptores de corte continan
deteniendo la maquina, ser necesario drenar el tanque y descargar los
slidos.
b. Una interferencia con los brazos de rastra puede ser causada tambin
por un objeto externo (Ej. rocas, herramientas, etc.) que fue arrojado
dentro del tanque. Detenga el mecanismo y vea si el objeto puede ser
removido. (Puede emplease una especie de gancho o anzuelo para
pescar el objeto). Si no funciona este mtodo, ser necesario cortar el
influyente para prevenir una gran acumulacin del lodo. Si el objeto no
puede ser removido con el tanque lleno, ser necesario drenar el Tanque
y removerlo antes de reiniciar el mecanismo. Verifique que los brazos de
rastra no han sufrido dao o deformaciones antes del reinicio de las
operaciones.
c. Unos de los brazos de rastra puede estar arrastrados en el fondo del
tanque. Esto es causado por una desalineacin o posible falla en una
conexin. Para remediarlo, el tanque debe ser drenado y el brazo
reconectado o realineado.

2. LA LNEA DEL FLUJO DEBAJO (DESCARGA DE SLIDO) SE ENCUENTRA

ENTUPIDA:

a. Esto es resultado de la corriente de flujo debajo, la cual se ha tornado

demasiado espesa. Para limpiar la lnea, introduzca un chorro de agua a
presin hasta que la lnea sea destapada completamente.

b. Esta condicin puede ser causada tambin por un objeto externo que ha
entrado en la lnea tapndola. Use el mismo procedimiento recomendado
en el punto 1b arriba descrito. En cualquier caso, la fuente del problema
debe ser localizada y corregida antes de reiniciar el mecanismo.

3. PROBLEMAS CON EL REDUCTOR DE VELOCIDAD:

Consulte el manual de operacin y mantenimiento del reductor de

velocidad en la seccin de la UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO del motor.

4. PROBLEMAS CON EL MOTOR DE LA UNIDAD:

Consulte la seccin de la UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO DEL ESPESADOR

de este manual.

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 CONDICIONES DE EMERGENCA Y
SOLUCIN DE PROBLEMAS
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

5. LA UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO COMIENZA A OPERAR

RUIDOSAMENTE:

Esto es un indicativo de que la unidad posee una necesidad de

lubricacin. Consulte la seccin de la UNIDAD DE ACCIONAMIENTO de
este manual.

NO INTENTE CONTINUAR OPERANDO EL MECANISMO CUANDO SE INDIQUE

UNA CONDICIN DE SOBRECARGA. IDENTIFIQUE EL PROBLEMA Y
RESUELVALO.

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 PRECAUCIONES DE ALMACENAMIENTO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

PRECAUCIONES DE ALMACENAMIENTO

Es preferible almacenar todos los artculos mecnicos y elctricos bajo techo y

en una superficie cerrada, seca y bien ventilada a temperatura constante, a la
medida de lo posible. El equipo deber estar adecuadamente soportado para
prevenir distorsiones y tensones indebidas. Deber colocarse al menos a 6
pulgadas del piso.

Bien sea que se almacene el equipo bajo techo o en un lugar abierto, los
siguientes pasos deben ser seguidos:

Corto Plazo es de 30 a 120 das

Largo Plazo es de 120 das o ms.

ALMACENAMIENTO A CORTO PLAZO:

Las instrucciones siguientes tambin aplican existe un perodo de tiempo entre

la instalacin y el arranque o entre el arranque y el equipo estar en operacin.
Estos paso son requeridos para proteger el equipo contra corrosin y asegurar
la condicin de operacin.

1. Cubra con una lona que permita una adecuada ventilacin, drenaje, y
acceso para inspeccin al rea protegida contra viento, luz solar directa,
lluvia y nieve.

NOTA: No se recomienda el uso de lonas de plstico si hay calentadores

energizados en el espacio.

2. Cubra todas las superficies de metal que no son pintados, como ejes,
con aceite, grasa, o un inhibidor de xido (i.e. cosmoline).

4. Deben ser usados calentadores en climas fros o hmedos.

5. Al menos una vez al mes, vuelva a lubricar todos los artculos

internamente y con grasa todas las superficies exteriores de los sellos.
Inspeccione todo el equipo, en busca de signos de corrosin y poder
tomar las medidas correctivas necesarias.

6. Si la energa est conectada, opere el equipo por cinco minutos

aproximadamente una vez por semana para evitar el endurecimiento de
los rodamientos, y para mantener la condicin del lubricante y la
flexibilidad de los sellos y las correas si se utilizan. Si la energa no est
conectada, el equipo debe ser girado manualmente suficiente para el
conseguir el los objetivos arriba mencionados.

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 PRECAUCIONES DE ALMACENAMIENTO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

7. Vace la condensacin de la envoltura del engranaje principal por lo

menos una vez a la semana o deje la vlvula de drenaje abierto para
permitir que la condensacin que se forma puede drenar.

8. Adems de estos pasos, los manuales de instrucciones de los fabricantes

de los reductores de velocidad, unidades motrices de velocidad variable,
etc. se debe leer y seguir sus instrucciones.

ALMACENAMIENTO A LARGO PLAZO:

Adems de los pasos ya descritos, los siguientes deben ser considerados bien
sea almacenaje interno o externo:

Dependiendo de las condiciones ambientales, las superficies pintadas debern

ser revisadas peridicamente para determinar el deterioro de la pintura. Una
amplia variacin en la temperatura ambiente conduce a condensacin y
posterior oxidacin. Deben tomarse medidas para proteger las reas afectadas.
Las pinturas tipo Bitumastic tienden a volverse frgiles y a desconcharse. Se
requiere entonces, incrementar la ventilacin y reducir la humedad. Donde el
equipo est en cubierto y protegido, las puertas de inspeccin, techo, etc.
Deben ser ligeramente abiertas para incrementar la ventilacin. Las reas
relativamente pequeas y ductos deben ser cubiertos con grasa a prueba de
agua o anti-corrosivo.

REDUCTORES DE VELOCIDAD, ENGRANAJE, ETC

Los respectivos manuales de instruccin del fabricante deben ser seguidos

cuidadosamente. Por lo menos, los siguientes pasos deben tomarse adems de
las medidas pedidas en "Corto plazo".

1. Las unidades que estaban equipadas con un chrter seco deben llenarse
completamente con el aceite, en caso de ser el tipo lubricado con aceite.
2. Cualquier respiradero, rejilla de ventilacin, etc., debe ser cubierta con
cinta.
3. Desconecte cargas que cuelgan o bloques de soporte para aliviar la
carga de los rodamientos.
4. Vace el aceite cada seis meses y rellene con aceite de viscosidad
adecuada. Engrase esas unidades que estn lubricados con grasa.
5. Etiquete la unidad para indicar lo que debe hacerse antes de poner en
marcha, tales como:
a. Vace el aceite al nivel operativo
b. Retire los recubrimientos de los respiraderos y rejillas de ventilacin
c. Vuelva a engrasar
d. Vuelva a conectar cargas que cuelgan o eliminar el bloqueo

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 PRECAUCIONES DE ALMACENAMIENTO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

MOTORES ELCTRICOS

Las siguientes son las precauciones mnimas consideradas por los fabricantes
de los motores para el almacenamiento externo de motores elctricos:

1. Recubra todas las piezas mecanizadas, como unidades de eje, con

cosmoline o material similar, si no est ya protegido. Los motores
debera ser elevados en un mnimo de seis pulgadas sobre el piso.

2. Remueva el plstico que cubre los motores y cubre los motores con una
lona impermeable. Esto ofrecer proteccin de las inclemencias mientras
que est permitiendo respirar el motor.

3. Mantenga calientes los motores. Si equipado con un calentador de

espacio, mantngalo encendido. Si los calentadores no fueron
suministrados, calentadores auxiliares se debe utilizar para mantener
clido y libre de condensacin los bobinados del los motores.

4. Motores con rodamientos lubricados con grasa ya tiene inhibidores de la

roya inherente en la grasa. El eje debe ser girado lentamente a mano
por lo menos una vez cada 30 das. Esto distribuir la grasa en los
rodamientos.

5. Todos los drenajes sern totalmente operable mientras que estn en el

almacenamiento, y / o elimine los enchufes de fuga. Los motores deben
ser almacenados de modo que el drenaje se encuentra en el punto ms
bajo. Todos los respiraderos y drenajes "T" automticas deben ser
operables para permitir la respiracin en puntos diferentes de los
encajes de los rodamientos. Los motores verticales deben ser
almacenados en posicin vertical.

6. Todas las unidades estn equipadas con calentadores ha de tener los

calentadores conectados, si las condiciones de almacenamiento son
similares (en cualquier forma) a las condiciones atmosfricas
experimentados en la operacin.

7. Bobinados deben ser chequeado por un meghmetro en el momento que

el equipo se pone en el almacenamiento. En la terminacin de
almacenamiento, el motor debe ser chequeado por un meghmetro
antes de la aplicacin de poder. Las indicaciones mnimas deben ser 1
megohm para motores evaluado 600 voltios y menos. Cualquier cada
debajo de este punto se necesita secando de los partes elctricos o
mecnicos. En caso de que una gran cantidad de motores se almacena,
una inspeccin debe hacerse mediante la eliminacin de los soportes de
los extremos y la inspeccin visual de la presencia de agua en la grasa o

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 PRECAUCIONES DE ALMACENAMIENTO
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

el xido en los cojinetes. Si est presente, sustituir los rodamientos y

lubricar.

8. Grasa en los motores ha de ser purgado en el mismo tiempo que la

salida del almacn, asegurndose de que una oferta amplia de grasa
fresco est en cada cavidad de grasa.

9. Todas las partes externas y motores sometidos a la corrosin debe ser

protegida por un revestimiento resistente a corrosin.

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 EXPLICACIN DE NMEROS Y LISTA DE PIEZAS
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

Nmeros de temes:

Un nmero de tem que identifica a la pieza se muestra en el diseo de

montaje. (Consulte el segmento de muestra del diseo de Arreglo General y la
presentacin de la Lista de piezas en la pgina siguiente). Los nmeros de
temes en crculos son mostrados en el diseo con flechas apuntando para cada
pieza. En la lista de piezas, los nmeros de temes son encontrados en la
columna ubicada a la izquierda de la lista de piezas. Los nmeros de temes
son nmeros de tres dgitos. El primer dgito es el nmero de la pgina de la
lista de piezas. El segundo y tercer dgito son el nmero de la lnea en la
pgina en que la pieza esta listada.

Nmeros de la pieza:

Los nmeros de la pieza identifican los nmeros de los diseos de fabricacin.

Los diseos de fabricacin no estn incluidos en este manual de operacin y
mantenimiento.

G E NE RAL ARR AN GEM E NT

PA RT S LIS T

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

21352 PARTS LIST 2 77,172 1

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS:

200 A GENERAL NOTES 0

201 C FOUNDATION LOADS 0
202 C GENERAL ARRANGEMENT - PLAN VIEW 0
203 D ANCHOR RING ASSEMBLY 0
204 B GENERAL ARRANGEMENT - ELEVATION VIEW 0

REFERENCE DRAWINGS:

A60B-001A E FABRICATION AREA CLEANING REQUIREMENTS (D) 0

P24Z-024A E WESTECH STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 0
WAST-0001 D FIELD ERECTION REFERENCE TAG 0

05/04/11 MJH HK NNK Assembly Description

Total Weight 77172 kgs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
INDEX PAGE
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M DIA.

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21472 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:21 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

1110 0 TAILINGS THICKENER GENERAL ASSEMBLY 0

1111 0 TAILINGS THICKENER GENERAL ASSEMBLY BRIDGE & PLATFORM 0
1112 0 TAILINGS THICKENER GENERAL ASSEMBLY BRIDGE & PLATFORM 0
1113 0 TAILINGS THICKENER GENERAL ASSEMBLY INFLUENT & FEEDWELL 0
1114 0 TAILINGS THICKENER GENERAL ASSEMBLY MECHANISM 0
1115 0 TAILINGS THICKENER GENERAL ASSEMBLY MECHANISM 0

05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Total Weight kgs

Assembly Description
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

1201 A 0 COLUMN 10,033 1 0

1202 0 COLUMN DETAILS 0
1203 0 COLUMN DETAILS 0
1204 A 0 TORQUE TUBE 15,263 1 0
1205 0 TORQUE TUBE DETAILS 0
1206 0 TORQUE TUBE DETAILS 0
1207A 0 TORQUE TUBE TO DRIVE CLAMP PLATE A 64 8 0
1208 A 0 TORQUE TUBE TO DRIVE CLAMP PLATE B 64 8 0
1209 A 0 SHORT RAKE ARM 11,282 2 0
1210 0 SHORT RAKE ARM DETAILS 0
1211 0 SHORT RAKE ARM DETAILS 0
1212 A 0 INNER RAKE ARM A 7,755 1 0
1213 A 0 INNER RAKE ARM B 7,755 1 0
1214 0 INNER RAKE ARM DETAILS 0
1215 0 INNER RAKE ARM DETAILS 0
1216 0 INNER RAKE ARM DETAILS 0
1217 A 0 MID RAKE ARM A 3,225 1 0
1218 A 0 MID RAKE ARM B 3,225 1 0
1219 0 MID RAKE ARM DETAILS 0
1220 0 MID RAKE ARM DETAILS 0
1221 A 0 OUTER RAKE ARM A 1,620 1 0
1222 B 0 OUTER RAKE ARM B 1,619 1 0
1223 0 OUTER RAKE ARM DETAILS 0
1224 0 OUTER RAKE ARM DETAILS 0
1225 A 0 PICKET SUPPORT A 1,292 1 0
1226 A 0 PICKET SUPPORT B 1,268 1 0
1227 A 0 PICKET SUPPORT BASE A 26 2 0
1227 B 0 PICKET SUPPORT BASE B 30 2 0
1228 A 0 INNER PICKET A 23 1 0
1228 B 0 INNER PICKET B 24 1 0
1228 C 0 INNER PICKET C 24 1 0
1228 D 0 INNER PICKET D 25 1 0
1228 E 0 INNER PICKET E 26 1 0
1228 F 0 INNER PICKET F 27 1 0
1228 G 0 INNER PICKET G 28 1 0
1228 H 0 INNER PICKET H 29 1 0
1228 I 0 INNER PICKET I 30 1 0
1228 J 0 INNER PICKET J 31 1 0
1228 K 0 INNER PICKET K 32 1 0
1228 L 0 INNER PICKET L 33 1 0
1229 A 0 TRANSISTION PICKET A 30 1 0
1230 A 0 TRANSISTION PICKET B 30 1 0
1231 A 0 OUTER PICKET A 23 1 0
1231 B 0 OUTER PICKET B 24 1 0
1231 C 0 OUTER PICKET C 25 1 0
1231 D 0 OUTER PICKET D 26 1 0
1231 E 0 OUTER PICKET E 26 1 0
1231 F 0 OUTER PICKET F 27 1 0
1231 G 0 OUTER PICKET G 28 1 0
1231 H 0 OUTER PICKET H 29 1 0
05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Assembly Description
Total Weight 65121 kgs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

1231 I 0 OUTER PICKET I 30 1 0

1232 A 0 CONER SCRAPER 358 2 0
1233 0 CONE SCRAPER DETAILS 0
1234 A 0 TORQUE TUBE BRACE 88 4 0
1235 A 0 TORQUE TUBE BRACE PAD 4 0

05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Assembly Description

Total Weight 476 kgs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

1301 A 0 PLATFORM CENTER 1,698 1 0

1302 0 PLATFORM CENTER DETAILS 0
1303 0 PLATFORM CENTER DETAILS 0
1304 A 0 PLATFORM SIDE 550 2 0
1305 0 PLATFORM SIDE DETAILS 0
1306 A 0 WALKWAY BOTTOM INNER PANEL 739 1 0
1307 0 WALKWAY BOTTOM INNER PANEL DETAILS 0
1308 A 0 WALKWAY BOTTOM OUTER PANEL 1,093 1 0
1309 0 WALKWAY BOTTOM OUTER PANEL DETAILS 0
1310 A 0 WALKWAY TOP INNER PANEL 1,447 1 0
1311 0 WALKWAY TOP INNER PANEL DETAILS 0
1312 A 0 WALKWAY TOP OUTER PANEL 864 1 0
1313 0 WALKWAY TOP OUTER PANEL DETAILS 0
1314 A 0 WALKWAY INNER END BEAM 576 4 0
1315 A 0 WALKWAY OUTER END BEAM 236 2 0
1316 A 0 WALKWAY STRUT A - RIGHT 48 1 0
1316 B 0 WALKWAY STRUT A - LEFT 48 1 0
1317 A 0 WALKWAY STRUT B - RIGHT 72 1 0
1317 B 0 WALKWAY STRUT B - LEFT 72 1 0
1318 A 0 WALKWAY STRUT C - RIGHT 204 4 0
1318 B 0 WALKWAY STRUT C - LEFT 204 4 0
1319 A 0 WALKWAY STRUT D 104 2 0
1320 A 0 WALKWAY STRUT E - RIGHT 72 1 0
1320 B 0 WALKWAY STRUT E - LEFT 72 1 0
1321 A 0 WALKWAY STRUT F - RIGHT 48 1 0
1321 B 0 WALKWAY STRUT F - LEFT 48 1 0
1322 A 0 TOP FLANGE SPLICE PLATE 20 4 0
1322 B 0 TOP WEB SPLICE PLATE 2 2 0
1322 C 0 BOTTOM FLANGE SPLICE PLATE 8 4 0
1322 D 0 BOTTOM WEB SPLICE PLATE 2 2 0
1323 A 0 WALKWAY TOP MID SPLICE DIAGONAL 26 1 0
1323 B 0 WALKWAY BOTTOM END SPLICE DIAGONAL 26 1 0
1323 C 0 WALKWAY SIDE DIAGONAL 420 14 0
1323 D 0 WALKWAY SIDE END SPLICE DIAGONAL 58 2 0
1323 E 0 WALKWAY BOTTOM MID SPLICE DIAGONAL 26 1 0
1324 A 0 MONORAIL SUPPORT A 130 2 0
1325 A 0 MONORAIL SUPPORT B 99 1 0
1326 A 0 PLATFORM MONORAIL 178 1 0
1326 B 0 MONORAIL EXTENSION 92 1 0
1327 A 0 PLATFORM HANDRAIL BACK 68 1 0
1327 B 0 PLATFORM KICKPLATE BACK 32 1 0
1328 A 0 PLATFORM HANDRAIL RIGHT 79 1 0
1328 B 0 PLATFORM KICKPLATE RIGHT 37 1 0
1329 A 0 PLATFORM HANDRAIL LEFT 79 1 0
1329 B 0 PLATFORM KICKPLATE LEFT 37 1 0
1330 A 0 WALKWAY OUTER HANDRAIL RIGHT 45 1 0
1331 A 0 WALKWAY OUTER HANDRAIL LEFT 45 1 0
1332 A 0 WALKWAY MID HANDRAIL RIGHT 102 2 0
1333 A 0 WALKWAY MID HANDRAIL LEFT 102 2 0
1334 A 0 WALKWAY INNER HANDRAIL RIGHT 15 1 0
05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Assembly Description
Total Weight 9923 kgs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

1335 A 0 WALKWAY INNER HANDRAIL LEFT 15 1 0

1336 A 0 GRATING 1 0
1337 A 0 PLATFORM SLIDE PLATE 4 0
1337 B 0 PLATFORM WASHER 8 8 0
1337 C 0 BEARING PLATE ASSEMBLY 8 2 0
1338 A 0 CONTROL PANEL SUPPORT 24 2 0

05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Assembly Description

Total Weight 55 kgs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

1400 A 0 FEED PIPE A1 2,160 2 0

1401 A 0 FEED PIPE A2 661 1 0
1402 A 0 FEED PIPE B1 1,670 2 0
1403 A 0 FEED PIPE B2 494 1 0
1404 A 0 FEED PIPE B3 352 1 0
1405 A 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 1 873 1 0
1406 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 1 - DETAILS 0
1407 A 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 2 740 1 0
1408 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 2 - DETAILS 0
1409 A 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 3 669 1 0
1410 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 3 - DETAILS 0
1411 A 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 4 607 1 0
1412 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 4 - DETAILS 0
1413 A 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 5 613 1 0
1414 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 5 - DETAILS 0
1415 A 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 6 599 1 0
1416 0 FEEDWELL SECTION 6 - DETAILS 0
1417 A 0 CLOSURE PLATE A 128 16 0
1417 B 0 CLOSURE PLATE SUPPORT 18 0
1418 A 0 CLOSURE PLATE B 8 1 0
1419 A 0 CLOSURE PLATE C 8 1 0
1420 A 0 FEEDWELL SUPPORT A 36 4 0
1421 A 0 FEEDWELL SUPPORT B 112 4 0
1422 A 0 FEEDWELL SUPPORT BEAM 406 2 0
1423 A 0 FLOC HEADER A 240 1 0
1424 A 0 FLOC HEADER B 414 2 0
1425 A 0 FLOC PIPE VALVE SECTION 236 4 0
1426 A 0 DOSE LINE B 33 1 0
1427 A 0 DOSE LINE C1 34 1 0
1427 B 0 DOSE LINE C2 56 1 0
1428 A 0 DOSE LINE D 175 1 0
1429 A 0 DOSE LINE E1 58 1 0
1429 B 0 DOSE LINE E2 126 1 0
1430 A 0 FEED PIPE A GASKET 4 0
1430 B 0 FEED PIPE B GASKET 5 0
1431 A 0 INFLUENT PIPE SUPPORT U-BOLT A 133 7 0
1432 A 0 INFLUENT PIPE SUPPORT U-BOLT B 126 7 0

05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Assembly Description

Total Weight 11767 kgs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

7MF4133-1CA70-1A DSIII SERIES PRESSURE GAGE 1 0

P# (7MF4133-1CA70-1AC7-Z+B21+M43+Y01+Y21)
7MF4825-1HM30 FRONT FLUSH DIAPHRAGM 1/4"-18 NPT 1 0
0
SA8-1146-1 SOURCE HOLDER 1 0
(28" DENSITY SYSTEM) 0
DET15000-4-PA DENSITY DETECTOR 1 0
(28" DENSITY SYSTEM)
BRKT-3787-28 PIPE MOUNTING BRACKET 1 0
(28" DENSITY SYSTEM)
X96SHPA-000S000 MICROPROCESSOR 1 0
(28" DENSITY SYSTEM) 0
CBLE-11635-30 INTER-CONNECT CABLE 1 0
(28" DENSITY SYSTEM)
0
SA8-1146-1 SOURCE HOLDER 1 0
(20" DENSITY SYSTEM)
DET15000-4-PA DENSITY DETECTOR 1 0
(20" DENSITY SYSTEM)
BRKT-3787-20 PIPE MOUNTING BRACKET 1 0
(20" DENSITY SYSTEM) 0
X96SPHA-000S000 MICROPROCESSOR 1 0
(20" DENSITY SYSTEM)
CBLE-11635-30 INTER-CONNECT CABLE 1 0
(20" DENSITY SYSTEM)

SA8-1146-1 SOURCE HOLDER 2 0

(12" DENSITY SYSTEM)
DET15000-4-PA DENSITY DETECTOR 2 0
(12" DENSITY SYSTEM) 0
BRKT-3787-12 PIPE MOUNTING BRACKET 2 0
(12" DENSITY SYSTEM)
X96SPHA-000S000 MICROPROCESSOR 2 0
(12" DENSITY SYSTEM)
CBLE-11635-30 INTER-CONNECT CABLE 2 0
(12" DENSITY SYSTEM) 2 0

7ME6310-6YL15-4AA 28" MAGNETIC FLOW METER 3100 1 0

FDK: 083N8302 PROTECTION RING 28" 1 0
7ME6310-6FJ15-4AA 20" MAGNETIC FLOW METER 3100 1 0

7ME6310-5DJ15-4AA 12" MAGNETIC FLOW METER 3100 2 0

FDK:085U1053 WALL MOUNT KIT FOR TRANSMITTER 2 0

FDK:001STCAB REMOTE MOUNT TRANSMITTER CABLE 120 0

05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Total Weight kgs

Assembly Description
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

8908T48 WIRE ROPE - 3/16" - 160 FT LENGTH 1 A

3868T24 WIRE ROPE CLIP - 3/16" 40 A

3494T12 WIRE ROPE THIMBLE 20 A

3000T57 TURNBUCKLE 10 0

PVC PIPE 2" DIA SCH 80 x 73 FT LENGTH 1

ACL-00005-M A U-BOLT, 6", W/ 4 NUTS 10 0

(FLOC HEADER TO WALKWAY)

UBO304-050C0400 U-BOLT 4" PIPE, 1/2-13 4 0

(DOSING PIPE TO SUPPORT)

AGA-00001-M FLANGE GASKET, 6" -RING 3 0

(FLOC HEADER)

AGA-00001-K FLANGE GASKET, 4" -RING 10 0

(FLOC DOSING PIPES)

UBO304-025C0125 U-BOLT 1 1/4" PIPE, 1/4-20 4 0

(CONTROL PANEL SPPT)

2511A Royce Model 2511A Transmitter 0

220VAC, 4-20mA & relay outputs, 50 watt heater,
LCD display, NEMA 4X housing. Complete with a
remote dual crystal transducer model 25DN with
30 ft. of interconnecting cable and a quick
release hand rail bracket.

05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Total Weight kgs

Assembly Description
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX B

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

BHH490-150650 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1 1/2 x 6 1/2 4 0

NF490-150 HEX NUT 1 1/2" W/ FW 4 0
(CAGE TO PICKET SUPPORT)

BHH490-150675 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1 1/2 x 6 3/4 4 0

NF490-150 HEX NUT 1 1/2 W/ FW 4 0
(RAKE TO PICKET SPPT. B)

BHH325-150C0500 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1 1/2" X 5" 40 0

NF325-150 HEX NUT 1 1/2" W/ FW 40 0
(CAGE TO DRIVE)

BHH490-150C0550 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1 1/2" X 5 1/2" 24 0

NF490-150 HEX NUT 1 1/2 W/ FW 24 0
(COLUMN TO DRIVE)

BHH307-075C0225 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/4" X 2 1/4" 16 0

NF307-075 HEX NUT 3/4" W/ FW 16 0
(TORQUE TUBE TO TORQUE TUBE BRACE)

NF307-075 HEX NUT 3/4" W/ FW 16 0

(CAGE TO CONE SCRAPER)

BHH307-075C0350 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/4" X 2 1/2" 16 0

NF307-075 HEX NUT 3/4" W/ FW 16 0
(CAGE BRACE TO PAD)

BHH307-050C0450 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1/2" X 4 1/2" 23 0

NF307-050 HEX NUT 1/2" W/ FW 23 0
(RAKE TO PICKET)

BHH307-050C0175 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1/2" X 1 3/4" 11 0

NF307-050 HEX NUT 1/2" W/ FW 11 0
(RAKE TO PICKET)

BHH307-150C0650 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1 1/2" X 6 1/2" FULL THREAD 4 0

NF307-150 HEX NUT 1 1/2" W/ FW 4 0
(COLUMN LEVELING)

BHH325-075C0225 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/4" X 2 1/4" 69 0

W/ FW 69
(CAGE TO DRIVE CLAMP PLATE)

05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Total Weight kgs

Assembly Description
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

BHH307-050C0250 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1/2" X 2 1/2" 34 0

NF307-050 HEX NUT 1/2" W/ FW 34 0
(HANDRAIL PLATFORM TO KICKPLATE)

BHH307-062C0175 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8" X 1 3/4" 70 0

NF307-062 HEX NUT 5/8" W/ FW 70 0
(HANDRAIL TO WALKWAY) (40)
(HANDRAIL TO PLATFORM) (30)

BHH307-075C0225 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/4" X 2 1/4" 32 0

NF307-075 HEX NUT 3/4" W/ FW 32 0
(WALKWAY SPLICE BOTTOM/TOP)

BHH307-062C0150 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8" X 1 1/2" 4 0

NF307-062 HEX NUT 5/8" W/ FW 4 0
(CONTROL PANEL SPPT. TO PLATFORM)

BHH307-075C0200 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/4" X 2" 38 0

NF307-075 HEX NUT 3/4" W/ FW 38 0
(WALKWAY DIAGONAL SPLICES)

BHH307-075C0225 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/4" X 2 1/4" 48 0

NF307-075 HEX NUT 3/4" W/ FW 48 0
(PLATFORM TO PLATFORM SIDE)

BHH307-062C0225 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8" X 2 1/4" 164 0

NF307-062 HEX NUT 5/8" W/ FW 164 0
(WALKWAY TOP TO VERTICAL STRUTS) (72)
(WALKWAY BTM TO VERTICAL STRUTS) (64)
(PLATFORM MONORAIL TO MONORAIL SPPT. A) (8)
(MONORAIL SPPT. A TO WALKWAY TOP) (16)
(MONORIAL SPPT. A TO WALKWAY OUTER END BEAM) (4)

BHH307-075C050 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/4" X 5" 8 0

NF307-075 HEX NUT 3/4" W/ FW 8 0
(WALKWAY TO DRIVE)

NF307-075 HEX NUT 3/4" W/ FW 16 0

(PLATFORM TO WW BTM. INNER) (8)
(WW BTM. OUTER PANEL TO BEARING PLATE) (8)

NF307-062 HEX NUT 5/8" W/ FW 8 0

(PLATFORM TO VERTICAL STRUT INNER END BTM) (8)

NF307-100 HEX NUT 1" W/ FW 112 0

(INFLUENT UBOLT TO WALKWAY)

05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Total Weight kgs

Assembly Description
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

BHH307-037C0200 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/8" X 2" 4 0

NF307-037 HEX NUT 3/8" W/ FW 4 0
(CONTROL PANEL TO SUPPORT)

BHH307-062C0200 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8" X 2" 2 0

NF307-062 HEX NUT 5/8" W/ BEVEL WASHER 2 0
(MONORAIL EXT. TO MONORAIL SPPT.)

BHH307-062C0200 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8" X 2" 4 0

NF307-062 HEX NUT 5/8" W/ FW 4 0
(MONORAIL TO WALKWAY TOP)

BHH307-062C0225 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8" X 2 1/4" 64 0

NF307-062 HEX NUT 5/8" W/ FW 64 0
(WW INNER BEAM TO WW TOP/BTM)

05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Total Weight kgs

Assembly Description
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

BHH307-125C0400 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1 1/4" X 4" 212 0

NF307-125 HEX NUT 1 1/4" W/ FW 212 0
(INFLUENT PIPE A & B)

BHH307-075C0325 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/4" X 3 1/4" 16 0

NF307-075 HEX NUT 3/4" W/ FW 16 0
(DILUTION HEADER)

BHH307-062C0300 CAPSCREW HEX HD 5/8" X 3" 80 0

NF307-062 HEX NUT 5/8" W/ FW 80 0
(DILUTION DOSING PIPE/VALVE SECTION)

BHH307-075C0200 CAPSCREW HEX HD 3/4" X 2" 134 0

NF307-075 HEX NUT 3/4" W/ FW 134 0
(FEEDWELL SPLICE) (102)
(FEEDWELL TO FEEDWELL SUPPORT B) (8)
(FEEDWELL SUPPORT B TO PLATFORM) (8)
(FEEDWELL SUPPORT A TO FEEDWELL) (8)
(FEEDWELL SUPPORT A TO FEEDWELL SUPPORT BEAM) (8)

BHH307-087C0250 CAPSCREW HEX HD 7/8" X 2 1/2" 8 0

NF307-087 HEX NUT 7/8" W/ FW 8 0
(FEEDWELL SUPPORT BEAM TO PLATFORM)

BHH307-050C0150 CAPSCREW HEX HD 1/2" X 1 1/2" 18 0

NF307-050 HEX NUT 1/2" W/ FW 18 0
(DILUTION PLATE TO CLIP)

05/11/11 KWW RV BFB Total Weight kgs

Assembly Description
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
TAILINGS THICKENER ERECTION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21692 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:30 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

A PANEL LAYOUT A
A ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC A
A ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC A
A ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC/ ANNUNCIATION CONTACTS A
A FIELD WIRING DIAGRAM A
A FIELD WIRING DIAGRAM A

P504 WIRE, DUCT, BITS, FASTENERS, ETC 1 0

CSD20168SS ENCLOSURE, TYPE 4X, WALL MOUNT 24 1 0

CP2016 BACK PANEL, 18.2 X 14.2 8 1 0
CMFKSS MOUNTING FOOT KIT, SS 1 0

APD1126DNR PILOT LIGHT, LED RED, 120V TRANSFORMER 1 0

APD1126DNA PILOT LIGHT, LED AMBER, 120V TRANSFORMER 2 A

ASD320N SELECTOR SWITCH, 3 POSITION W/2NO CONTACT 1 A

BST010 CONTACT BLOCKS, NO 3 A

ABD100 PUSHBUTTON BASE, 30mm 1 0

ABD1BNR PUSHBUTTON, RED 1 0
BST010 CONTACT BLOCKS, NO 1 0
ABD100 PUSHBUTTON BASE, 30mm 1 0
ABD2BNR PUSHBUTTON, EXTENDED RED 1 0
BST001 CONTACT BLOCKS, NC 1 0
OL-KL1 LOCKING GUARD COVER 1 0
10250T333 POTENTIOMETER, 10K OHMS 1 A
ABD100 PUSHBUTTON BASE, 30mm 1 A
ABD1BNB BLACK PUSHBUTTON HEAD ONLY 1 A
BST001 CONTACT BLOCKS, NC 2 A
BST010 CONTACT BLOCKS, NO 1 A
105STA-N5 BEACON ASSY.,AMBER, 120VAC 1 0
105PM MOUNTING BRACKET, 3/4 PIPE MNT (FOR 105 SERIES BEACONS) 1 0
876-N5 HORN, 120VAC, W/BACKBOX TYPE 4X, 103 dB, .13A 1 0
HUB75D HUB, MYERS 3/4" INSUL 2 0
NIP3/4XCLS-RIGID NIPPLE, 3/4 X CLOSE RIGID GALVANIZED. 2 0

FH8-1PC30-L FUSE HOLDER, 1 POLE, 30A CC 1 0

FNQ-R-3 TIME DELAY FUSE, 3 AMP 1 0

RH4B-ULAC120V RELAY, FOUR POLE, 120VAC W/INDICATION LIGHT 1 A

SH4B-05C FINGERSAFE RELAY BASE, FOUR POLE 1 A

03/29/11 JRL PES NRT Assembly Description

Total Weight 32 lbs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
THICKENER ALARM STATION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21069 21261A INDEX B

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:28 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

RH3B-ULAC120V RELAY, THREE POLE, 120VAC W/INDICATION LIGHT 2 A

SH3B-05C FINGERSAFE RELAY BASE, THREE POLE 2 A

RH1B-ULAC120V RELAY,SINGLE POLE, 120VAC W/INDICATION LIGHT 5 A

SH1B-05C FINGERSAFE RELAY BASE, SINGLE POLE 5 A

3044102 TERMINAL BLOCK, 6mm UT4 46 A

3047028 TERMINAL BLOCK, 6.2mm, END COVER, GRAY 2 0
0800886 TERMINAL BLOCK, END BRACKET UT4 2 0
1051003 TERMINAL BLOCK, SPRING, 6mm, BLANK MARKER STRIP ZB6 UT4 92 A

0442079 TERMINAL BLOCK, GROUND 3 0

NP-2X6B NAMEPLATE 1 0
UNIDAD MOTRIZ (RAKE DRIVE) 0
ALARMAS DE LOS EQUIPOS (EQUIPMENT ALARMS) 0

LP-I30B LEGEND PLATE - IDEC, 30mm, BLACK 1 0

EQUIPO ENCENDIDO (RUN) 0

LP-I30R LEGEND PLATE - IDEC, 30mm, RED 1 0

CORTE DE MOTOR (CUTOUT) 0

LP-I30B LEGEND PLATE - IDEC, 30mm, BLACK 1 0

LOCAL/OFF/REMOTO (LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE) 0

LP-I30R LEGEND PLATE - IDEC, 30mm, RED 1 0

SILENCIAR ALARMA (ALARM SILENCE) 0

LP-I30R LEGEND PLATE - IDEC, 30mm, RED 1 0

PARAR (STOP) 0

LP-I30B LEGEND PLATE - IDEC, 30mm, BLACK 1 0

DISPOSITIVO DE REPOSICION (RESET) 0

LP-I30R LEGEND PLATE - IDEC, 30mm, RED 1 A

VFD FALLA (VFD FAULT) A

LP-I30B LEGEND PLATE - IDEC, 30mm, BLACK 1 A

POTENCIOMETRO (POTENTIOMETER) A

NP-2X3B NAMEPLATE 1 A
THICKENER TFC-TH-01 A

03/29/11 JRL PES NRT Total Weight lbs

Assembly Description
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
THICKENER ALARM STATION
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 40M

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21069 21261A INDEX A

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:28 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

0 PLC PANEL LAYOUT 0

0 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC 0
0 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC 0
A ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC A
A ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC A
0 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC 0
A ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC A
A ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC A
A ANNUNCIATION CONTACTS/ TB LAYOUT A
A FIELD WIRING DIAGRAM A
A FIELD WIRING DIAGRAM A
A FIELD WIRING DIAGRAM A

P504 WIRE, DUCT, BITS, FASTENERS, ETC 1 0

CSD36368 ENCLOSURE, TYPE 4/12 91 1 0

CP3636 BACK PANEL, 34.2 X 34.2 40 1 0
CMFK MOUNTING FOOT KIT 1 1 0

EA7-T8C TOUCH SCREEN, COLOR, TOUCH 1 0

2891152 ETHERNET SWITCH, 5 PORT, RJ45 1 0

2866310 TRIO POWER SUPPLY SINGLE PHASE 5A 1 0

5600461 RECEPTACLE, DUPLEX, DIN RAIL MOUNT, 15 AMP 1 0

QCR1020 CIRCUIT BREAKER, 1PH, 20 AMP, 120/240VAC 1 0

QCR1015 CIRCUIT BREAKER, 1PH, 15 AMP, 120/240VAC 1 0
0916605 CIRCUIT BREAKER, 2 AMP 13 0
0916606 CIRCUIT BREAKER, 4 AMP 4 0

FSPDB2A POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCK 2/0 THRU #14 IN 2 0

RH1B-UAC24V RELAY, SPDT, 24V PLUG IN 14 0

SH1B-05C FINGERSAFE RELAY BASE, SINGLE POLE 14 0

04/19/11 JRL BRJ NRT Assembly Description

Total Weight 132 lbs
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
PLC CONTROL PANEL
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 T-2-1-1

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21307 21261A INDEX A

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:32 AM 12/19/03
 Document No. Dwg Quantity per Line
Drawing No. Rev Description No. of Pages Weight
Order Rev

PM554-T-ETH AC500 eCO PLC W/ 8 DI AND 6 DO 1 0

DX561 DIGITAL CARD 8 DI/ 8 DO 1 0
DI561 DIGITAL CARD 8 DI 1 0
AX561 ANALOG CARD 4 AI/ 2 AO 3 0
L44470901501 9 POLE BLOCK FOR PLC CARD 5 0
L44471101501 11 POLE BLOCK FOR PLC CARD 5 0

PS501 PLC PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE 1 0

3044814 TERMINAL BLOCK, DOUBLE DECK 76 0

3047293 TERMINAL BLOCK, END COVER 4 0
3047303 TERMINAL BLOCK, SPACER PLATE 4 0
3030271 TERMINAL BLOCK, JUMPER, 10 POSITION, RED 6 0
0800886 TERMINAL BLOCK, END BRACKET UT4 3 0
1051003 TERMINAL BLOCK, SPRING, 6mm, BLANK MARKER STRIP ZB6 UT4 448 0

3011041 TERMINAL BLOCK, TRIPLE DECK WITH GROUND 24 0

0442079 TERMINAL BLOCK, GROUND 10 0

NP-2X3B NAMEPLATE 1 0
PLC PANEL DE CONTROL (PLC CONTROL PANEL) 0

04/19/11 JRL BRJ NRT Total Weight lbs

Assembly Description
Date Proj. By Proj. Chkd. Proj. Aprvd.
PLC CONTROL PANEL
Date Std. By Std. Chkd. Std. Aprvd. Type Size

PARTS LIST INDEX PAGE PT240 T-2-1-1

Document Number Job Number P/L Page No. Rev.

21307 21261A INDEX 0

QF-00-052 Printed by- SKJOHNSON Printed on-August 3, 2011 8:32 AM 12/19/03
 PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA
REQUISICiN DE REPUESTOS
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA REQUISICIN DE REPUESTOS Y PIEZAS DE

REEMPLAZO

Los repuestos y piezas de reemplazo pueden ser solicitados al Departamento

de piezas a:

WESTECH EQUIPAMENTOS INDUSTRIAIS LTDA.

Rua Marqus de Paranagu, 360 CEP 01303-050.
So Paulo, SP - Brasil.
Telefono: (55 11) 3129-5226
Fax: (55 11) 3129-5118

SERVICIO 24 HORAS/EMERGENCIA
(801) 265-1000 8:00 am to 5:00 pm
(801) 263-4093 5:00 pm to 8:00 am

E-MAIL: westech@westech.com.br
WEB: www.westech-inc.com

Si necesita hablar directamente con un representante de partes y repuestos en

las horas laborales (8:00 AM a 5:00 PM So Paulo Time), marque (55 11)
3129-5226 y un representante WesTech tomar su orden.

Si Usted necesita enviar va fax su orden, enve su solicitud al (55 11) 3129-
5118. Un representante de WesTech procesar su orden hacindole saber que
ya hemos recibido su orden, bien sea va fax o a travs de un llamada
telefnica.

Para usar la lnea 24 horas de servicio/emergencia, marque (801) 267-4220 y

espere cuatro tonos altos. A continuacin marque su nmero telefnico para
poder contactarle. Un representante WesTech responder dentro de una (1)
hora.

Si lo prefiere, puede enviarnos su lista de parte va correo electrnico a

westech@westech.com.br Un representante de WesTech procesar su orden
hacindole saber que ya hemos recibido su orden, bien sea va fax o a travs
de una llamada telefnica.

Acuse de Recibo
Los repuestos tambin pueden ser solicitados directamente a travs nuestra
pagina web (www.westech-inc.com). Simplemente dirjase a la pgina web, de
un click en Parts and Service, luego en Contact the WesTech Spare Parts
Departmen y rellene el formulario en linea. Un representante de WesTech

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA
REQUISICiN DE REPUESTOS
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

procesar su solicitud y le enviar un Acuse de Recibo de la solicitud, o

retornar con una llamada telefnica para confirmar que la solicitud fue
recibida.

En caso de se requiera asistencia complementar en la determinacin de los

repuestos que son apropiados para su situacin particular, por favor entre en
contacto con el Departamento de Piezas y Repuestos de WesTech.

Con la finalidad de evitar retrasos en la obtencin de las piezas de reemplazo o

repuestos correctos para su equipo, asegrese de suministrar la informacin
siguiente en su solicitud:

1. Identificar el equipo mediante el nmero del proyecto. Su equipo se

identifica de la siguiente manera:

WesTech Job No.: 21261A

Tipo de Equipo: Espesador de Alta Densidad
Nombre del Proyecto/Cliente:
MINERA BROCAL

2. Identifique la pieza por el nombre y suministre el nmero del diseo en

el cual la referida pieza aparece.

3. Identifique el nmero de la pieza.

4. Identifique el tamao e incluya todas las dimensiones pertinentes (tales

como dimetro exterior, longitud, espesor, dimetro interno, inclinacin,
etc.) a la medida de lo posible.

5. En caso de las piezas solicitadas ser de naturaleza elctrica, suministre

todos los datos pertinentes tales como: voltaje, amperaje, potencia,
ciclos, frecuencia, factor de potencia y otras informaciones dadas en la
placa de identificacin de la pieza o incluida en el catlogo de la pieza.

6. Enviar ambas, la orden de compra escrita o la solicitud de cotizacin,

formadas e impresas con el nombre completo de la persona contacto
para que WesTech conozca a quien contactar para esclarecimientos
adicionales de la requisicin que resulten necesarios. TODAS LAS
RDENES VERBALES DEBERN SER REGISTRADAS POR ESCRITO.

7. Suministre la direccin de retorno y la direccin de entrega.

8. Suministre el mtodo preferido para el envo (por ejemplo: UPS, envo

terrestre, envo ferroviario, envo areo expreso, etc.).

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA
REQUISICiN DE REPUESTOS
AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY
MANUAL DE OPERACIN Y MANTENIMIENTO

9. Muestre la cantidad deseada.

10. Suministre las instrucciones para la facturacin adecuada.

11. Todos las rdenes de repuestos y piezas de reposicin sern sujetas a

una valor mnimo de orden de $100,00.

O M - 21261A - Spanish - corrected REV. 8-2-11

 Page 1

3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84115

Phone (801) 265-1000 / Fax (801) 265-1080 Recommended
24 Hour Emergency Assistance (801) 263-4093
E-Mail: parts@westech-inc.com Spare Parts List
Westech Job No.: 21261A Date Prepared: August 8, 2011 Prepared by: CRICHARDS
Proposal Valid for: 90 days FOB Ship Pt. w/Frt: Prepay & Add Payment Terms: Net 30 Days

In order to increase the life of your equipment, and avoid costly downtime, Westech recommends that you maintain your equipment
at regular intervals. To do this, Westech recommends, at a minimum, that you have the below mentioned items on hand at all times.
Long lead items that could significantly minimize downtime as well as normal maintenance and wear items are included in this list.

Item Drawing Item Recommended Unit+

Number Number Description Quanitity Price

Parts List No: 21069

135 105STA-N5 BEACON ASSY.,AMBER, 120VAC 1.00 269.00 each

137 876-N5 HORN, 120VAC, W/BACKBOX 1.00 166.00 each

143 FNQ-R-3 TIME DELAY FUSE, 3 AMP 1.00 14.00 each

148 SH4B-05C FINGERSAFE RELAY BASE, 1.00 9.00 each

203 SH3B-05C FINGERSAFE RELAY BASE, 2.00 7.00 each

206 SH1B-05C FINGERSAFE RELAY BASE, 5.00 5.00 each

Parts List No: 21307

144 RH1B-UAC24V RELAY, SPDT, 24V 14.00 14.00 each

Parts List No: 21355

103 SECONDARY SPEED REDUCER 4.00 29,797.00 each

105 GEAR MOTOR 4.00 4,769.00 each

113 RR-0002A RETAINING RING, 3 3/4" EXT 4.00 25.00 each

114 MS-0194A LOWER SHAFT SEAL, BRG HSG 4.00 43.00 each

115 MS-0289A UPPER SHAFT SEAL, BRG HSG 4.00 52.00 each

116 BR-0053A BALL BEARING, DEEP GROOVE 8.00 72.00 each

117 RETAINING RING (2 15/16" EXT) 4.00 13.00 each

124 PINION BEARING 4.00 854.00 each

127 RR-0018A RETAINING RING 5 3/4" INT 4.00 55.00 each

415 MS-0066A O-RING 29.00 1.00 each

416 MS-0382A SEAL STRIP 29.00 2.00 each

428 445-320B-B INSPECTION PORT COVER GASKET 1.00 14.00 each

447 445-267B-B PINION INSPECTION PORT GASKET 4.00 14.00 each

450 445-319B-B INSPECTION PORT GASKET 1.00 14.00 each

Parts List No: 21692

501 DSIII SERIES PRESSURE GAGE 1.00 3,894.00 each

505 28" MAGNETIC FLOW METER 3100 1.00 34,949.00 each

506 20" MAGNETIC FLOW METER 3100 1.00 21,069.00 each

507 12" MAGNETIC FLOW METER 3100 2.00 11,341.00 each

Parts List No: 21720

107 AL131CV LOAD CELL, MODEL 53, 1000 LBS 4.00 989.00 each
 Page 2

3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84115

Phone (801) 265-1000 / Fax (801) 265-1080 Recommended
24 Hour Emergency Assistance (801) 263-4093
E-Mail: parts@westech-inc.com Spare Parts List
Westech Job No.: 21261A Date Prepared: August 8, 2011 Prepared by: CRICHARDS
Proposal Valid for: 90 days FOB Ship Pt. w/Frt: Prepay & Add Payment Terms: Net 30 Days

In order to increase the life of your equipment, and avoid costly downtime, Westech recommends that you maintain your equipment
at regular intervals. To do this, Westech recommends, at a minimum, that you have the below mentioned items on hand at all times.
Long lead items that could significantly minimize downtime as well as normal maintenance and wear items are included in this list.

Item Drawing Item Recommended Unit+

Number Number Description Quanitity Price

+ Please call, for current price and availibility, if prepared more than 90 days previous, or if unit price is not printed.

Industrial Recommended Spare Parts List

 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

EQUIPOS
ACCESORIOS

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

INFORMACIN
ELCTRICA Y PLC

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MINERA BROCAL
SAN ISIDRO, LIMA, PERU

MANUAL DE
MANTENIMIENTO
Y OPERACION
ELECTRICO
PROPORCIONADO POR:
WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC.
SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH
WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC.
JOB NUMBER: 21261 A

WESTECH
REVISIONES

0 AS BUILT AND TESTED JRL CGB 5/3/2012

REV DESCRIPTION BY CHKD DATE

WESTECH ENGINEERING INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

LISTA DE PARTES

WESTECH ENGINEERING INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

LOS ESQUEMATICO

WESTECH ENGINEERING INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MINERA BROCAL
SAN ISIDRO, LIMA, PERU

PANEL DE CONTROL
PARA ESPESAR

ANDA CON LOS DOCUMENTOS:

E16D-E28D, PL 21307

WESTECH JOB NUMBER: 21261 A

WESTECH ENGINEERING INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

HMI

WESTECH ENGINEERING INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
Hardware User Manual

EA-USER-M
  WARNING 
Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as,
AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or
uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or
operating the equipment.
To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes
that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and
usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to
verify that the equipment, installation, and operation is in compliance with the latest revision of these
codes.
At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical
Code, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). There may be local
regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for
safe installation and operation.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes
and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your
particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or
operation.
Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-
line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life
support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death,
personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage ("High Risk Activities"). AutomationDirect
specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our catalog. If
you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need
additional information, please call us at 770-844-4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At
AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to
make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation.
This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product.

Trademarks
This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The
product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners.
AutomationDirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.
Copyright 2005-2007, Automationdirect.com Incorporated
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written
consent of Automationdirect.com Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all
information included in this document.
  ADVERTENCIA 
Gracias por comprar equipo de automatizacin de Automationdirect.com. Deseamos que su nuevo equipo de
automatizacin opere de manera segura. Cualquier persona que instale o use este equipo debe leer esta
publicacin (y cualquier otra publicacin pertinente) antes de instalar u operar el equipo.
Para reducir al mnimo el riesgo debido a problemas de seguridad, debe seguir todos los cdigos de seguridad
locales o nacionales aplicables que regulan la instalacin y operacin de su equipo. Estos cdigos varian de rea
en rea y usualmente cambian con el tiempo. Es su responsabilidad determinar cuales cdigos deben ser
seguidos y verificar que el equipo, instalacin y operacin estn en cumplimiento con la revisin mas reciente
de estos cdigos.
Como mnimo, debe seguir las secciones aplicables del Cdigo Nacional de Incendio, Cdigo Nacional
Elctrico, y los cdigos de (NEMA) la Asociacin Nacional de Fabricantes Elctricos de USA. Puede haber
oficinas de normas locales o del gobierno que pueden ayudar a determinar cuales cdigos y normas son
necesarios para una instalacin y operacin segura.
Si no se siguen todos los cdigos y normas aplicables, puede resultar en daos al equipo o lesiones serias a
personas. No garantizamos los productos descritos en esta publicacin para ser adecuados para su aplicacin en
particular, ni asumimos ninguna responsabilidad por el diseo de su producto, la instalacin u operacin.
Nuestros productos no son tolerantes a fallas y no han sido diseados, fabricados o intencionados para uso o
reventa como equipo de control en lnea en ambientes peligrosos que requieren una ejecucin sin fallas, tales
como operacin en instalaciones nucleares, sistemas de navegacin area, o de comunicacin, control de trfico
areo, mquinas de soporte de vida o sistemas de armamentos en las cuales la falla del producto puede resultar
directamente en muerte, heridas personales, o daos fsicos o ambientales severos ("Actividades de Alto Riesgo").
Automationdirect.com especficamente rechaza cualquier garanta ya sea expresada o implicada para
actividades de alto riesgo.
Para informacin adicional acerca de garanta e informacin de seguridad, vea la seccin de Trminos y
Condiciones de nuestro catlogo. Si tiene alguna pregunta sobre instalacin u operacin de este equipo, o si
necesita informacin adicional, por favor llmenos al nmero 770-844-4200 en Estados Unidos.
Esta publicacin est basada en la informacin disponible al momento de impresin. En
Automationdirect.com nos esforzamos constantemente para mejorar nuestros productos y servicios, as que
nos reservamos el derecho de hacer cambios al producto y/o a las publicaciones en cualquier momento sin
notificacin y sin ninguna obligacin. Esta publicacin tambin puede discutir caractersticas que no estn
disponibles en ciertas revisiones del producto.

Marcas Registradas
Esta publicacin puede contener referencias a productos producidos y/u ofrecidos por otras compaas. Los nombres de las
compaas y productos pueden tener marcas registradas y son propiedad nica de sus respectivos dueos. Automationdirect.com,
renuncia cualquier inters propietario en las marcas y nombres de otros.
PROPIEDAD LITERARIA 2005-2007, AUTOMATIONDIRECT.COM INCORPORATED
Todos los derechos reservados
No se permite copiar, reproducir, o transmitir de ninguna forma ninguna parte de este manual sin previo consentimiento por escrito de
Automationdirect.com Incorprated. Automationdirect.com retiene los derechos exclusivos a toda la informacin incluida en este
documento. Los usuarios de este equipo pueden copiar este documento solamente para instalar, configurar y mantener el equipo
correspondiente. Tambin las instituciones de enseanza pueden usar este manual para propsitos educativos.
  AVERTISSEMENT 
Nous vous remercions d'avoir achet l'quipement d'automatisation de Automationdirect.com, en faisant des
affaires comme, AutomationDirect. Nous tenons ce que votre nouvel quipement d'automatisation fonctionne en
toute scurit. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet quipement doit lire la prsente publication (et toutes les
autres publications pertinentes) avant de l'installer ou de l'utiliser.
Afin de rduire au minimum le risque d'ventuels problmes de scurit, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux et
nationaux applicables rgissant l'installation et le fonctionnement de votre quipement. Ces codes diffrent d'une
rgion l'autre et, habituellement, voluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de dterminer les codes respecter et
de vous assurer que l'quipement, l'installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la
plus rcente de ces codes.
Vous devez, tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prvention des incendies,
du Code national de l'lectricit et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). Des
organismes de rglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent galement vous aider dterminer
les codes ainsi que les normes respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement srs.
L'omission de respecter la totalit des codes et des normes applicables peut entraner des dommages l'quipement
ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits dcrits dans cette publication
conviennent votre application particulire et nous n'assumons aucune responsabilit l'gard de la conception, de
l'installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit.
Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux dfaillances et ne sont ni conus ni fabriqus pour l'utilisation ou la revente
en tant qu'quipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux ncessitant une scurit absolue,
par exemple, l'exploitation d'installations nuclaires, les systmes de navigation arienne ou de communication, le
contrle de la circulation arienne, les quipements de survie ou les systmes d'armes, pour lesquels la dfaillance du
produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matriels ou environnementaux
(activits risque lev). La socit AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d'aptitude
l'emploi en ce qui a trait aux activits risque lev.
Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la scurit, veuillez consulter la section Modalits et
conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l'installation ou du fonctionnement de cet
quipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplmentaires, n'hsitez pas nous tlphoner au
770-844-4200.
Cette publication s'appuie sur l'information qui tait disponible au moment de l'impression. la socit
AutomationDirect, nous nous efforons constamment d'amliorer nos produits et services. C'est pourquoi nous
nous rservons le droit d'apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans pravis ni
quelque obligation que ce soit. La prsente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractristiques susceptibles de ne
pas tre offertes dans certaines versions rvises du produit.

Marques de commerce
La prsente publication peut contenir des rfrences des produits fabriqus ou offerts par d'autres entreprises. Les
dsignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent tre des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement
leurs propritaires respectifs. AutomationDirect nie tout intrt dans les autres marques et dsignations.
Copyright 2005-2007, Automationdirect.com Incorporated
Tous droits rservs
Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit tre copie, reproduite ou transmise de quelque faon que ce soit sans le
consentement pralable crit de la socit Automationdirect.com Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les
droits exclusifs l'gard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le prsent document.
 HARDWARE USER MANUAL

Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below,
when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication.

Manual Number: EA-USER-M

Issue: 1st Edition, Rev. C
Issue Date: 08/07

Publication History
Issue Date Description of Changes
First Edition 11/05 Original
Rev. A 01/06 Added chapters and content.
Rev. B 04/06 Added chapters 7-9 and appendix B.
Rev. C 08/07 Added AB EtherNet/IP, minor corrections, and content added.
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Mounting Clips New Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Part Number Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
EZTouch Conversion & Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
EZTouch to C-more Cross Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Quick Start Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Step 1 Unpack and Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Step 2 Assemble Temporary Support Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Step 3 Install Optional Hardware Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Step 4 Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Step 5 Connect Touch Panel to Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Step 6 Provide Power to the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Step 7 Access the Touch Panel Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Step 8 Choose Touch Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Step 9 Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Step 10 Connect Touch Panel to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Chapter 2: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Available Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Model Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
6 Base Feature Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
6 Full Feature Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
8 & 10 Full Feature Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Table of Contents

12 & 15 Full Feature Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C & T6C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . .28
EA7-T8C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
EA7-T10C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
EA7-T12C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
EA7-T15C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Mounting Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Memory Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Handling External Memory Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Power Loss Detection and Power Retention Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Data Logging Function and Logging Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Data Logging Memory Device Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Chemical Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Chapter 3: Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Accessories Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Accessories at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
AC/DC Power Adapter EA-AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Expansion Assembly EA-EXP-OPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
CF Card Interface Module EA-CF-IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
128 MB CompactFlash Memory EA-FLASH-128MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
6 Adapter Plate EA-6-ADPTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
D-SUB 15-pin 90 degree Comm Port Adapter EA-ADPTR-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter EA-COMCON-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Non-glare Screen Covers EA-xx-COV2, xx = 6, 8, 10, 12 or 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
USB Pen Drive SDCZ4-512-A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323

ii Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Table of Contents

Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C & T6C Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
EA7-T8C Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
EA7-T10C Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
EA7-T12C Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
EA7-T15C Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
6 Adapter Plate EA-6-ADPTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Mounting Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Marine Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Providing Power to the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
DC Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
AC Wiring Diagram (EA-AC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414

Chapter 5: System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Accessing the System Setup Screens (no project loaded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Accessing the System Setup Screens (with project loaded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
System Setup Screens Enable Password in Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
System Setup Screens Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Memory Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 iii

Table of Contents

Chapter 6: PLC Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
DirectLOGIC PLCs Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
PLC Compatibility Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Direct LOGIC PLCs RS-232C Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Direct LOGIC PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Direct LOGIC Universal Isolated Network Adapter, p/n FA-ISOCON . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Direct LOGIC Universal Converter, p/n F2-UNICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Allen-Bradley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
GE Fanuc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Mitsubishi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Omron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Modicon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625

Chapter 7: Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Project Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Check Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Check Operating Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Check Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Check Physical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Run Tests under System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Check Memory Usage via System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Check/Adjust Display Brightness or Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Check Error Log via System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Adjust Touch Panel via System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Replace Battery Periodically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Cleaning the Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Check Project Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Checks from C-more Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

iv Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Table of Contents

Chapter 8: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Touch Panel does not Power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Display is Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Display is Dim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
No User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
No Communications between Panel and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
No Communications between Panel and PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .810
IP Address in System Setup Screens displays 0.0.0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .813
PLC Protocol Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814
Touch Panel Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .815
Panel Constantly Displays Initializing when Powering up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
Data not Logging Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
Loss of Date/Time or Retentive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
Electrical Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817

Chapter 9: Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Replacement Parts Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Replacement Parts at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Battery Replacement & Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
6 Panel Mounting Clip Replacements & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
8-15 Panel Mounting Clip Replacements & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
DC Panel Power Connector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
AC Power Adapter Connector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
8-15 Panel Backlight Bulb Replacements & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
6-15 Panel Gasket Replacement & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .911
8-15 Panel Bezel Replacement & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .912
6 Adapter Plate Gasket Replacement & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .914

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 v

Table of Contents

Appendix A: PLC Protocol Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2
C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3
DirectLOGIC Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A4
DirectLOGIC K-Sequence Protocol PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A5
DirectLOGIC DirectNET Protocol PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A5
DirectLOGIC Modbus (Koyo) Protocol PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A5
Modbus RTU Protocol PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A6
Modbus TCP/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A6
DirectLOGIC ECOM Protocol PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A6
Allen-Bradley Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A7
Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A8
Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A10
Allen-Bradley Panel Error Code PLC-496, 497 & 498 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . .A12
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, and FlexLogix Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . .A13
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol
MicroLogix 1100, SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A17
Generic EtherNet IP Protocol PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A22
GE Fanuc 90-30 Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A23
GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A24
Mitsubishi FX Protocol PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A33
Omron Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A33
Omron Host Link & FINS Protocol PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A34

Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B2
Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B3

vi Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Table of Contents

Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C2
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C & T6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C3
EA7-T8C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C5
EA7-T10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C7
EA7-T12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C9
EA7-T15C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C11

Index

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 vii

 CHAPTER
GETTING STARTED
1
In This Chapter...
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Mounting Clips New Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Part Number Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
EZTouch Conversion & Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
EZTouch to C-more Cross Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Quick Start Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Step 1 Unpack and Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Step 2 Assemble Temporary Support Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Step 3 Install Optional Hardware Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Step 4 Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Step 5 Connect Touch Panel to Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Step 6 Provide Power to the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Step 7 Access the Touch Panel Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Step 8 Choose Touch Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Step 9 Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Step 10 Connect Touch Panel to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Introduction
1 The Purpose of this Manual
2 Thank you for purchasing our C-more Touch Panel family of products. This manual
describes AutomationDirect.coms C-more Touch Panels, their specifications, included
components, available accessories and provides you with important information for installation,
3 connectivity and setup. The manual shows you how install, wire and use the products. It also
helps you understand how to interface the panels to other devices in a control system.
4 This user manual contains important information for personnel who will install the touch
panels and accessories, and for the personnel who will be programming the panel. If you
5 understand control systems that make use of operating interfaces such as the C-more touch
panels, our user manuals will provide all the information you need to get, and keep your system
up and running.
6 Supplemental Manuals
If you are familiar with industrial control type devices, you may be able to get up and running
7 with just the aide of the Quick Start Guide that is included with each touch panel. You can also
refer to the On-line help that is available in the C-more programming software for more
8 information about programming the panel. The accessories include data sheets that will help
with installing the accessories.
9 Technical Support
We strive to make our manuals the best in the industry. We rely on your feedback to let us know
10 if we are reaching our goal. If you cannot find the solution to your particular application, or, if
for any reason you need technical assistance, please call us at:
7708444200
11 Our technical support group will work with you to answer your questions. They are available
Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Eastern Time. We also encourage you to
12 visit our web site where you can find technical and non-technical information about our
products and our company.
13 http://www.automationdirect.com
If you have a comment, question or suggestion about any of our products, services, or manuals,
14 please fill out and return the Suggestions card that was included with this manual.

A
B
C
D

12 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Conventions Used
1
When you see the notepad icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a
2
special note. The word NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
3
4
When you see the exclamation mark icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right
will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of property, or even death (in extreme
5
cases). The word WARNING: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
6
7
Key Topics for Each Chapter 8
The beginning of each chapter will list the key topics

1
that can be found in that chapter. Getting Started CHAPTER 9
In This Chapter...
10
General Information .................................................................1-2
Specifications ...........................................................................1-4
11
12
13
Mounting Clips New Style 14
A
NOTE: C-more touch panels shipped prior to approximately April 2006 had a slightly different mounting clip
design. All of the drawings and illustrations in this issue of the Hardware User Manual are shown with the
newer design. Appendiix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006 contains drawings and illustrations of the B
original designed mounting clips for your reference.
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 13

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Product Overview
1
2
3
4
5
6 Some of the features designed into the product to provide excellent hardware and software are
listed below.
7 Analog touch screen (no touch cell boundaries)
Plenty of memory and methods to get data in/out of the panel
8 Overlapping active devices on the touch screen
65,536 colors for enhanced graphics on 6 (TFT), 8, 10, 12 and 15 panels
9 (256 colors on 6 STN panels)
Screen resolutions up to 1024 X 768 pixels
10 Built-in project simulation; test on PC while developing
Serial RS232, RS422/485 and Ethernet 10/100Base-T communications
11 (Ethernet available on full feature units only.)
Programming via USB or Ethernet (Ethernet available on full feature units only.)
12 Optional AC/DC power adapter (EA-AC)
User replaceable bulbs on 8, 10, 12 and 15 panels
13 Animation of bitmaps and objects
4,000 built-in symbols, classic fonts: 6x8, 8x16, 8x32, 8x64, 16x16, 16x32, 16x64,
14 32x16, 32x32, 32x64, and Windows fonts
PID face plate, trending, alarming and a recipe database
A Event Manager to trigger actions based on assigned state changes, schedules, PLC tag names, etc.
setup in a database environment. The event can also trigger a sound byte, initiate a screen capture,
send a data file (FTP), send an E-mail, etc.
B Select unique background screens for each created screen
Trend Data logging
C Built-in FTP client/server, E-mail client, and Web server
Audio output port - stereo, requires amplifier and speaker(s)
D

14 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Part Number Key Touch Panels

The C-more touch panel part numbers consist of the following key: 1
Screen Size: Features:
6: 5.7
8: 8.4
blank: Full 2
R: Base
10: 10.4
12: 12.1 3
15: 15.0
EA7-xxx-x 4
LCD Type: Color:
S: STN C: color 5
T: TFT M: gray scale
6
Product label examples:
7
8
EA7-S6C-R
9
10
11
12
EA7-T15C
13
14
Serial Number and Date Code formats: A
Serial Number =[Part Number]+[YYMDDFNNN] B
Date Code = YYMF
YY:
M:
Year (0599 --- e.g. 05 = 2005)
Month (19, X, Y, Z --- e.g. X = Oct.)
C
DD: Day (131)
F: Manufacturing Site (09, AZ) D
NNN: Sequence number for the date listed (000999)

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 15

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

EZTouch Conversion and Mounting

1 C-more panels are a drop-in replacement for EZTouch panels from AutomationDirect. They fit
the same panel cutout*. The C-more software will convert your legacy EZTouch project (created
2 with EZTouch Edit ver. 3.1a) automatically with no changes to the project required.** Just open
your old EZTouch project in the new C-more Programming Software, connect the USB cable,
and click "Send to Panel". The conversion is automatic and you will benefit immediately from:
3 A better looking display
A brighter screen
4 Longer backlight bulb life

5 Wider temperature tolerance

A two year warranty
6 Note: EZTouch projects most have been created with EZTouch Edit software version 3.1a to assure proper
project conversion.
7 Now, there are hundreds of new features you may want to take advantage of, but it's nice to
know that you can be up and running your existing EZTouch project in just a few minutes.
8 C-more accepts the same PLC communications and networking cables that you are using with
EZTouch. The 24 VDC power connections accept the same DC wiring that you used for
9 EZTouch, and now there is a removable terminal block connector. Only the programming cable
is different - you no longer have to buy a proprietary serial cable to program your touch panel.
C-more uses a standard USB cable or an Ethernet (CAT5) connection for programming.
10 * If you have an old 6" non-slim bezel EZTouch panel you will need our 6" Adapter Plate, part number
EA-6-ADPTR, see the chapter on accessories.
11 ** Some things to keep in mind when switching to C-more:
1.) The project conversion utility is a great feature. However the user must take full responsibility
12 in ensuring the conversion works to their satisfaction.
2.) C-more does not support: FDA approval, DH+, ModBus+., Profibus, DeviceNet, Siemens MPI

13
Example of a C-more 6 touch panel
14 mounted into an existing EZTouch
non-slim bezel cutout using the
C-more 6 adapter plate.
A
B
C
D

16 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

EZTouch Touch Panel Cross Reference to C-more

1
EZTouch C-more*
EZTouch 6, grayscale STN
(045 C) C-more 6 Adapter C-more 6, grayscale STN
(050 C)
2
EZ-S6M-R Requires: EA-6-ADPTR
EA7-S6M-R 3
EZ-S6M-RS
EZ-S6M-F Requires: EA-6-ADPTR
EA7-S6M
4
EZ-S6M-FS (includes Ethernet)
5
EZTouch C-more* 6
EZTouch 6, 128 Color STN C-more 6, 256 Color STN or 65,536 Color TFT
C-more 6 Adapter
(045 C) (050 C)
7
EZ-S6C-K Requires: EA-6-ADPTR EA7-S6C-R

EZ-S6C-KS
8
EZ-S6C-F Requires: EA-6-ADPTR
EA7-S6C
(256 Color STN;
9
includes Ethernet)
EZ-S6C-FS
10
EA7-T6C
EZ-S6C-FST
(65,536 Color TFT;
includes Ethernet)
11
12
EZTouch C-more*
EZTouch 8, 128 Color STN
(040 C)
C-more 8, 65,536 Color TFT
(050 C)
13
EZ-S8C-F 14
EA7-T8C
EZ-S8C-FS (includes Ethernet) A
EZ-S8C-FST
B
*Note: All C-more touch panels are NEMA 4/4X, IP-65 (When mounted correctly, C
for indoor use only), non-FDA.
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 17

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

EZTouch Touch Panel Cross Reference to C-more (contd)

1
2 EZTouch
EZTouch 10, 128 Color TFT
C-more*
C-more 10, 65,536 Color TFT
(050 C) (050 C)
3 EZ-S10C-F
EZ-S10C-FS
4 EA7-T10C
(includes Ethernet)
EZ-S10C-FST
5 EZ-S10T-FSE

6
EZTouch C-more*
7 C-more 12, 65,536 Color TFT
No 12 EZTouch available (050 C)
8
9 EA7-T12C
(includes Ethernet)

10
11
EZTouch C-more*
12 EZTouch 15, 128 Color TFT C-more 15, 65,536 Color TFT
(045 C) (050 C)
13 EZ-S15C-FS
EA7-T15C
14 EZ-S15C-FST (includes Ethernet)

A EZ-S15C-FSE

B
*Note: All C-more touch panels are NEMA 4/4X, IP-65 (When mounted correctly,
C for indoor use only), non-FDA.

18 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Quick Start Steps

Step 1 Unpack and Inspect
1
a.) Unpack the C-more Touch Panel from its shipping carton. Included in the carton are the
following:
2
C-more Touch Panel
cutout template 3
mounting clips
temporary support stand
DC power connector
4
gasket
Quick Start Guide, p/n EA-QSG 5
b.) Unpack any accessories that have been
Temporary
ordered, such as: AC/DC Power
Adapter, Expansion Assembly,
6
Support Stand
CompactFlash memory, programming
cable, communications cable, etc. 7
Cutout Template
c.) Inspect all equipment for
located here.
completeness. If anything is missing 8
or damaged, immediately call the
Mounting Clips
located in here.
AutomationDirect returns
department @ 1-800-633-0405.
9
10
11
12
13
Shipping Carton Contents
14
Optional Accessories A
AC Power Adapter
EA-AC
Expansion Assembly
EA-EXP-OPT
128 MB Compact Flash
EA-FLASH-128MB
512 MB USB Pen Drive
SDCZ4-512-A10 B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 19

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 2 Assemble Temporary Support Stand

1
6 & 8 Touch Panel Temporary Stand
2
3
1 2 3
4 4
Shipping Carton Packing Material
5
6
7
5 6 7 8
8
9 10, 12 & 15 Touch Panel Temporary Stand

10
11 1
2
12 Shipping Carton Packing Material
3

13 Insert tabs
between layers

14
A 4 5 6

B
C NOTE: See Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring for C-more touch panel installtion information including
cutout dimensions and mounting clearances.
D

110 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 3 Install Optional Hardware Accessories

NOTE: CompactFlash memory card designations CF Slot #1 is at the top of the panel and CF Slot #2 is the
1
CF Card Interface Module, p/n EA-CF-IF.
CF Card
2
Interface Module
128MB CompactFlash Memory
Card EA-FLASH-128MB
EA-CF-IF
3
CF card interface
module installs
4
in right slot only,
left slot for future 5
CF card plugs
6
into slot #1
at top of panel
Expansion Assembly
7
C-more
EA-EXP-OPT
Touch Panel
8
9
USB Pen Drive
10
AC/DC Power Adapter SDCZ4-512-A10
EA-AC 11
NOTE: The C-more 6 touch panels will fit into the existing cutout of any EZTouch 6 slim bezel panel. Use 12
the C-more 6 Adapter Plate, p/n EA-6-ADPTR, to install C-more 6 panels into existing cutouts of EZTouch
6 non-slim (rounded bezel) panels. 13
Optional Accessories 14
6 Adapter Plate
EA-6-ADPTR
15-pin Terminal 15-pin 90 Degree
A
Block Adapter Comm. Port Adapter
EA-COMCON-3 EA-ADPTR-4 B
Date code
Country of Origin
Date code
Country of Origin C
KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
EA-COMCON-3

D
TERM

EA-ADPTR-4
GND

RD+
RD
SD+
SD

IOIOI PLC

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 111

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 4 Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports

1
Compact Flash

2 memory slot #1
is located at the
top of panel.
PLC Serial Communications

8 1
Pin
1
2
Signal
Frame GND
TXD (232C)
Pin
6
7
LE
Signal

CTS (232C)
Pin
11
Signal
TXD+ (422/485)
12 TXD (422/485)
15 9 3 RXD (232C) 8 RTS (232C) 13 Term. Resistor

3 4
5
Vcc
Logic GND
9 RXD+ (422/485)
10 RXD (422/485)
14 do not use
15 do not use

4
Bottom View
For Future Use

5 Audio Line Out,

stereo, 1 Volt rms,
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
PLC Communications,
3.5mm Mini Jack Programming/Download

6 (Amplifier Required)

USB Port - Type B

Pin
1 TD+
Signal Pin
5
Signal
do not use
USB Port - Type A 2 TD 6 RD
Programming/Download USB Device Options

7 Pin
1
Signal
Vbus
2 1
1 2 3 4
Pin
1
Signal
do not use
3
4
RD+
do not use

1
7
8
do not use
do not use

8
2 D
3 4 Link Status LED (Green) Network Activity LED (Orange)
2 D

8 3
4
D+
GND
Shell Shield
3
4
D+
GND
On
Off
Ethernet Linked
No Ethernet Comm.
On
Off
Active Network Data
Network Idle

9 Note: Device is not available on Base Feature touch panels, part numbers EA7-S6M-R and EA7-S6C-R.
Note: Use USB Programming Cable, p/n USB-CBL-AB15.

10
11 Note: See Chapter 2: Specifications and Chapter 6: PLC Communications for additional details on the
available communication ports, protocols and cables.

12
13
14
A
B
C
D

112 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 5 Connect Touch Panel to Computer

Connect a USB Programming Cable, p/n USB-CBL-AB15, from an USB type A port on the PC to
the USB type B programming port on the C-more touch panel 1
or connect the C-more touch panel and PC together via an Ethernet hub or switch, and CAT5
Ethernet cables (full feature panels only) 2
or use an Ethernet crossover cable directly between the C-more touch panel Ethernet port and the PC
Ethernet port (full feature panels only)
3
USB 4
C-more
PC USB Port Type B
Programming/Download
Touch Panel

USB Port
Type A
5
USB-CBL-AB15
6
7
Ethernet Ethernet via
Hub or Switch
10/100 Base-T
10/
PW
R
Hub or Switch 8
T/ 0
AC 10
K
LN Port
10/ link

9
T/ 0 Up
AC 10
K
LN
10/
T/ 0
AC 10
K

05
T/
AC 10
10/
0
LN
U
SW
K
LN
10/

E
T/ 0
AC 10
K

C-more
LN

3
2

Ethernet
R
1

PW
R
PW
+

Touch Panel Port

10
PC

(Bottom View)
11
Ethernet
Port
12
Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru 13
14
Ethernet via
Crossover Cable C-more
Touch Panel
Ethernet
Port A
PC
B
(Bottom View)
Ethernet
Port Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Crossover
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 113

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 6 Provide Power to the Touch Panel

Connect a dedicated 24 VDC (20.4 - 28.8 VDC) switching power supply rated at a minimum of 1.5
1 A to the DC connector on the rear of the C-more touch panel, include wiring the ground terminal to
a proper equipment ground
2 or install a C-more AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, to the rear of the touch panel and connect an AC
voltage source of 100-240 VAC, 50/60Hertz, to its AC connector (see note below)

3 then turn on the power source and check the LED status indicators on the rear of the C-more touch
panel for proper indication

4 NOTE: The AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, is for C-more touch panels only. The adapter is powered from a
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz power source. The adapter provides 24 VDC @ 1.5 A. Power Fault features help
5 protect data being logged to CompactFlash during power failures. The C-more panel must have firmware
version 1.21 Build 6.18E or higher for proper operation.

6 DC Wiring WARNING: The AC/DC Power Adapter is not

recommended for use with the EA7-T15C
7 Recommended DC Supply Fuse
Panel Size Rating ADC p/n
touch panel when operating temperatures
are expected to exceed 40 C [104 F].
6 10 2.5 A MDL2-5

8 +
12 & 15 4.0 A MDL4

AC Wiring
24 VDC, -15%, +20%

9
(20.4 - 28.8 VDC)

10 GND
Equipment
Ground
PWR

CPU

BATT

11 AC Power Adapter
Not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C
when operating temperatures are expected
to be above 40 deg C.

12
13
Recommended AC Supply Fuse

14 3.0 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL3

100 - 240 VAC

50/60 Hz

A C-more LED Status Indicators

Power LED (Green)

B CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red)

Off Power Off
PWR
On
Off
Power On
Power Off
Green Normal CPU Run State CPU

C Red
Blinking
Memory Error
BATT
TxD

RxD

Red
Operating System not found Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)

D Blinking
Orange
Blinking
Green
LCD Backlight Failure
Power Loss Detection
IOlOlPLC
On Comm. is active
Off No communication
Rear View

114 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 7 Access the Touch Panel Setup Screens

Access the Main Menu of the touch panel System Setup Screens by pressing the extreme upper left
corner of the panel display area for three (3) seconds as shown below. 1
Adjust the time and date for the panel by pressing the Setting button on the Main Menu, then press
the Adjust Clock button on the Setting screen. 2
Use the right pointing arrows for the time or date display to select the unit to change. Use the up and
down arrows to increment or decrement the value for the selected unit.
Press OK when done to accept the changes to the time and date that is retained in the touch panels
3
battery backed memory, or press Cancel to exit the Adjust Clock setup screen without making any
changes. 4
Press the Main Menu button on the Setting screen and then the Exit button on the Main Menu screen
to return to the application screen. 5
6
Setting

Adjust Clock Adjust Display 7

Adjust Touch Panel Beeper
8
9
Main Menu

10
11
MAIN MENU
12
Information Setting

Time
Adjust Clock

Date
13
Test Menu Memory
10 : 45 : 23 09 - 01 - 2005
14
Exit
9
12

3
A
6
OK Cancel
B
Note: When using an Ethernet connection, by default the panel is set for DHCP IP addressing. If it can not
find a DHCP server, the panel will automatically assign an IP address. The IP address can be changed by the
C
user from the programming software or by accessing the IP address setting screen as shown on page 5-19
and detailed on page 5-25. See Chapter 5 - System Setup Screens for details on other setup screen settings D
and functions.

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 115

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 8 Choose Touch Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables

1 PLC Family Model
PLC Compatibility Table
Protocols
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5-01/02/03, PLC5 DH485/AIC/AIC+
2 MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200 and 1500
SLC 5-03/04/05
DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex
DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex
3 Allen-Bradley
PLC-5
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Tag Based
DF1 Full Duplex
DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Generic I/O Messaging EtherNet/IP Server
4 ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Tag Based
MicroLogix 1100 & SLC 5/05, both via native Ethernet port
EtherNet/IP Client
EtherNet/IP Client
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5-03/04/05, all via ENI adapter EtherNet/IP Client
5 Modbus TCP/IP Modbus TCP/IP devices Modbus TCP/IP
GE Fanuc 90/30 and 90/70 SNPX
6 Mitsubishi FX Series
C200 Adapter, C500
FX Direct
Host Link
Omron CJ1/CS1 Serial FINS
7 Modicon 984 CPU, Quantum 113 CPU, AEG Modicon Micro Series 110 CPU: 311-xx, 411-xx,
512-xx, 612-xx Modbus RTU
K-Sequence
8 DL05/DL06
all Direct NET
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100 Direct LOGIC Ethernet
9 DL105 all
D2-230
K-Sequence
K-Sequence
K-Sequence
10 D2-240
Direct NET
K-Sequence
DL205 D2-250/D2-250-1/D2-260 Direct NET
11 Modbus (Koyo addressing)
Direct NET
D2-240/D2-250-1/D2-260
Using DCM Modbus (Koyo addressing)
12 H2-ECOM/H2-ECOM100
D3-330/330P (Requires the use of a Data Communications Unit)
Direct LOGIC Ethernet
Direct NET
D3-340 Direct NET
13 Direct LOGIC K-Sequence
DL305 D3-350 Direct NET

14 D3-350 DCM
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
Direct NET
Modbus (Koyo addressing)

A D4-430
K-Sequence
Direct NET
K-Sequence
D4-440
B DL405
Direct NET
K-Sequence
D4-450 Direct NET
C Modbus (Koyo addressing)
Direct NET
All with DCM
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
D H4-ECOM/H4-ECOM100
H2-WinPLC (Think & Do) Live V5.2 or later and Studio any version
Direct LOGIC Ethernet
Think & Do Modbus RTU (serial port)
H2-WinPLC (Think & Do) Live V5.5.1 or later and Studio V7.2.1 or later Think & Do Modbus TCP/IP (Ethernet port)

116 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 8 Choose Touch Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables (contd)

Purchased Cable
Description
Cable
Part Number
1
Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-12 port, DL05
DL06, DL105, DL205, D3-350, D4-450 &
H2-WINPLC (RS-232C)
EA-2CBL 2
Direct LOGIC (VGA Style) 15-pin port
DL06, D2-250 (250-1), D2-260 EA-2CBL-1 3
(RS-232C)
Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-11 port, D3-340
(RS-232C) EA-3CBL 4
Direct LOGIC DL405 PLC 15-pin D-sub
port, DL405 (RS-232C) EA-4CBL-1 5
Direct LOGIC PLC 25-pin D-sub port,
DL405, D3-350, DL305 DCU and
all DCMs (RS-232C)
EA-4CBL-2
6
Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1000, 1100,
EA-MLOGIX-CBL
1200 &1500 (RS-232C)
Allen-Bradley SLC 5-03/04/05,
7
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix EA-SLC-232-CBL
DF1 port (RS-232C)
Allen-Bradley PLC-5 DF1 port
8
(RS-232C) EA-PLC5-232-CBL
Allen-Bradley SLC 5-01/02/03 DH485 port
EA-DH485-CBL
9
(RS-232C)
GE 90/30 and 90/70 15-pin D-sub port
(RS-422A) EA-90-30-CBL 10
MITSUBISHI FX Series 25-pin port
(RS-422A) EA-MITSU-CBL 11
MITSUBISHI FX Series 8-pin mini-DIN
EA-MITSU-CBL-1
(RS-422A)
OMRON Host Link (C200 Adapter, C500)
12
(RS-232C) EA-OMRON-CBL
13
NOTE 1: The above list of pre-made communications cables may be purchased. See Chapter 6: PLC
Communications for wiring diagrams of additonal user constructed cables. Chapter 6 also includes wiring
diagrams for the pre-made cables.
14
NOTE 2: EZTouch serial PLC communication cables are compatible with C-more touch panels. A
EA-2CBL EA-2CBL-1 B
Pre-made cable C
examples
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 117

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 9 Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project

Following are the minimum system requirements for running C-more Programming Software,
1 p/n EA-PGMSW, on a PC:
Personal Computer with a 333 MHz or higher processor (CPU) clock speed recommended; Intel
2 Pentium/Celeron family, or AMD K6/Athlon/Duron family, or compatible processor
recommended
3 Keyboard and Mouse or compatible pointing device
Super VGA color video adapter and monitor with at least 800 x 600 pixels resolution
4 (1024 x 768 pixels recommended), 64K color minimum
300 MB free hard-disk space

5 128 MB free RAM (512 MB recommended)

CD-ROM or DVD drive for installing software from the CD

6 USB type A port or Ethernet 10/100 Mbps port for project transfer from software to touch panel
(Ethernet port not available on -R models)
Operating System - Windows XP Home / Professional Edition or Windows 2000 with Service
7 Pack 4. (To check your computer system information, go to the Start Menu All Programs and
select Accessories, then System Tools, and finally System Information.)
8 Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the PCs CD-ROM drive and follow
the instructions. If you need assistance during the software installation,
please refer to the supplied Software Installation Guide or call the
9 AutomationDirect Technical Support team @ 770-844-4200.

10
11 Start a Project Simulate Project

Allows you to check the operation of

Send Project to panel

Download your project to the connected

your project before downloading it to touch panel via USB or Ethernet.

12
the touch panel.
Make a New Project

Select Project

13
Location: C:\My Documents\C-more Projects\ Browse...
Enter a name

Or
Project: MyProject for your project Select an EZTouch Project
that was previously saved
HMI Type: EA7-T8C Select the C-more Read from Disk under Version 3.1a of the
touch panel EZTouch Programming
Software.

14
PLC Protocol: DirectLogic K-Sequence
Select the PLC Driver
Protocol Setup...

A
B
C
D

118 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 10 Connect Touch Panel to PLC

Connect the serial communications cable between the C-more touch panel and the PLC
or connect the C-more touch panel and PLC together via an Ethernet hub or switch, and CAT5
1
Ethernet cables (full feature panels only)
or use an Ethernet crossover cable directly between the C-more Ethernet port and the PLC Ethernet 2
port (full feature panels only)

Serial C-more
3
Touch Panel
DL-06 PLC 4
5
C-more to

Port 2
Direct LOGIC
VGA 15-pin port
6
serial cable
p/n EA-2CBL-1
7
8
Ethernet
Hub or Switch
Ethernet via 9
10/100 Base-T R Hub or Switch
10
PW

10/
T/ 0
AC 10
K
LN Port
10/ link
T/ 0 Up
AC 10
K
LN
10/
T/ 0
AC 10
K

05
T/
AC 10
10/
0
LN
U
SW
K
LN
10/

E
T/ 0
AC 10
K

H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100 C-more
LN

11
2

Ethernet Module Ethernet

R
1

PW
R
PW
+

Touch Panel Port

12
(Bottom View)

DL06 PLC 13
Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru
14
Ethernet via Crossover Cable A
H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100
Ethernet Module
C-more
Ethernet
Touch Panel Port
B
(Bottom View)
C
Ethernet CAT5
DL06 PLC Cable - Crossover
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 119

 CHAPTER
SPECIFICATIONS
2
In This Chapter...
Available Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Model Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
6 Base Feature Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
6 Full Feature Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
8 & 10 Full Feature Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
12 & 15 Full Feature Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C & T6C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . .28
EA7-T8C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
EA7-T10C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
EA7-T12C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
EA7-T15C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Mounting Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Memory Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Handling External Memory Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Power Loss Detection and Power Retention Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Data Logging Function and Logging Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Data Logging Memory Device Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Chemical Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Available Models
1 The C-more Operator Interface is the next generation of touch panel brought to you by
AutomationDirect. It has been designed to display and interchange graphical data from a PLC
2 by merely viewing or touching the screen.
The C-more Touch Panel is available in a variety of models to suit your application. Refer to the
following tables for a list of part numbers, descriptions and options available.
3
Part User CF Card USB
Description
4 Number Memory Option Device Ethernet
6-inch C-more grayscale STN touch panel (5.7 inch viewable
screen), 15 shades of gray, 320 x 240 pixel QVGA screen
5 EA7-S6M-R
resolution, 333 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating
range), NEMA 4/4X, IP-65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor 10 MB No Yes No
use only), non-replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half-life.
6 *Base Model: Built-in USB only, no Ethernet or CompactFlash
support.
6-inch C-more color STN touch panel (5.7 inch viewable
7 screen), 256 colors, 320 x 240 pixel QVGA screen resolution,
333 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range), NEMA
EA7-S6C-R 4/4X, IP-65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use only), 10 MB No Yes No

8 non-replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half-life. *Base Model:

Built-in USB only, no Ethernet or CompactFlash support.

9 6-inch C-more grayscale STN touch panel (5.7 inch viewable

screen), 15 shades of gray, 320 x 240 pixel QVGA screen
resolution, 333 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating
EA7-S6M range), NEMA 4/4X, IP-65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor 10MB Yes Yes Yes
10 use only), non-replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half-life.
Built-in Ethernet and USB; supports CompactFlash.

11 6-inch C-more color STN touch panel (5.7 inch viewable

screen), 256 colors, 320 x 240 pixel QVGA screen resolution,
333 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range), NEMA
EA7-S6C 10 MB Yes Yes Yes
12 4/4X, IP-65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use only),
non-replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half-life.
Built-in Ethernet and USB; supports CompactFlash.

13 6-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (5.7 inch viewable

screen), 64K colors, 320 x 240 pixel QVGA screen resolution,
333 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range), NEMA
14 EA7-T6C 4/4X, IP-65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use only),
non-replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half-life.
10 MB Yes Yes Yes

Built-in Ethernet and USB; supports CompactFlash.

A
Table continued on the next page.
B
C
D

22 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Available Models (contd)

Part Description User CF Card USB 1
Number Memory Option Device Ethernet
8-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (8.4 inch viewable
2
screen), 64K colors, 640 x 480 pixel VGA screen resolution, 400
EA7-T8C MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range), NEMA
4/4X, IP-65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use only), user
replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half-life.
10 MB Yes Yes Yes 3
Built-in Ethernet and USB; supports CompactFlash.

10-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (10.4 inch viewable

4
screen), 64K colors, 640 x 480 pixel VGA screen resolution, 400
EA7-T10C MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range), NEMA
4/4X, IP-65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use only), user 10 MB Yes Yes Yes 5
replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half-life.
Built-in Ethernet and USB; supports CompactFlash.
6
12-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (12.1 inch viewable

EA7-T12C
screen), 64K colors, 800 x 600 pixel SVGA screen resolution,
400 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range), NEMA
4/4X, IP-65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use only), user 40 MB Yes Yes Yes
7
replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half-life.
Built-in Ethernet and USB; supports CompactFlash. 8
15-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (15.0 inch viewable

EA7-T15C
screen), 64K colors, 1024 x 768 XGA screen resolution, 400
MHz CPU, 24V DC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range), NEMA 40 MB Yes Yes Yes
9
4/4X, IP-65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use only), user
replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half- life.
Built-in Ethernet and USB; supports CompactFlash. 10
Model Specifications 11
The following tables on the next four pages provide details to the Specifications of each available
model. The specification tables are separated into the following groups: 12
6 Base Feature Models, EA7-S6M-R and EA7-S6C-R
6 Full Feature Models, EA7-S6M, EA7-S6C and EA7-T6C 13
8 & 10 Full Feature Models, EA7-T8C and EA7-T10C
12 & 15 Full Feature Models, EA7-T12C & EA7-T15C 14
The following note applies to the Backlight Average Lifetime of 50,000 hours shown in the
following four tables: A
Note: The backlight average lifetime is defined as the average usage time it takes before the brightness
becomes 50% of the initial brightness. The lifetime of the backlight depends on the ambient temperature. The
B
lifetime will decrease under low or high temperature usage.
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 23

 Chapter 2: Specifications

6 Base Feature Models

1 Specification
Model 6 STN grayscale
w/ base features
6 STN color
w/ base features

2 Part Number
Display Actual Size and Type
EA7-S6M-R
5.7" STN grayscale
EA7-S6C-R
5.7" STN color
Color Scale 15 shades of gray 256 colors
3 Display Viewing Area
Screen Pixels
4.54" x 3.4" [115.2 mm x 86.4 mm]
320 x 240 (QVGA)
Display Brightness 150 cd/m2 (NITS) 200 cd/m2 (NITS)
4 LCD Panel Dot Pitch
Backlight Average Lifetime
0.36 mm x 0.36 mm
Approximately 50,000 hours (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
Backlight User Replaceable
5 Touch Panel Type
No
Analog resistive (10-bit resolution, 1024 x 1024 touch area)
CPU Type 32-Bit RISC CPU (333 MHz)
6 Battery
System Memory
Replaceable battery ADC Part # D2-BAT-1 (Manufacturer Part # CR2354)
SDRAM 32 MBytes
System Flash Memory FLASH 32 MBytes
7 Backup Memory (SRAM)
Logging Data Memory
Control data backup memory (SRAM) 256 KBytes
USB Pen Drive p/n SDCZ4-512-A10 (Optional)
Number of Screens Up to 999 limited by project memory (10 MBytes)
8 Realtime Clock Built into panel (PLC clock is still accessible if available)
Calendar Month/Day/Year Yes - battery backup
9 Screen Saver
Serial PLC Interface
Yes, backlight turns off after a 301500 minute adjustable time, or can be disabled
Serial PLC Port: RS-232C/422/485 15-Pin D-sub (female)
USB Port Type B Download/Program USB Port type B
10 USB Port Type A
Ethernet Port
Port for USB device options type A
not available
Audio Line Out not available
11 CF Card Slot #1 not available
Expansion Assembly
not available
12 (p/n EA-EXP-OPT)
Supply Power 24 VDC, -15%, +20% (20.428.8 VDC operating range, minimum of 1.5 A) (Use the AC/DC
Power Adapter, EA-AC, to power the touch panel from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. power source.)
13 Power Consumption
Recommended DC Supply Fuse
9 W @ 24 VDC
2.5 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL2-5
10 W @ 24 VDC

Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F)

14 Storage Temperature
Humidity
20 to +60 C (4 to +140 F)
1085% RH (non-condensing)
Noise Immunity Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 s, Rise time: 1 ns
A Withstand Voltage 1000 VDC for 1 minute, between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
Insulation Resistance Over 20 M between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
B Vibration IEC61131-2 compliant, 1057 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude, 57150 Hz 1.0 G:
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes
Shock 15 G peak, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
C Enclosure
Agency Approvals
NEMA 4/4X , IP-65 (When mounted correctly. For indoor use only.)
UL, cUL, CE
Dimensions 6.140" x 8.047" x 1.697" [156.0 mm x 204.4 mm x 43.1 mm]
D Weight 1.46 lb. [660 g] 1.39 lb. [630 g]

24 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

6 Full Feature Models

Specification
Model 6 STN grayscale
w/ full features
6 STN color
w/ full features
6 TFT color
w/ full features
1
Part Number EA7-T6C
Display Actual Size and Type
EA7-S6M
5.7" STN grayscale
EA7-S6C
5.7" STN color 5.7" TFT color 2
Color Scale 15 shades of gray 256 colors 65,536 colors
Display Viewing Area
Screen Pixels
4.54" x 3.4" [115.2 mm x 86.4 mm]
320 x 240 (QVGA)
3
Display Brightness 150 cd/m2 (NITS) 200 cd/m2 (NITS) 270 cd/m2 (NITS)
LCD Panel Dot Pitch
Backlight Average Lifetime
0.36 mm x 0.36 mm
Approximately 50,000 hours (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
4
Backlight User Replaceable No
Touch Panel Type Analog resistive (10-bit resolution, 1024 x 1024 touch area) 5
CPU Type 32-Bit RISC CPU (333 MHz)
Battery
System Memory
Replaceable battery ADC Part # D2-BAT-1 (Manufacturer Part # CR2354)
SDRAM 32 MBytes
6
System Flash Memory FLASH 32 MBytes
Backup Memory (SRAM) Control data backup memory (SRAM) 256 KBytes
CompactFlash Memory Card p/n EA-FLASH-128MB, industrial grade, high speed (Optional)
7
Logging Data Memory or USB Pen Drive p/n SDCZ4-512-A10 (Optional)
Number of Screens
Realtime Clock
Up to 999 limited by project memory (10 MBytes)
Built into panel (PLC clock is still accessible if available)
8
Calendar Month/Day/Year Yes - battery backup
Screen Saver Yes, backlight turns off after a 301500 minute adjustable time, or can be disabled 9
Serial PLC Interface Serial PLC Port: RS-232C/422/485 15-Pin D-sub (female)
USB Port Type B
USB Port Type A
Download/Program USB Port type B
Port for USB device options type A
10
Ethernet Port Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
Audio Line Out
CF Card Slot #1
Audio Line Out, 1 volt rms, stereo requires amplifier and speaker(s)
Optional: CompactFlash Card p/n EA-FLASH-32MB, slot #1 located on top side of touch panel.
11
Expansion Assembly
(p/n EA-EXP-OPT)
Optional: Use the CF Card Adapter p/n EA-CF-IF in the right slot of the expansion assembly for
installing CF card - Slot #2. The left slot of the expansion assembly is for future options. 12
24 VDC, -15%, +20% (20.428.8 VDC operating range, minimum of 1.5 A) (Use the AC/DC
Supply Power
Power Consumption
Power Adapter, EA-AC, to power the touch panel from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. power source.)
10 W @ 24 VDC 11 W @ 24 VDC 13 W @ 24 VDC 13
Recommended DC Supply Fuse 2.5 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL2-5
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F)
20 to +60 C (4 to +140 F)
14
Humidity 1085% RH (non-condensing)
Noise Immunity
Withstand Voltage
Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 s, Rise time: 1 ns
1000 VDC for 1 minute, between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
A
Insulation Resistance Over 20 M between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
Vibration IEC61131-2 compliant, 1057 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude, 57150 Hz 1.0 G:
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes
B
Shock 15 G peak, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
Enclosure NEMA 4/4X , IP-65 (When mounted correctly. For indoor use only.) C
Agency Approvals UL, cUL, CE
Dimensions
Weight
6.140" x 8.047" x 1.697" [156.0 mm x 204.4 mm x 43.1 mm]
1.50 lb. [680 g] 1.43 lb. [650 g] 1.52 lb. [690 g]
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 25

 Chapter 2: Specifications

8 and 10 Full Feature Models

1 Specifications
Model 8 TFT color
w/ full features
10 TFT color
w/ full features
Part Number EA7-T8C EA7-T10C
2 Display Actual Size and Type 8.4" TFT color 10.4" TFT color
Color Scale 65,536 colors
3 Display Viewing Area
Screen Pixels
6.73" x 5.05" [170.9 mm x 128.2 mm] 8.31" x 6.24" [211.2 mm x 158.4 mm]
640 x 480 (VGA)
Display Brightness 300 cd/m2 (NITS) 270 cd/m2 (NITS)
4 LCD Panel Dot Pitch
Backlight Average Lifetime
0.267 mm x 0.267 mm 0.33 mm x 0.33 mm
Approximately 50,000 hours (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
Backlight User Replaceable Yes - Part No. EA-xx-BULB, xx = panel size
5 Touch Panel Type Analog resistive (10-bit resolution, 1024 x 1024 touch area)
CPU Type 32-Bit RISC CPU (400 MHz)
6 Battery
System Memory
Replaceable battery ADC Part # D2-BAT-1 (Manufacturer Part # CR2354)
SDRAM 32 MBytes
System Flash Memory FLASH 32 MBytes
7 Backup Memory (SRAM) Control data backup memory (SRAM) 256 KBytes
CompactFlash Memory Card p/n EA-FLASH-128MB, industrial grade, high speed (Optional)
Logging Data Memory or USB Pen Drive p/n SDCZ4-512-A10 (Optional)
8 Number of Screens
Realtime Clock
Up to 999 limited by project memory (10 MBytes)
Built into panel (PLC clock is still accessible if available)
Calendar Month/Day/Year Yes - battery backup
9 Screen Saver Yes, backlight turns off after a 301500 minute adjustable time, or can be disabled
Serial PLC Interface Serial PLC Port: RS-232C/422/485 15-Pin D-sub (female)
10 USB Port Type B
USB Port Type A
Download/Program USB Port type B
Port for USB device options type A
Ethernet Port Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
11 Audio Line Out
CF Card Slot #1
Audio Line Out, 1 volt rms, stereo requires amplifier and speaker(s)
Optional: CompactFlash Card p/n EA-FLASH-32MB, slot #1 located on top side of touch panel.
Expansion Assembly
12 (p/n EA-EXP-OPT)
Optional: Use the CF Card Adapter p/n EA-CF-IF in the right slot of the expansion assembly for
installing CF card - Slot #2. The left slot of the expansion assembly is for future options.
24 VDC, -15%, +20% (20.428.8 VDC operating range, minimum of 1.5 A) (Use the AC/DC
Supply Power Power Adapter, EA-AC, to power the touch panel from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. power source.)
13 Power Consumption 15 W @ 24 VDC 17 W @ 24 VDC
Recommended DC Supply Fuse 2.5 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL2-5
14 Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F)
20 to +60 C (4 to +140 F)
Humidity 1085% RH (non-condensing)
A Noise Immunity
Withstand Voltage
Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 s, Rise time: 1 ns
1000 VDC for 1 minute, between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
Insulation Resistance Over 20 M between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
B Vibration IEC61131-2 compliant, 1057 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude, 57150 Hz 1.0 G:
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes
Shock 15 G peak, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
C Enclosure NEMA 4/4X , IP-65 (When mounted correctly. For indoor use only.)
Agency Approvals UL, cUL, CE
D Dimensions 8.748" x 10.894" x 2.053"
[222.2 mm x 276.7 mm x 52.1 mm]
10.669" x 13.661" x 2.079"
[271.0 x 347.0 x 52.8 mm]
Weight 2.60 lb. [1,180 g] 3.55 lb. [1,610 g]

26 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

12 and 15 Full Feature Models

Specifications
Model 12 TFT color
w/ full features
15 TFT color
w/ full features
1
Part Number
Display Actual Size and Type
EA7-T12C
12.1" TFT color
EA7-T15C
15.0" TFT color 2
Color Scale 65,536 Colors
Display Viewing Area
Screen Pixels
9.47" x 7.62" [240.6 mm x 184.5 mm]
800 x 600 (SVGA)
11.97" x 8.98" [304.1 mm x 228.1 mm]
1024 x 768 (XGA)
3
Display Brightness 260 cd/m2 (NITS) 220 cd/m2 (NITS)
LCD Panel Dot Pitch
Backlight Average Lifetime
0.267 mm x 0.267 mm 0.297 mm x 0.297 mm
Approximately 50,000 hours (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
4
Backlight User Replaceable Yes - Part No. EA-xx-BULB, xx = panel size
Touch Panel Type Analog resistive (12-bit resolution, 4096 x 4096 touch area) 5
CPU Type 32-Bit RISC CPU (400 MHz) Plus Graphic Accelerator Chip
Battery
System Memory
Replaceable battery ADC Part # D2-BAT-1 (Manufacturer Part # CR2354)
SDRAM 64 MBytes
6
System Flash Memory FLASH 64 MBytes
Backup Memory (SRAM) Control data backup memory (SRAM) 256 KBytes
CompactFlash Memory Card p/n EA-FLASH-128MB, industrial grade, high speed (Optional)
7
Logging Data Memory or USB Pen Drive p/n SDCZ4-512-A10 (Optional)
Number of Screens
Realtime Clock
Up to 999 limited by project memory (40 MBytes)
Built into panel (PLC clock is still accessible if available)
8
Calendar Month/Day/Year Yes - battery backup
Screen Saver Yes, backlight turns off after a 301500 minute adjustable time, or can be disabled 9
Serial PLC Interface Serial PLC Port: RS-232C/422/485 15-Pin D-sub (female)
USB Port Type B
USB Port Type A
Download/Program USB Port type B
Port for USB device options type A
10
Ethernet Port Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
Audio Line Out
CF Card Slot #1
Audio Line Out, 1 volt rms, stereo requires amplifier and speaker(s)
Optional: CompactFlash Card p/n EA-FLASH-32MB, slot #1 located on top side of touch panel.
11
Expansion Assembly
(p/n EA-EXP-OPT)
Optional: Use the CF Card Adapter p/n EA-CF-IF in the right slot of the expansion assembly for
installing CF card - Slot #2. The left slot of the expansion assembly is for future options. 12
24 VDC, -15%, +20% (20.428.8 VDC operating range, minimum of 1.5 A) (Use the AC/DC
Supply Power Power Adapter, EA-AC, to power the touch panel from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. power source.)
Power Consumption 20 W @ 24 VDC 33 W @ 24 VDC 13
Recommended DC Supply Fuse 4.0 A time delay, ADC MDL4
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F)
20 to +60 C (4 to +140 F)
14
Humidity 1085% RH (non-condensing)
Noise Immunity
Withstand Voltage
Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 s, Rise time: 1 ns
1000 VDC for 1 minute, between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
A
Insulation Resistance Over 20 M between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
Vibration IEC61131-2 compliant, 1057 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude, 57150 Hz 1.0 G:
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes
B
Shock 15 G peak, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
Enclosure NEMA 4/4X , IP-65 (When mounted correctly. For indoor use only.) C
Agency Approvals UL, cUL, CE
Dimensions 11.024" x 13.336" x 2.075"
[280.0 x 339.5 x 52.7 mm]
13.000" x 16.748" x 1.0481"
[330.2 x 425.4 x 54.0 mm] D
Weight 4.59 lb. [2,080 g] 7.01 lb. [3,180 g]

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 27

 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C

1 Dimensions:
2 All the necessary mounting hardware is provided with the touch panel. Use the two (2)
mounting clips and screws to secure the touch panel to the cabinet or enclosure surface.
A template is provided for marking the cutout dimensions on the mounting surface.
3
4 7.402
[188.0]

5 1.500
Gasket
[38.1]
6 Mounting Clip
0.197 (2) places
Units: inches[mm]
7 [5.0]
8.047
[204.4]
8
9
10 6.140
[156.0] 5.458
[138.6]
11
12
13
14
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
A and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
B Mounting Clip
Screw Torque Touch
Panel Size
Enclosure
Thickness Range
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range
6 lower mounting
C clip position
0.039 - 0.24 inch
[1 6 mm]
35 ~ 50 oz-in
[0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]
6 upper mounting 0.20 - 0.63 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
D clip position [5 16 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]

28 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C

Ports & Memory Expansion:
1
DC Power Label
CF Slot #1
(not available)
2
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location
3
(not available)

Base Feature Model 4

EA7-S6M-R & EA7-S6C-R PWR

CPU 5
TxD

RxD
BATT

IOIOIPLC
6
PLC Serial
Communications
Product Label 7
8
USB B
(Programming/
USB A
(Device Options)
9
Download)

CF Slot #1
10
DC Power Label (Top of Panel)

11
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location
12
Full Feature Model
EA7-S6M, EA7-S6C & EA7-T6C PWR
13
CPU

TxD

BATT
RxD

14
IOIOIPLC

PLC Serial Product Label

A
Communications

B
For Future Use
C
USB B USB A Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
(Programming/ (PLC Communications,
Audio Line Out Download)
(Device Options)
Programming/Download)
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 29

 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T8C
1 Dimensions:
2 All the necessary mounting hardware is provided with the touch panel. Use the six (6) mounting
clips and screws to secure the touch panel to the cabinet or enclosure surface. A template is
provided for marking the cutout dimensions on the mounting surface.
3
4 9.159
[232.6]
Gasket
5 1.738
[44.1]

6
0.315 Units: inches[mm]
[8.0] Mounting Clip
7 10.894
[276.7] (6) places

8
9
10 8.748 6.993
[222.2] [177.6]
11
12
13
14
A Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
B Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
C Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
0.039 - 0.20 inch 42 ~ 57 oz-in
8, 10, 12 & 15 [1 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
D

210 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T8C
Ports & Memory Expansion:
1
CF Slot #1
2
DC Power Label (Top of Panel)

3
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location
4
Full Feature Model 5
EA7-T8C
6
7
8
PLC Serial Product Label
Communications
9
10
For Future Use
USB B USB A
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
(PLC Communications,
Programming/Download)
11
Audio Line Out (Programming/ (Device Options)
Download)
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 211

 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T10C
1 Dimensions:
2 All the necessary mounting hardware is provided with the touch panel. Use the six (6) mounting
clips and screws to secure the touch panel to the cabinet or enclosure surface. A template is
provided for marking the cutout dimensions on the mounting surface.
3
11.820
4 [300.2]
Gasket
1.685
5 [42.8]

6 0.394 Units: inches [mm]

[10.0]
7 13.661
[347.0]
Mounting Clip
(6) places
8
9
10
10.669
8.828
11 [271.0]
[224.2]

12
13
14
A Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
B Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
C Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
0.039 - 0.20 inch 42 ~ 57 oz-in
8, 10, 12 & 15 [1 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
D

212 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T10C
Ports & Memory Expansion:
1
CF Slot #1
(Top of Panel) DC Power Label
2
3
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location 4
Full Feature Model 5
EA7-T10C
6
7
8
PLC Serial Product Label
9
Communications
10
11
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
For Future Use
(PLC Communications,
Programming/Download) 12
Audio Line Out USB B
(Programming/ USB A
Download) (Device Options)
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 213

 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T12C
1 Dimensions:
2 All the necessary mounting hardware is provided with the touch panel. Use the six (6) mounting
clips and screws to secure the touch panel to the cabinet or enclosure surface. A template is
provided for marking the cutout dimensions on the mounting surface.
3
12.430
Gasket
4 [315.7]

5 1.681
[42.7]

6 0.394 Units: inches [mm]

[10.0] Mounting Clip
7 13.366
[339.5]
(6) places

8
9
10
11.024 10.088
11 [280.0] [256.2]

12
13
14
A Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
B Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
C Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
0.039 - 0.20 inch 42 ~ 57 oz-in
8, 10, 12 & 15 [1 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
D

214 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T12C
Ports & Memory Expansion:
1
CF Slot #1 DC Power Label
2
(Top of Panel)

3
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location
4
Full Feature Model 5
EA7-T12C 6
7
8
PLC Serial Product Label
Communications
9
10
For Future Use
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
(PLC Communications,
Programming/Download)
11
Audio Line Out
USB B
(Programming/
Download)
USB A
(Device Options)
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 215

 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T15C
1 Dimensions:
2 All the necessary mounting hardware is provided with the touch panel. Use the eight (8)
mounting clips and screws to secure the touch panel to the cabinet or enclosure surface. A
template is provided for marking the cutout dimensions on the mounting surface.
3 14.892
[378.3]
4 Gasket
1.654
5 [42.0]

6 0.394 Units: inches[mm]

[10.0]
7 16.748
[425.4] Mounting Clip
(8) places
8
9
10
11 13.000
[330.2]
11.230
[285.2]

12
13
14
A Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
B and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip

C Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range
Touch
Panel Size
Enclosure
Thickness Range
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
0.039 - 0.20 inch 42 ~ 57 oz-in
D 8, 10, 12 & 15 [1 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]

216 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T15C
Ports & Memory Expansion:
1
2
CF Slot #1
DC Power Label
(Top of Panel)
3
4
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location
5
Full Feature Model 6
EA7-T15C
7
8
9
PLC Serial Product Label
10
Communications

11
12
For Future Use
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
(PLC Communications,
13
Programming/Download)
Audio Line Out USB B
(Programming/ USB A
(Device Options)
14
Download)
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 217

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Mounting Clearances
1 The following drawing shows the mounting clearances for the C-more touch panel. There
should be a minimum of 4 inches of space between all sides of the panel and the nearest object
2 or obstruction and at least 2 inches between the rear of the panel and the nearest object or
obstruction.

3 Note: Make sure the touch panel is mounted on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper
cooling.

4
5 Mounting Clip

6
4 Min.
7 2 Min.
8
4 Min. 4 Min.
9
10
11
4 Min.
12 Air
Flow

13
14 Front View Side View

A
B
C
D

218 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Communications Ports
Compact Flash
memory slot #1
PLC Serial Communications Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1
is located at the 1 Frame GND 6 LE 11 TXD+ (422/485)
top of panel. 8 1

15 9
2
3
4
TXD (232C)
RXD (232C)
Vcc
7
8
9
CTS (232C)
RTS (232C)
RXD+ (422/485)
12 TXD (422/485)
13 Term. Resistor
14 do not use
2
5 Logic GND 10 RXD (422/485) 15 do not use

3
For Future Use
Bottom View
4
Audio Line Out, Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
stereo, 1 Volt rms,
3.5mm Mini Jack
(Amplifier Required)
Pin
PLC Communications,
Programming/Download

Signal Pin Signal

5
1 TD+ 5 do not use
USB Port - Type B
Programming/Download
Pin Signal
USB Port - Type A
USB Device Options
2
3
TD
RD+
6
7
RD
do not use
6
4 do not use 8 do not use
1 Vbus Pin Signal

7
2 1

2 D 1 2 3 4 1 do not use 1 8
3 4 Link Status LED (Green) Network Activity LED (Orange)
3 D+ 2 D
3 D+ On Ethernet Linked On Active Network Data
4 GND
4 GND Off No Ethernet Comm. Off Network Idle
Shell Shield

8
Note: Device is not available on Base Feature touch panels, part numbers EA7-S6M-R and EA7-S6C-R.

Ethernet Port
Note: Use USB Programming Cable, p/n USB-CBL-AB15.
9
The Ethernet port can be used several ways: for programming the panel (downloading a
project), for PLC communication, and for the advanced features, such as sending e-mail, FTP
10
access, and allowing the panel to act as a web-server.
The Ethernet connector is an RJ-45 Module jack type. It has a green and an orange LED. 11
The orange LED indicates the Ethernet communication status. It illuminates when there is data
activity on the network. 12
The green LED indicates link status and illuminates when a link is established.
Ethernet connections to PLCs: 13
Direct LOGIC Ethernet
Modbus TCP/IP 14
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Server - Generic I/O Messaging (ControlLogix, CompactLogix,
and FlexLogix) A
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Client - Tag Based (ControlLogix, CompactLogix, and FlexLogix)
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Client - MicroLogix 1100 & SLC 5/05, both via native Ethernet port B
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Client - MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5-03/04/05,
all via ENI Adapter
Entivity Modbus TCP/IP
C
Note: The base panels ( -R part numbers) do not include an Ethernet port, and do not have these capabilities. D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 219

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Communications Ports (contd)

1 USB Port B
2 Program C-more via the USB programming port. It's fast and easy, with no baud rate settings,
parity, or stop bits to worry about. We stock standard USB cables for your convenience, such as
part no. USB-CBL-AB15. USB Port B can be used to upload or download projects to and from
3 a PC (personnel computer).
USB Port A
4 The Universal Serial Bus (USB) type A port is a standard feature for all models and can be used
to connect various USB HID (Human Input Device) devices to the panel, such as:
5 USB pen drives, (such as ADC p/n SDCZ4-512-A10)
USB keyboards
6 USB barcode scanners
USB card scanners
7 C-more can log data to the USB pen drive as well as load projects to the panel from the pen
drive. You can also back up project files and panel firmware.
8 Sound Interface (Audio Line Out)
When attached to an amplifier and speaker(s), C-more can play warning sounds, or
9 pre-recorded messages such as: "conveyor is jammed". C-more supports WAV type files.
The output is stereo. Various Objects in the C-more programming software support sounds.
10 Sound files are stored in the sound library. See the C-more programming software help support
for additional details.

11 PLC Port
The PLC port is an RS-232C, RS-422A or RS-485A female 15-pin D-sub connector. Use this
port for serial connections to PLCs. The port supports the following PLC protocols:
12 All AutomationDirect.com Direct LOGIC PLCs:
Direct LOGIC K-sequence
13 Direct NET
Modbus (Koyo Addressing)

14 Allen Bradley:
DF1 Full & Half Duplex
DF1 Full & Half Duplex - Tag Based
A PLC5 DF1
DH485

B Modbus RTU
Entivity Modbus RTU
GE Fanuc SNPX (90/30, 90/70)
C Omron:
Host Link (C200 Adapter, C500)
FINS (CJ1, CS1)
D Mitsubishi Melsec FX

220 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Memory Organization
The following diagram outlines the relationships between the internal memory of the panel and 1
any external memory device. It also shows how the various memory areas can be used for
different functions. The 6, 8 and 10 panels have a project area of 10 MB, while the 12 and
15 panels have a 40 MB project area.
2
USB Flash Drive CompactFlash Card CompactFlash Card
3
(USB Port Built-in) (Slot #2 Optional) (Slot #1 Built-in)

Use additional memory for:

Project Transfers
4
Project Back-up/Restore
Alarm Logging
Up to 1 GB Total Up to 1 GB Total Up to 1 GB Total Message Logging
Screen Captures
Trend Data Logging External
5
Additional Font Memory Memory Devices
USB Port, Type A CF2 Slot
6
10 MB*
Use additional memory for: Project Memory
Project Back-up/Restore
Alarm Logging
Message Logging CF1 Slot 7
Screen Captures
Trend Data Logging
8
C-more Touch Panel
NOTE:
The Project is loaded into the
9
Internal SDRAM memory from
the Internal Flash Memory and
executed in the SDRAM memory.
If a CompactFlash memory
card is plugged into CF1 Slot,
Internal Flash
Memory
Project and user data run in
10
then its Project is loaded into the internal SDRAM while
the Internal SDRAM memory the panel is powered.
and executed.
10 MB*
Project Memory
& Font Memory
This data is backed-up internally
(32 MB* Internal Flash memory),
11
and loaded/copied into SDRAM
on power up.

Internal SDRAM 22 MB
External Memory devices can
also be used for back-up of
C-more projects.
12
Memory Reserved
(Operating System,
*Note: 12 and 15 units have:
Firmware, etc.)
64 MB SDRAM
64 MB Internal Flash
40 MB of Available Project
13
Memory

Working
Memory
Internal
256 KB SRAM
14
Memory
(Battery Backed)
A
Log Buffer
Alarm, Message, and Trend Data
Logging is buffered in SRAM
pending transfer to an External
B
Memory device:
When the buffer nears full
NOTE:
The Project and Font memory
sizes can be checked by viewing
Periodically, every 5 minutes
When one of the internal eject
tags is activated via an Object
C
the Project Transfer dialog box in Retentive or Event
the C-more Programming Software. Tag Data
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 221

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Handling External Memory Devices

1 Consider the following to prevent data error risk when utilizing data logging.
Do not turn off power to the C-more touch panel at any time the external memory device is being
2 accessed.
Do not remove any external memory device when the device is being accessed by the touch panel.
3 Note: A system tag, such as SYS %device% WriteStatus can be used to detect when the external memory
device is being accessed. See the C-more programming software on-line help for additional information on
4 System Tag Names.

If a CompactFlash memory card is plugged into the CF1 slot while the panel is running, the project
5 will continue to run from the project that is currently in the internal SDRAM. If power is cycled and
there is a good project stored on the CompactFlash, then that project will be loaded into the internal
SDRAM and ran.
6 Be sure to backup the memory device at regular intervals.
A CompactFlash memory card plugged into the CF1 slot that includes a project that is being run
7 cannot be used for backup.
If you suspect the memory device is bad, you may want to use a PC to re-format the device, or use a
8 known good memory device.

Note: The C-more touch panel requires that all external memory devices be formatted with a FAT32 file
9 system.

The number of times the memory device can be written to is limited, approximately 300,000 times.
10 Consequently, frequent writing at short intervals may shorten the service life of the memory device.
Try to use as long as possible sampling times for logging data to reduce the amount of times the
memory device is accessed.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

222 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Power Loss Detection and Power Retention Period

It is important to have an understanding of how the touch panel handles power loss as it applies 1
to data logging and retentive name tag data. The C-more touch panel system CPU will receive
a power loss interrupt signal when the incoming DC voltage level drops below 19.2 VDC. If
using the optional AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, then an interrupt signal will occur when the
2
incoming AC voltage level drops below 58 VAC (+/- 5%). When power loss is detected, the
backlight will turn off immediately to allow extending the power retention period. Any logging 3
to either CompactFlash memory or an USB pen drive will also stop. This will allow time to
complete writing any data to the internal 256 KB SRAM. The 256 KB SRAM along with CPU
Date/Time registers are battery backed.
4
Because the 24 VDC power retention time period is very short, only data backup to the internal
256 KB SRAM memory buffer can occur. When power is restored, the contents of the SRAM
5
will be written to the selected memory storage device.
6
Data Logging Function and Logging Media
Considering the power retention period and the CF card write performance, the EA-FLASH- 7
128MB memory card is recommended to minimize data loss. It is also recommended to further
reduce the risk of losing data, a uninterruptible power supply (UPS) should be used to provide
power to the touch panel.
8
Data Logging - Memory Device Full 9
The following explains what occurs when logging data from an object, such as Line Trending,
and the memory device becomes full. The memory device can be a USB pen drive plugged into 10
the USB port, or a CompactFlash memory card plugged into location CF1 or CF2.
The answer is when the memory device that is being used for logging is full, the panel will stop 11
writing to the log and a RTE-001 Runtime Error will be displayed on the screen. The displayed
error message will read "Log Failed. Not enough Memory Space in %Device%". (%Device%
can be USB, CF1, or CF2.) The data logging object will continue to execute.
12
The user can monitor the System Tag "SYS %DEVICE% FreeMemory" with the Event
Manager, and display a message to the operator to warn when the memory device is close to full.
13
The user can also use a Pushbutton object with the tag "SYS Copy Log to %Device%" to copy
ALL logs on ALL other devices to %Device% and therefore save the current data. 14
For example, if the application is logging to CF1 and CF2, the user can monitor "SYS CF1
FreeMemory" and "SYS CF2 FreeMemory" in the Event Manager. When the value of either A
gets below a set value in the Event Manager, then the Event Manger can issue an Alarm, send
an email, etc. The operator can then insert a USB pen drive into the panel's USB port, and press
a pushbutton that is configured with System Tag "SYS Copy Log to USB". This action will copy
B
all of the logged data to the USB pen drive from both CF1 and CF2. The operator can then use
the System Setup Screen's Memory selection to clear both CompactFlash CF1 and CF2. C
This example can work with different combinations of the memory devices, but the preferred
method is using a USB pen drive because it is the easiest device to insert and remove. D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 223

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility
1 The C-more touch panels are comprised of three different materials that may be exposed to
outside elements. The panels screen has a polyester (PET) surface. The bezel uses ABS plastic
2 materials and the panels gasket is a silicone rubber material. The following tables are provided
to make you aware of the general compatibility between chemicals that may be present in your
work environment and the various materials used in the manufacture of the panel. Use the table
3 to determine those chemicals that are safe to use around your C-more touch panel and those
that may harm it. The tables are made up of specifications provided by the manufacturer of the
4 listed material. The tables rate these chemicals as either Excellent, Good, Not Recommended,
or Not Usable. Because the ratings are for ideal conditions at room temperature, consider all
factors when evaluating your application. Areas left blank have not been tested by the
5 manufacturer and therefore information of compatibility is not available.
The values in [brackets] represent the chemicals density at RT (room temperature), (20 C).
6
Screen Sheet PET Bezel ABS Gasket Silicone
7 Chemicals [Density %,
Temperature C]
[Density %,
Temperature C]
[Density %,
Temperature C]
Acetaldehyde Not Recommended
8 [10, RT] Excellent
[10, RT] Excellent
9 Acetic Acid [Glacial] Excellent [50, RT] Not Usable
[50-70, RT] Not Usable
10 [100, RT] Not Usable
Acetic anhydride Not Recommended
11 Acetone Excellent Not Usable
Acetophenone Not Usable
12 Acetylene Excellent
Acrylonitrile Not Recommended
13 Alcohol - Butyl Ether Excellent
Alcohol - Ethanol Excellent
14 Alcohol - Isopropyl Excellent
Alums NH3, Cr, K Excellent
A Aluminum acetate Excellent
Aluminum bromide Good

B Aluminum chloride
Aluminum nitrate
Good
Excellent

C Aluminum sulfate
Ammonia [anhydrous]
Excellent
Good

D Table continued at top of next page.

224 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (contd)

Screen Sheet PET Bezel ABS Gasket Silicone 1
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
Temperature C] Temperature C] Temperature C]
Ammonia gas [cold] Good
2
Ammonia liquid Good
[12%] Not Usable
3
Ammonia water
[28%] Not Usable
Ammonium carbonate Excellent
4
Ammonium chloride Excellent
Ammonium hydroxide Excellent
5
[ammonia water]
Ammonium nitrate Excellent 6
Ammonium persulfate Excellent
Ammonium phosphate
Ammonium sulfate
Excellent
Excellent
7
Amyl acetate
Amyl alcohol
Not Usable
Good
8
Aniline dyes
Animal oil [lard]
Not Recommended
Good
9
Aqua regia
Arsenic acid
Not Usable
Not Recommended
10
Asphalt Excellent
Barium chloride Excellent
11
Barium hydroxide Excellent
Barium sulfate Excellent
12
Barium sulfide Excellent
Beer Excellent 13
Beet sugar liquors Excellent
Benzaldehyde Not Recommended 14
Benzene [Benzol] Not Recommended
Benzene Excellent A
Benzine Not Usable Not Usable
Benzyl alcohol Not Recommended B
Benzyl benzoate Not Usable
Benzyl chloride Not Usable C
Borax Excellent
Boric acid Good D
Table continued at top of next page.

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 225

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (contd)

1 Screen Sheet PET Bezel ABS Gasket Silicone
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
2 Bromine
Temperature C] Temperature C]
Not Usable
Temperature C]

3 Butane
Butter
Excellent
Good

4 Butyl acetate
Butyl acrylate
Not Usable
Not Usable
Butyl alcohol [Butanol] Good
5 Calcium actetate Excellent
Calcium bisulfite Good
6 Calcium chloride Excellent
Calcium hydroxide Excellent
7 Calcium hypochlorite [20,RT] Excellent
Calcium nitrate Excellent
8 Calcium sulfide Excellent
Cane sugar liquors Excellent
9 Carbon dioxide Excellent
Carbon disulfide Not Usable
10 Carbonic acid Good
Carbon tetrachloride Excellent Not Usable
11 Castor oil Not Recommended
China wood [tung] oil Excellent
12 Chlorine gas [dry] Not Usable
Chlorine gas [wet] Not Usable

13 Chlorine liquid Not Usable

Chlorinated solvents Not Usable

14 Chloroacetic acid
Chloroacetone
Not Usable
Not Usable

A Chloroform
Chlorophenol
Excellent
Not Usable
Not Usable

B Chlorosulfonic acid
Chlorotoluene
Not Usable
Not Usable

C Table continued at top of next page.

226 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (contd)

Screen Sheet PET Bezel ABS Gasket Silicone 1
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
Temperature C] Temperature C] Temperature C]
[2, 70 C] Not Usable
2
Chromic acid
[5, 70 C] Not Usable
[10, 70 C] Not Usable
3
Citric acid
[25, 70 C] Not Usable
Good
4
Cocoanut oil Good
Copper chloride Excellent
5
Copper cyanide Excellent
Copper sulfate Excellent 6
Corn oil Good
Cottonseed oil Good 7
Creosol Not Usable
Cyclohexane Good 8
Cyclohexanol Good
Cyclohexanone Not Usable 9
Developing solutions [Hypos] Excellent
Dibutyl phthalate [DBP] Not Usable 10
Dichlorobenzene Not Usable
Diethylene glycol Good 11
Diethyl ether Not Usable
Disopropyl ketone Not Usable 12
Dimethyl aniline Not Usable
Dimethyl formamide
Dioxane
Not Usable
Not Usable
13
Dipentene
Epichlorohydrine
Not Usable
Not Usable
14
Ethyl acetate
Ethyl acetoacetate
Excellent Not Usable
Not Usable
A
Ethyl acrylate
Ethyl alcohol
Not Usable
Not Recommended
B
Ethyl benzene Not Usable
Ethyl chloride Not Usable
C
Ethylene chlorohydrin Not Usable
D
Table continued at top of next page.

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 227

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (contd)

1 Screen Sheet PET Bezel ABS Gasket Silicone
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
2 Ethylene diamine
Temperature C] Temperature C]
Not Usable
Temperature C]

3 Ethylene dichloride
Ethylene glycol
Not Usable
Excellent

4 Ethylene oxide
Fatty acid
Not Usable
Good
Ferric chloride
5 Ferric nitrate
Excellent
Excellent
Ferric sulfate Excellent
6 Fluorboric acid Not Recommended
Fluorobenzene Not Usable
7 Fluosilicic acid Not Recommended
[40, RT] Good
8 Formaldehyde
[25, RT] Excellent
[50, RT] Good
9 [90, RT] Not Recommended
Freon [45C] Excellent
10 Freon 11 Not Recommended
Freon 12 Good
11 Freon 113 Not Usable
Freon 114 Not Recommended
12 Fuel oil Good
Gasoline Not Recommended
13 Gelatin Excellent
Glaubers salt Excellent

14 Glue
Glycerin
Excellent
Excellent

A Grease
Hexane
Excellent
Not Recommended

B Hexyl alcohol Good

[20,RT] Not Usable
Hydrobromic acid
C [20-70,RT] Not Usable
[37,RT] Not Usable

D Table continued at top of next page.

228 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (contd)

Screen Sheet PET Bezel ABS Gasket Silicone 1
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
Temperature C] Temperature C]
[10,RT] Excellent
Temperature C]
2
[18%] Excellent
Hydrochloric acid
[20,RT] Good
[20-80, RT] Good 3
[35%] Good Not Recommended
[38,RT] Not Recommended 4
Hydrocyanic acid Excellent

Hydrofluoric acid
[10,RT] Excellent
[20,RT] Excellent
5
Hydrofluoric acid anhydrous
[40,RT] Good
Not Usable
6
Hydrogen Excellent
[5,RT] Not Recommended
7
[5-50, RT]
Hydrogen peroxide Not Recommended 8
[30,RT] Not Usable
Hydrogen sulfide
Hydorquinone
Excellent
Not Recommended
9
Hypochlorous acid
Isobutyl alcohol
Not Recommended
Good
10
Isopropyl acetate
Isopropyl alcohol
Not Usable
Good
11
JP fuels (1-6)
Kerosene
Good
Good
12
Lacquer Not Usable
Lactic acid Excellent
13
Lard Excellent
Lead acetate Excellent
14
Lead nitrate Good
Lead sulfamate Good A
Linoleic acid Excellent
Linseed oil Excellent B
Liquified petroleum gas [LPG] Excellent
Lubricating oil Excellent C
Lye solution Excellent
Magnesium chloride Excellent D
Table continued at top of next page.

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 229

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (contd)

1 Screen Sheet PET Bezel ABS Gasket Silicone
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
2 Magnesium hydroxide
Temperature C] Temperature C]
Excellent
Temperature C]

3 Magnesium sulfate
Maleic acid
Excellent
Excellent

4 Marcuric chloride
MEK Good
Excellent

Mercury
5 Metacresol Not Usable
Excellent

Methyl acetate Not Usable

6 Methyl alcohol Excellent Not Recommended
Methyl Benzoate Not Usable
7 Methyl chloride Not Usable
Methyl ethyl ketone [MEK] Not Usable
8 Methyl isobutyl ketone [MIBK] Not Usable
Methyl methacrylate Not Usable
9 Methyl dichloride Not Usable
Methyl Salicylate Not Usable
10 Milk Excellent
Mineral oil Excellent Excellent
11 Monochlorobenzene Not Usable Not Usable
Naptha Good
12 Napthalene Excellent
Napthenic acid Good
13 Natural gas Excellent
Natural oil Excellent

14 Nickel acetate
Nickel chloride
Excellent
Excellent

A Nickel sulfate Excellent

[10, RT] Good

B [20%] Good [10-70, RT] Not Usable

[30, RT] Not Usable
Nitric acid
C [30%] Not Usable
[30-70, RT] Not Usable
[61.3, RT] Not Usable
[Vapor, RT] Not Usable
D
Table continued at top of next page.

230 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (contd)

Screen Sheet PET Bezel ABS Gasket Silicone 1
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,

Nitrobenzene
Temperature C]
Not Usable
Temperature C]
Not Usable
Temperature C] 2
Nitroethane
Nitromethane
Not Usable
Not Usable
3
Nitropropane
Nitrogen
Not Usable
Excellent
4
Octyl alcohol
Oleic acid
Good
Excellent
5
Olive oil Excellent
Oxalic acid Excellent
6
Oxygen Excellent
Ozone Not Recommended
7
Palmitic acid Excellent
Perchloroethylene Not Usable 8
Petroleum Excellent
Phenol Not Usable Not Usable 9
[50, RT] Good
Phospheric acid [50-70, RT] Not Usable 10
[75, RT] Not Usable
[Sulfuric acid 20% 11
+ nitric acid 4%] Good
Pickling solution
[Sulfuric acid 40%
+ nitric acid 15%]
12
Not Recommended
Pine oil Good 13
Potassium chloride Excellent
Potassium cyanide
Potassium dichromate
Excellent
[10, RT] Excellent
14
Potassium hydroxide
Potassium nitrate
[10%] Not Usable Excellent
Excellent
A
Potassium permangante
Potassium sulfate
[5, RT] Excellent
Excellent
B
Propane
Propyl acetate
Excellent
Not Usable
C
Propyl alcohol Good
D
Table continued at top of next page.

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 231

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (contd)

1 Screen Sheet PET Bezel ABS Gasket Silicone
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
Temperature C] Temperature C] Temperature C]
2 Salt water Excellent

3 Silicone oils
Silver nitrate
Good
Excellent
Skydrol 500 Not Usable
4 Skydrol 7000 Not Usable Not Usable
Soap solutions Excellent
5 Soda ash Excellent
Sodium bicarbonate Excellent
6 Sodium bisulfate Good
Sodium borate Excellent
7 Sodium carbonate [10%] Excellent
Sodium chloride Excellent
8 Sodium cyanide Excellent
[10, RT] Excellent
9 Sodium hydroxide [10%] Not Usable [30, RT] Excellent
[30-70, RT] Not Usable
10 Sodium hydrochlorite
[5, RT] Excellent
[5-70, RT] Not Usable
11 Sodium metaphosphate Excellent
Sodium nitrate Excellent
12 Sodium perborate Excellent
Sodium peroxide Not Usable

13 Sodium phosphate
Sodium thiosulfate
Excellent
Excellent

14 Sodium sulfate [Glaubers salt]

Sodium sulfite
Good
Excellent

A Soybean oil
Stannic chloride
Excellent
Good
[below 150 degrees]
B Steam Not Usable
[above 150 degrees]
Steam Not Usable
C Stearic acid Excellent
Styrene Not Recommended
D Sucrose solutions Excellent
Table continued at top of next page.

232 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (contd)

Screen Sheet PET Bezel ABS Gasket Silicone 1
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,

Sulfur
Temperature C] Temperature C]
Excellent
Temperature C] 2
Sulfur dioxide Good
[10, RT] Excellent
3
[40%] Excellent
[10-70, RT] Not Usable
[30, RT] Excellent
4
Sulfuric acid [60%] Excellent [30-70, RT]
Not Recommended
Not Usable
5
[98, RT] Not Usable
[70%] Not Usable
[Vapor, RT] Not Usable
6
Sulpherous acid [10, RT] Good
Tannic acid Good 7
Tar Not Recommended
Tartaric acid Excellent 8
Terpineol Not Recommended
Tetrachloroethane Good Not Usable 9
Tetraethyl lead Good
Tetralin Not Usable 10
Tetrahydrofuran Not Usable Not Usable
Thionyl chloride Not Usable 11
Toluene Excellent Not Usable Not Usable
Trichloroethylene [Trichlene] Not Usable 12
Triethanol amine Good
Turpentine oil Good 13
Vegetable oil Good
Vinegar
Water
Excellent
Excellent
14
Whiskey
Xylene Excellent
Excellent
Not Usable
A
Zeolites
Zinc acetate
Excellent
Excellent
B
Zinc chloride
Zinc sulfate
Excellent
Excellent
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 233

 CHAPTER
ACCESSORIES
3
2
In This Chapter...
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Accessories Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Accessories at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
AC/DC Power Adapter EA-AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Expansion Assembly EA-EXP-OPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
CF Card Interface Module EA-CF-IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
128 MB CompactFlash Memory EA-FLASH-128MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
6 Adapter Plate EA-6-ADPTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
D-SUB 15-pin 90 degree Comm Port Adapter EA-ADPTR-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter EA-COMCON-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Non-glare Screen Covers EA-xx-COV2, xx = 6, 8, 10, 12 or 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
USB Pen Drive SDCZ4-512-A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
 Chapter 3: Accessories

Accessories
1 Part Number Description Part Number Description
The AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, is for
2 C-more touch panels only, and is powered
from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz power Non Glare 6 Inch Screen Cover, protective
source. The adapter provides 24 VDC @ overlay used to protect the touch screen
EA-AC 1.5 A. Power Fault features help protect EA-6-COV2
3 data being logged to CompactFlash during
power failures. The C-more panel must
while helping to reduce the glare from
external light sources. (pk of 3)
have firmware version 1.21 Build 6.18E or
4 higher for proper operation.
Expansion Assembly, is used to allow Non Glare 8 Inch Screen Cover, protective
installation of the optional CF Card overlay used to protect the touch screen
EA-EXP-OPT Interface Module for CF card use and also EA-8-COV2
5 provides a slot for future option modules.
while helping to reduce the glare from
external light sources. (pk of 3)
CF Card Interface Module, is used with the Non Glare 10-Inch Screen Cover, protective
6 EA-CF-IF Expansion Assembly to allow use of CF
cards, such as the CompactFlash Memory, EA-10-COV2
overlay used to protect the touch screen
while helping to reduce the glare from
p/n EA-FLASH-128MB. external light sources. (pk of 3)
7 128 MB CompactFlash Memory Card Non Glare 12-Inch Screen Cover, protective
overlay used to protect the touch screen
EA-FLASH-128MB Option, industrial grade, high speed EA-12-COV2 while helping to reduce the glare from
memory for non-volatile storage.
8 6 Inch Adapter Plate, allows C-more 6
external light sources. (pk of 3)
Non Glare 15-Inch Screen Cover, protective
touch panels to be mounted into EZTouch overlay used to protect the touch screen
EA-6-ADPTR EA-15-COV2
9 6 non-slim bezel cutouts without having
to make alterations. NEMA 4/4X.
while helping to reduce the glare from
external light sources. (pk of 3)
USB Pen Drive, 512MB, SanDisk Cruzer
10 D-SUB 15-pin 90 degree PLC serial
communication port adapter to allow a
micro Pen Drive. Compatible with
Windows 98SE, ME, 2000, XP and Mac OS
9.1.x+, OS X 10.1.2+ Certified Windows
EA-ADPTR-4 PLC communication cable to be plugged in SDCZ4-512-A10
11 at a 90 degree angle to reduce panel depth
requirements.
XP and Mac OS X. Contains Unit, sleeve
and protective cap, lanyard and keychain
loop. Recommended for use with the
C-more Operator Touch Panels.
12 D-SUB 15-pin to 6-terminal PLC serial
communication port adapter to allow wire
EA-COMCON-3 terminal connections for RS-422/485 PLC
13 communication cable.

14
A H-1
AS ARD
-FL H C
EZB FLAS e
WARNING: Do NOT use EZTouch RAM or Flash
B memory cards with the C-more touch
512
K

0
te
Da 38
2
Co
:
d

ING this
RN with
panels. WAodulewn.
m o
tall e d

C Ins sid

32 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

Accessories Overview
NOTE: CompactFlash memory card designations CF Slot #1 is at the top of the panel and CF Slot #2 is the
1
CF Card Interface Module, EA-CF-IF.
2
CF Card
3
128MB CompactFlash Memory Interface Module
Card EA-FLASH-128MB EA-CF-IF 4
CF card interface
module installs
in right slot only,
5
left slot for future

CF card plugs
6
into slot #1

C-more
at top of panel 7
Touch Panel Expansion Assembly
EA-EXP-OPT 8
9
AC/DC Power Adapter
10
EA-AC
USB Pen Drive
SDCZ4-512-A10 11
12
NOTE: Refer to the individual product data sheets that are included with the accessories for additional
information. 13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 33

 Chapter 3: Accessories

Accessories at a glance:
1
2 AC/DC Power Adapter:
6 inch Adapter Plate:
EA-6-ADPTR
Non glare 15 inch screen cover:
EA-15-COV2
EA-AC (Used to retrofit new (pk of 3)
3 C-more 6 touch panel
into existing EZTouch
non-slim panel cutout.)
Non glare 12 inch screen cover:

4 Expansion Assembly: D-SUB 15 pin 90 degree

EA-12-COV2
(pk of 3)
EA-EXP-OPT Comm Port Adapter:

5 EA-ADPTR-4
Non glare 10 inch screen cover:
EA-10-COV2
(pk of 3)

6 CF Card Interface Module:

EA-CF-IF
D-SUB 15 pin to
Terminal Block Adapter:
Non glare 8 inch screen cover:
EA-COMCON-3
EA-8-COV2
7 (pk of 3)

CF 128 MB CompactFlash USB Pen Drive, Non glare 6 inch screen cover:
8 128 MB
Memory Card:
EA-FLASH-128MB
512 MByte:
SDCZ4-512-A10
EA-6-COV2
(pk of 3)

9
10
11
12 WARNING
To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate
13 the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and it is your responsibility to
determine which codes should be followed, and to verify that the equipment, installation, and operation are in
14 compliance with the latest revision of these codes.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes and standards. We
A do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular application, nor do we assume any
responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation.
If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need additional
B information, please call us at 770-844-4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At Automationdirect.com we
C constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or
publications at any time without notice and without obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may not
D be available in certain revisions of the product.

34 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

AC/DC Power Adapter

The optional C-more AC/DC Power Adapter can be used to power the C-more touch panels 1
from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz, voltage source. The adapter provides 24 VDC @ 1.5 A to
the touch panels DC power connector and can be conveniently secured to the touch panel with
two captive screws. The adapter provides a power loss signal to the touch panel that can be used
2
to track power outages. This signal also allows the touch panel by way of a timed sequence to
stop writing data to CompactFlash memory devices providing a controlled shutdown for 3
increased data logging reliability.
4
WARNING: The AC/DC Power Adapter is not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C touch panel when
operating temperatures are expected to exceed 40 C [104 F]. 5
NOTE: 1.)The AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, is for C-more touch panels only, and is powered from a
6
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz power source. The adapter provides 24 VDC @ 1.5 A.
2.) Power Fault features help protect data being logged to CompactFlash during power failures. 7
The C-more panel must have firmware version 1.21 Build 6.18E or higher for proper operation.
8
Part No. EA-AC AC/DC Power Adapter Wiring 9
0
AC Power Adapter
11
Not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C
when operating temperatures are expected
to be above 40 deg C.

12
13
Recommended AC Supply Fuse
3.0 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL3

100 - 240 VAC

50/60 Hz
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 35

 Chapter 3: Accessories

AC/DC Power Adapter Specifications

1 Part Number
AC/DC Power Adapter Specifications
EA-AC
Input Voltage & frequency 100-240 VAC; 50/60 Hertz
2 Voltage Range 85-264 VAC w/ Under Voltage and Over Voltage Shutdown
Permissible Momentary
Within 40 ms, see explanation in the Note below.
3 Power Failure
Input Power 68 VA or less
0 C to 50 C [32 to 122 F] (For the EA7-T15C touch panel, maximum
4 Operating Temperature Range temperature is 40 C, [104 F] when using the AC/DC Power Adapter.)
Storage Temperature Range -20 to 60 C [-4 to 140 F]

5 Operating & Storage Humidity 10-85% RH (non-condensing)

1000 VAC p-p (Pulse width 1 s, rise time: 1 ns)
Noise Immunity With proper ground connection on AC terminal block.
6 Hi-pot 1000 VAC, 1 minute
With proper ground connection on AC terminal block.
500 VDC, 10 M ohm or above
7 Insulation Resistance With proper ground connection on AC terminal block.
Vibration Compliant with IEC61131-2
8 Shock Pulse shape: Sine half wave, Peak acceleration: 147 m/s2 (15 G),
X, Y, Z: 3 directions, 2 times each
Thermal Protection 140 C [284 F], with autorecovery
9 Short Circuit Protection 85 VAC: 2.6 A, 100 VAC: 2.8 A, 264 VAC: 3.9 A
Static Electricity Discharge
Compliant with IEC61000-4-2, Contact: 4 kV, Air: 8 kV
Resistance
10 Agency Approvals UL508, cUL, CE, EMC EN61132-2
Environment No corrosive gas or conductive dust
11 Grounding Ground resistance: less than 100 ohm
3.00 (H) x 3.66 (W) x 1.42 (D) [76.2 mm x 93.0 mm x 36.1 mm]
Diemnsions - inches [mm] (Excluding DC Power Connector.)
12 Weight 6.13 oz. [175 g]
Cooling Method Natural convection when installed on vertically mounted touch panel.
13 Included Parts AC Power Connector, Data Sheet Insert
EA-AC-CON or DECA Switchlab MC101-508-03G
Removable AC Power Connector Secure with (2) captive M2.5 screws, torque to 70 oz-in [0.5 Nm]
14 Output Voltage and Ripple 21.6 - 26.4 VDC, Ripple < 100 mV p-p
Output Current Maximum 1.5 A
A Inrush Current For 100 VAC: 15 A, 3 ms or less
For 240 VAC: 20 A, 3 ms or less
Power Fail Detection Voltage 58 VAC 5%
B Recommended AC Supply Fuse 3.0 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL3
Mounting to Touch Panel Secure with (2) spring loaded captive M3-20 screws, torque to 50 oz-in [0.35 Nm]

C NOTE: Permissible momentary power failure: The C-more touch panel will turn off the LCD backlight instantly
when the power failure is detected (less than 58 VAC +/- 5%) for extending the Power Retention Period that
D enables the CPU to run longer. The backlight turns on automatically when the power returns to the C-more
operating voltage.

36 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

AC/DC Power Adapter Dimensions

1
Dimensions
Screw
AC Power Label 2
3.661
[93.0]

3
4
3.001
[76.2]

5
6
DC Power
Connector

AC Power
Connector
FRONT VIEW Screw SIDE VIEW REAR VIEW
7
Units: inches [mm]
8
1.421 0.02
[36.1 0.5]

9
0.579
[14.7]

BOTTOM VIEW
10
11
Panel Depth with AC/DC Power Adapter Installed 12
X.XXX
[XX.X] 13
14
EA7-S6M-R = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-S6C-R = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-S6M = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-S6C = 2.921 [74.2]
A
EA7-T6C = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-T8C = 3.157 [80.2]
EA7-T10C = 3.106 [78.9]
EA7-T12C = 3.102 [78.8]
B
EA7-T15C = 3.075 [78.1]

C
Units: inches[mm]
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 37

 Chapter 3: Accessories

AC/DC Power Adapter Installation

1 WARNING: This procedure should only be performed by qualified personnel who are experienced in working
with electronic equipment. Take the necessary steps to prevent damage that may be caused by static
electricity discharge. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding.
2
3
1 2
4
5
6
7 Preparation: Place the touch panel face down on a lint-free Insert the AC/DC Power Adapter into the touch panels
soft surface to prevent scratching the display screen if not 5-position DC power connector.
8 already installed in a control cabinet. Remove the DC power
connector if it is installed.

9
10 3 4
11
12
13
14 Secure the AC/DC Power Adapter to the touch panel by
tightening the two (2) spring loaded captive M3-20 screws
Plug the wired 3-pin AC Power Connector into its mating
connector on the adapter and secure in place by tightening
to a torque of 50 oz-in [0.35 Nm]. the two (2) captive M2.5 screws to a torque of 70 oz-in [0.5
A Nm]. (Wiring details shown on page 3-5.)

B
C
D

38 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

Expansion Assembly
The C-more Expansion Assembly is used to allow installation of the optional CF Card Interface Module for CF card use and
1
also provides a slot for future option modules.
2
Part No. EA-EXP-OPT Expansion Assembly Dimensions
2.165
3
[55.0]

4
1.618
Units: inches [mm]
2.067
[41.1]

[52.5]
5
Connector Cover 6
7
3.567
8
[90.6]

9
10
0.459
[11.7]

Screw
11
12
Panel Depth with
Expansion Assembly Installed Expansion Assembly Details
13
EA7-S6M = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-S6C = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-T6C = 2.921 [74.2]
14
EA7-T8C = 3.157 [80.2]
Units: inches[mm] EA7-T10C = 3.106 [78.9]
EA7-T12C = 3.102 [78.8]
A
EA7-T15C = 3.075 [78.1]

X.XXX
B
[XX.X]
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 39

 Chapter 3: Accessories

Expansion Assembly Installation

1 WARNING: This procedure should only be performed by qualified personnel who are experienced in
working with electronic equipment. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding.
2
3
4 1 2
5
6
7
Preparation: Place the touch panel face down on a lint-free Remove expansion area cover by pressing down on the left
8 soft surface to prevent scratching the display screen if not
already installed in a control cabinet.
and right line markings and at the same time, slide the cover
in the direction of the embossed arrow.

9
10 3 4
11
12
13
14 The cover will stop at the Remove position indicated by a
tic mark on the cover lining up with the Remove tic mark
Position the expansion assembly over the opening so that
the tic mark to the right of the fastening screw lines up with
on the panel. At this position, lift the cover up. the Remove tic mark.

A
B
C
D

310 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

Expansion Assembly Installation (contd)

1
2
5 6
3
Note: The Expansion Assembly
4
is shown in the photos with two
covers. The unit is shipped with
only one cover in place.
5
Slide the expansion assembly in a downward direction until Secure the Expansion Assembly to the touch panel by
6
the tic marks at the home position line up. tightening the spring loaded captive M3-20 screw to a
torque of 50 oz-in [0.35 Nm]. 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 311

 Chapter 3: Accessories

CF Card Interface Module

1 The C-more CF Card Interface Module is used with the Expansion Assembly to allow use of
CompactFlash cards, such as the CompactFlash Memory, EA-FLASH-128MB.
2 Part No. EA-CF-IF
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CF Card Interface Module Dimensions
10 0.780
2.122 [19.8]

11 [53.9] Product Label

12 EA-CF-IF

13 3.024
[76.8]
14
A
B
Units: inches [mm]
C
D

312 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

CF Card Interface Module Installation

WARNING: The CF Card Interface Module is designed to be installed in the right hand side slot of the 1
Expansion Assembly only. This procedure should only be performed by qualified personnel who are
experienced in working with electronic equipment. Take the necessary steps to prevent damage that may
be caused by static electricity discharge. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding.
2
3
1 2 4
5
6
7
Preparation: Place the touch panel face down on a lint-free
soft surface to prevent scratching the display screen if not
Install the CF Card Interface Module, p/n EA-CF-IF, into the
right hand side slot by carefully aligning the female
8
already installed in a control cabinet. Again, make sure the connector of the interface module with the male connector
input power is disconnected. Remove the right hand side
protective slot cover, if it is installed, by squeezing the pinch
tabs and lifting the cover off.
on the touch panel. There are PCB guides at the top and
bottom of the slot to accept the edge of the Interface
Modules printed circuit board. It is also helpful to preset the
9
locking tabs of the Interface Module so they are swung
inward, top and bottom. 10
4
11
3
12
13
14
Continue to slide the interface module into the slot until the The above photo shows the CF Card Interface Module fully
A
front of the module is flush with the front of the Expansion installed. To remove the Interface Module in the future, pry
Assembly. Press on the front of the Interface Module until
the locking tabs snap into place.
out on the top and bottom locking tabs at the same time and
the module will release from the connector. Lift the module
from the slot. The Interface Module should only be removed
B
from the slot with input power disconnected.
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 313

 Chapter 3: Accessories

128 MB CompactFlash Memory

1 EA-FLASH-128MB is a 128MB high speed industrial grade CompactFlash memory card for
non-volatile storage. Its 85 C operating temperature makes it perfect for data logging in
2 industrial applications (recommended for C-more touch panels).

3
Part No. EA-FLASH-128MB Specifications/Features:
4 CompactFlash Compatibility
Interface transfer speed: 16.6 MB/second
5 W/E Endurance: 100,000 cycles (Ta = 40C to
85C); 300,000 cycles (Ta = 0C to 70C)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 CF Slot #1 Location CF Slot #2 Location
14
A
B
C
D

314 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

CompactFlash Memory Card Installation

WARNING: Take the necessary steps to prevent damage that may be caused by static electricity 1
discharge. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding.

Preparation: If the touch panel is not already installed into a control 2

cabinet, then in a clean environment, place the panel face down on a lint-
CF Card Installed in CF Slot #1: free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of the panel.
3
1
Protective
dust cover 2
CF Slot
#1
4
5
6
7
Remove the protective dust cover from the CF Slot #1 at the
top of the touch panel by prying up on one edge. Discard the
Orientate the CompactFlash memory card so that the front
label is facing the back of the panel and the CF card
8
dust cover or store it for future use when a CF card is not connector faces into the slot. There are guides on each side
being used. of the slot that will match the guides on the CF card. The CF
card can only be inserted one way. 9
CF card 10
3 4 eject button
11
12
13
Gently press the CF card into the slot until it stops. You To remove the CF card from the CF Slot #1, press in on the
14
should feel a slight resistance as the CF card connector eject button to the right of the CF card. This will cause the CF
mates with the slots connector. The CF card should be flush
with the slots opening. The dust cover can then be
card to be partially ejected from the slot allowing removal.
A
re-installed.

SH
-1
LAH CARD
B
- F
EZB FLAS e
WARNING: Do NOT use EZTouch RAM or Flash
memory cards with the C-more touch
512
K

0
te
Da 38
2
Co
:
d

ING this
RN with
C
WAodulewn.
panels. m o
tall e d
Ins sid
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 315

 Chapter 3: Accessories

CompactFlash Memory Card Installation (contd)

1
2 Preparation: Disconnect input power and all other connections, then remove
the touch panel from the control cabinet. In a clean environment, place the
3 CF Card Installed in CF Slot #2:
panel face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of
the panel.

4 CF Slot
1 #2 2
5
6
7
8
Orientate the CompactFlash memory card so that the front Gently press the CF card into the slot until it stops. You
label is facing the power supply connector and the CF card should feel a slight resistance as the CF card connector
9 connector faces into the slot. There are guides on each side
of the slot that will match the guides on the CF card. The CF
mates with the slots connector. The CF card should be flush
with the slots opening.
card can only be inserted one way.
10
11 3
WARNING: Do NOT use EZTouch RAM or Flash
memory cards with the C-more touch
panels.
12
13 CF card H -1
AS ARD
Z -FLLASH C
eject button E F
14 512
K

0
B
te
Da 38
2
Co
:
de

ING this
RN with
WAodulewn.

A To remove the CF card from the CF Slot #2, press in on the

eject button at the bottom of the CF card. This will cause the
Ins sid
m o
tall e d

CF card to be partially ejected from the slot allowing

B removal.

C
D

316 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

6 Adapter Plate
The adapter plate has been designed to simplify the retrofit of a new C-more 6 touch panel into 1
an existing cabinet cutout for an EZTouch 6 non-slim touch panel, such as AutomationDirect
part number EZ-S6C-K, EZ-S6C-F, EZ-S6M-R or EZ-S6M-F. The new C-more 6 touch
panel will directly mount into the existing cutout opening for any EZTouch 6 slim touch
2
panel.
Part No. EA-6-ADPTR 6 Adapter Plate Cutout Dimensions 3
8.076
[205.1]
4.250
4
[108.0] 0.837

Adapter Plate
Outline
2.125
[54.0]
[21.3]
5
0.218 Dia.
Centerline 6
[5.5] CUTOUT

6.222
(6 places)

5.624
7
[158.0] [142.8]

3.111 2.812
[71.4]
8
[79.0] Units: inches [mm]

9
0.705
3.761
[95.5]
7.522 0.705
0.837
[21.3] 10
[17.9] [191.1] [17.9]

11
12
6 Adapter Plate Dimensions
13
8.932
[226.9]
0.618
[15.7]
0.118 0.04
8.076 0.02
[205.1 0.5]
4.250 0.02
14
[3.0 1.0] [108.0 0.5]

A
7.299
[185.4] M4
Thread
Centerline
6.223 0.02
[158.1 0.5]
B
Insert
Units: inches[mm] (6 places)
C
Adapter Gasket
Front View Side View Rear View
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 317

 Chapter 3: Accessories

6 Adapter Plate Installation

The adapter plate has been designed to simplify the retrofit of a new C-more 6 touch panel into
1 an existing cabinet cutout for an EZTouch 6 non-slim touch panel, such as our part number
EZ-S6C-K, EZ-S6C-F, EZ-S6M-R or EZ-S6M-F. The new C-more 6 touch panel will directly
2 mount into the existing cutout opening for any EZTouch 6 slim touch panel.
Two sets of mounting screws are provided with the adapter plate. Set A contains six M4 metric
3 screws by 8mm in length for a control cabinet thickness range of 0.02-0.118 [0.5-3mm]. Set
B contains six M4 metric screws by 10mm in length for a control cabinet thickness range of
0.118-0.197 [3-5mm]. Mounting screw torque: 100 oz-in [0.7 Nm].
4 The two DIN mounting clips that secure the C-more 6 touch panel to the adapter plate are
provided with the touch panel. The adapter plate has an integral sealing gasket and the touch
5 panel includes a gasket to seal the panel to the adapter.
Use of the adapter plate will maintain the NEMA 4/4X (indoor) rating of the C-more touch
6 panel.
Dimensions for the cutout with mounting hole locations and an assembly diagram are shown
7 in this chapter.
Preparation: Confirm the existing cutout with the dimensions shown on the previous page
8 when using the adapter plate to replace an existing EZTouch 6 non-slim touch panel with a
new C-more 6 touch panel.
9
WARNING: Mount the adapter plate and touch panel on a vertical surface to allow proper
10 cooling.

11 6 C-more
Touch Panel
6 Adapter Plate Assembly
12 C-more
Adapter Plate
Enclosure

13
Two sets of mounting screws provided:
Set A - M4-8 metric screws for an enclosure
14 thickness range of 0.02-0.118 inch [0.5-3mm]
Set B - M4-10 metric screws for an enclosure
thickness range of 0.118-0.197 inch [3-5mm]
Mounting screw torque: 100 oz-in [0.7 Nm]
A DIN Mounting
Clips
B
C
D
Screw Torque: 100 oz-in [0.7 Nm]

318 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

D-SUB 15-pin 90 degree Comm Port Adapter

The EA-ADPTR-4 adapter is plugged into the 15-pin serial port on the rear of the panel to
1.695
1
allow a PLC communication cable to be plugged in at a 90 degree angle to reduce panel depth
[43.1]
requirements. UL Recognized.
2
Part No. EA-ADPTR-4
3
Rear Panel Dimensions with
View Units: inches [mm]
Connector Installed 4
R
0.333
[8.5]
5
6
Front
View
7
8
Comm Port Adapter Dimensions
9
Units: inches [mm]
10
0.412
[10.5]

11
0.751
[19.1]

Date code
1.605
[40.8]

Country of Origin

KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

EA-ADPTR-4
IOIOI PLC
12
13
1.873 0.793
[47.6] [20.2]
14
A
B
C
Installation D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 319

 Chapter 3: Accessories

D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter

1 The EA-COMCON-3 adapter is1.695 plugged into the 15-pin serial port on the rear of the panel to
allow wire terminal connections [43.1]
for RS-422/485 PLC communication cable. UL Recognized.
2 Part No. EA-COMCON-3
3 Rear Panel Dimensions with
View
4 Connector
Units: inches [mm] Installed
0.687
[17.5]
5 R

6
Front
7 View

8 Terminal Block Adapter Dimensions

9
Units: inches [mm]
0.564
[14.3]

10
11
0.903
[22.9]

Date code
Country of Origin
1.756
[44.6]

12 KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

EA-COMCON-3
TERM
GND

RD+
RD
SD+
SD

13
1.873 1.126
14 [47.6] [28.6]

A
B
C
D Installation

320 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter (contd)

1
Terminal Block Adapter Wiring Diagram
D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter
2
(P/N EA-COMCON-3)
Wiring Diagram 3
GND GND

SD SD 4
SD+ SD+

RD RD
5
RD+

TERM
RD+

TERM
6
7
8
Terminal Block Adapter Terminal Designations 9
Terminals 10
TERM
GND

11
RD+
RD
SD+
SD

12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 321

 Chapter 3: Accessories

Non-glare Screen Covers

1 Non Glare 6 Inch Screen Cover, protective overlay used to protect the touch screen while
helping to reduce the glare from external light sources. (pk of 3)
2 Part No. EA-6-COV2, EA-8-COV2, EA-10-COV2, EA-12-COV2 & EA-15-COV2
3 Screen Cover Dimensions
4 12.563
[319.1]
0.197
[5.0]

0.157 Adhesive

5 EA-15-COV2

10.260 0.197
[4.0]

[260.6] [5.0]

6 EA-12-COV2
0.157
[4.0]

0.197
[5.0]

7 9.374
[238.1]
EA-10-COV2
8.906
[226.2]
0.157
[4.0]

7.315 0.197

8
7.642
[194.1] [185.8] [5.0]

0.157
[4.0]
EA-8-COV2

9 6.614
[168.0]

5.441
[138.2]
4.913
[124.8]
0.197
[5.0]

EA-6-COV2

10 3.795
[96.4]
0.157
[4.0] 15
12

11
10

Units: inches [mm] 8

12
Installation
13
14
A
B
C
NOTE: The protective cover ships with a thin protective sheet on the face of the cover that needs to be
D carefully removed. If your panel is not clear, the protective sheet may not have been removed.

322 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 3: Accessories

USB Pen Drive

The SanDisk Cruzer Micro is an extremely small 512MB USB Flash Drive (UFD) that 1
connects to a USB port. Users can easily store their logging data, project data, key documents
and images on a Cruzer Micro and transfer them to another computer with a USB port.
Includes software for data encryption (CruzerLock 2)*, and trial version for back-up
2
(PocketCache)*, and Outlook synchronization (CruzerSync)*.
3
Part No. SDCZ4-512-A10 Specifications/Features:
Dimensions: 7.9mm x 18.95mm x 52.2mm
(H x W x L)
4
Stylish, metal casing with changeable colored skins
and caps ** 5
Includes CruzerLock 2 for data security*, and trial
versions of PocketCache (back-up)* and CruzerSync
(Outlook & My Documents folder synchronization)
6
software*
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 certified (backwards compatible
7
with all USB 1.1 ports)
Compatible with Windows 98SE, ME, 2000, XP 8
and Mac OS 9.1.x+, OS X v10.1.2+
Certified Windows XP and Mac OS X 9
Cruzer Micro Package Contents:
Cruzer Micro Skins (with clear skin and cap) 10
2 additional colored skins w/matching caps **
Lanyard 11
Quick Start Guide
* For Windows only
12
** Available for new version of Cruzer Micro with Skins
only 13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 323

 CHAPTER
INSTALLATION & WIRING
4
In This Chapter...
Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C & T6C Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
EA7-T8C Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
EA7-T10C Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
EA7-T12C Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
EA7-T15C Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
6 Adapter Plate EA-6-ADPTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Mounting Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Marine Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Providing Power to the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
DC Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
AC Wiring Diagram (EA-AC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Safety Guidelines
1
NOTE: Products with CE marks perform their required functions safely and adhere to relevant standards as
2 specified by CE directives provided they are used according to their intended purpose and that the
instructions in this manual are adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this
equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. A listing of our international affiliates is available
3 on our Web site: http://www.automationdirect.com

WARNING: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility and
4 should be your primary goal during system planning and installation. Automation systems can fail and
may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Do not rely
5 on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment. You should use external
electromechanical devices, such as relays or limit switches, that are independent of the PLC application
to provide protection for any part of the system that may cause personal injury or damage. Every
6 automation application is different, so there may be special requirements for your particular application.
Make sure you follow all national, state, and local government requirements for the proper installation
and use of your equipment.
7
Plan for Safety
8 The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment safety
part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of the system to determine which areas
9 are critical to operator or machine safety. If you are not familiar with control system installation
practices, or your company does not have established installation guidelines, you should obtain
10 additional information from the following sources.
NEMA The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, located in Washington, D.C. publishes
many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems. You can order these
11 publications directly from NEMA. Some of these include:
ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems
12 ICS 3, Industrial Systems
ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems
13 NEC The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning the installation and use of
various types of electrical equipment. Copies of the NEC Handbook can often be obtained from your
14 local electrical equipment distributor or your local library.
Local and State Agencies many local governments and state governments have additional
requirements above and beyond those described in the NEC Handbook. Check with your local
A Electrical Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information.

B
C
D

42 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Introduction
The installation and wiring of the C-more touch panels requires selecting an appropriate 1
location for the touch panel, laying out the cutout dimensions on the surface of the control
cabinet that the panel will be mounted through, securing the touch panel with the provided
mounting clips, tightening the screws to the appropriate torque rating to assure the gasket is
2
sealing correctly, and finally connecting the appropriate power source to the touch panel.
WARNING: C-more touch panels need to be mounted on a vertical surface to ensure proper cooling of the
3
panel and its components.
4
Note: Each C-more touch panel is provided with a cutout template to make marking the proper cutout size
on the surface of the control cabinet that the panel will be mounted through a simple task.
5
The C-more 6 touch panels include two mounting clips. The clips can be viewed as a long
metal bracket with two screws in each clip. The 6 panel clips can be fitted to the touch panel
at two different depth locations that allow the 6 panel to be mounted through a wide range of
6
enclosure thicknesses. The 8 through 12 touch panels include six mounting clips while the
15 touch panel includes eight. The 8 through 15 panel mounting clips are all the same. They 7
are fitted to the touch panel by inserting two tabs into mating wide slots around th panel and
then sliding the clip into a narrower slot to secure it in place. There is one screw on each clip 8
that needs tightening to secure the panel in place.
Any C-more touch panel can be mounted directly through the existing cutout of a same size
EZTouch slim touch panel. There is a simple solution for the need to replace an EZTouch 6
9
non-slim (rounded bezel) touch panel as explained in the following note.
10
NOTE: The C-more 6 touch panels will fit into the existing cutout of any EZTouch 6 slim bezel panel. Use
the C-more 6 Adapter Plate, EA-6-ADPTR, to install C-more 6 panels into existing cutouts of EZTouch 6
non-slim (rounded bezel) panels. The adapter plate gasket is included.
11
This chapter only covers the proper mounting of the touch panel and connecting power. Once
power is applied to the touch panel, the user will want to read Chapter 5 on the System Setup
12
Screens in order to set the internal time and date for the panel, check the information menu to
make sure the panel is the correct unit for the application and is the latest version, set 13
communication port parameters that may be required, become familiar with the touch panel
test features, and check memory options. 14
The next step will be to select the appropriate PLC protocol and communications cable as
described in Chapter 6. A
6 Mounting Clips 8-15 Mounting Clip B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 43

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C Cutout Dimensions

1 The C-more 6 touch panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and secured
with two (2) mounting clips. The mounting clips are provided with the touch panel. There is a
2 set of four (4) rectangular holes (slots) on each side of the touch panels short dimension that
the two tabs on each mounting clip will match. You will need to select either the upper or lower
set of holes depending on your control cabinets material thickness. The table below shows the
3 different thickness ranges. The mounting clips are held in place, and pull the front bezel of the
panel tight to the mounting surface, by tightening the screws into the rear of the control
4 cabinet. The screws need to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the table below so that
the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.

5 Note: Mount the touch panel on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper cooling.

6 7.460 +0.04
-0.0 Mounting Clip
(2) places
[189.5 +1.0
-0.0]
0.630
7 [16.0]

8 0.315
[8.0]
0.294
[7.5]

9 5.512 +0.04
-0.0
0.294
[7.5] CUTOUT
[140.0 +1.0
-0.0 ] Bezel Outline
10 Cutout Outline
0.315
[8.0] Units: inches[mm]
11
0.630
12 [16.0]
6.533 0.709
[165.9] [18.0]
13 0.709
[18.0]

14 Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges

A and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip
B Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch
Panel Size
Enclosure
Thickness Range
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Thickness Range
6 lower mounting 0.039 - 0.24 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
C clip position
6 upper mounting
[1 6 mm]
0.20 - 0.63 inch
[0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]
35 ~ 50 oz-in
clip position [5 16 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]
D

44 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

EA7-T8C Cutout Dimensions

The C-more 8 touch panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and secured 1
with six (6) mounting clips. The mounting clips are provided with the touch panel. The
mounting clips will insert into a series of slots around the rear perimeter of the touch panel.
Each clip has two tabs that will mate to two slots, using the larger rectangular holes. The
2
mounting clips are held in place by sliding the clip toward the smaller rectangular holes. The
screw of each mounting clip needs to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the table below 3
so that the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.
Note: Mount the touch panel on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper cooling. 4
0.394 9.250 +0.04
-0.0 0.394
5
[10.0] [235.0 +1.0
-0.0] [10.0]
0.822 4.625 0.822 0.394 6
[20.9] [117.5] [20.9] [10.0]
7
Mounting Clip
8
(6) places
CUTOUT 0.837
[21.3]
9
7.075 +0.04
-0.0
[179.7 +1.0
-0.0 ]
10
Cutout Outline

Bezel Outline Units: inches [mm] 3.537

11
[89.9]
12
13
0.837 0.394 14
[21.3] [10.0]

Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges A

and Mounting Clip Screw Torque B
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch
Panel Size
Enclosure
Thickness Range
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
C
Thickness Range

8, 10, 12 & 15 0.039 - 0.20 inch

[1 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm] D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 45

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

EA7-T10C Cutout Dimensions

1 The C-more 10 touch panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and
secured with six (6) mounting clips. The mounting clips are provided with the touch panel. The
2 mounting clips will insert into a series of slots around the rear perimeter of the touch panel.
Each clip has two tabs that will mate to two slots, using the larger rectangular holes. The
mounting clips are held in place by sliding the clip toward the smaller rectangular holes. The
3 screw of each mounting clip needs to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the table below
so that the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.
4 Note: Mount the touch panel on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper cooling.

5 0.394
[10.0]
11.908 +0.04
-0.0
[302.5 +1.0
-0.0]
0.394
[10.0]

6 0.877
[22.3]
5.954
[151.2]
0.877
[22.3]

7 Mounting Clip
(6) places
0.876
[22.3]
0.394
[10.0]

8
9
CUTOUT
10
8.917 +0.04
-0.0

11 Cutout Outline
[226.5 +1.0
-0.0 ]

12 Units: inches [mm] 4.459

[113.2]

Bezel Outline
13
14
0.876 0.394
A [22.3] [10.0]

Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges

B and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip
C Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
D 8, 10, 12 & 15 0.039 - 0.20 inch
[1 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]

46 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

EA7-T12C Cutout Dimensions

The C-more 12 touch panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and 1
secured with six (6) mounting clips. The mounting clips are provided with the touch panel. The
mounting clips will insert into a series of slots around the rear perimeter of the touch panel.
Each clip has two tabs that will mate to two slots, using the larger rectangular holes. The
2
mounting clips are held in place by sliding the clip toward the smaller rectangular holes. The
screw of each mounting clip needs to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the table below 3
so that the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.
Note: Mount the touch panel on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper cooling. 4
0.354 12.579 +0.04 0.354
[9.0]
-0.0
[319.5 +1.0
-0.0 ] [9.0] 5
0.394
[10.0]
6.289
[159.7]
0.394
[10.0] 0.354
6
[9.0]
7
8
Mounting Clip 0.394
(6) places
CUTOUT [10.0] 9
10.236 +0.04
-0.0
10
[260.0 +1.0
-0.0]

11
5.118
Units: inches [mm] [130.0] 12
Cutout Outline
13
Bezel Outline
14
0.394 0.354
[10.0] [9.0] A
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque B
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip C
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
8, 10, 12 & 15 0.039 - 0.20 inch
[1 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 47

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

EA7-T15C Cutout Dimensions

1 The C-more 15 touch panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and
secured with eight (8) mounting clips. The mounting clips are provided with the touch panel.
2 The mounting clips will insert into a series of slots around the rear perimeter of the touch panel.
Each clip has two tabs that will mate to two slots, using the larger rectangular holes. The
mounting clips are held in place by sliding the clip toward the smaller rectangular holes. The
3 screw of each mounting clip needs to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the table below
so that the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.
4 Note: Mount the touch panel on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper cooling.

5 0.395
[10.0]
14.960 +0.04
-0.0
[380.0 +1.0
-0.0 ]
0.395
[10.0]

6 0.894
[22.7]
7.480
[190.0]
0.894
[22.7] 0.406
[10.3]
7
8 Mounting Clip 0.864
(8) places [21.9]
9 CUTOUT

10 11.276 +0.04
-0.0
[286.4 +1.0
-0.0 ]

11 Cutout Outline
5.638
[143.2]
12 Units: inches[mm]
Bezel Outline

13
14 0.864
[21.9]
0.406
[10.3]

A
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
B and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip
C Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
D 8, 10, 12 & 15 0.039 - 0.20 inch
[1 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]

48 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

6 Adapter Plate
Use the C-more 6 Adapter Plate, p/n EA-6-ADPTR,
to install a C-more 6 touch panel into the existing
1
cutout of an EZTouch 6 non-slim (rounded bezel)
touch panel. Gasket and mounting hardware is 2
included.

Part No. EA-6-ADPTR 3

4
5
6
7
6 Adapter Plate Assembly
8
6 C-more
Touch Panel
9
C-more 10
Adapter Plate
Enclosure
11
Two sets of mounting screws provided:
Set A - M4-8 metric screws for an enclosure
thickness range of 0.02-0.118 inch [0.5-3mm]
12
Set B - M4-10 metric screws for an enclosure
thickness range of 0.118-0.197 inch [3-5mm]
Mounting screw torque: 100 oz-in [0.7 Nm]
13
DIN Mounting
Clips 14
A
B
Screw Torque: 100 oz-in [0.7 Nm]
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 49

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

6 Adapter Plate (contd)

1 6 Adapter Plate Dimensions
2 8.932 0.618 8.076 0.02
[226.9] [15.7] [205.1 0.5]
0.118 0.04
3 [3.0 1.0]
4.250 0.02
[108.0 0.5]

4
7.299 6.223 0.02
5 [185.4] M4
Thread
Insert
Centerline [158.1 0.5]

Units: inches[mm] (6 places)

6
Adapter Gasket
Front View Side View Rear View
7
8
6 Adapter Plate Cutout Dimensions
9 8.076
[205.1]
10 4.250
[108.0] 0.837
2.125 [21.3]
[54.0]
11 Adapter Plate
Outline

12 Centerline

0.218 Dia.
CUTOUT
13 [5.5]
(6 places)

6.222 5.624
14 [158.0] [142.8]

2.812
A 3.111
[79.0] Units: inches [mm] [71.4]

B
C 3.761
[95.5]
0.837
[21.3]
0.705 7.522 0.705
[191.1]
D [17.9] [17.9]

410 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Mounting Clearances
The following drawing shows the mounting clearances for the C-more touch panel. There 1
should be a minimum of 4 inches of space between all sides of the panel and the nearest object
or obstruction and at least 2 inches between the rear of the panel and the nearest object or
obstruction.
2
Note: Make sure the touch panel is mounted on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper
cooling.
3
4
Mounting Clip
5
6
4 Min.

2 Min.
7
8
4 Min. 4 Min.
9
10
11
4 Min.
Air
Flow
12
13
Front View Side View 14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 411

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Wiring Guidelines
1 WARNING: To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and
national codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from
2 area to area and it is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to verify
that the equipment, installation, and operation are in compliance with the latest revision of these
3 codes.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable
codes and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for
4 your particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation,
or operation.
If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need
5 additional information, please call us at 1-800-633-0405 or 770-844-4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At
6 Automationdirect.com we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the
right to make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without
obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of
7 the product.

8 Agency Approvals
Some applications require agency approvals for particular components. The C-more touch panel
agency approvals are listed below:
9 UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)
CUL (Canadian Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)
10 CE (European Economic Union)
Marine Use
11 American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) certification requires flame-retarding insulation as per 4-
8-3/5.3.6(a). ABS will accept Navy low smoke cables, cable qualified to NEC Plenum rated
12 (fire resistant level 4), or other similar flammability resistant rated cables. Use cable
specifications for your system that meet a recognized flame retardant standard (i.e. UL, IEEE,
13 etc.), including evidence of cable test certification (i.e. tests certificate, UL file number, etc.).
NOTE: Wiring needs to be low smoke per the above paragraph. Teflon coated wire is also recommended.
14
A
B
C
D

412 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Wiring Guidelines (contd)

Providing Power to the Touch Panel
1
Connect a dedicated 24 VDC (20.4 - 28.8 VDC) switching power supply rated for a minimum of
1.5 A to the DC connector on the rear of the C-more touch panel. Connect the ground terminal to 2
a proper equipment ground.
or install a C-more AC/DC Power Adapter (EA-AC) to the rear of the touch panel and connect an 3
AC voltage source of 100-240 VAC, 50/60Hertz, to its AC connector.
then turn on the power source and check the LED status indicators on the rear of the C-more touch
panel for proper operation. See the LED Status Indicator diagram on the next page for reference.
4
DC Wiring Diagram
5
6
DC Wiring
7
Recommended DC Supply Fuse
Panel Size Rating ADC p/n
8
6 10 2.5 A MDL2-5

+
12 & 15 4.0 A MDL4
9
24 VDC, -15%, +20%

(20.4 - 28.8 VDC) 10
GND
Equipment
PWR

CPU
11
Ground
BATT

12
Recommended DC Power Supply:
AutomationDirect Part No. PS24-050D 13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 413

 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Wiring Guidelines (contd)

1 AC Wiring Diagram
2
AC Wiring
3
4
5 AC/DC Power Adapter
AC Power Adapter
Not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C
when operating temperatures are expected
to be above 40 deg C.

6 EA-AC

7
8 Recommended AC Supply Fuse
3.0 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL3

100 - 240 VAC

9 50/60 Hz

10 WARNING: The AC/DC Power Adapter is not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C touch panel when
operating temperatures are expected to exceed 40 C [104 F].
11
12 Note: Power Fault features help protect data being logged to CompactFlash during power failures. The
C-more panel must have firmware version 1.21 Build 6.18E or higher for proper operation.

13
C-more LED Status Indicators
14 Power LED (Green)
CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red) On Power On
A Off Power Off
PWR Off Power Off
Green Normal CPU Run State CPU

B Red
Blinking
Memory Error
BATT
TxD

RxD

Red
Operating System not found Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)
C Blinking
Orange
Blinking
LCD Backlight Failure
IOlOlPLC
On Comm. is active
Green Power Loss Detection Off No communication
Rear View
D

414 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 CHAPTER
SYSTEM SETUP SCREENS
5
In This Chapter...
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Accessing the System Setup Screens (no project loaded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Accessing the System Setup Screens (with project loaded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
System Setup Screens Enable Password in Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
System Setup Screens Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Memory Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Introduction
1 The C-more touch panels include a series of built-in System Setup Screens that allow the user
to view detailed information about the panel, adjust certain features, configure
2 communications, test various functions of the touch panel, backup & restore system and project
memory, clear memory, and reset all values and conditions back to the original factory defaults.
The following is presented to give the user a detailed step by step look at 1.) how to access the
3 System Setup Screens, 2.) what adjustments and features are available, 3.) when and why the
feature may need to be adjusted or used, and 4.) how to adjust and/or interrupt the features.
4 The System Setup Screens from the Main Menu are split into four different categories to make
it simple for the user to select the area for viewing information, making adjustments, testing the
5 touch panel or working with the internal and/or external memory options. The four Main
Menu selections are:
6 Information
Here you will find detailed information in regards to the touch panel
7 model, the panels name, version information for the hardware, boot
loader and firmware, clock source, battery status and beeper status. Also
available are details on the panels internal memory and the status of any
8 external memory devices, such as CompactFlash memory and USB pen drives. Communication
port details are also available in this area, as well as an error log to help in trouble-shooting the
9 system.
Setting
10 This is the area for 1.) making adjustments to the internal clock,
2.) adjusting the brightness and contrast of the display (There are some
differences of what can be adjusted between the STN and TFT type
11 displays, see details later in this chapter.), 3.) adjusting (calibrating) the
touch panel, 4.) enabling or disabling the internal beeper, and 5.) the IP Address of the touch
12 panel can also be configured from this menu area. Access to the IP Address Setting screen is
covered later in this chapter.
13 Test Menu
From this sub menu, the user can 1.) test the touch panel, 2.) test the
14 display, 3.) test the communication ports, and 4.) test both the internal
beeper or the audio line output, if a speaker with an amplifier is
connected. A WAV sound file is system provided for the audio line output
A test.
Memory
B Select the Memory menu item to either backup or restore your project
and data. Selections can be made to backup to optional CompactFlash
C memory or USB pen drive memory. The menu selections also give the
user the ability to clear the memory, and there is also a selection to reset
D all of the touch panel settings back to the original factory defaults.

52 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Accessing the System Setup Screens (no project loaded)

To access the Main Menu of the touch panel System Setup Screens prior to downloading a 1
project, press the extreme upper left corner of the panel display area for 3 seconds as shown
below. See the next page for an example of the System Setup Screens menu steps for adjusting
the time and date of the internal clock.
2
3
4
Press in the extreme
upper left corner for 3
5
seconds to bring up the
System Setup Screens
Main Menu.
6
7
8
9
10
11
NOTE: The ability to directly activate the Main Menu of the System Setup Screens by pressing the upper left
12
corner of the touch panel for 3 seconds will only occur when there is no project loaded into the memory of
the panel. Refer to the next section on accessing the System Setup Screens with a project loaded for
procedure details and recommendations.
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 53

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Accessing the System Setup Screens (with project loaded)

1 To access the Main Menu of the touch panel System Setup Screens with a project loaded into
memory, press the upper left corner of the panel display area for 3 seconds as shown below.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 The following WARNING dialog box will appear on the the touch screen.
Dialog Box Actions:
10 Pressing OK will display the system setup screen.
See the WARNING below!

11 System Screen Called Pressing Cancel will take you back to the project
screen.
Communications with the PLC is active while the
12 Activating System Screen will stop the
Panel Run Mode.
Do you want to continue?
Warning is displayed.
The dialog box will close if no action is taken for
13 60 seconds.
The dialog box will not display if the touch panel
OK Cancel
14 does not have a project loaded.
The dialog box will not display if the System
Screen password is enabled.
A
B WARNING: Pressing OK at this point will STOP the PLC driver and therefore all communications between
the touch panel and PLC will cease. It is strongly recommended that the password system tag
SYSTEMSCREENPW be enabled to add a safeguard step in accessing the system setup screens. See
C the next section for a quick overview for setting the System Tags in the Event Manager Database.

54 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens (no password enabled)

If no password is enabled for the system setup screens, then pressing the OK button in the
Warning dialog box will bring up the Main Menu as shown below. You can then proceed to the 1
other system setup screens.
2
3
4
5
6
7
System Setup Screens (password enabled) 8
NOTE: If the password system tag sys systemscreenpw is enabled, procedure described on the next page,
then the Enter Security Code keypad shown below will be displayed. Entering the correct password code 9
will then bring up the Main Menu system setup screen. If the wrong password code is entered, the keypad
clear from its display the value entered and will stay present until the correct value is entered or the Cancel
key is pressed.
10
11
Enter Security Code
12
7 8 9
13
4 5 6
14
1 2 3 Enter A
0 CL Cancel B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 55

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens Enable Password in Software

1 Under the C-more Programming Softwares Navigation window, select the Function tab, then
select the Event Managers Database function to display the Event
2 Manager Database shown below:

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 Click on the Add button
to add an event to the
13 database that will be used
to enable the System
14 Screen Password.

A
B
C
D

56 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens Enable Password (contd)

The Event Add dialog box will be displayed as shown next: 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Click on the Tag Name: pull down menu and select the internal System Bit On
(SYS BIT ON) tag as shown. This will force the tag event type to be continuously active. 10
11
12
13
14
Tag Name: SYS BIT ON

A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 57

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens Enable Password (contd)

1 Use the Event Name: text box to document the event as System Screen PW for record keeping
This is optional.
2 In the Action box, click once on the displayed 01-Alarm under the Sequence List: so that
01-Alarm is highlighted. Then click the Delete Action button to remove the 01-Alarm.
3
Event Name:
4
5
6
7
8 Delete Action

9
10
11
12
13
14 The Sequence List will
now be cleared out.
A
B
C
D

58 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens Enable Password (contd)

In the Action box, click on the Add Action... button. This will bring up the Add Action dialog 1
box as shown below:
2
3
4
5
6
Add Action
7
8
9
Click on the Command: pull down list in the Add Command box, select Tag from the list, then 10
click OK.
11
12
13
Tag
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 59

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens Enable Password (contd)

1 A 01-Tag action item will then be added to the Sequence List.

2
3
4
01-Tag
5
6
7
8
9
Click on the Tag Name: pull down list down arrow in the Action boxs Tag tab, select SYS
10 SYSTEMSCREENPW from the list, and click OK.

11
12
13
14 SYS SYSTEMSCREENPW

A
B
C
D

510 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens Enable Password (contd)

Enter a numeric value into the Value: box, such as 777. This value becomes the Password 1
code to access the System Setup Screens Main Menu.
2
3
4
Password Value 777 5
6
7
8
9
Click the Add button in the Event Add dialog box and then the Close button to return to the 10
Event Manager Database. You now will see that the first event in the database is for the System
Screen Password and it is enabled. 11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 511

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens Flowchart

1
Main Menu
2 [pg. 5-13]

3 Information General/Memory/Ports/Error
[pg. 5-14 to 5-17] [pg. 5-14 to 5-17]

4 Setting Adjust Clock

[pg. 5-18] [pg. 5-19]

5 Adjust Display
[pg. 5-20]
6 Adjust Touch Panel
[pg. 5-21]
7 Beeper
[pg. 5-23]
8
IP Address Setting
[pg. 5-24]
9
Test Menu Test Touch Panel
10 [pg. 5-25] [pg. 5-26]

Test Display
11 [pg. 5-27]

Test Communication Port

12 [pg. 5-29]

13 Test Beep/Sound
[pg. 5-35]

14 Memory Backup Panel -> Storage

[pg. 5-37] [pg. 5-39]
A Restore Storage -> Panel
[pg. 5-43]
B Clear Memory
[pg. 5-47]
C
Reset to Factory Default
[pg. 5-53]
D

512 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Main Menu
The Main Menu system setup screen is the top layer in 1
the menu structure.
The menu is displayed at full screen on the 6 inch
touch panel models. It is displayed in the center on the
2
8, 10, 12, or 15 inch models.
3
4
5
6
Item No.
1
Function
Information
Description
Press to go to the Information Menu.
Comment 7
2 Setting Press to go to the Setting Menu.
3 Test Menu Press to go to the Test Menu. 8
4 Memory Press to go to the Memory Menu.
5 Exit Press to return to the user screen.
While the Main Menu system setup screen is This feature is only used if the touch
9
being displayed, the extreme upper left corner panel data becomes corrupted and
6 Adjust Touch Panel of the touch panel can be pressed for 3
seconds to access the Adjust Touch Panel
touching the Main Menu buttons does
not work. It allows a shortcut to the
10
screen. touch panel calibration screen.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 513

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Information Menu General tab

1 The General tab under the Information
menu provides detailed information of
2 the C-more Touch Panels model, Panel
Default Name based on Model type and
MAC address, hardware, boot loader and
3 firmware versions, etc.

4
5
6
7
Item No. Function Description Comments
8 EA7-S6M-R,
EA7-S6C-R,
EA7-S6M,
9 1 Model
EA7-S6C,
EA7-T6C,
EA7-T8C,
10 EA7-T10C,
EA7-T12C,
EA7-T15C

11 2 Panel Default Name

[Model Name]-01XXXX
"01 XXXX" is the lower 3 bytes of the
Mac Address
e.g.
EA7-S6M-01004D
MAX: 15 characters (15 bytes)
12 1.)Hardware: X.XX
2.)Boot loader: X.XX
3.)Firmware
13 3 Version a) OS:Timestamp of NK.BIN
b) Runtime: X.X.X.X (Version of
Runtime.EXE)
14 c) System Screen: X.X.X.X (Version of
Panel.exe)
4 Clock Internal/External clock selection.
A 5
6
Battery
Beep
Battery status, either OK or Battery Low.
Enable/Disable the internal beeper
7 Main Menu
B Press to return to the Main Menu screen.

C
D

514 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Information Menu Memory tab

C-more Memory Organization 1
32 MB*
SDRAM
Project and user data reside
in SDRAM while the panel is
powered.
2
Memory 10 MB*
Project Memory This data is backed-up internally
(32 MB Internal Flash memory -
not shown), and loaded/copied
3
into SDRAM on power up.

22 MB
External Memory devices can
also be used for back-up of
4
Reserved C-more projects.
(Operating System,
*Note: 12 and 15 units have:
C-more
Internal
Firmnware, etc.)
64 MB SDRAM
64 MB Internal Flash Back-up
5
Memory 40 MB of Available Project
Memory
(Built-in)

256 KB
6
SRAM
Memory 189 KB
(Battery
Backed)
Log Buffer
(11 KB per Object)
Alarm, Message, and PLC Log
Data is buffered in SRAM
7
pending transfer to an External
33 KB Memory device:
Alarm Log/
Count Buffer
When the buffer nears full
Periodically, every 5 minutes
8
When one of the internal eject
32 KB tags is activated via an Object
Retentive Tag Data or Event
9
2 KB
SRAM Index

USB Flash Drive

Use additional memory for:
10
(USB Port Built-in)
Project Transfers
C-more Up to Project Back-up/Restore
Additional 1 GB or
Memory more for CompactFlash Card
(Slot #1 Built-in)
Alarm Logging
Message Logging
11
(Optional) each Screen Captures
PLC Data Logging
CompactFlash Card
(Slot #2 Optional) Additional Font Storage 12
Item No. Function Description Comment
13
1.) Total:
1 SRAM
System Memory
2.) Usage:
3.) Free:
14
Size of unit displayed:
1.) Total:
2
Expansion Memory
1.) CF1:
2.) Usage:
3.) Free:
1.) KB
When size is 1 to 999 bytes. A
It will be shown as 1KB.
2.) CF2: Note: N/A - not available on base featured
models (R)
1.) Total:
2.) KB or MB
3.) MB or GB B
Expansion Memory
3 2.) Usage:
3.) USB: 3.) Free: C
4 Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen.

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 515

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Information Menu Ports tab

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Item No. Function Description Comment
13 1 COM
(Built-in Ports)
PLC Serial Communications Port Settings:
baud rate/party/data bit, stop bit

14 Ethernet Settings:
MAC Address: 00 D0 7C 01 XX XX
A Ethernet
Address Type: DHCP/Static
IP Address: Note: Not available on base featured
2 models (R)
(Built-in Ports) Subnet Mask:
B Default Gateway:
DNS: 1.) Automatically
2.) Use Designated Address
C
Ethernet
3 Future Future
D 4
(CF Slot #1)
Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen.

516 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Information Menu Error tab

1
2
3
Error message format
4
Navigation buttons
5
6
Error message format: 7
Item No. Function Description Comment
8
Order of error message functions:
Error Number, Date, Time, Error Port, Device Name, Error Type, PLC Device, Access Bytes, Error Message
1 Date Format: MM/DD/YY
9
2 Time Format: HH/MM/SS
3 Error Port PLC Serial Communications Port:
Ethernet:
10
The assigned device name in the
4 Device Name programming software.
RD: Read
11
5 Error Type WT: Write
6 PLC Address The assigned address of the PLC. 12
7 Access Bytes The number of access bytes.

8 Error Message
The error message is the same as the
message displayed in the upper left of the A list of Error Massages is shown in
13
C-more touch panels display. Appendix A

Error message navigation buttons:

14
Item No. Function Description
Press to clear all of error messages.This
Comment A
1 Clear button is grayed out when there are no error
messages to display.
Press to go to to the next page. This button is
B
2 Page Down grayed out when there is no error messages
on the next page.
Press to go to the previous page. This button
C
3 Page Up is grayed out when there is no error

4 Main Menu
messages on the previous page.
Press to return to the Main Menu screen.
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 517

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting Menu
1 The Setting menu is used to adjust the time & date,
adjust the contrast and brightness of the display
2 depending on which model is being used, adjust
(calibrate) the touch screen, and enable or disable the
internal beeper.
3
4
5
6
7 Item No.
1
Function
Adjust Clock
Description
Press to go to the Adjust Clock screen.
Comments

2 Adjust Display
8 3 Adjust Touch Panel
Press to go to the Adjust Display screen.
Press to go to the Adjust Touch Panel screen.
4 Beeper Press to go to the Adjust Beeper screen.
9 5 Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen.
The IP Address setting screen is only
While the Setting menu system setup screen accessible form the Setting menu
10 6 IP Address setting
is being displayed, the extreme upper left
corner of the touch panel can be pressed for
screen as described. There is no
direct button to call it from any of the
3 seconds to access the IP Address setting setup screens. The IP Address can
11 screen. also be assigned in the C-more
Programming Software.

12
13
14
A
B
C
D

518 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting Adjust Clock

1
2
3
4
5
6
Color Touch Panel Grayscale Touch Panel
7
Item No. Function Description Comments
Time: Each press of the Select button will
cycle thru the following settings.
8
1.) No Selection to Hours
2.) Hours to Minutes
3.) Minutes to Seconds 9
1 Select 4.) Seconds back to Hours
Date: Each press of the Select button will
cycle thru the following settings.
1.) Month to Day
10
2.) Day to Year
3.) Year back to Month 11
Press to increment the value by 1 with each
2 Up press.
12
Press to decrement the value by 1 with
3 Down each press.
13
4 OK Press to accept the changes.

5 Cancel Press to return to the Setting menu screen

14
without accepting the changes.

NOTE: The function buttons used to adjust the clock settings on the panels setup screen are disabled if an
A
External clock source is selected in the C-more programming software. The choice of an internal or external
clock source is available by selecting Clock Source in the C-more programming software under the Main B
Menu drop down function Setup.
C
NOTE: The panels clock can also be adjusted from the C-more programming software. The Adjust Clock
function can be accessed in the software by selecting Adjust Clock under the Main Menu drop down function
Panel or selecting Adjust Clock under the Panel tab in the softwares Navigation window.
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 519

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting Adjust Display

1
2
3
4
5
6
Color Touch Panel Grayscale Touch Panel
7
Item No. Function Description Comments
8 The STN type display models, both color and grayscale, can have the contrast adjusted. The TFT type display
models can have the brightness adjusted. See the table below.
9
Press to increment the value by 1 with each
1 Up press.
10
11 2 Down Press to decrement the value by 1 with
each press.

12 3 OK Press to accept the changes.

13 4 Cancel Press to return to the Setting menu screen

without accepting the changes.

14 Item No. Model

Selection Range Default
Brightness Contrast Brightness Contrast
A TFT Models:
EA&-T6C, EA7-T8C,
A 1 to 7 N/A 7 N/A
EA7-T10C, EA7-
B T12C & EA7-T15C
STN Color:
C B EA7-S6C-R &
EA7-S6C
N/A 1 to 7 N/A 3

D C
STN Grayscale:
EA7-S6M-R & N/A 1 to 7 N/A 6
EA7-S6M

520 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting Adjust Touch Panel

This procedure is used to calibrate the touch screen to ensure accuracy of the touch areas. There 1
are five points on the touch screen that the calibration is based around. The adjustment relies
on very narrow areas for the calibration points. The points are very much like using a stylus pen.
2
Item No. Function Description Comment 3
1 Point 1 Upper left adjustment co-ordinates.

2 Point 2 Lower left adjustment co-ordinates. 4

3 Point 3 Lower right adjustment co-ordinates. If the touched co-ordinate point is too

4 Point 4 Upper right adjustment co-ordinates.

far off from normal, then the
procedure will return to Point 1.
5
5 Point 5 Center adjustment co-ordinates. 6
Press to return to the Setting menu screen
6 Cancel without accepting the changes.
7 Tap to Save & Quit Press to accept the changes and return to the
Setting menu screen.
7
The current adjustment data is canceled and
8 Tap to Retry the procedure is returned to Point 1. 8
9
Touch Screen Calibration Touch Screen Calibration 10
Calibrate the Touch Screen by Calibrate the Touch Screen by
touching the center of the crosshairs
+ with your finger or a stylus.
touching the center of the crosshairs
+ with your finger or a stylus.
11
12
Cancel Cancel
13
14
A
Point 1 Point 2
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 521

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting Adjust Touch Panel (contd)

1
Touch Screen Calibration Touch Screen Calibration
2 Calibrate the Touch Screen by Calibrate the Touch Screen by
touching the center of the crosshairs touching the center of the crosshairs
3 + with your finger or a stylus. + with your finger or a stylus.

4
5 Cancel Cancel

6
7
Point 3 Point 4
8
9
10 Touch Screen Calibration

11 Calibrate the Touch Screen by

touching the center of the crosshairs
+ with your finger or a stylus. Press here to save and quit.
12
13
Cancel

14 Press here to retry.

A
B Point 5 Final

C
D

522 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting Beeper
This system setup screen function is used 1
to enable or disable the touch panels
internal beeper.
2
3
4
5
6
Item No. Function Description Comments 7
1 Yes Change Enable to Beeper.

2 No Change Disable to Beeper.

8
3 OK Press to accept the changes and return to the
Setting menu screen. 9
Press to return to the Setting menu screen
4 Cancel without accepting the changes. 10
11
NOTE: The project settings in the C-more programming software Panel Manager will override the touch
panel's internal setting upon initial download. 12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 523

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting IP Address Setting

1
2
3
4
5
6
Item No. Function Description Comment
7 "DHCP" is enabled as the default when this
system setup screen is first selected.
8 The following selections are dimmed when
DHCP is selected:
1 DHCP 1.) Use the following IP Address
2.) IP Address
9 3.) Subnet Mask
4.) Default Gateway
5.) Keypad
10 The Use the following IP Address" setting is
selected when its radio button is pressed.
11 An IP Address can be assigned as follows:
1.) Select the address type:
a.) IP Address Note: If an Ethernet cable is not
b.) Subnet Mask connected to the touch panel from an
12 2 IP Address c.) Default Gateway active Ethernet device, then the IP
Address will show as 0.0.0.0.
2.) Use the numerical keypad to input the
address. Use the decimal key to enter the
13 dot separator.
3.) Press the "ENT" key when finished with
each address type.
14 IP Address
This is the area to select the address type that
3 Subnet Mask is being assigned.
Default Gateway
A The keypad is used to enter the Address: The ENT key must be pressed to
Use the numeric keys and the dot key to accept the entered address. If the
enter the address, e.g: 192.168.10.1 ENT key is not pressed, then the
B 4 Keypad ENT = Enter key sets address
CL = Clear value entered
previous value for the address will
remain when another area is selected
DEL = Delete 1 character with each press or the Cancel key is pressed.
C 5 OK Press to accept the changes and return to the
Setting menu screen.
Press to return to the Setting menu screen
D 6 Cancel without accepting the changes.

524 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu
The Test Menu gives the user the ability to test the 1
operation of the touch screen, test the LCD display,
test the various communication ports, and also test
the internal beeper and the audio line out through an
2
user supplied amplified (stereo) speaker(s).
3
4
5
6
Item No. Function Description Comments 7
1 Test Touch Panel Press to go to the Test Touch Panel screen.
8
2 Test Display Press to go to the Test Display screen.

3 Test Communication Port Press to go to the Test Communication Port 9

screen.

4 Test Beep/Sound Press to go to the Test Beep/Sound screen.

5 Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen.

1
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 525

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu Test Touch Panel

1 Using this test, normal or unusual operation of an
analog touch panel can be determined.
2
3
4
5
6
7 Item No. Function Description Comments

8 Display Size
6 Inch
Touch Area
320 X 240
1 Touch area 8/10 Inch 640 X 480 Both the title bar (Test Touch Panel)
9 12 Inch
15 Inch
800 X 600
1024 X 768
and Cancel button can be drawn
across to test the touch operation.

10 2 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

526 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu Test Display

This test can be used to check the LCD display by running a pattern on the screen. 1
Item No. Function Description Comments

1 Test Pattern 1 Displays a test pattern of 16 grayscale

2
graduations and RGB colors. See below.

Each RGB color is used to fill the entire

3
2 Test Pattern 2 screen in a varying pattern.
4
5
Test Pattern 1 6
7
8
9
10
Item No. Function Description Comments
11
Touch the Test Display
Press the screen anywhere except the Cancel
button and the shown Test Pattern 1 remains.
12
1 If the Test Display screen is not touched, then
screen. in three seconds the display will move to Test
Pattern 2. 13
2 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen. 14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 527

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu Test Display (contd)

1 Test Pattern 2 will follow the pattern as shown in the following chart with the color wiping
across the screen in the direction indicated by the arrows:
2 Color 1st Time 2nd Time 3rd Time 4th Time

3 RED

4
GREEN
5
6 BLUE
7
8 Test Pattern 2

9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

528 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu Test Communication Ports: Serial

The following test can be used to check the 1
operation of the serial communication port, with
the use of a loop back connector and can also check
the status of the serial communications to any
2
connected and configured PLC.
Continued on the next two pages. 3
4
5
6
Item No. Function Description Comments
7
1 Loop Back Test This function checks the serial comm port for
proper operation with a loop back connector.
8
This function allows the ability to select any
PLC that that may be connected to the touch Note: The PLC serial communications
9
2 PLC Enquiry Test panel via a serial connection and checks to port settings must be configured in
see if the communications are working
correctly.
the C-more programming software.
10
3 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.
11
12
RS-422/485 Loop-back Connector
13
RS-232 Loop-back Connector
7 CTS 15-pin D-sub
15-pin D-sub
(male) 8 (male)
14
RTS
2 TXD 15
3 RXD
15 9 RXD+ A
11 TXD+
7
8
CTS 10 RXD B
RTS 1 12 1
TXD
Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 529

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu Serial Port Test

1 PLC Serial Comm Port Loop Back Test
2 Item No. Function Description Comments
1.) When testing an RS-232C serial
3 connection, connect pin 2 to 3 and pin 7
to 8 on an appropriate D-SUB 15-pin male
connector and plug it into the serial PLC
comm port on the rear of the touch panel.
4 1 Determine Loop Back
Connector 2.) When testing an RS-422 or RS-485 serial
connection, connect pin 9 to 11, pin 10 to
12 and pin 7 to 8 on an appropriate D-
5 SUB 15-pin male connector and plug it
into the serial PLC comm port on the rear
of the touch panel.
6 2 Start Test Press the Loop Back Test button to start the
serial comm port test.

7 1.) Bytes Sent:

The number of bytes sent after a test is
started.
8 2.) Receive Counts:
The number of bytes which are received
after the test is started.
9 3 Test Results 3.) Error Counts:
The number of bytes which have not been
Note: The test will continue to run
until the Cancel button is pressed.
received after the test is started.
10 4.) RTS/CTS Test: Pass/Fail
RTS is turned on and if CTS receives the
signal then the test shows Pass,
11 otherwise the test shows Fail.

4 Cancel Press to return to the Test Comm. Port screen.

12
13
14
A
B
C
D

530 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu PLC Enquiry Test: Serial Connection

This function allows the ability to select any PLC 1
that may be connected to the touch panel through
a serial comm. port connection and checks to see if
the communications are working correctly.
2
Note: The communications protocol for the PLC
being selected must be configured the same as
3
the C-more touch panel. The touch panels PLC
serial communications are configured using the C-more 4
Programming Softwares Panel Manager.
5
6
Item No. Function Description Comments 7
Select any PLC that is shown in the drop
1 Select PLC down menu. The PLC selected will connect to
the touch panel at the time of a test.
8
2 PLC Enquiry Test
Four test read packets are sent to the selected
PLC.
9
Test result will be either Pass or Fail.
10
3 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 531

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu Test Communication Ports: Ethernet

1 Test Comm. Port
The following test feature can be used to check
the operation of the Ethernet communication
2 Serial Ethernet
port by indicating if an Etherent link has been
established or not, and can also check the status
Link : Online of the Ethernet communications to any
3 Address : Static
192.168.100.4
PLC Enquiry Test
connected PLC.
Select PLC:
Base featured models (-R) do not include an
4 Ethernet port, therefore this check is not
displayed.
5 Note: The communications protocol for the
PLC being selected must be configured the
6 Cancel same as the C-more touch panel. The touch
panels PLC Ethernet communications are configured
using the C-more Programming Softwares Panel
7 Manager.

Item No. Function Description Comments

8 This area displays information to whether an
Ethernet link has been established for the
1 Ethernet Connected touch panels Ethernet comm port or not.
9 Displays panels IP address and shows
whether it is static or assigned by a DHCP.

10 2 PLC Enquiry Test

This function allows the ability to select any
PLC configured in the project that may be
connected to the touch panel via an Ethernet
connection and checks to see if the
11 communications are working correctly.

3 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

12 Example of displayed message when the touch
panels Ehternet port is not connected.
13 Typical Ethernet connection
with Ethernet hub.
Test Comm. Port

14 Serial Ethernet Ethernet

Hub or Switch
10/100 Base-T PW
R

A
10/
T/
AC 100

Link : Offline
K
LN Port
10/ link
T/ Up
AC 100
K
LN

PLC Enquiry Test

10/
T/
AC 100
K

05
T/
10/
LN
U
Address : Static
AC 100

SW
K
LN
10/

E
T/
AC 100
K

H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100 C-more
LN

3
2

0.0.0.0 Ethernet Module Ethernet

1

PWR
PWR
+

Touch Panel
Select PLC: Port

B
(Bottom View)

C DL06 PLC

Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru

D Cancel

Continued on the next page.

532 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu PLC Enquiry Test: Ethernet Connection

Test Comm. Port
This function allows the ability to select any 1
PLC configured in the project that may be
Serial Ethernet connected to the touch panel through an
Ethernet port connection and checks to see if
2
Link : Online the communications are working correctly.
PLC Enquiry Test
Address : Static
192.168.100.4
Select PLC: Note: The communications protocol for the
3
DEV001 PLC being selected must be configured the
DEV001
DEV008
same as the C-more touch panel. The touch 4
DEV009 panels PLC Ethernet communications are configured
DEV010
DEV011
using the C-more Programming Softwares Panel
Manager.
5
Cancel
6
Item No. Function Description Comments
7
1 Select PLC Select any PLC that is shown in the drop
down menu. 8
The following are the steps that the Ethernet
PLC Enquiry Test performs: 9
1.) Ping the network 4 times for the PLC

2 PLC Enquiry Test

selected.
2.) Four of the test read packets are sent to 10
the selected PLC.
Test result will be either Pass or Fail.
However, if the result of pinging the network 11
shows an error, the test is stopped.

3 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen. 12

13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 533

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu Test Beep/Sound

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Item No. Function Description Comments
8 The internal Beeper can be tested from this
system setup screen whether the Beeper is
1 Beep Test enabled or disabled. After the Beep Test
9 button is pressed then released, the Beeper
will sound for 500 msec.

2 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

534 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu Test Beep/Sound (contd)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
WARNING: Hearing damage may occur if the volume on the user supplied external amplified speaker is set
too high. 8
Item No. Function Description Comments 9
The Speaker Test function requires that a
speaker(s) with an amplifier (can be stereo)
be connected to the Audio Line Out stereo
10
1 Speaker Test jack on the rear of the touch panel.
After the Speaker Test button is pressed then
released, a system provided Test.WAV file will
11
play once.

2 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 535

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Menu
1 The users project file can be backed up and restored to
either a CompactFlash memory card or an USB
2 memory device. The user also has the ability to clear
the memory within the C-more touch panel.
Base featured models (-R) do not include CF1 or CF2.
3
4
5
6
7 Item No. Function Description Comments
USB: USB Memory
8 1 Backup
CF Slot #1: CF card standard port
CF Slot #2: CF card optional port Support is possible to 1 GigaByte.
The backup data files are created and copied
9 to a folder on the memory device named
"EA_Memory Copy."

10 2 Restore
USB: USB Memory
CF Slot #1: CF card standard port Support is possible to 1 GigaByte.
CF Slot #2: CF card optional port
11 Built-in Memory:
6, 8 & 10 panels - total 15 MB

12 3 Clear Memory
12 & 15 panels - total 46 MB

USB: USB Memory

13 CF Slot #1: CF card standard port
CF Slot #2: CF card optional port

14 4 Reset to Factory Default The touch panels internal memory is set to

the original factory defaults.

A 5 Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen.

B
C
D

536 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Project Executed from CompactFlash (CF Slot #1)

If a project file is backed up to a CompactFlash memory card located in CF Slot #1, then when 1
the touch panel has power cycled, the system will boot from the CompactFlash
The following are the steps that result in the touch panel running the project stored in
CompactFlash plugged into CF Slot #1:
2
1.) The project file is backed up to a CompactFlash memory card plugged into CF Slot #1.
2.) The touch panels power is cycled.
3
3.) The project file stored on the CF memory card is loaded into the touch panels internal DRAM
memory and executed. Please note that the project stored in the panels internal FLASH memory
4
is NOT loaded into the internal DRAM memory when a CompactFlash memory card is present,
therefore the original project is still kept in the internal FLASH memory. 5
WARNING: During power up with a CompactFlash memory card plugged into CF Slot #1, please do not 6
remove the memory card from the slot. Damage to the CF card and possibly the touch panel may result.
7
WARNING: After a firmware update, the project files which are located in the touch panels internal FLASH
memory and the CompactFlash memory card plugged into CF Slot #1 are cleared. The programming 8
software will need to be used to Transfer the project file back into either the panels internal FLASH
memory or the CompactFlash memory card. If you wish to retain the project on the CompactFlash
memory card, then remove it before performing a firmware upgrade.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 537

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Backup Panel -> Storage

1 The available memory devices will be displayed
showing the total and free available memory for
2 that device. If the device is not available, it will be
grayed out. The Next button is grayed out until a
device is selected.
3 During boot up from CF1, the CF1 button will
be grayed out.
4
5 The Cancel button can be pressed at any time to
return to the Memory menu screen.
6
7 Select the memory device to be used for backing
up the panels data type file(s).
8
The selected device is highlighted.
9
10 When there are more than two available backup
devices, the one selected will be highlighted. If
there is only one available memory device, it
11 needs to be highlighted in order to go to the next
step.
12
Press the Next button to continue.
13
14
Note: If you have a memory device plugged into the proper connector on the touch panel, but it doesnt show
A up as highlighted in Step 1 of the Restore setup screen, then try a different device to determine if the memory
device is defective or if there is a possible problem with the memory device connector.

B
C
D

538 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Backup Panel -> Storage (contd)

Select the data types to be backed up. 1
The selected data type(s) is highlighted. 2
Pressing the highlighted button again will turn it 3
off.
4
The Next >> button will stay grayed out until the
data type(s) are selected. 5
6
Example of data types selected for backing up.
7
The selected data types are highlighted.
8
The Next >> button is now enabled.
9
10
Pressing Cancel will return to the previous menu.
11
Press the Next button to continue.
12
13
Note: The following definitions are for the various data types that can be backed up:
Project data consists of the actual developed project data that is created in the C-more programming
14
software and includes all functionality, objects, screens, tag names, labels, comments, graphics, etc.
System data consists of the operating system, firmware and run time files. A
Log data consists of the files that are created by the Event Manager, Logged Trend Data and Object
logging selection for alarms and events.
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 539

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Backup Panel -> Storage (contd)

1 The data selected to backup is checked. If the data
is good, then the OK button can be pressed to
2 start the backup.
If there is a problem with the data, the OK button
will remain grayed out and the user can return to
3 the previous screen by pressing the
<< Prev button.
4
5
6
7 If the destination does not have enough space to
store the selected memory size, then the message
8 shown here will be displayed. Press the OK
button to clear the warning message.
9 The warning message will read "Not enough
Memory Space in %Device%".
10 %Device% will show either "CF1", "CF2", or
"USB".
11
12
13 This warning message will be displayed if the
backup Memory device fails or is removed during
14 the backup. Press the OK button to clear the
warning message.
A The warning message will read Backup Failed.
"%Device% cannot be found".
B %Device% will show either "CF1", "CF2", or
"USB".
C Refer to Chapter 8 on Troubleshooting for
additional help.

540 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Backup Panel -> Storage (contd)

For any other reason the backup fails, then this 1
warning message will be displayed. Press the OK
button to clear the warning message.
The warning message will read "Backup Failed".
2
3
Refer to Chapter 8 on Troubleshooting for
additional help. 4
5
6
This message is displayed during the Backup 7
copying process. Press the Cancel button to abort
the backup. 8
The following text is shown in the copying
progress message box: 9
Copy to USB Memory:
"Please do not Power Off or Remove USB"
Copy to CF1 or CF2:
10
"Please do not Power Off or Remove CF"
11
12
This message is displayed to indicate the Backup
is complete. Press the OK button to return to the
13
previous menu selection.
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 541

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Restore Storage -> Panel

1 The available memory devices will be displayed
showing the total and free available memory for
2 that device. If the device is not available, it will be
grayed out. The Next button is grayed out until a
device is selected.
3
4 During boot up from CF1, the CF1 button will
be grayed out.
5
6
7 Select the memory device to use for restoring the
data type file(s) that have been stored on the
8 device.
The selected device is highlighted.
9
10 When there are more than two available restore
devices, the one selected will be highlighted. If
there is only one available memory device, it
11 needs to be highlighted in order to go to the next
step.
12
Press the Next button to continue.
13
14 Note: If you have a memory device plugged into the proper connector on the touch panel, but it doesnt show
up as highlighted in Step 1 of the Restore setup screen, then try a different device to determine if the memory
A device is defective or the panel has a problem.

B
C
D

542 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Restore Storage -> Panel (contd)

Select the data type(s) to be restored. The data 1
type can be either the Project, System or Log
files. The data is restored to the internal built-in
FLASH memory.
2
The selected data type(s) is highlighted.
3
Pressing the highlighted button again will turn it
4
off.
5
The Next >> button will stay grayed out until the
data type(s) are selected.
6
7
Example of a file selected for restoring. 8
The selected device is highlighted. 9
The Next >> button is now enabled. 10
Pressing Cancel will return to the previous menu. 11
12
13
Note: If you have a memory device plugged into the proper connector on the touch panel that you are sure 14
contains one of the data type files, but that particular data type is grayed out, then you may need to try the
memory device on another panel, or check the contents of the memory device on a PC.
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 543

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Restore Storage -> Panel (contd)

1 The data selected to restore is checked. If the data
is good, then the OK button can be pressed to
2 start the restore.
If there is a problem with the data, the OK button
will remain grayed out and the user can return to
3 the previous screen by pressing the
<< Prev button.
4 The problem could be caused by a corrupted data
file. See Chapter 8 on Troubleshooting for
5 additional help.

6
7 If the system memory does not have enough space
to restore the selected memory size, then the
8 message shown here will be displayed. Press the
OK button to clear the warning message.
9 The warning message will read "Not enough
Memory Space in System Memory".

10 The Project size must be less than 10 MByte for

6-10 panels and less than 40 MByte for 12 &
15 panels.
11
12
13 This warning message will be displayed if the
restore Memory device fails or is removed during
14 the backup. Press the OK button to clear the
warning message.
A The warning message will read Restore Failed.
"%Device% cannot be found".
B %Device% will show show "CF1", "CF2", or
"USB".
C Try using a different device with known good
data in the same connector or using the device
D that is causing the error in a different connector.

544 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Restore Storage -> Panel (contd)

For any other reason the restore fails, then this 1
warning message will be displayed. Press the OK
button to clear the warning message.
2
3
4
5
6
This message is displayed during the Restore
7
process. Press the Cancel button to abort the
backup. 8
The following text is shown in the copying
progress message box: 9
Copy to USB Memory:
"Please do not Power Off or Remove USB" 10
Copy to CF1 or CF2:
"Please do not Power Off or Remove CF" 11
WARNING: During the copying process, Do
not power off the touch panel or remove
the memory device.
12
13
After the Restore is complete, press the OK
button to return to the user screen. 14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 545

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Clear Memory

1 Select the memory device to clear. The Next
button is grayed out until a device is selected. If
2 the device is not available, it will be grayed out.
The Next button is grayed out until a device is
selected.
3
4
5
6
7 The selected device is highlighted.

8 When there are more than two available backup

devices, the one selected will be highlighted. If
9 another is selected, then the highlight will change
to the last one pressed. Only one device can be
selected at a time.
10
Press the Next button to continue.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

546 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Clear Memory (contd)

Select the data type to be cleared 1
Example of USB Memory that was selected.
2
The selected file will be highlighted.
3
Press again to un-select.
4
The Next >> button will stay grayed out until
file(s) are selected. 5
6
Example of Built-in Memory that was selected.
7
8
Notice the ability to select either the Project
memory, the Log memory or the System
memory.
9
10
11
12
13
Example of file selected for clearing.
14
The selected memory area is highlighted.
A
Press again to un-select.
B
The Next >> button is now enabled.
C
Pressing Cancel will un-select the file(s). D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 547

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Clear Memory (contd)

1 The data selected to clear is checked. If the data is
good, then the OK button can be pressed to start
2 the clear procedure.
If there is a problem with the data, the OK button
will remain grayed out and the user can return to
3 the previous screen by pressing the
<< Prev button.
4
5
6
7 This message is displayed during the clearing
process. Press the Cancel button to abort the
8 clearing.
The following text is shown in the clearing
9 progress message box:
Clearing Built-in Memory:
10 "Please do not Power Off"
Clearing USB Memory:
11 "Please do not Power Off or Remove USB"
Clearing CF1 or CF2
12 "Please do not Power Off or Remove CF"

13 WARNING: During the clearing process, do not power off the touch panel or remove the memory device.

14
A
B
C
D

548 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Clear Memory (contd)

The following message is displayed when the 1
clearing process is complete:
"%Device% cleared" 2
%Device% will show either "CF1", "CF2", or
"USB". 3
Press the OK button to return to the Memory
menu screen. 4
5
6
WARNING: During the clearing process, Do not power off the touch panel or remove the memory device. 7
8
Example of Clear All selected for clearing.
9
The selected device is highlighted.
10
The Next >> button is now enabled.
11
Pressing Cancel will un-select the Clear All.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 549

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Clear Memory (contd)

1 The data selected to clear is checked. If the data is
good, then the OK button can be pressed to start
2 the clear procedure.
If there is a problem with the data, the OK button
will remain grayed out and the user can return to
3 the previous screen by pressing the
<< Prev button.
4
5
6
7 The warning message shown here will be
displayed to give the user the opportunity to
8 decide if they want to proceed or not.

9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

550 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Clear Memory (contd)

This message is displayed during the clearing 1
process. Press the Cancel button to abort the
backup.
The following text is shown in the clearing
2
progress message box:
Clearing Built-in Memory:
3
"Please do not Power Off"
Clearing USB Memory:
4
"Please do not Power Off or Remove USB"
Clearing CF1 or CF2 5
"Please do not Power Off or Remove CF"
6
WARNING: During the clearing process, Do not power off the touch panel or remove the memory device.
7
The following message is displayed when the 8
clearing process is complete:
"%Device% cleared" 9
%Device% will show either "CF1", "CF2", or
"USB". 10
Press the OK button to return to the Memory
menu screen. 11
12
13
The warning message shown here will be
displayed if the clearing process fails. 14
"Clear Failed".
Press the OK button to return to the Clear A
Memory screen and try again.
If the selected memory still fails to clear, then B
refer to Chapter 8 on Troubleshooting for
additional help. C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 551

 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Reset to Factory Default

1 After pressing the Reset to Factory Default
button, the message box shown will be displayed.
2 Resetting to the Factory Defaults produces the
following actions:
3 1.) The touch panels Settings data is
reset to the Factory Defaults.
4 2.) The Project File is cleared.
3.) The Multi Media file is cleared.
5 4.) The Log file is cleared.
5.) The System file (NK.bin) is not
6 cleared.

7 WARNING: Please make a backup file to either a CF or USB memory device using the Memory Backup
function before resetting to the Factory Defaults as a precautionary measure.

8 The message shown here is displayed once the

Factory Default values have been stored into the
9 system memory.

10 If the factory defaults do not complete, then an

error message will appear.
11
Press OK.
12
13
Touch Screen Calibration After pressing OK, the touch panel will go to the
14 Calibrate the Touch Screen by
Touch Screen Calibration procedure, allowing
touching the center of the crosshairs new touch screen calibration data to be stored in
A + with your finger or a stylus. the touch panels memory.
The following note is also shown on the
Note: The panel will not
communicate or run its project in this calibration screens to remind the user that the
B mode. Project File has been cleared:
Note: The panel will not communicate or run its
C Cancel project in this mode.

552 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 CHAPTER
PLC COMMUNICATIONS
6
In This Chapter...
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
DirectLOGIC PLCs Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
PLC Compatibility Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Direct LOGIC PLCs RS-232C Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Direct LOGIC PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Direct LOGIC Universal Isolated Network Adapter, p/n FA-ISOCON . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Direct LOGIC Universal Converter, p/n F2-UNICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Allen-Bradley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
GE Fanuc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Mitsubishi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Omron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Modicon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Introduction
1 The C-more family of touch panels is capable of communicating with a wide variety of
Programmable Logic Controllers. C-more is capable of communicating over RS232, RS422 and
2 RS485 serial networks as well as Ethernet networks. It communicates with all controllers in the
Direct LOGIC family of PLC's utilizing various protocols. C-more also communicates with
other brands of PLCs by their different protocols. The table on the next page lists all of the
3 various PLCs and protocols that can be configured. The page after the protocol table lists the
various serial communication cables that are available to purchase. The rest of this chapter is
4 devoted to show the pin to pin connections of all the available cables plus wring diagrams that
the user can refer to in order to construct their own cables, along with wiring diagrams of cables
that are not available for purchase. To simplify RS422/RS485 wiring schemes, we have included
5 wiring diagrams showing connections for available terminal connectors such as our ZIPLink
Communication Adapter Module, p/n DN-15TB, used for example with our DL-06 and D2-
6 260 PLCs and C-more D-Sub 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter p/n EA-COMCON-3.
If you have difficulty determining whether the particular PLC and/or protocol you are using
7 will work with the C-more series of touch panels, please contact our technical support group at
770-844-4200

8 DirectLOGIC PLCs Password Protection

9 NOTE: DirectLogic PLCs support multi-level password protection of the ladder program. This allows
password protection while not locking the communication port to an operator interface. The multilevel
10 password can be invoked by creating a password with an upper case "A" followed by seven numeric
characters (e.g. A1234567). Please refer to the specific PLC user manual for further details.

11
C-more
Touch Panel
12
DL-06 PLC
13
14
C-more to
A Direct LOGIC
VGA 15-pin port
Port 2
B serial cable
p/n EA-2CBL-1
C
D

62 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

PLC Compatibility Table

PLC Family Model
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5-01/02/03, PLC5
Protocols
DH485/AIC/AIC+
1
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200 and 1500 DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex
SLC 5-03/04/05
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix
DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex
DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex
2
PLC-5 DF1 Full Duplex
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Tag Based
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Generic I/O Messaging
DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex
EtherNet/IP Server
3
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Tag Based EtherNet/IP Client
MicroLogix 1100 & SLC 5/05, both via native Ethernet port EtherNet/IP Client 4
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5-03/04/05, all via ENI adapter EtherNet/IP Client
Modbus TCP/IP
GE Fanuc
Modbus TCP/IP devices
90/30 and 90/70
Modbus TCP/IP
SNPX
5
Mitsubishi FX Series FX Direct

Omron
C200 Adapter, C500
CJ1/CS1 Serial
Host Link
FINS
6
Modicon 984 CPU, Quantum 113 CPU, AEG Modicon Micro Series 110 CPU: 311-xx, 411-xx,
512-xx, 612-xx Modbus RTU
K-Sequence
7
all Direct NET
DL05/DL06
H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
Direct LOGIC Ethernet
8
DL105 all K-Sequence
D2-230 K-Sequence
K-Sequence
9
D2-240
Direct NET

DL205 D2-250/D2-250-1/D2-260
K-Sequence
Direct NET
10
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
D2-240/D2-250-1/D2-260
Using DCM
Direct NET
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
11
H2-ECOM/H2-ECOM100 Direct LOGIC Ethernet
D3-330/330P (Requires the use of a Data Communications Unit) Direct NET 12
D3-340 Direct NET
Direct LOGIC
DL305 D3-350
K-Sequence
Direct NET 13
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
D3-350 DCM
Direct NET
Modbus (Koyo addressing) 14
K-Sequence
D4-430

D4-440
Direct NET
K-Sequence
A
Direct NET
DL405
D4-450
K-Sequence
Direct NET
B
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
All with DCM
Direct NET
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
C
H4-ECOM/H4-ECOM100 Direct LOGIC Ethernet
H2-WinPLC (Think & Do) Live V5.2 or later and Studio any version
H2-WinPLC (Think & Do) Live V5.5.1 or later and Studio V7.2.1 or later
Think & Do Modbus RTU (serial port)
Think & Do Modbus TCP/IP (Ethernet port)
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 63

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams

1 Purchased Cable
Description
Cable
Part Number
2 Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-12 port, DL05
DL06, DL105, DL205, D3-350, D4-450 & EA-2CBL
H2-WINPLC (RS-232C)
3 Direct LOGIC (VGA Style) 15-pin port
DL06, D2-250 (250-1), D2-260 EA-2CBL-1
(RS-232C)
4 Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-11 port, D3-340
(RS-232C) EA-3CBL Part No. EA-2CBL

5 Direct LOGIC DL405 PLC 15-pin D-sub

port, DL405 (RS-232C) EA-4CBL-1
Direct LOGIC PLC 25-pin D-sub port,
6 DL405, D3-350, DL305 DCU and
all DCMs (RS-232C)
EA-4CBL-2

7 Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1000, 1100,

1200 &1500 (RS-232C) EA-MLOGIX-CBL
Allen-Bradley SLC 5-03/04/05,
8 ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix
DF1 port (RS-232C)
EA-SLC-232-CBL

Allen-Bradley PLC-5 DF1 port Part No. EA-2CBL-1

EA-PLC5-232-CBL
9 (RS-232C)
Allen-Bradley SLC 5-01/02/03 DH485 port
EA-DH485-CBL
10 (RS-232C)
GE 90/30 and 90/70 15-pin D-sub port
(RS-422A) EA-90-30-CBL
11 MITSUBISHI FX Series 25-pin port
EA-MITSU-CBL
(RS-422A)
12 MITSUBISHI FX Series 8-pin mini-DIN
(RS-422A) EA-MITSU-CBL-1

13 OMRON Host Link

C200 Adapter, C500 EA-OMRON-CBL
Part No. EA-3CBL

(RS-232C)

14
NOTE 1: The above list of pre-made communications cables may be purchased. See further in this chapter for
A wiring diagrams of additonal user constructed cables. This chapter also includes wiring diagrams for the pre-
made cables.

B NOTE 2: EZTouch serial PLC communication cables are compatible with C-more touch panels.

C
8 1
C-more PLC Serial D-Sub 15-pin female
D Communications Port
15 9
on rear of touch panel

64 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams

1
2
3
Part No. EA-4CBL-1 Part No. EA-4CBL-1
4
5
6
7
Part No. EA-MLOGIX-CBL Part No. EA-SLC-232-CBL
8
9
10
Part No. EA-PLC5-232-CBL Part No. EA-DH485-CBL
11
12
13
14
Part No. EA-90-30-CBL Part No. EA-MITSU-CBL
A
B
C
D
Part No. EA-MITSU-CBL-1 Part No. EA-OMRON-CBL

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 65

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams (contd)

1 The following series of wiring diagrams show the connectors and wiring details for the
communication cables that are used between the C-more touch panels and various PLC
2 controllers. Part numbers are included with the pre-made cables that can be purchased from
AutomationDirect. The information presented will allow the user to construct their own cables
if so desired.
3 Direct LOGIC PLCs RS-232C Serial: EA-2CBL
Direct Logic PLC RJ12 port: DL05, DL105, DL205, DL350, DL450, H2-WINPLC
4 To PLC RS-232C (p/n EA-2CBL)
To C-more
PLC Port
RJ12 Port

5
RJ12 6-pin 15-pin
Phone Plug
6 1 = Sig GND
(6P6C) Wiring Diagram 8 = do not use
7 = do not use
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
14 = do not use
2 = do not use TXD 4 3 RXD 6 = do not use 15 13 = do not use
3 = RXD
7 4 = TXD
5 = do not use 123456
RXD
GND
3
1
2
5
TXD
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
6 = do not use 1 2 = TXD (232C) 9 = do not use
shield 1
8 1 = Frame GND
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

9 EA-2CBL-1
To C-more
10 To PLC
15-Pin HD Port
Direct Logic PLC (VGA style) 15-pin HD port: D2-250, D2-250-1, D2-260, DL06
RS-232C (p/n EA-2CBL-1)
PLC Port

11 15-pin Wiring Diagram 15-pin

HD D-sub 2 3 RXD D-sub
12 8 = do not use
7 = Sig GND
(male)
15
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
TXD
RXD 3 2 TXD
8 = do not use
7 = do not use
(male) 15 = do not use
15 14 = do not use
6 = do not use 13 = do not use GND 7 5 6 = donot use 13 = do not use
5 = CTS 12 = do not use 5 = Logic GND
13 4 = RTS
3 = RXD 1 6
11 = do not use RTS
10 = do not use CTS
4
5
4 = do not use
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
2 = TXD 9 = do not use 2 = TXD (232C) 1 9 = do not use

14 1 = +5 VDC - N/C
HD = High Density shield 1 1 = Frame GND

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

A
B
C
D

66 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Direct LOGIC PLCs RS-232C Serial (contd): EA-3CBL

To PLC
Direct Logic PLC RJ11 port: D3-340
RS-232C (p/n EA-3CBL)
To C-more
PLC Port
1
RJ11 Port
2
RJ11 4-pin 15-pin
Phone Plug
(4P4C) Wiring Diagram 8 = do not use
7 = do not use
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
14 = do not use
3
1 = Sig ground TXD 4 3 RXD 6 = do not use 15 13 = do not use
2 = do not use
3 = RXD
4 = TXD
RXD
GND
3
1
2
5
TXD
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
4
1234
shield 1 2 = TXD (232C) 1 9 = do not use
1 = Frame GND
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.
5
EA-4CBL-1 6
To PLC Direct Logic PLC 15-pin D-sub port: DL405, To C-more
15-Pin Port PLC Port
RS-232C (p/n EA-4CBL-1)
7
TXD 2
Wiring Diagram
3 RXD
8
15-pin 3 2 15-pin
RXD TXD

7 = CTS
D-sub
8 = YOM Sense (male) 15 = Logic GND
14 = Logic GND
online 4 5
D-sub
8 = do not used (male)
7 = do not used
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
9
6 = do not use
15
13 = Logic GND GND 13 15
6 = do not used 13 = do not use
GND 14
5 = do not use
4 = Online
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use GND 15
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not used
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
10
2 = TXD (232C) 9 = do not use YOP 1
2 = TXD (232C) 1 9 = do not use
1 = YOP Sense 1
See PLC user manual
CTS
YOM
7
8
1 = Frame GND
11
for pin out details.
shield 1
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. 12
EA-4CBL-2
To PLC
25-Pin Port
Direct Logic PLC 25-pin D-sub port: DL405, D3-350, DL305 DCU, and all DCMs, To C-more
13
RS-232C (p/n EA-4CBL-2) PLC Port

14
25-pin
D-sub
2
Wiring Diagram

3 RXD 8 = do not use

15-pin
D-sub
A
13 = do not use (male) 25 = do not use TXD 15 = do not use
12 = do not use (male)
25 24 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
9 = do not use
23 = do not use RXD
22 = do not use GND 7
3 2 TXD 7 = do not use
5
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
15
14 = do not use
13 = do not use
12 = do not use
B
21 = do not use 4 4 = do not use 11 = do not use
8 = do not use RTS
7 = Signal GND
6 = do not use
5 = CTS
20
19
=
=
do
do
not
not
use
use
18 = do not use
CTS 5 3 = RXD (232C)
2 = TXD (232C) 1
1 = Frame GND
10 = do not use
9 = do not use C
4 = RTS 17 = do not use shield 1
3 = RXD
2 = TXD
1 = do not use
1
16 = do not use
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
D
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 67

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Direct LOGIC PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A:

When using the RS-422A/RS-485A capabilities of the C-more PLC communications port, the
1 termination resistor is placed between the RXD and RXD+ terminals on the PLC side of the
connection between the touch panel and PLC. The Termination Resistor value is based on the
2 characteristic impedance of the cable being used. To enable the built-in 120 Ohm Termination
Resistor, jumper pin 13 to pin 9 (RXD+) on the C-more 15-pin PLC communications port.
3 To PLC Direct LOGIC DL-06, D2-250, D2-250-1, D2-260 (all Port 2) To C-more
PLC Port
RS-422A
4
15-Pin Port
User Constructed
Wiring Diagram
5 15-pin
HD D-sub
TXD+ 9
13
9
Term.
RD+
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
10 10 RD 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
6 8 = do not use
7 = Sig GND 15
15 = CTS
14 = CTS+
TXD
RXD+ 13 11 SD+
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
15
13 = Termination
12 = SD (RS422)
6 = RXD RXD 6 12 SD 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422)
5 = do not use 13 = RXD+
7 3 = do not use 10 = RD (RS422)
7 4 = do not use
3 = do not use 1 6
12 = RTS-
11 = RTS+
10 = TXD
GND
RTS 12
5
2 = do not use 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = RD+ (RS422)
2 = do not use 15
1 = do not use 9 = TXD+ CTS

8 RTS+
CTS+
11
14
shield 1
9 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.

10 To PLC Direct LOGIC D2-DCM*, D3-DCM* & D4-DCM* To C-more

25-Pin Port
RS-422A PLC Port
11 User Constructed
12 25-pin
D-sub 25 = do not use
Wiring Diagram 13 Term. 15-pin
D-sub
13 = CTS (male)24 = do not use 14 9 RD+
TXD+
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
12 = CTS+ 23 = do not use
13 11 = RTS
10 = RTS+
25 22 = do not use TXD
21 = do not use RXD+ 17
15 10 RD 7 = do not use
11 SD+ 6 = do not use
15
14 = do not use
13 = Termination
9 = do not use 20 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD (RS422)
8 = do not use 16 12 4 = do not use
19 = do not use RXD SD 11 = SD+ (RS422)
14 7=0V
6 = do not use
5 = do not use
18 = do not use
17 = RXD+
0V 7
11
5 3 = do not use
2 = do not use 1
10 = RD (RS422)
9 = RD+ (RS422)
(RS422) RTS 1 = Frame GND
4 = do not use
16 = RXD CTS 13
A 3 = do not use
2 = do not use
1 = do not use 1
(RS422)
15 = TXD
RTS+ 10 * Note: The DCM modules must be set for:
CTS+ 12 Direct NET Slave, HEX mode.
(RS422)

B 14 = TXD+
(RS422)
shield 1

Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.

C
NOTE: The RS-422 wiring diagrams shown above are not for multi-drop networks involving connecting more
D than one PLC to a panel. Refer to the wiring diagram example on page 6-14 if more than one PLC will be
connected to a panel.

68 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Direct LOGIC PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A (contd):

User Constructed 1
To PLC
25-Pin Port
Direct LOGIC D4-430/D4-440/D4-450 Port 1 and D3-350 Port 2 To C-more
RS-422A PLC Port
2
25-pin
D-sub
Wiring Diagram 13 Term. 15-pin
D-sub
3
13 = do not use (male) 25 = do not use 14 9
12 = do not use
TXD+ RD+
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
11 = CTS+
10 = RXD
24 = do not use
25 23 = CTS
22 = do not use
TXD
RXD+
16
9
10
11
RD 7 = do not use
SD+
6 = do not use 15
14 = do not use
13 = Termination
4
(RS422) 21 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD (RS422)
9 = RXD+ 10 12 SD 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422)
(RS422)
8 = do not use
7=0V
20 = do not use
19 = RTS+
18 = RTS
RXD
0V 7
18
5 3 = do not use
2 = do not use 1
10 = RD (RS422)
9 = RD+ (RS422)
5
17 = do not use
RTS 1 = Frame GND
6 = do not use
5 = do not use
4 = do not use
3 = do not use 1
16 = TXD
(RS422)
15 = do not use
CTS
RTS+
23
19 6
2 = do not use 11
14 = TXD+ CTS+
1 = do not use (RS422) shield 1
7
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.

8
User Constructed
To PLC
25-Pin Port
Direct LOGIC D4-450 Port 3 To C-more
9
RS-422A PLC Port
RTS and CTS are not present on this port.
10
13 = TXD
25-pin
D-sub 25 = RXD
12
Wiring Diagram 13
9
Term. 15-pin
D-sub
11
(male) (RS422)
(RS422) TXD+ RD+
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
12 = TXD+ 24 = RXD+ 13 10
(RS422)
11 = do not use
25 (RS422)
23 = do not use
TXD
RXD+ 24 11
RD 7 = do not use
SD+
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
15
14 = do not use
13 = Termination
12 = SD (RS422)
12
10 = do not use 22 = do not use 25 12
9 = do not use RXD SD 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422)
21 = do not use
8 = do not use
7=0V
6 = do not use
20 = do not use
19 = do not use
0V 7
shield
5
1
3 = do not use
2 = do not use 1
1 = Frame GND
10 = RD (RS422)
9 = RD+ (RS422) 13
5 = do not use 18 = do not use
17 = do not use
4 = do not use
3 = do not use
2 = do not use 1
16 = do not use
15 = do not use
14
1 = do not use 14 = do not use
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent. A
B
NOTE: The RS-422 wiring diagrams shown above are not for multi-drop networks involving connecting more
than one PLC to a panel. Refer to the wiring diagram example on page 6-14 if more than one PLC will be
connected to a panel.
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 69

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Direct LOGIC PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A (contd):

1 User Constructed
To PLC Direct LOGIC DL-06, D2-260 (both Port 2) To C-more
PLC Port
15-Pin Port RS-485A
2
3 15-pin
HD D-sub
RXD+ 13
Wiring Diagram 13
9
Term.
RD+
15-pin
D-sub
(male)
(male) 8 = do not use 15 = do not use
9 11 SD+ 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
4 8 = do not use
7 = Sig GND 15
15 = CTS
14 = CTS+
TXD+
TXD 10 10 RD
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
15
13 = Termination
12 = SD (RS485)
6 = RXD RXD 6 12 SD 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS485)
5 = do not use 13 = RXD+
7 3 = do not use
5 4 = do not use
3 = do not use 1 6
12 = RTS-
11 = RTS+
GND
RTS 12
5
2 = do not use 1
1 = Frame GND
10 = RD (RS485)
9 = RD+ (RS485)
2 = do not use 10 = TXD 15
1 = do not use 9 = TXD+ CTS

6 RTS+
CTS+
11
14
shield 1
7 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.

8
NOTE: The RS-485 wiring diagram shown above is not for multi-drop networks involving connecting more
9 than one PLC to a panel. Refer to the wiring diagram example on page 6-16 if more than one PLC will be
connected to a panel.

10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

610 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Direct LOGIC PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A (contd):

Direct LOGIC ZIPLink DN-15TB Adapter Module to EA-COMCON-3 Terminal Block Adapter
1
RS-485A PLC D2-260 or DL06 only Port 2
Cable ZL-DN15TB-CBL
to 15-pin HD PLC Port
C3 SHD
Wiring Diagram Terminal Block Adapter
plugs into C-more 15-pin
2
PLC Serial Comm. Port
B3 GND GND

DN-15TB
JDP1

TX
B1 RXD RD 3
B2 TXD SD
RX

C1
S1
PWR
B4 RXD+
B5 TXD+
SD+
RD+
4
C1 RTS shield TERM
B5
C2 CTS
C4 RTS+
See DN-15TB specifications on
S1 Dip Switch Configuration EA-COMCON-3
5
A1 for RS485A.
C5 CTS+
TB1

DN-15TB 6
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.

7
Direct LOGIC ZIPLink DN-15TB Adapter Module to EA-COMCON-3 Terminal Block Adapter
Cable ZL-DN15TB-CBL
RS-422A PLC D2-250 (-1), D2-260 or DL06 Port 2 8
to 15-pin HD PLC Port Wiring Diagram Terminal Block Adapter
plugs into C-more 15-pin

JDP1
C3 SHD
B3 GND GND
PLC Serial Comm. Port
9
B1 RXD SD
DN-15TB TX

S1
RX

PWR
B4 RXD+
B2 TXD
SD+
RD
10
B5 TXD+ RD+
C1

B5
C1 RTS
C2 CTS
shield TERM 11
See DN-15TB specifications on
S1 Dip Switch Configuration EA-COMCON-3
A1

TB1
C4 RTS+
C5 CTS+
for RS422A.
12
DN-15TB
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
13
NOTE: The RS-422 and RS-485 wiring diagrams shown above are not for multi-drop networks involving 14
connecting more than one PLC to a panel. Refer to the wiring diagram examples starting on page 6-14 if more
than one PLC will be connected to a panel.
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 611

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Direct LOGIC Universal Isolated Network Adapter, p/n FA-ISOCON:

1 FA-ISOCON Universal Isolated Network Adapter
RS-422A to RS-232C PLC DL05 or D2-240 Port 2 only
2 Wiring Diagram Terminal Block Adapter
plugs into C-more 15-pin
PLC Serial Comm. Port
A COM B GND
3 RX SD
RX+ SD+
RXD

4 TXD
TXD EN
TX
TX+
RD
RD+
B TXD shield TERM

5 C
RXD
CTS
C-A
+V
Ground the shield only at the equipment
end where the FA-ISOCON is located. EA-COMCON-3
C-A

6 D TX+
TX
RX
RX+
See FA-ISOCON specificaitons to
properly configure the adapter. Note: When using multiple PLCs
C-B connected to one C-more touch
panel, only jumper the Term
7 FA-ISOCON
terminal to the RD+ terminal
when the panel is the last device
at one end of the network.

8 Port 2

9
10 Modular cable included
with the FA-ISOCON
PW
RU
CP
TX1
R
N
U
DL05 PLC
1
RX
TX2

11
2
RX

12 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.

13
14
A
B
C
D

612 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Direct LOGIC Universal Converter, p/n F2-UNICON:

F2-UNICON Universal Converter

1
RS-422A to RS-232C PLC DL05 or D2-240 Port 2 only
Wiring Diagram Terminal Block Adapter
plugs into C-more 15-pin
2
PLC Serial Comm. Port
GND GND
RXD SD 3
RXD+ SD+
TXD
TXD+
RD
RD+
4
shield TERM
Ground the shield only at the equipment
end where the F2-UNICON is located. EA-COMCON-3
5
F2-UNICON
See F2-UNICON specificaitons to
properly configure the converter.
Note: When using multiple PLCs
connected to one C-more touch
panel, only jumper the Term
6
terminal to the RD+ terminal
when the panel is the last device
at one end of the network.
PWR
BATT
RUN
CPU 7
RUN
DL240

D2-240 PLC
CPU TERM

CH 1
8
CH 2

CH 3

CH 4 9
PORT 1

10
PORT 2

Modular cable included

with the F2-UNICON 11
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent. 12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 613

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples

1
DirectLOGIC
2 DirectLOGIC
DL06 PLC
DL205 PLC

3
Port 2
4 (Slave)

5
Port 2 (Slave)
6 Shielded Cable

7 Shielded Cable

8
9
10 Note: We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.

To DL06 PLC port 2 To D2-250-1 PLC port 2

11
RXD+

RXD+
RXD

RXD
TXD+

RTS+

CTS+

TXD+

RTS+

CTS+
TXD

RTS
CTS

TXD

RTS

CTS
GND

GND

12 7 10 9 6
*
13 11 14 12 15 7 10 9 6 13 11 14 12 15

15-pin
13 7 = Sig GND
HD D-sub
8 = do not use (male) 15 = CTS
14 = CTS+
8
7
6
6 = RXD 15 13 = RXD+
5 = do not use 12 = RTS- 5

14 4 = do not use
3 = do not use
2 = do not use 1
1 = do not use 6
11 = RTS+
10 = TXD
9 = TXD+
4
3
2
1
HD = High Density

A RXD+ RXD+

RXD RXD

B TXD+

TXD
TXD+

TXD
Signal GND Signal GND
shield
C * Termination resistors required at both ends of the
network receive data signals to match the impedance
of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms).
Typical RS-422 Multi-Drop Wring Diagram
D

614 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples (contd)

1
C-more
GIC Touch Panel
LC DirectLOGIC
DL06 PLC
2
3
4
(Slave)
(Master)
5
Port 2
6
Shielded Cable
7
Shielded Cable

8
9
Note: We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
10
To C-more Touch Panel
To DL06 PLC port 2
11

* Term.
RXD+
RXD
TXD+

RTS+

CTS+
TXD

RTS

CTS

SHD
RD+
RD

SD+
GND

SD
GND

7 10 9 6 13 11 14 12 15 5 10 9 12 11 13 1
12
15-pin

7 = Sig GND
6 = RXD
HD D-sub
8 = do not use (male)
15
15 = CTS
14 = CTS+
13 = RXD+
8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub 15 = do not use
13
7 = do not use (male) 14 = do not use
5 = do not use 12 = RTS- 6 = do not use 15 13 = Termination
4 = do not use
3 = do not use
2 = do not use 1
1 = do not use 6
11 = RTS+
10 = TXD
9 = TXD+
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
3 = do not use
2 = do not use
12 = SD (RS422)
11 = SD+ (RS422)
10 = RD (RS422)
9 = RD+ (RS422)
14
HD = High Density 1 = Frame GND 1

RXD+ RXD+ A
RXD RXD

TXD+

TXD
TXD+

TXD
B
Signal GND Signal GND
shield shield
* Termination resistors required at both ends of the
network receive data signals to match the impedance
C
of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms). Jumper pin
Typical RS-422 Multi-Drop Wring Diagram (contd) 13 to 9 on the C-more Touch Panel 15-pin connector
to place the 120q internal resistor into the network. If
the cable impedance is different, then use an external
resister matched to the cable impedance.
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 615

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples (contd)

1
DirectLOGIC
2 DirectLOGIC
DL06 PLC
DL205 PLC

3
Port 2
4
5
Port 2
6 Shielded Cable

7 Shielded Cable

8
9
10 Note: We recommend Belden 88102 shielded cable or equivalent.

11 To DL06 PLC port 2 To D2-250-1 PLC port 2

12
RXD+

RXD+
RXD

RXD
TXD+

RTS+

CTS+

TXD+

RTS+

CTS+
TXD

RTS
CTS

TXD

RTS
CTS
GND

GND

7 6 10 13 9 11 14 12 15 7 6 10 13 9 11 14 12 15

13 *

15-pin
HD D-sub

14 8 = do not use (male)

7 = Sig GND
6 = RXD
5 = do not use
15
15 = CTS
14 = CTS+
13 = RXD+
12 = RTS-
4 = do not use 11 = RTS+
3 = do not use 10 = TXD
A 2 = do not use 1
1 = do not use 6
9 = TXD+

HD = High Density

B TXD+ / RXD+

TXD / RXD
TXD+ / RXD+

TXD / RXD
Signal GND Signal GND
shield
C * Termination resistors required at both ends of
the network to match the impedance of the cable

Typical RS-485 Multi-Drop Wring Diagram

(between 100 and 500 ohms).

616 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples (contd)

1
C-more
GIC Touch Panel
LC DirectLOGIC 2
DL06 PLC
3
4
5
Port 2
6
Shielded Cable
7
Shielded Cable

8
9
Note: We recommend Belden 88102 shielded cable or equivalent.
10
To DL06 PLC port 2
To C-more Touch Panel
11

* Term.
12
RXD+
RXD

TXD+

RTS+

CTS+
TXD

RTS

CTS

SHD
RD+
RD

SD+
GND

GND

SD
7 6 10 13 9 11 14 12 15 5 10 12 9 11 13 1

15-pin
13
HD D-sub
8 = do not use (male) 15 = CTS 15-pin
7 = Sig GND
6 = RXD
5 = do not use
15
14 = CTS+
13 = RXD+
12 = RTS-
8 = do not use

6 = do not use
D-sub
7 = do not use (male)
15
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
13 = Termination
14
4 = do not use 11 = RTS+ 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD (RS485)
3 = do not use 10 = TXD 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS485)
2 = do not use 1
1 = do not use 6
9 = TXD+

HD = High Density
3 = do not use
2 = do not use
1 = Frame GND 1
10 = RD (RS485)
9 = RD+ (RS485) A
TXD+ / RXD+

TXD / RXD
TXD+ / RXD+

TXD / RXD
B
Signal GND Signal GND
shield shield
* Termination resistors required at both ends of the
network receive data signals to match the impedance
C
of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms). Jumper pin
Typical RS-485 Multi-Drop Wring Diagram (contd) 13 to 9 on the C-more Touch Panel 15-pin connector
to place the 120q internal resistor into the network. If
the cable impedance is different, then use an external
resister matched to the cable impedance.
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 617

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Allen-Bradley:
EA-MLOGIX-CBL
1 Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1000/1100/1200/1500 To C-more Touch
RS-232C (p/n EA-MLOGIX-CBL) Panel PLC Port
To AB MicroLogix RS-232
2 communication channel

3 1 = do not use
Mini Din
8-pin Male Wiring Diagram 8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
2 = Sig GND 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
4 3 = do not use TXD 7 3 RXD 6 = do not use 15 13 = do not use
0.290
4 = RXD 6 7 8
5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use
3 4 5
RXD 4 2 TXD
5 = do not use 1 2 4 = do not use 11 = do not use
6 = do not use GND 2 5 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
0.35
5 7 = TXD
8 = do not use
DIA. Nonstandard
keying shield 1 2 = TXD (232C) 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = do not use

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

6
EA-SLC-232-CBL
7 To PLC
Allen-Bradley SLC 5-03/04/05, ControlLogix, CompactLogix, To C-more Touch
9-Pin Port FlexLogix, DF1, RS-232C (p/n EA-SLC-232-CBL) Panel PLC Port

8
9 9-pin
D-sub
(female) Wiring Diagram
15-pin
D-sub
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
7 = do not use 14 = do not use
1 = do not use 1
10 2 = RXD
3 = TXD
6 = do not use TXD
7 = do not use
8 = do not use RXD
3
2
3
2
RXD 6 = do not use
TXD
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
15 13 = do not use
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
4 = do not use 9 = do not use GND 5 5 3 = RXD (232C)
9
10 = do not use
5 = Signal GND
11 shield 1 2 = TXD (232C) 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = do not use

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

12
EA-PLC5-232-CBL
13 To PLC
25-Pin Port
Allen-Bradley PLC5 DF1 To C-more
PLC Port
RS-232C (p/n EA-PLC5-232-CBL)
14
A 25-pin
D-sub
13 = do not use (male) 25 = do not use TXD 2
Wiring Diagram

3 RXD 8 = do not use

15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
12 = do not use 25 24 = do not use 3 2 TXD 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
B 11 = do not use
10 = do not use
9 = do not use
23 = do not use RXD
22 = do not use GND 7
21 = do not use
5
1
6
5
=
=
do not
Logic
use
GND
4 = do not use
15 13 = do not use
12 = do not use
8 = do not use shield 11 = do not use
7 = Signal GND 20 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
C 6 = do not use
5 = do not use
4 = do not use
19 = do not use
18 = do not use
17 = do not use
2 = TXD (232C) 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = do not use

3 = RXD 16 = do not use

D 2 = TXD
1 = do not use
1 15 = do not use
14 = do not use
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

618 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Allen-Bradley (contd): EA-DH485-CBL

To AB SLC500
Allen-Bradley SLC500, 5/01, /02, /03 DH-485
Point-to-Point
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port 1
DH-485 Port
RS-485A (p/n EA-DH485-CBL)

Wiring Diagram
2
1 = TXD/RXD+
RJ45 8-pin
Phone Plug
(8P8C)
1
13
9
Term.
15-pin
D-sub
8 = do not use (male)
3
2 = TXD/RXD TXD/RXD+ RD+ 15 = do not use
7 = do not use 14 = do not use
3 = do not use
4 = Signal GND
5 = LE
TXD/RXD 2 10
11
RD
SD+
6 = LE
5 = Logic GND
15 13 = Termination
12 = SD (RS485)
4
6 = do not use 12 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS485)
SD 3 = do not use
7 = Signal GND
8 = do not use LE *
GND
5
4
6 LE * 2 = do not use 1
1 = Frame GND
10 = RD (RS485)
9 = RD+ (RS485) 5
7 5 * Note: The LE signal is wired in the cable
GND
shield 1
as shown, but not required for
point-to-point communications. 6
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.

Allen-Bradley SLC500, 5/01, /02, /03 DH-485/AIC to Multiple C-more Touch Panels
7
RS-485A (using C-more cable p/n EA-DH485-CBL)
8
Allen-Bradley DH-485 Link
SLC 500 Modular (See manufacturers litature for details.)
PLC Controller

DH-485 DH-485
9
10
Peripheral Peripheral
J2 J2

CPU CPU
J1 J1

Channel 1 must be Power Power

set to DH485.

AB 1747-AIC
DH485 Link Coupler
AB 1747-AIC
DH485 Link Coupler
11
AB 1747-C11 A
Cable
12
13
14
C-more
Touch Panel
C-more
Touch Panel
A
B
C-more
EA-DH485-CBL
C-more
EA-DH485-CBL
C
Cable Cable

Note: The above diagram shows connecting multiple C-more touch panels to an Allen-Bradley DH485/AIC network
using the AB DH485 Link Coupler, p/n 1747-AIC. Select the Allen-Bradly DH485/AIC SLC500 MircroLogix driver
in the C-more Programming Software when starting the project. Also, set the AB channel configuration for DH485.
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 619

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Allen-Bradley (contd):
1 Allen-Bradley SLC500 5/03 DH-485/AIC to Multiple C-more Touch Panels
(using C-more cables p/n EA-MLOGIX-CBL, EA-SLC-232-CBL)

2 Allen-Bradley DH-485 Link

SLC 5/03 Modular (See manufacturers litature for details.)

3 PLC Controller

4
Channel 0 must be
set to DH485.

5 AB 1761-NET-AIC
AIC + Advanced
AB 1761-NET-AIC
AIC + Advanced
Interface Converter Interface Converter

6 C-more
EA-MLOGIX-CBL
Cable

7 AB 1747-CP3
RS-232 Cable

8 To additional
C-more
Touch Panel

9 C-more C-more
Touch Panel Touch Panel

10
C-more
11 EA-MLOGIX-CBL
Cable
C-more
EA-SLC-232-CBL
Cable

12 Note: The above diagram shows connecting multiple C-more touch panels to an Allen-Bradley DH485/AIC network using the
AB AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter, p/n 1761-NET-AIC. Select the Allen-Bradly DH485/AIC SLC500 MircroLogix driver
in the C-more Programming Software when starting the project. Also, set the AB channel configuration for DH485.

13
14
A
B
C
D

620 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Allen-Bradley (contd):
Multiple Allen-Bradley PLCs connected to multiple C-more Touch Panels 1
(using AB Ethernet Network Interface p/n 761-NET-ENI with EtherNet/IP protocol)

Allen-Bradley Allen-Bradley
Allen-Bradley
MicroLogix 1500
2
SLC 5/03 Modular MicroLogix 1000 PLC Controller
PLC Controller PLC Controller
3
4
AB mini DIN to D-shell
cable p/n 1761-CBL-AP00
AB mini DIN to mini DIN
cable p/n 1761-CBL-AM00 5
6
ETHERNET
RS232
FAULT

TX/RX ETHERNET
RS232
FAULT

IP
TX/RX
PWR

ETHERNET

IP
FAULT
RS232

TX/RX
CABLE

EXTERNAL

Ethernet
Hub or Switch
10/100 Base-T
IP

CABLE

EXTERNAL
PWR

7
AB 1761-NET-ENI

8
PWR

AB 1761-NET-ENI
CABLE

EXTERNAL

Ethernet/IP
Network
AB 1761-NET-ENI
10/
T/ 0
AC 10
K

9
LN
10/
T/ 0
AC 10
K
10/ LN
T/ 0
AC 10
K
LN
10/
T/ 0
AC 10
K
LN
10/
T/ 0
AC 10
K
LN
10/
T/ 0
AC 10
K
LN
10/
T/ 0
AC 10

10
K
LN

C-more
Touch Panel

C-more
Touch Panel
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 621

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

GE Fanuc:
EA-90-30-CBL
1 To PLC
15-Pin Port
GE Fanuc 90/30 and 90/70 15-pin D-sub port,
RS-422A (p/n EA-90-30-CBL)
To C-more
PLC Port

2
Wiring Diagram
3 8 = CTS(B)
15-pin
D-sub
(male)
15 = CTS(A) SD(B) 13
13
9
Term.
RD+
8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
7 = Logic GND 14 = do not use 12 10
15 SD(A) RD 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
6 = do not use 13 = SD(B)
4 5 = +5V
4 = do not use
12 = SD(A)
11 = RD(B)
RD(B) 11
10
11
12
SD+ 6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
SD 4 = do not use
15
13 = Termination
12 = SD (RS422)
3 = do not use 10 = RD(A)
RD(A) 11 = SD+ (RS422)
7 5 3 = do not use 10 = RD (RS422)
5 2 = do not use
1 = do not use 1
9 = do not use GND
CTS(B) 8 2 = do not use
1 = Frame GND
1 9 = RD+ (RS422)

CTS(A) 15

6 +5V 5
shield 1

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

622 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Mitsubishi:
EA-MITSU-CBL 1
To PLC Mitsubishi FX Series 25-pin D-sub port,
25-Pin Port To C-more
RS-422A (p/n EA-MITSU-CBL) PLC Port

2
25-pin
D-sub
3
Wiring Diagram
13 Term.
9 RD+
15-pin
D-sub
3
13 = do not use (male) 25 = do not use SD+ (male)
12 = do not use 8 = do not use 15 = do not use
25 24 = do not use SD 16 10 RD 7 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
9 = do not use
23 = do not use
22 = do not use RD+ 2 11 SD+ 6 =
=
do not use
GND
15
14 = do not use
13 = Termination 4
21 = do not use RD 15 12
5 Logic 12 = SD (RS422)
8 = do not use SD 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422)
20 = do not use
7 = Signal GND
6 = do not use
5 = do not use
19 = do not use GND
18 = do not use GND 4
7 5 3 = do not use
2 = do not use 1
10 = RD (RS422)
9 = RD+ (RS422)
5
17 = do not use 1 = Frame GND
4 = Signal GND 1
shield
3 = SD+ (RS422)
2 = RD+ (RS422) 1
1 = do not use
16 = SD (RS422)
15 = RD (RS422)
14 = do not use
6
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
7
EA-MITSU-CBL-1
Mitsubishi FX Series 8-pin MINI-DIN,
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port
8
To PLC
8-Pin Port RS-422A (p/n EA-MITSU-CBL-1)
9
Mini Din Wiring Diagram 13 15-pin
1 = RD (RS-422)
2 = RD+ (RS-422)
8-pin Male
SD+ 7 9
Term.
RD+ 8 = do not use
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
10
SD 4 10 RD 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
3 = Sig GND 15
6 = do not use 13 = Termination
11
6 7 8
4 = SD (RS-422) 3 4 5 RD+ 2 11 SD+ 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD (RS422)
5 = do not use 1 2
1 12
RD SD 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422)
6 = do not use
3 5 3 = do not use 10 = RD (RS422)
7 = SD+ (RS-422) GND 2 = do not use 9 = RD+ (RS422)
8 = do not use
shield 1 1 = Frame GND
1
12
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.

13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 623

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Omron: EA-OMRON-CBL
1 To PLC
25-Pin Port
Omron Host Link (C200 Adapter, C500),
RS-232C (p/n EA-OMRON-CBL)
To C-more
PLC Port

2
Wiring Diagram
3 13 = do not use
25-pin
D-sub
(male) 25 = do not use TXD 2 3 RXD 8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
12 = do not use 25 24 = do not use 3 2 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
11 = do not use 23 = do not use RXD TXD
4 10 = do not use
9 = do not use
8 = do not use
22 = do not use GND 7
21 = do not use 4
5
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
15 13 = do not use
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
7 = Signal GND 20 = do not use RTS 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
19 = do not use CTS 5
5 6 = do not use
5 = CTS
4 = RTS
18 = do not use
17 = do not use shield 1
2 = TXD (232C) 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = do not use

3 = RXD 16 = do not use

6 2 = TXD
1 = do not use
1 15 = do not use
14 = do not use
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

7 User Constructed
8 To PLC
9-Pin Port
Omron FINS (CQM1, CPM1, CPM2, C200, CJ1 & CS1)
RS-232C
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port

9
9-pin 15-pin
D-sub D-sub
10 1 = do not use
(male)
9
Wiring Diagram 8 = do not use (male)
7 = do not use
6 = do not use
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
6 = do not use TXD 2 3 RXD 15 13 = do not use
2 = TXD 7 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use
11 3 = RXD
4 = RTS
5 = CTS 1
8 = do not use RXD
9 = Signal GND SG
3
9
2
5
TXD 4 = do not use
3 = RXD (232C)
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
4 2 = TXD (232C) 9 = do not use
RTS 1 = Frame GND 1
12 CTS 5
shield 1
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.
13
User Constructed
14 To Peripheral Omron Host Link CQM1 using CQM1-CIF02 Peripheral Port Connecting Cable To C-more Touch
Port Cable Panel PLC Port
RS-232C
A
B 9-pin
D-sub
(male) Wiring Diagram 8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
7 = do not use 14 = do not use
1 = do not use 9 3 3 6 = do not use 13 = do not use
C 2 = RXD
3 = TXD
6 = do not use TXD
7 = do not use
8 = do not use RXD
2 2
RXD
TXD
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
15
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
4 = do not use 9 = do not use GND 5 5 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
5 = Signal GND 1
D shield 1
2 = TXD (232C)
1 = Frame GND 1
9 = do not use

Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

624 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Modicon ModBus RS-232: User Constructed

To PLC
9-Pin Port
Modicon ModBus, 984 CPU, Quanum 113 CPU
RS-232C
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port
1
2
9-pin 15-pin
D-sub
(male) Wiring Diagram
D-sub
8 = do not use (male)
7 = do not use
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
3
1 = do not use 9 3 3
6 = DSR TXD RXD 6 = do not use 15 13 = do not use
2 = RXD
3 = TXD
4 = DTR
7 = RTS
8 = CTS RXD
9 = do not use GND
2
5
2
5
TXD
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
4
10 = do not use
5 = Signal GND 1 2 = TXD (232C) 1
4 9 = do not use
DTR
DSR 6
1 = Frame GND 5
RTS 7

CTS 8
shield 1
6
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

Modicon Micro Series:

7
User Constructed
To PLC
AEG Modicon Micro Series: To C-more Touch
8
9-Pin Port 110 CPU 311-xx, 110 CPU 411-xx, 110 CPU 512-xx, 110 CPU 612-xx Panel PLC Port
RS-232C
9
9-pin
D-sub
(female) Wiring Diagram
15-pin
D-sub
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
10
7 = do not use 14 = do not use
1 = do not use 1 6 = do not use
2 = TXD
3 = RXD
6 = do not use TXD
7 = do not use
8 = do not use RXD
2
3
3
2
RXD
5 = Logic GND
TXD 4 = do not use
15 13 = do not use
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
11
4 = do not use 9 = do not use GND 5 5 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
9
5 = Signal GND
shield 1
2 = TXD (232C)
1 = Frame GND 1
9 = do not use
12
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

Modicon ModBus with RJ45:

13
User Constructed
To PLC
Modicon ModBus with RJ45
RS-232C
To C-more
PLC Port
14
RJ45 Port

A
RJ45 8-pin Wiring Diagram 15-pin
Phone Plug
1 = do not use
2 = do not use
3 = TXD
(8P8C) TXD
RXD
3
4
3
2
RXD
8 = do not use
TXD 7 = do not use
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use B
15 14 = do not use
4 = RXD GND 5 5 6 = donot use 13 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
6 = RTS RTS 6
7
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
C
7 = CTS CTS 10 = do not use
8 = do not use 2 = TXD (232C) 1 9 = do not use
shield 1 1 = Frame GND
D
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 625

 CHAPTER
MAINTENANCE
7
In This Chapter...
Project Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Check Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Check Operating Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Check Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Check Physical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Run Tests under System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Check Memory Usage via System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Check/Adjust Display Brightness or Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Check Error Log via System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Adjust Touch Panel via System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Replace Battery Periodically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Cleaning the Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Check Project Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Checks from C-more Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Maintenance
1 Although the C-more touch panels require very little maintenance, setting up a routine
maintenance schedule will insure the longevity of the product in your application.
2 The following are some suggestions of items to include in a preventive maintenance list or
schedule. Most of these items should be scheduled quarterly or bi-annually.
3 Project Backup
During a routine preventive maintenance schedule is a good time to make sure that there is
4 an up-to-date backup of the application project. Although the C-more touch panel with its
programming software has the ability to upload the complete project from a panel through the
programming software, insurance is warranted just in case the worse case scenario happens and
5 the entire touch panel is destroyed.
Check Operating Environment
6 Make sure the touch panel is operating in the proper temperature range:
(0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F)).
7 Make sure the touch panel is operating within the specified humidity range:
(1085% RH, non-condensing).
8 Make sure the operating environment is free of corrosive gasses. CORROSIVE

Check Operating Voltage

9 Check the input voltage that is powering the touch panel to make sure it is within the
appropriate range.
10 DC: If the panel is being powered with a DC power source, then the acceptable range is
20.4 to 28.8 VDC. (24 VDC, -15%, +20%, minimum of 1.5 A)
11 AC: If the panel is being powered from an AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, then the
acceptable input voltage range to the adapter is 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz.
12 Check Status Indicators
During a routine maintenance check is a good time to take a quick look at the status indicators
13 on the rear of the touch panel. The Power LED (PWR) indicator should be on and there
should be activity on the TxD and RxD LED indicators when connected serially to a PLC or
control device. Check the status of the CPU LED and compare it to the chart shown in the
14 illustration below. Any indication of the CPU LED other than a solid green shows there is a
C-more
possible problem, and LED Status
the condition Indicators
needs to be corrected.
A Power LED (Green)
CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red) On Power On
B Off Power Off
PWR Off Power Off
Green Normal CPU Run State CPU

TxD

C Red
Blinking
Red
Memory Error
Operating System not found
BATT
RxD

Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)

Blinking
LCD Backlight Failure On Comm. is active
D Orange
Blinking
Green Power Loss Detection
IOlOlPLC

Off No communication
Rear View

72 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Check Physical Conditions

Make sure that harmful chemicals are not being used around the panel. Look for any
deterioration of the touch panels bezel and front display area. See Chapter 2: Specifications 1
for a chemical compatibility list.
Check the mounting gasket to make sure it is sealing properly and 2
has not deteriorated. Replace the mounting gasket if there are any
signs of deterioration, or if there is any evidence that
moisture/liquids have penetrated to the inside of the enclosure
3
where the panel is mounted. Information on a replacement
gaskets can be found in Chapter 9: Replacement Parts.
p/n EA-10-GSK 4
Check to make sure that none of the cooling vents around the inside section of the touch
panel are clogged with dust or debris. Also make sure that there is clearance around the touch 5
panel as shown in Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring.
Run Tests under System Setup Screens 6
Use the touch panels System Setup Screens to test the touch
screen, display, communication ports, beeper and audio output
Test Menu

Test Touch Panel Test Display

7
(only with external amplifier and speaker(s) connected). See
Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for additional details for the
Test Menu. Test Comm. Port Test Beep/Sound
8
Test Touch Panel - allows the user to check the analog touch
function of the screen by drawing free hand lines and shapes Main Menu
9
across the entire touch area. The display will retain the lines
where the screen has been touched until the Cancel button
is pressed.
10
Test Display - used to test the display and color rendition. A test pattern will first show
both the primary colors (if applicable) and a gray scale. If the touch screen is not pressed
11
within a few seconds, the display will go into alternating color sweeps across the screen
until the panel is pressed again. If the screen is pressed when the test pattern first appears, 12
it will stay in this mode until the Cancel button is pressed.
Test Comm. Port - used to test the functionality of both the 15-pin PLC 13
communication serial port and the Ethernet port (non -R models only). A loop-back
connector can be fabricated and used on the 15-pin serial port to test both the RS-232
and RS-422/485 communications for the TxD and RxD signals and also the RTS and
14
CTS signals if applicable. The Test Comm. Port setup screen and Chapter 5 show pin-
outs for the both the RS-232 and RS-422/485 loop-back connectors. The Ethernet A
connection can also be tested for communications if it is at least connected to an
Ethernet hub or switch. If the touch panel is connected to a PLC, then an inquiry test
can also be done to test the communications between the panel and the PLC. Press the
B
Cancel button when finished to return to the Test Menu screen.
Test Beeper/Sound - used to test the touch panels internal beeper and also test the audio
C
line output port with an external amplifier and speaker(s) connected. Testing the audio
output is done by playing an included internal WAV file. Press the Cancel button when D
finished to return to the Test Menu screen.

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 73

 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Check Memory Usage via System Setup Screens

A good time to check and record the touch panels memory
1 usage for future reference is during a routine maintenance
schedule. The various memory devices being used by the panel
2 are listed under the tab. This includes the SRAM, Built-in
Flash and any external memory device such as a USB pen drive
or CompactFlash memory. If no external memory device is
3 inserted, it will not show up on the list. The amount of total,
used and free memory is shown. The memory usage can be
4 viewed by use of the panels System Setup Screens Main
Menu, and then selecting the Information button. Look under
5 the Memory tab. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for
additional details on using the Memory tab.

6 Check/Adjust Display Brightness or Contrast

Is is good practice to occasionally check the display brightness
or contrast and adjust as required. This is done by using the
7 Setting Menu in the System Setup Screens. Keep in mind that
only the contrast can be adjusted on the STN type display
8 models, both color and grayscale, and only the brightness can
be adjusted on the TFT type display models. See Chapter 5:
System Setup Screens for additional details.
9 Check Error Log via System Setup Screens
10 Another good practice is to review the touch panels Error Log.
The log can be viewed by use of the panels System Setup
Screens Main Menu, and then selecting the Information
11 button. Look under the Error tab. See Chapter 5: System
Setup Screens for additional details on using the Error tab,
12 Appendix A: PLC Protocol Error Codes for a list of the error
codes as they relate to the specific PLC that is being used with
a description of the error, and Appendix B:Touch Panel
13 Runtime Errors for a list of errors that may occur when the
panel is in operation.
14 Adjust Touch Panel via System Setup Screens
It is recommended that a regularly scheduled maintenance
A program include adjusting the touch panel. The adjustment
can be looked at as calibrating the touch area of the panel.
B The procedure should also be done anytime that it seems the
touch area being pressed for an object is out of position by a
small amount. The procedure is done by using the Setting
C Menu in the System Setup Screens and then selecting the
Adjust Touch Panel button. See Chapter 5: System Setup
D Screens for additional details.

74 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Replace Battery Periodically

The lithium battery in the touch panel is used to maintain the system SRAM
retentive memory and the CPU date/time registers when the unit is without 1
external power. Before replacing the battery, back-up the data in your SRAM
retentive memory as a precaution. Input power needs to be maintained to
the panel during battery replacement or the SRAM retentive memory and
2
date/time registers will be cleared. Typical battery life is five years, which
includes panel runtime and normal shutdown periods. The batterys status 3
can be checked under the General tab of the Information screen of the D2-BAT-1
System Setup Screens, see Chapter 5. However, consider installing a fresh 4
battery if your battery has not been replaced recently and the unit will be
without power for a period of more than ten days. A replacement battery can
be purchased from AutomationDirect as part number D2-BAT-1
5
(#CR2354).
Cleaning the Display Screen
6
The display screen should be cleaned periodically by
wiping it with a lint free damp cloth using a mild soap 7
solution. Dry the surface when finished with a lint free
cloth. Do not clean with ammonia based products.
The ABS material the bezel is made from is reactive
8
with ammonia.
The longevity of the display can be increased by the EA-6-COV2
9
use of a non-glare screen protector, p/n EA-XX-
COV2, where XX = touch panel screen size, 6, 8, 10, 10
12, or 15. See Chapter 3: Accessories for additional
information on the screen protectors. 11
To prevent damage to the display screen, avoid touching the screen with sharp objects,
striking the screen with a hard object, the use of abrasives near the screen, or using excessive
force when pressing the touch screen. In the event that the touch screen membrane becomes
12
damaged or scratched, the bezel, which includes the clear membrane window, can be replaced
on the 8, 10, 12 and 15 touch panels. See Chapter 9: Replacement Parts for additional 13
information on the replacement bezels. The bezel with clear membrane window can be
replaced on the 6 touch panels by calling our technical support department at 770-844-4200
to make arrangements for returning the unit for repair.
14
Check Project Functionality A
During a routine maintenance schedule is a good time to check the functionality of your
application, making sure that various areas on different screens do what they were designed to
do. An outline or specification for the application is a useful tool for testing the various aspects
B
of your application. As a starting point, you may want to run through all the screens to make
sure they are accessible. C
If there are any trouble-shooting procedures built into the touch panel application, now is a
good time to also check these aids. D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 75

 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Checks from C-more Programming Software

If you have a PC available with the C-more programming software, EA-PGMSW, installed,
1 and the PC is connected to the touch panel, there are checks you can make to the status of the
touch panel by using the Panel Information... feature located under the Main Menu heading
2 Panel. This includes the following:
Connect Panel Information
3 Memory availability and usage
Power Voltage
Battery Voltage:
4 Revisions

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 Other functions that can be accessed from the programming software directly to the touch
panel include: Display Screen, Reboot, Adjust Clock, Memory Clear, and Update Firmware.
Additional information for these functions can be found in the C-more programming software
A on-line help.

B
C
D

76 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Notes:
_____________________________________________________________ 1
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
2
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
3
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
4
_____________________________________________________________ 5
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 6
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 7
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 8
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 9
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
10
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
11
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
12
_____________________________________________________________ 13
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 14
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ A
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ B
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ C
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 77

 CHAPTER
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
In This Chapter...
Touch Panel does not Power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Display is Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Display is Dim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
No User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
No Communications between Panel and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
No Communications between Panel and PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .810
IP Address in System Setup Screens displays 0.0.0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .813
PLC Protocol Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814
Touch Panel Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .815
Panel Constantly Displays Initializing when Powering up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
Data not Logging Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
Loss of Date/Time or Retentive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
Electrical Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
1 The following are some common problems that may be encountered during the installation
and operation of your C-more touch panel. We have made some suggestions on what to
2 check in order to correct the problem.

3 Touch Panel does not Power up

1.) Check the status indicators on the rear of the panel to see if the Power LED (Green)
4 indicator is on. Reference the diagram shown below. If the Power LED (Green) indicator is
on and the panel was observed showing Initializing... during power up, but the display is
now blank, go to the next troubleshooting tip, Display is Blank.
5 2.) If the Power LED (Green) indicator is off and the panel is being powered with a 24 VDC
power source, use a voltmeter to check the incoming DC voltage level. The DC voltage level
6 should be in the range of 20.4 to 28.8 VDC. If the incoming DC voltage is zero, check any
fusing that may be in the circuit. If the fuse is open, determine cause and replace. If the DC
7 voltage level is out of range, the DC power source needs to be corrected or replaced.
3.) If the Power LED (Green) indicator is off and the panel is being powered with an AC/DC
Power Adapter, EA-AC, use a voltmeter to check the incoming AC power. The AC voltage
8 to the AC/DC Power Adapter should be in the range of 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz. If
the incoming AC voltage is zero, check any fusing that may be in the circuit. If the fuse is
9 open, determine cause and replace. If proper AC voltage is present on the AC/DC Power
Adapter, but the Power LED (Green) indicator is off, replace the AC/DC Power Adapter.
10
C-more LED Status Indicators
11 Power LED (Green)
CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red) On Power On
12 Off Power Off
PWR Off Power Off
Green Normal CPU Run State CPU

13 Red Memory Error

BATT
TxD

RxD

Blinking Operating System not found Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)

14 Red
Blinking
Orange LCD Backlight Failure
IOlOlPLC
On Comm. is active
Blinking
Green Power Loss Detection Off No communication
A Rear View

B
C
D

82 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Display is Blank
1.) Touch the screen to make sure the panel is not in the Screen Saver mode.
2.) If the panel is not in Screen Saver mode, check the status indicators on the rear of the panel.
1
(See the previous page for reference to the status indicator diagram.)
The Power LED (Green) should be on. If not, check the incoming power as explained on the previous
2
page.
Make sure the CPU status LED (Green, Orange, Red) is a steady Green. A Blinking Orange colored 3
CPU Status LED indicates a failed LCD display backlight. The backlights are user replaceable on the
8, 10, 12 and 15 C-more touch panels. See Chapter 9: Replacement Parts for additional
information on the replacement backlights. The backlight can be replaced on the 6 touch 4
panels by calling the AutomationDirect returns department @ 1-800-633-0405 to make
arrangements for returning the unit for repair. 5
3.) There is always the remote possibility that a project has been transferred to the touch panel
that includes a screen that uses a black background and has no objects placed on the screen.
To check for this possibility, access the Main Menu of the touch panel System Setup Screens
6
by pressing the extreme upper left corner of the panel display area for three (3) seconds as
shown below. If the System Setup Screens Main Menu is displayed, then most likely an 7
empty black background screen is being displayed.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Information
MAIN MENU

Setting
A
B
Test Menu Memory

C
Exit

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 83

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Display is Dim
1.) Check either the contrast or brightness setting found under the System Setup Screens. Keep
1 in mind that the STN type display models, both color and grayscale, can have the contrast
adjusted. The TFT type display models can have the brightness adjusted. See Chapter 5:
2 System Setup Screens for additional information.

3
4
5
6
7
8 2.) As the backlight is used in service, it will have a tendency to slowly lose some luminance
causing the display to slightly dim. The backlight average lifetime is rated at 50,000 hours
9 and is defined as the average usage time it takes before the brightness becomes 50% of the
initial brightness. The lifetime of the backlight depends on the ambient temperature. The
10 lifetime will decrease under low or high temperature usage. To improve the backlight life, use
the Start Screen Saver function that is available in the C-more Programming Software in the
Panel Manager dialog box. As noted earlier, the backlights are user replaceable on the 8,
11 10, 12 and 15 C-more touch panels. See Chapter 9: Replacement Parts for additional
information on the replacement backlights. The backlight can be replaced on the 6 touch
12 panels by calling the AutomationDirect returns department @ 1-800-633-0405 to make
arrangements for returning the unit for repair.
13 3.) Another condition that may make the display appear dim is to view the touch panel in direct
sunlight or in a location where direct light is reflected onto the display. The C-more touch
panel displays have Display Brightness ratings of 150 to 300 cd/m2 (NITS), depending on
14 the particular model. The higher the cd/m2 (NITS) rating, the more visible the display will
be under bright lighting conditions.
A 4.) If the incoming DC voltage level drops below 19.2 VDC, the backlight will turn off
immediately to allow extending the power retention period. The panel will continue to run
B and the LCD display will be slightly visible. This may be seen as the display being dim, so
it is also advisable to check the incoming voltage. The panel does not turn off until the DC
voltage drops to below 5 VDC.
C
D

84 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No User Program
1.) If the touch screen is displaying the message No User Program after it has powered up,
then either the built-in Flash memory does not contain a recognized project or a 1
CompactFlash memory card is plugged into the CF1 built-in CompactFlash slot and there
is no project on the CompactFlash memory card. Keep in mind that on power up, the touch
panel will either copy the project from its internal Flash memory to its internal SDRAM
2
memory and run the project, or if a CompactFlash memory card is plugged into the CF1
slot, then any project contained on the CF memory card will be copied to the panels 3
internal SDRAM memory and be run. In other words, a project contained on CF1 will
override a project contained in the panels internal Flash memory upon power up or reboot. 4
5
6
7
NO USER PROGRAM 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 85

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer)

The C-more touch panel is programmed using the C-more Programming Software,
1 EA-PGMSW. The developed project is transferred from the PC to the touch panel by either a
USB or an Ethernet connection between the two. (Ethernet available on full feature units only.)
2 1.) If using USB, then a USB type AB programming cable, such as p/n USB-CBL-AB15,
should be used to make a connection between the panels USB Port, Type B and a USB port
3 on the PC. The C-more Programming Software will install a USB driver on the PC during
C-more
PC USB Port Type B
Programming/Download

4 Touch Panel

USB Port

5 Type A

USB-CBL-AB15

6
the software installation. Use the programming software to check the status of the USB
7 communications. From the Navigation window, select the Panel tab. At the bottom of the
Panel tab is the Communication Config dialog box. If the USB communications to the
8 panel is working, then the USB radio button should be checked and there should be a
green indicator next to the USB selection. For reference, if the USB driver is working and
you open the Device Manager in Windows, you should see a C-more HMI USB
9 connection under Universal Serial Bus controllers selection. You can also make sure the
C-more USB driver has been installed by looking for the following file:
10 C:\WINDOWS\System32\Drivers\kyceusb.sys If the indicator is red, then try using a
different cable. If replacing the cable does not fix the communications, you may need to try
a different USB port on the PC. If there are any USB hubs or other USB devices being used,
11 you may need to temporarily eliminate them to see if this solves the problem.
Note: When transferring a project to the panel using the Send Project to Panel function, there is a possibility
12 even with a USB programming cable properly connected between the touch panel and PC, and having a green
indicator displayed next to the USB radio button in the Step 3 - Project Transfer dialog box, that the Transfer
13 button in the dialog box will still be dim. The green indicator means that the very lowest level of USB
communications is connected, but it does not necessarily mean the panel and PC are communicating. If the
Transfer button is dim, then the panel and PC are not communicating. If a PLC is connected to the serial port
14 of the panel, try disconnecting it. If this corrects the problem, then check your grounding for the PLC and the
panel. If this does not correct the problem, see the C-more Programming Software Installation Guide for

A reinstalling the USB driver.

2.) When using an Ethernet connection to communicate between the touch panel and the PC
B and the communications does not seem to be working, the first area to check is the Ethernet
status indicators located next to the 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Port on the rear of the panel.
C Link Status LED (Green)
1 8
Network Activity LED (Orange)
On Ethernet Linked On Active Network Data

D Off No Ethernet Comm. Off Network Idle

(Ethernet connections between the touch panel and PC continued on next page.)

86 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) (contd)

If using an Ethernet connection to program the touch panel, there are two basic ways to make
the connection. You can use a crossover Ethernet cable to make a direct connection between the 1
H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100 C-more
Ethernet Module
Touch Panel Ethernet
Port 2
3
(Bottom View)

DL06 PLC
Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Crossover 4
touch panel and the PC or a regular Ethernet cable from the touch panel to a hub, switch, etc.
5
that is also connected to the PC. Use the C-more programming software to check the status of
the Ethernet communications. From the Navigation window, select the Panel tab. At the 6
Ethernet
Hub or Switch
10/100 Base-T
10/
0
T/
AC 10
K
LN Port
link
10/
0
PW
R
7
T/ Up
AC 10
K
LN
10/
T/ 0
AC 10

8
K

05
T/
AC 10
10/
0
LN
U
SW
K
LN
10/

E
T/ 0
AC 10
K

H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100 C-more
LN

3
2

Ethernet Module Ethernet

R
1

PW
R
PW
+

Touch Panel Port

9
(Bottom View)
10
DL06 PLC

Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru
11
bottom of the Panel tab is the Communication Config dialog box. If the Ethernet 12
communications to the panel is working, then the Ethernet radio button should be checked and
there should be a green indicator next to the Ethernet selection. There should also be an IP
Address shown in the browse box below the Ethernet selection. If the Ethernet radio button is
13
red, then you will need to check your Ethernet cables and connections. There can also be a
conflict with another Ethernet connection that may be using the same IP Address. You may 14
want to check the setup both in the touch panel and also in your PC. As a starting point, it is
best to start with an assigned IP Address and Subnet mask, mainly to eliminate IP addressing A
conflicts. Use the C-more programming software and open the Touch Panel Network dialog
box under the Main Menus Setup drop down menu. Click on the Ethernet Port tab to display
the dialog box used to set up the touch panels Ethernet port.
B
Another cause of an Ethernet communications problem that may be encountered, is the touch
panel doesnt show up in the node list, which can be caused by the PC having a firewall. C
(Ethernet connections between the touch panel and PC continued next page.)
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 87

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) (contd)

Below shows the Touch Panel Network dialog box with the Ethernet port tab opened. The Save
1 settings to Project check box is checked and we are using the Use the following IP Address
selection by checking its radio button. It is necessary that the subnet be the same for both the
2 panel and the PC. See the C-more programming software on-line help for additional details in
regards to the Touch Panel Network.
3
4
5
6
7 In the example shown here,
the subnet is 192.168.0.0
8 and needs to be the same
for all the Ethernet devices

9 connected together.

10
11
12 The IP Address assigned to the touch panel can also be checked or edited by using the system
setup screens built into the touch panel. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for additional
information.
13 Example of the panels System Setup Screens Ethernet Port dialog box for configuring the
Ethernet port. Again, make sure the subnet mask is the same for both the panel and the PC.
14
A
B
C
D

88 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) (contd)

Check the IP Address setting of the PC by opening the Windows operating systems Control
Panel and then selecting the Network Connections utility. Click on Properties, scroll down to 1
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
dialog box will open. Again, make sure the Subnet Mask is set the same for both the panel and
the PC and also make sure that the IP Addresses do not conflict.
2
Note: If a DHCP Server is being used to obtain the 3
IP Address for the PC, there are ways to identify the
IP Address. For example, if using Windows XP,
open a Command Prompt and type IPCONFIG
4
/ALL. A list of all Ethernet assignments for the PC
will be shown. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 89

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PLC

The communications between the C-more touch panel and designated PLC or controlling
1 device can be accomplished by either a serial connection to the panels 15-pin PLC
Communications Port or by using an Ethernet connection to the panels 10/100 Base-T
2 Ethernet Port. (Ethernet available on full feature units only.)
1.) If the touch panel and PLC are connected serially and the communications have seemed to
3 stop working, then first check the TxD and RxD status indicators on the rear of the panel
for activity.
4 C-more
Touch Panel

5 DL-06 PLC

6 C-more to
Direct LOGIC

7 Port 2
VGA 15-pin port
serial cable
p/n EA-2CBL-1

8
9 If there is no activity on one or both the TxD and RxD status indicators, then it should be
suspected that either:
10 the cable is bad and needs replaced
or the serial port on the panel is defective
11 C-more LED Status Indicators
or the PLC is bad
Power LED (Green)
12 CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red) On Power On
Off Power Off Off Power Off
PWR

13 Green
Red
Normal CPU Run State
Memory Error
BATT
CPU

TxD

RxD

Blinking Operating System not found

Red Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)
14 Blinking
Orange
Blinking
LCD Backlight Failure
IOlOlPLC
On Comm. is active
Green Power Loss Detection Off No communication
Rear View
A The status indicators will show activity whether the serial communications is wired for RS-232
or RS-422/485.
B Electrical noise, pulse generating wiring and/or improper grounding can also cause problems
with communications. Refer to the Electrical Noise Problems section on page 8-17 for
C additional help.
(Serial connections between the touch panel and PLC continued on next page.)
D

810 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PLC (contd)

The serial port on the C-more touch panel can be tested by using the panels system setup
screens. Access the Main Menu of the panels system setup screens, press the Test Menu button 1
and then press the Test Comm. Port button. You will need to fabricate a Loop Back Connector
for the type of serial connection that is being used in your application, either RS-232 or RS-
422/485, per the wiring diagrams shown below. Plug the loop back connector into the panels
2
15-pin PLC serial communications port and then press the Loop Back Test button to run the
test. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for additional information. 3
Loop back connector wiring diagrams: 4
RS-422/485 Loop-back Connector
RS-232 Loop-back Connector
15-pin D-sub
7 CTS 15-pin D-sub
8 (male)
5
(male) RTS
2 15
TXD 9
3 RXD
15
11
RXD+
TXD+
6
7 CTS 10 RXD
8 RTS 1
Wiring Diagram
12 TXD 1 7
Wiring Diagram

System setup screens Test Comm. Port dialog boxes: 8

9
10
11
12
The PLC Enquiry Test can also be performed to determine if the Ethernet communications is 13
working correctly between the panel and designated PLC .
14
A
B
C
D
(Ethernet connections between the touch panel and PLC continued on next page.)

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 811

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PLC (contd)

2.) If using an Ethernet connection between the touch panel and the PLC, and there is a
1 problem with the communications, the first area to check is the Ethernet status indicators
located next to the 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Port (shown below) on the rear of the panel.
2 Link Status LED (Green)
1 8
Network Activity LED (Orange)
On Ethernet Linked On Active Network Data

3 Off No Ethernet Comm. Off Network Idle

There are two basic ways to make the connection. You can use a crossover Ethernet cable
4 (shown below) to make a direct connection between the touch panel and the PLC or a
H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100
Ethernet Module
C-more
Ethernet
Touch Panel
5 Port

6
(Bottom View)

7 DL06 PLC
Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Crossover

8
regular Ethernet cable (shown below) from the touch panel to a hub, switch, etc. that is also
9 connected to the PLC.
Ethernet
Hub or Switch

10 10/100 Base-T
T/
AC 10
K
10/
0
LN
T/
AC 10
K
10/
0 Up
T/
AC 10
K
LN Port
link
10/
0
PW
R

05
T/
AC 10
10/
0
LN
U
SW
K
LN
10/

E
T/ 0
AC 10
K

11 H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100 C-more
LN

3
2

Ethernet Module Ethernet

R
1

PW
R
PW
+

Touch Panel Port

12 (Bottom View)

13 DL06 PLC

Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru

14 Check the status indicators that may be included with the Ethernet communications module
or device that is part of the PLC. Refer to the PLCs Ethernet user manual for further
A troubleshooting information.

B (Ethernet connections between the touch panel and PLC continued next page.)

C
D

812 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PLC (contd)

The Ethernet port on the C-more touch panel can be tested by using the panels system setup
screens. Access the Main Menu of the panels system setup screens, press the Test Menu button 1
and then press the Test Comm. Port button. Select the Ethernet tab in the Test Comm. Port
dialog box, make sure the Ethernet port is connected to an Ethernet hub or other Ethernet
communications device, and then press the Loop Back Test button to run the test. See Chapter
2
5: System Setup Screens for additional information.
3
4
5
6
7
If a PC running the C-more programming software is connected to the Ethernet network that
8
is also connected to both the touch panel and PLC, then certain functions in the software, such
as the Main Menus Setup drop down selection for Panel Manager or Touch Panel Network 9
and the Main Menus Panel drop down selection for Panel Information, can be used to help
troubleshoot problems with the touch panels communications and operation. See the C-more
programming softwares on-line help for additional information.
10
11
IP Address in System Setup Screens displays 0.0.0.0 12
Note: If entering an IP Address for the C-more touch panel using the System Setup Screens, and the IP
Address keeps displaying 0.0.0.0, even after entering an IP address, it is an indication that either the panel is
13
not connected to an Ethernet hub, the hub is bad, or the Ethernet cable is bad. The entered IP Address is
stored in the panels memory, but wont show up until a good connection is established. Keep in mind that if
in the C-more programming softwares Touch Panel Network dialog box, under the Ethernet Port tab, you
14
have checked the Save settings to Project check box and have entered an IP Address of 0.0.0.0, then anytime
the project is transferred to the panel, the panels IP Address will be overwritten with the entered address. A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 813

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

PLC Protocol Error Codes

The C-more touch panel includes built-in PLC communication protocol diagnostics that
1 monitors the exchange of data between the panel and the PLC. The diagnostics look for the
proper exchange of data, correct handshaking signals, addressing errors, incorrect data bytes,
2 wrong packet format, etc. The diagnostics also monitors and reports any of the errors that the
designated PLC would normally generate if there is a problem with the PLCs communications.
Each brand of PLC has its own unique set of diagnostic errors that are typically communicated
3 over the PLCs communications port. The PLC generated errors are interpreted by the C-more
software. See the PLC manufacturers user manuals for additional details on the designated
4 PLCs errors.
If a C-more communications error does occur, the error message will be displayed in the upper
5 left of the C-more screen and the Error Code is recorded in the panels error log. If a PLC error
occurs, the PLC error code number will appear across the top of the screen, the PLC error
message may not be included in some cases. The error log can be viewed by using the system
6 setup screens. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens under the Information window to bring
up the Error tab which includes a description of the logged data. A detailed list and description
7 of the various PLC protocol errors can be found in Appendix A: PLC Protocol Error Codes.

8 PLC Protocol Error Codes example:

Error Codes for DirectLOGIC K-Sequence
9 Error Code Error Message Description
PLC Communication Timeout (for single A timeout occurred after sending a request to the PLC
10 PLC-001 PLC)
%Device% PLC Communication Timeout
%Device%.
%Device% indicates the device name, such as DEV001.
(for multiple PLCs, such as RS-422/485) Example error message for multiple PLCs: DEV001 PLC
Communication Timeout
11 PLC-002 NAK received from PLC A negative acknowledgement (NAK) control code has been
generated during a read/write request.
12 PLC-004 STX is not found A Start of Text (STX) control code was not found in the data
packet received from the PLC.

13
14
A
B
C
D

814 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Touch Panel Runtime Errors

The C-more touch panel includes built-in diagnostics that check for proper operation of the
panel when it is running a project that has been transferred to its memory. Faults detected while 1
the panel is running will produce a Runtime error. These errors are displayed in the upper left
of the panels display and are also recorded in the panels error log. The error log can be viewed
by using the system setup screens. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens under the Information
2
window to bring up the Error tab which includes a description of the logged data. A detailed
list and description of the various touch panel runtime errors can be found in Appendix B: 3
Touch Panel Runtime Errors.
4
Touch Panel Runtime Errors example:
5
Tag System
Error Error
Error Message Error Screen
No. Log
Code Located at upper left of screen Message
Tag Code Info > Cause 6
Value Error
Log Error 7
MM/DD/YY The size of the destination
1 RTE-001 Log Failed. SYS ERR
Not enough Memory Space in %Device% ERRORCODE 2001 HH/MM/SS
Error Code memory is not large
enough to store the data.
8
RTE-001

2 RTE-002 Log Failed. SYS ERR 2002

MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS No device available or
9
%Device% cannot be found ERRORCODE Error Code the device is defective.

Battery
RTE-002
10
1 RTE-031 Low Battery SYS ERR 2031
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
The panels backup battery
voltage level has fallen 11
ERRORCODE Error Code below 1.8 VDC and should
RTE-031 be replaced.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 815

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Panel Constantly Displays Initializing when Powering up

If the touch panel constantly displays a message reading Initializing while powering up, then
1 check the following possible causes.
1.) The project that is loaded into the panels internal SDRAM memory is corrupted. Use the
2 C-more programming software to clear the panels memory and re-transfer the project to the
touch panel.
3 2.) A CompactFlash memory card has been plugged into the CF1 slot and the CompactFlash
either has no project stored on it or the project is corrupted. Remove the CompactFlash
4 memory card form the CF1 slot and either load the project to the panels internal Flash
memory, or use a CF card reader connected to a PC to clear and re-format the
CompactFlash card, or try a different CompactFlash memory card.
5 Note: In the Error Log you may find the error RTE-500 - Check Sum Error, which is defined as Memory in
the panel has been corrupted by power loss, etc. If this is the case, try cycling power to the panel, re-
6 transfer the project to the panel, and re-transfer the firmware, etc. in sequential steps to try to correct the
problem.
7
8 Data not Logging Problems
If the data log is found to have missing entries, or a Runtime Error for the Log Errors as shown
in Chapter B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors is seen, then check the following possible causes.
9 1.) Check that the memory devices, that were selected for Data Storage under the C-more
programming softwares Main Menu - Setup drop down - Panel Manager dialog box, are
10 plugged into their proper location. Alarms, messages and screen captures can be
independently selected to be saved to either a USB pen drive plugged into the USB Port -
11 Type A, or a CompactFlash memory card plugged into CF1 or CF2. (Full feature units
only.)
12 2.) The memory device could be bad. If possible, check it by plugging it into a PC that has the
ability to access the memory device.

13
Loss of Date/Time and Retentive Data
14 If power is cycled to the C-more touch panel and it is then noticed that either the Date/Time
of the panel is no longer correct, or any data that has been setup to be retentive is inaccurate,
most likely the backup battery is exhausted and needs to be replaced. See Chapter 9:
A Replacement Parts for additional information on replacing the panels battery.

B
C
D D2-BAT-1

816 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Electrical Noise Problems

Noise is one of the most difficult problems to diagnose. Electrical noise can enter a system in
many different ways and they fall into one of two categories, conducted or radiated. It may be 1
difficult to determine how the noise is entering the system but the corrective actions for either
of the types of noise problems are similar. 2
Conducted noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into the system by way of an
attached wire, panel connection, etc. It may enter through a power supply connection, the
communication ground connection, or the chassis ground connection.
3
Radiated noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into the system without a direct
electrical connection, much in the same manner as radio waves. 4
While electrical noise cannot be eliminated, it can be reduced to a level that will not affect the
system. 5
Most noise problems result from improper grounding of the system. A good earth ground can be the
single most effective way to correct noise problems. If a ground is not available, install a ground rod
as close to the system as possible. Ensure all ground wires are single point grounds and are not daisy
6
chained from one device to another. Ground metal enclosures around the system. A loose wire can act
as a large antenna, introducing noise into the system. Therefore, tighten all connections in your 7
system. Loose ground wires are more susceptible to noise than the other wires in your system. Review
Chapter 4: Installation & Wiring if you have questions regarding how to ground the touch panel.
Electrical noise can enter the system through the power source for the touch panel. Installing a
8
properly wired isolation transformer (neutral grounded) for all AC sources can help the problem, but
only if wired correctly. DC sources should be well-grounded good quality supplies. 9
Never run communication cables or low-voltage power wiring close to high voltage wiring or pulse
generating wiring that controls such devices as solenoids, servos, VFOs, etc.. 10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 817

 CHAPTER
REPLACEMENT PARTS
9
In This Chapter...
Replacement Parts Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Replacement Parts at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Battery Replacement & Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
6 Panel Mounting Clip Replacements & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
8-15 Panel Mounting Clip Replacements & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
DC Panel Power Connector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
AC Power Adapter Connector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
8-15 Panel Backlight Bulb Replacements & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
6-15 Panel Gasket Replacement & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .911
8-15 Panel Bezel Replacement & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .912
6 Adapter Plate Gasket Replacement & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .914
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Replacement Parts Overview

1 Part Number Description Part Number Description
D2-BAT-1 EA-12-GSK
Battery Replacement 12" Panel Gasket Replacement
2 EA-BRK-1 6 Panel Mounting Clip
EA-10-GSK
Replacements (2 per pk.) 10" Panel Gasket Replacement
8-15 Panel Mounting Clip
3 EA-BRK-2 EA-8-GSK
Replacements (8 per pk.)
DC Panel Power Connector
8" Panel Gasket Replacement

EA-DC-CON EA-6-GSK
Replacement 6" Panel Gasket Replacement
4 EA-AC-CON AC Power Adapter Connector
EA-15-BEZEL
Replacement 15" Panel Bezel Replacement
15" Panel Backlight Bulb
5 EA-15-BULB
EA-12-BULB
EA-12-BEZEL
Replacement
12" Panel Backlight Bulb
EA-10-BEZEL
12" Panel Bezel Replacement

10" Panel Bezel Replacement

Replacement
6 EA-10-BULB 10" Panel Backlight Bulb
EA-8-BEZEL
Replacement 8" Panel Bezel Replacement
8" Panel Backlight Bulb 6 Adapter Plate Gasket
7 EA-8-BULB
EA-15-GSK
EA-6-ADPTR-GSK
Replacement
15" Panel Gasket Replacement
Replacement

8
9 Replacement Parts at a Glance:
Battery:
D2-BAT-1
10 6 inch mounting clips:
15 inch gasket:
EA-15-GSK
15 inch Bezel:
EA-15-BEZEL
(gasket not included)
EA-BRK-1
11 (pk of 2)

8 - 15 inch mounting clips:

12 EA-BRK-2
(pk of 8)
12 inch gasket:
12 inch Bezel:
EA-12-BEZEL
DC power connector: EA-12-GSK (gasket not included)

13 EA-DC-CON

AC power connector:

14 EA-AC-CON

10 inch gasket:
10 inch Bezel:
EA-10-BEZEL
(gasket not included)
EA-10-GSK

A 15 inch backlight:
EA-15-BULB

8 inch Bezel:
EA-8-BEZEL
B 12 inch backlight:
EA-12-BULB 8 inch gasket:
(gasket not included)

EA-8-GSK

C 10 inch backlight:
Note: 6 inch bezel is
not user replaceable.

EA-10-BULB

D 8 inch backlight:
6 inch gasket:
EA-6-GSK
6 inch Adapter Plate
replacement gasket
EA-6-ADPTR-GSK
EA-8-BULB

92 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Battery Replacement D2-BAT-1

The C-more touch panels are supplied with a SRAM retentive memory backup battery that also 1
is used to backup the internal CPU date/time registers. The battery should be replaced every 5
years or during any routine maintenance to the touch panel. As a note, the battery used in the
C-more touch panels is the same battery that is used for backup in AutomationDirects DL06,
2
D2-250(-1), D2-260 and D3-350 PLCs.
3
4
Battery Replacement Instructions:
5
NOTE: The lithium battery in your panel is used to maintain the system SRAM retentive memory and the CPU
date/time registers when the unit is without external power. Before replacing the battery, back-up the data in
your SRAM retentive memory as a precaution. Input power needs to be maintained to the panel during battery
6
replacement. Typical battery life is five years, which includes panel runtime and normal shutdown periods.
However, consider installing a fresh battery if your battery has not been replaced recently and the unit will be
without power for a period of more than ten days.
7
8
Preparation: If the touch panel is not mounted in or has been removed from a control cabinet, then it is recommended the panel be
placed face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of the panel. The battery door is located on the rear just below
and to the left of the DC Power Connector. 9
10
DC Power
1 Connector 2 11
12
13
Battery door
latch tab 14
Open the battery holder door by pressing down on the upper The coin cell style battery is located in the battery holder. To
latch tab while lifting upward and rotating the door in a
downward motion. The battery door will pivot toward its
remove the battery, use the slot in the top of the holder to
pry the battery away from the holder and while grasping the
A
bottom hinge point. battery, lift it upward.
B
Continued on next page. C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 93

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Battery Replacement Instructions (contd):

1
2 3 4
3
4
Battery
5 retaining tab

6 Above shows the empty battery holder and also points out
the location of the battery retaining tab for reference in the
To install the battery, hold the battery so that the larger
diameter (+ symbol) is outward. Set the battery to the inside
next step. of the retaining tab and then press the upper top of the
7 battery into the holder.

8
9 5
10
11
12
Press the battery holder door downward until the upper
13 latch tab locks into place. Make a note of the date the battery
was installed.

14
WARNING: DO NOT attempt to recharge the battery or dispose of an old battery by fire. The battery may
A explode or release hazardous materials. CR lithium batteries are safe for disposal in the municipal
waste stream, but it is suggested that where possible, the battery be fully discharged prior to disposal.
B Additional precautions:
Do not short circuit the battery and be sure to make the correct polarity connections.
Avoid extremely high or low temperatures and high humidity when storing.
C Do not dismantle the battery.

94 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

6 Panel Mounting Clip Replacements EA-BRK-1

Spare panel mounting clips for 6 inch C-more touch panels. 1
Package of 2 clips with 4 screws.
2
3 3
4
Installation Instructions
5
1 6
Tighten the mounting screws in an alternating fashion while
observing the front of the touch panel. The goal is to make
sure the front bezel is pulled up against the enclosure sheet
7
metal uniformly, and the touch panel gasket is fully
compressed all the way around its perimeter. Tighten the
screws to a torque rating shown in the table below. Avoid
over-tightening the screws to the point that they start to
8
deform or bend the mounting clip.
9
Position the touch panel through the cutout in the control
cabinet door and hold in place. The mounting clips can be
positioned into one of two different set of slots for different
4 10
cabinet thicknesses. See table below.
11
2 12
13
The above photo shows both mounting clips in place and the
touch panel secured. 14
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
A
Thickness
Panel Size Screw Torque
Range
The above photo shows one mounting clip in place. The
example is using the lower mounting clip slots that
B
accommodates an enclosure thickness of 0.039 0.24 6
0.039 - 0.24 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
lower mounting
inches [1 6 mm]. The upper slots can be used for an
enclosure thickness of 0.20 0.63 inches [5 16 mm]. clip position
[1 6 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm] C
6
upper mounting 0.20 - 0.63 inch
[5 16 mm]
35 ~ 50 oz-in
[0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]
D
clip position

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 95

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

815 Panel Mounting Clip Replacements EA-BRK-2

1 Spare panel mounting clips for the 8 inch through 15 inch
C-more touch panels. Package of 8 clips with 8 screws.
2
3 3
4
Installation Instructions
5
6 1
Tighten the mounting screw for each mounting clip in an
7 alternating fashion at all clips while observing the front of the
touch panel. The goal is to make sure the front bezel is
pulled up against the enclosure sheet metal uniformly, and
the touch panel gasket is fully compressed all the way
8 around its perimeter. Tighten the screws to a torque rating
shown in the table below. Avoid over-tightening the screws
to the point that they start to deform or bend the mounting
9 clip.

Position the touch panel through the cutout in the control

10 cabinet door and hold in place. The mounting clips are
positioned into the slots around the outside edge of the 4
touch panel rear.
11
12 2
13
14 The above photo shows all mounting clips in place and the
touch panel secured. The 8, 10 and 12 touch panels
require 6 mounting clips and the 15 touch panel requires 8
A mounting clips.

B The mounting clips are positioned into the larger portion of

the slot at two locations, and then slid toward the smaller Touch Enclosure
Thickness Mounting Clip
portion of the slots to lock them in place. Some slots are Panel Size Screw Torque
arranged to slide to the left and others to the right. Range
C 6
0.20 - 0.63 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
upper mounting
D clip position
[5 16 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]

96 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

DC Panel Power Connector Replacement EA-DC-CON

C-more touch panel 5-position DC power connector terminal block replacement. One (1) DC 1
Power Connector is supplied with each touch panel.
2
Recommended DC Supply Fuse
Panel Size Rating
6 10 2.5 A
ADC p/n
MDL2-5
3
12 & 15 4.0 A MDL4
+ 4
24 VDC, -15%, +20%
(20.4 - 28.8 VDC)
5
GND
Equipment
PWR

CPU 6
Ground
BATT
7
8
AC Power Adapter Connector Replacement EA-AC-CON 9
C-more AC power adapter 3-position AC power connector terminal block replacement.
One (1) AC Power Connector is supplied with each AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC.
10
11
12
AC Power Adapter
Not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C
when operating temperatures are expected
to be above 40 deg C. 13
14
Recommended AC Supply Fuse
A
3.0 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL3

100 - 240 VAC

50/60 Hz
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 97

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

8-15 Panel Backlight Bulb Replacements EA-xx-BULB

1 Backlight assembly, customer replaceable, for C-more 8, 10, 12
and 15 touch panels. The 8, 10 and 15 touch panels use two
2 bulbs per panel and the 12 touch panels use one bulb per panel.
The bulbs are packaged two per box for the 8, 10 and 15 touch
panels and one per box for the 12 touch panels.
3 (The part number is completed by substituting the panel size, 08,
10, 12 or 15, for the xx shown above.)
4
5
Backlight Bulb Installation Instructions Example:
6 (See the Data Sheet insert for the specific backlight bulb that is being replaced for more detailed
information.)
7 W : This procedure should only be performed by qualified personnel who are experienced in
ARNING
working with electronic equipment. Take the necessary steps to prevent damage from static electricity
8 discharge. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding. Be careful not to pinch the
ribbon cable between the housing and bezel when re-assembling the panel.
9
10 Preparation: Disconnect input power and all other connections, then remove the touch panel from the control cabinet. In a clean
environment, place the panel face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of the panel.

11
Ribbon cable
12 1 2 recess

13
14
A
B With power disconnected, use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to
remove the four outer screws holding the touch panels main
electronics housing to the front bezel.
Lift the touch panels main electronics housing from the
front bezel. Set the front bezel and four screws to the side.
Observe the ribbon cable recess on the front bezel (see
detail) for use in re-assembling the panel.
C
D Continued on next page.

98 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Backlight Bulb Installation Instructions Example (contd):

3
Upper & lower backlight
bulb connectors 4
1
2
3
4
Place the touch panels main electronics housing facing up Carefully lift the bulbs wires out of the wire guides so they
5
on a lint-free soft surface. Position the housing so that the are free from obstructions. Do this for both the upper and
backlight bulb connectors are in plain view. lower backlight bulbs.
6
Bulb
5 6 retaining clip 7
8
9
10
Unplug the backlight bulbs power cable connector from the
circuit board connector. Again, do this for both the upper
Push up on the bulb retaining clip (see detail) while grasping
the plastic end of the bulb assembly and gently slide the bulb
11
and lower backlight bulbs. from its guide. Do this for both bulbs. The bulb is glass and
fragile, so handle with care.

Note: The two replacement bulbs are

12
7 8 labeled Upper and Lower. This is because
the bulbs have different cable lengths for 13
reaching the circuit board connector.

14
A
B
This photo shows the backlight bulb completely removed Remove the replacement bulb from its shipping tube and the
from its guide in the panels main electronics housing. (Only
one bulb shown.)
protective bubble wrap. Note: The replacement bulbs come
in pairs and should be replaced in pairs for longevity and
C
maintenance convenience.

Continued on next page.

D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 99

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Backlight Bulb Installation Instructions Example (contd):

1
9 10
2
3
4
5 Position the replacement bulb so that the opening in its Plug each backlight bulbs power cable connector back into
three-sided gold colored reflector faces toward the LCD its respective circuit board connector.
6 touch screen. Using gentle pressure, slide the bulb into the
guide until the retaining clip locks.

7
11 12
8
9
10
11
Gently position each backlight bulbs wires back into their Position the touch panels main electronics housing into the
respective wire guides to help clear any obstructions when front bezel so that the flat ribbon cable on the housing aligns
12 inserting the panels main electronics housing back into the
front bezel. Position any excess wire length in between the
with the recess in the front bezel. Insert the four screws and
tighten to a maximum of 70 oz-in [0.5 Nm].
printed circuit board and the LCD to prevent it from
13 becoming pinched between the housing and bezel.

14
A
B
C
D

910 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

6-15 Panel Gasket Replacements EA-xx-GSK

Replacement NEMA 4/4X touch panel gaskets for C-more 6, 1
8, 10, 12 and 15 touch panels.
(The part number is completed by substituting the panel size,
06, 08, 10, 12 or 15, for the xx shown above.)
2
3
4
Gasket Replacement Installation Instructions: 5
Preparation: Disconnect input power and all other connections, then remove the touch panel from the control cabinet. In a clean
6
environment, place the panel face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of the panel.
7
1 2 8
9
10
11
Start at one corner and pull the old gasket out of the channel
that holds the gasket in place. Pull the gasket up as you work
Lay the new gasket over the channel so that the long and
short sides of the gasket match up to the long and short
12
around the entire perimeter of the touch panel. Discard the sides of the touch panel. Start at one corner and match the
old gasket. gaskets corner to the channels corner. Press the gasket into
the channel and work all away around the perimeter of the
13
touch panel. Re-install the touch panel.
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 911

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

8-15 Panel Bezel Replacement EA-xx-BEZEL

1 The NEMA 4/4X bezels used on the C-more 8, 10, 12 and
15 touch panels can be easily replaced. The replacement bezel
2 includes the clear membrane element that protects the touch
sensitive area. A gasket is not included. The bezel and
membrane element do not require replacement under normal
3 use. In the event that the clear membrane is scratched from the
use of sharp objects or abrasive materials, follow the procedure
4 outlined below to replace the front bezel.
(The part number is completed by substituting the panel size,
5 08, 10, 12 or 15, for the xx shown above.)
Note: The bezel on the 6 C-more touch panels is not user replaceable and can only be replaced by
6 AutomationDirect. Contact the AutomationDirect returns department @ 1-800-633-0405 to make
arrangements for returning the unit for repair.

7
8 Bezel Replacement Instructions Example:
W : This procedure should only be performed by qualified personnel who are experienced in working
9 ARNING
with electronic equipment. Take the necessary steps to prevent damage from static electricity discharge.
Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding. Be careful not to pinch the ribbon cable
10 between the housing and bezel when re-assembling the panel.

11 Preparation: Disconnect input power and all other connections, then remove the touch panel from the control cabinet. In a clean
environment, place the panel face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of the panel.

12 Ribbon cable

1 2 recess

13
14
A
B
With power disconnected, use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to Lift the touch panels main electronics housing from the
remove the four outer screws holding the touch panels main front bezel. Set the four screws to the side and discard the
C electronics housing to the front bezel. original bezel. Observe the ribbon cable recess on the front
bezel (see detail) for use in re-assembling the panel.

D Continued on next page.

912 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Bezel Replacement Instructions Example (contd):

1
3 4 2
3
4
5
Place the new bezel facing down on the lint-free soft surface
along with main electronics and four screws.
Position the touch panels main electronics housing into the
new bezel so that the flat ribbon cable on the housing
matches up with the recess in the front bezel. Insert the four
6
screws and tighten to a maximum of 70 oz-in [0.5 Nm].
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 913

 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

6 Adapter Plate Gasket Replacement EA-6-ADPTR-GSK

1 6-inch replacement NEMA 4/4X gasket for the C-more touch
panel adapter plate.
2
3
4
5
6 6 Adapter Plate Gasket Replacement Instructions:
7 Preparation: Disconnect input power and all other connections, remove the touch panel from the 6 adapter plate, and then remove the
adapter plate from the control cabinet by removing the six (6) screws that secure the adapter to the control cabinet. In a clean
environment, place the adapter plate face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the adapter plate.
8
9 1 2
10
11
12
13 Start at one corner and pull the old gasket out of the channel
that holds the gasket in place. Pull the gasket up as you work
Lay the new gasket over the channel so that the long and
short sides of the gasket match up to the long and short
around the entire perimeter of the adapter plate. Discard the sides of the adapter plate. Start at one corner and match the
14 old gasket. gaskets corner to the channels corner. Press the gasket into
the channel and work all away around the perimeter of the
adapter plate. Re-install the adapter plate and then the touch
panel.
A
B
C
D

914 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

PANEL & PLC APPENDIX
ERROR CODE TABLES
A
In This Appendix...
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A2
C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A3
DirectLOGIC Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A4
DirectLOGIC K-Sequence Protocol PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A5
DirectLOGIC DirectNET Protocol PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A5
DirectLOGIC Modbus (Koyo) Protocol PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A5
Modbus RTU Protocol PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A6
Modbus TCP/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A6
DirectLOGIC ECOM Protocol PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A6
Allen-Bradley Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A7
Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A8
Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A10
Allen-Bradley Panel Error Code PLC-496, 497 & 498 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . .A12
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, and FlexLogix Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . .A13
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol
MicroLogix 1100, SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A17
Generic EtherNet IP Protocol PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A22
GE Fanuc 90-30 Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A23
GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A24
Mitsubishi FX Protocol PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A33
Omron Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A33
Omron Host Link & FINS Protocol PLC Error Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A34
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Introduction
A The C-more family of touch panels is capable of communicating with a wide variety of
Programmable Logic Controllers. C-more is capable of communicating over RS232, RS422 and
2 RS485 serial networks as well as Ethernet networks. It communicates with all controllers in the
Direct LOGIC family of PLCs utilizing various protocols. C-more also communicates with
other brands of PLCs by their different protocols. For a complete list of PLCs and protocols, see
3 the table on page 16 of Chapter 1: Getting Started.
As with any network communications, errors will occur. To make it more simple for the user to
4 identify the cause of the possible error, we have provided a error code table for all of the possible
errors that C-more can detect.
5 If a C-more communications error does occur, the error message will appear across the top of
the screen. The C-more touch panel also monitors any errors that are generated by the various
PLCs that are connected to it. If any of the PLC generated errors are detected, they are displayed
6 across the top of the panels display embedded as a hexadecimal value in error code P499s
message. An explanation of how the specific PLC error is identified in the panel error code P499
7 is shown proceeding the specific manufacturers PLC error tables. How the hexadecimal error
code value is interrupted is slightly different between manufacturers, so it is important to check
the explanation at the beginning of each manufacturers tables.
8
Note: These PLC error codes are provided by the manufacturer of the related PLC and are subject to change
9 by the PLC manufacturer. Please refer to the manufacturers documentation for a more complete and up-to-
date list of error codes.

10 All errors are also logged into the panels Error log under the
Information tab in the panels System Setup Screens and are
identified by the error code number. See Chapter 5: System
11 Setup Screens for additional details.
STX is not found

If you have difficulty determining the cause of the error,

12 please refer to Chapter 8: Troubleshooting for some
troubleshooting tips or contact our technical support group
13 at 770-844-4200 or the 3rd party PLC manufacturer.
Ethernet
14 Hub or Switch
10/100 Base-T PW
R

10/
T/ 0
AC 10

C-more Error Message

K
LN Port
10/ link

A
T/ 0 Up
AC 10
K
LN
10/
T/ 0
AC 10
K

5U
LN
10/
T/ 0
AC 10
0
SW
K
LN
10/

E
T/ 0
AC 10
K

H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100 C-more
LN

3
2

Ethernet Module Ethernet

R
1

PW
R
PW
+

Touch Panel Port

B
C (Bottom View)

DL06 PLC
D Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru

A2 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table

The following table includes all of the error codes and error messages that the panel will display
if the listed cause is detected. All of these errors involve problems that could result with the
A
panel communicating with the connected PLC. Be aware that not all of the panel errors are used
with each type of PLC that can be connected to the panel. 2
C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table
Error Code Error Message Cause
3
PLC Communication Timeout (for single A timeout occurred after sending a request to the PLC %Device%.
PLC-001 PLC)
%Device% PLC Communication Timeout
%Device% indicates the device name, such as DEV001.
Example error message for multiple PLCs: DEV001 PLC Communication
4
(for multiple PLCs, such as RS-422/485) Timeout.
PLC-002 NAK received from PLC A negative acknowledgement (NAK) control code has been generated
during a read/write request.
5
PLC-003 EOT received from PLC An End of Transmission (EOT) control code is sent by the PLC in response

PLC-004 STX is not found

to a Read/Write/SetBit request..
A Start of Text (STX) control code was not found in the data packet received
6
from the PLC.
PLC-005 ETX or ETB is not found Neither an End of Text (ETX) nor an End of Transmission Block (ETB)
control code was found in the data packet received from the PLC. 7
There was an incorrect Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) control code
PLC-006 LRC does not match in the communications packet received from the PLC. This is an indication
that the data in the packet is corrupted. 8
There was an incorrect Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) control code in the
PLC-007 CRC does not match communications packet received from the PLC. This is an indication that
the data in the packet is corrupted. 9
PLC-008 Address does not match The address value returned in the data packet from the PLC is incorrect.

PLC-009 Different function code received from PLC The function code returned in the data packet from the PLC is incorrect.
10
PLC-010 Data size does not match There are an incorrect number of bytes found in the data packet returned
from the PLC. 11
PLC-011 Invalid value in function code There is an invalid value in the function code.

PLC-012 Invalid command sent to PLC There was an invalid command sent to the PLC that wasnt recognized by
the PLC.
12
If the data packet does not include a negative acknowledgement (NAK -
PLC-013 ENQ received from PLC 0x15 value) in the defined packet field, then an enquiry (ENQ) control code
error will be displayed.
13
This error will be displayed if after checking the Transaction ID Bytes in
PLC-014 Transaction ID does not match the data packet, there is no match to what was requested. 14
PLC-015 %Device% No device found A PLC device designated as %Device% could not be found.

PLC-017 Out of address range The touch panel requested a file number larger than 255. A
C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table continued on the next page. B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A3

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table (contd)

A C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table (contd)
Error Code Error Message Cause
2 PLC-496
Allen-Bradley EtherNET/IP specific. Encapsulation Error.
Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from PLC See the explanation for error code PLC-496 proceeding the Allen-
Bradley EhterNet/IP error code tables.
3 PLC-497
Allen-Bradley EtherNET/IP specific. CIP Error.
Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from PLC See the explanation for error code PLC-497 proceeding the Allen-
Bradley EhterNet/IP error code tables.
4 PLC-498
Allen-Bradley EtherNET/IP specific. Service Packet Error.
Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from PLC See the explanation for error code PLC-498 proceeding the Allen-
Bradley EhterNet/IP error code tables.

5 PLC-499 Error code XXXX returned from PLC

An error code with a value of XXXX has been returned from the PLC.
See the explanation for error code PLC-499 below for Direct LOGIC and
proceeding each set of PLC error code tables that use this error code.

6 PLC-500 Cannot write to Serial Port

Data cannot write to the Serial port.
Data was sent to the PLC via the Serial Port.
If this error shows on the Panel, it indicates a Hardware Problem.
There was an error while allocating memory for the read buffer.
7 PLC-700 Not enough buffer memory When this error is displayed, a memory leak may have occurred.
Request to inaccessible memory from the HMI layer to the PLC protocol
PLC-701 Access to inaccessible PLC memory layer. This error is an indication that there is a problem in the HMI layer.
8 PLC-702 Cannot access by different function code A Read/Write/SetBit request has been sent to an invalid memory area.
This error is an indication that there is a problem in the HMI layer.
A PLC Write request was made to the PLCs Read-Only memory area.This
9 PLC-703 Write request to PLC Read Only Memory error is an indication that there is a problem in the HMI layer or the PLC
protocol layer.

10
DirectLOGIC Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation
11 The PLC-499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC.
The PLC-499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value embedded in the message.
This value can be looked up in the specific PLCs error tables to determine the cause of the error.
12 The possible PLC generated error codes for the DirectLOGIC communication protocol is
represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following message example.
13 Direct LOGIC Error Code PLC-499 Message Example:
14
Error code 0003 returned from
PLC

A
B
C Panel error code PLC-499
showing a hexadecimal value

D of 0003 indicates an Illegal

data value dependent upon
the request. PLC error.

A4 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

DirectLOGIC K-Sequence Protocol PLC Error Code Table

The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the DirectLOGIC PLC when using
the K-Sequence protocol.
A
Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panels screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
2
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for additional information.
3
PLC Error Codes for Direct LOGIC K-Sequence
Panel Error Code Description
4
PLC-499 Hex Value
01F8
020D
Error setting value.
Error in key mode.
5
021C Password protected.
6
7
DirectLOGIC DirectNET Protocol PLC Error Codes 8
Only errors as listed in the Touch Panel Error Code Table shown on page A-3 can occur when
using the DirectLOGIC DirectNET protocol, there are no PLC generated errors.
9
10
DirectLOGIC Modbus (Koyo) Protocol PLC Error Code Table 11
The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the DirectLOGIC PLC when using
the Modbus (Koyo) protocol.
12
Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panels screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for additional information.
13
PLC Error Codes for Direct LOGIC Modbus (Koyo) 14
Panel Error Code Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
0x1 The function code is unknown by the server.
A
0x2 Dependent upon the request.
0x3 Illegal data value dependent upon the request. B
0x4 The server failed during the execution.

DirectLOGIC error code tables continued on the next page. C

D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A5

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Modbus RTU Protocol PLC Error Code Table

A The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the DirectLOGIC PLC when using
the Modbus RTU protocol.
2 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panels screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
3 message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for additional information.

PLC Error Codes for Modbus RTU

4 Panel Error Code Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
5 0x1
0x2
The function code is unknown to the server.
Dependent upon the request.
0x3 Illegal data value dependent upon the request.
6 0x4 The server failed during the execution.

7
8 Modbus TCP/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Table
9 The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the DirectLOGIC PLC when using
the Modbus TCP/IP protocol.

10 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panels screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for additional information.
11
PLC Error Codes for Modbus TCP/IP
12 PLC-499
Panel Error Code
Hex Value Description

13 0x1
0x2
The function code is unknown to the server.
Dependent upon the request.
0x3 Illegal data value dependent upon the request.
14 0x4 The server failed during the execution.

A
B DirectLOGIC ECOM Protocol PLC Error Codes
Only errors as listed in the Touch Panel Error Code Table shown on page A-3 can occur when
C using the DirectLOGIC ECOM protocol, there are no PLC generated errors.

A6 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation

The PLC-499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC. A
The PLC-499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value embedded in the message.
This value can be looked up in the specific PLCs error tables to determine the cause of the error.
The possible PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley DF1 communication protocol is
2
represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following diagram. Please note that the error
code is broken down into three sections. It is possible for more than one type of PLC error to 3
be displayed in this value.
AB DF1 Protocol Error Code PLC-499 Breakdown
Remote Local EXT STS
AB DF1 Protocol Multiple Error Code Examples 4
4-7 bits 0-3 bits byte Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

16-bit
Word
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
Remote
4-7 bits
Local
F x
+
x x 1 x
+
x x F x
+
x x
5
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0-3 bits x 0 x x x 1 x x x 1 x x

EXT STS
byte x
+
x 0 9
=
x
+
x 0 0
=
x
+
x 0 9
=
6
Example of an EXT STS error Error PLC-499
PLC-499 Error Code Message for a Type mismatch. F 0 0 9 1 1 0 0 F 1 0 9
Displayed Hexadecimal Value F 0 1 7
hex
Value Displayed
7
Allen-Bradley Error Code PLC-499 Message Example: 8
9
Error code 1700 returned from
PLC
10
11
Panel error code PLC-499
12
showing a hexadecimal value
of 1700 indicates an Illegal
command or format.and
13
Station is offline. PLC error.
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A7

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

A The following PLC error code tables cover possible errors that are detected by the panel from
Allen-Bradley PLCs using the DF1 protocol. This includes full and half duplex
2 communications for the MicroLogix 1000, 1100. 1200 & 1500, SLC 5/03, /04, /05,
ControlLogix, CompactLogix and FlexLogix, and full duplex communications for the PLC5.

3 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panels screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for additional information.
4
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol, Local STS Errors (0-3 bits)
5 Panel Error Code
PLC-499 Hex Value Description
0x0 Success; no error.
6 0x1 DST node is out of buffer space.
0x2 Cannot guarantee delivery; link layer.
(The remote node specified does not ACK command.)
7 0x3 Duplicate token holder detected.
0x4 Local port is disconnected.
8 0x5
0x6
Application layer timed out waiting for response.
Duplicate node detected.
0x7 Station is offline.
9 0x8 Hardware fault.

10 PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol, Remote STS Errors (4-7 bits)
Panel Error Code Description
11 PLC-499 Hex Value
0x0 Success; no error.
0x10 Illegal command or format.
12 0x20 Host has a problem and will not communicate.
0x30 Remote node host is missing, disconnected, or shut down.
13 0x40
0x50
Host could not complete function due to hardware fault.
Addressing problem or memory protect rungs.
0x60 Function not allowed due to command protection selection.
14 0x70 Processor is in Program Mode.
0x80 Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem.
A 0x90
0xA0
Remote node cannot buffer command.
Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full).
0xB0 Remote node problem due to download.
B 0xC0 Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full).
0xD0 not used
C 0xE0
0xF0
not used
Error code in the EXT STS byte. See the error code table on the next page.

D (PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley DF1 protocol continued on the next page.)

A8 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol PLC Error Code Tables (contd)

PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol, EXT STS Command Code for F0 Command A
Panel Error Code Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
0x0 not used
2
0x1 A field has an illegal value.
0x2 Fewer levels specified in address than minimum for any address. 3
0x3 More levels specified in address than system supports.
0x4
0x5
Symbol not found.
Symbol is of improper format.
4
0x6 Address does not point to something usable.
0x7 File is wrong size. 5
0x8 Cannot complete request; situation has changed since start of the command.
0x9
0xA
Data or file size is too large.
Transaction size plus word address is too large.
6
0xB Access denied; improper privilege.
0xC Condition cannot be generated; resource is not available. 7
0xD Condition already exists; resource is readily available.
0xE
0xF
Command cannot be executed.
Histogram overflow.
8
0x10 No access.
0x11 Illegal data type. 9
0x12 Invalid parameter or invalid data.
0x13 Address reference exists to deleted area.
Command execution failure for unknown reason;
10
0x14 possible PLC 3 histogram overflow.
0x15
0x16
Data conversion error.
Scanner not able to communicate with 1771 rack adapter.
11
0x17 Type mismatch.
0x18 1771 module response was not valid. 12
0x19 Duplicated label.
0x22
0x23
Remote rack fault.
Timeout.
13
0x24 Unknown error.
0x1A File is open; another node owns it. 14
0x1B Another node is the program owner.
0x1C
0x1D
Reserved
Reserved
A
0x1E Data table element protection violation.
0x1F Temporary internal problem. B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A9

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

A The following PLC error code tables cover possible errors that are detected by the panel from
Allen-Bradley PLCs using the DH485 protocol. This includes all MicroLogix and SLC500
2 PLCs, and any communication connection using an Allen-Bradley AIC device using the
DH485 protocol.

3 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panels screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for additional information.
4
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol, Local STS Errors (0-3 bits)
5 Panel Error Code
PLC-499 Hex Value Description
0x0 Success; no error.
6 0x1 DST node is out of buffer space.
0x2 Cannot guarantee delivery; link layer.
(The remote node specified does not ACK command.)
7 0x3 Duplicate token holder detected.
0x4 Local port is disconnected.
8 0x5
0x6
Application layer timed out waiting for response.
Duplicate node detected.
0x7 Station is offline.
9 0x8 Hardware fault.

10 PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol, Remote STS Errors (4-7 bits)
Panel Error Code Description
11 PLC-499 Hex Value
0x0 Success; no error.
0x10 Illegal command or format.
12 0x20 Host has a problem and will not communicate.
0x30 Remote node host is missing, disconnected, or shut down.
13 0x40
0x50
Host could not complete function due to hardware fault.
Addressing problem or memory protect rungs.
0x60 Function not allowed due to command protection selection.
14 0x70 Processor is in Program Mode.
0x80 Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem.
A 0x90
0xA0
Remote node cannot buffer command.
Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full).
0xB0 Remote node problem due to download.
B 0xC0 Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full).
0xD0 not used
C 0xE0
0xF0
not used
Error code in the EXT STS byte. See the error code table on the next page.

D (PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley DH485 protocol continued on the next
page.)

A10 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol PLC Error Code Tables (contd)

PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol, EXT STS Command Code for F0 Command A
Panel Error Code
PLC-499 Hex Value Description 2
0x7 Insufficient memory module size (0000h is returned).
0xB
0xC
Access denied; privilege violation.
Resource not available or cannot do.
3
0xE CMD cannot be executed.
0x12 Invalid parameter. 4
0x14 Failure during processing.
0x19
0x1A
Duplicate label.
File open by another node + owner's local node address, 1 byte.
5
0x1B Program owned by another node + program owner's local node address, 1 byte.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A11

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol

A Panel Error Code PLC-496, 497 and 498 Explanation
2 The PLC-499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC.
The PLC-499 error message includes a eight digit hexadecimal value displayed embedded in the
message. This value can be looked up in the specific PLCs error tables to determine the cause
3 of the error. The possible PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP
communication protocol is represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following
4 message example.
Allen-Bradley Error Code PLC-496, 497, 498 Message Example:
5
6 Error code 00000065 returned
from PLC

7
8 Panel error code PLC-499
showing a hexadecimal value
9 of 00000065 indicates an The
target received a message of
10 invalid length. PLC error.

11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

A12 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

ControlLogix, CompactLogix, & FlexLogix A
The following PLC error code tables cover possible errors that are detected by the panel from
Allen-Bradley PLCs using the EtherNet/IP protocol. This includes all ControlLogix,
2
CompactLogix and FlexLogix PLCs.
Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
3
panel, and displayed on the touch panels screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-496
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for additional information. 4
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol Encapsulation Errors
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
5
Panel Error Code
PLC-496 Hex Value Description 6
0x00000001 The sender issued an invalid or unsupported encapsulation command.
0x00000002 Insufficient memory resources in the receiver to handle the command. You can get this error if the 1761-
NET-ENI cannot connect to the PLC serially. 7
0x00000003 Poorly formed or incorrect data in the data portion of the encapsulation message.
0x00000004 -
0x00000063 Reserved for legacy (Rockwell Automation). 8
0x00000064 An orginator used an invalid session handle when sending an encapsulation message to the target.
0x00000065
0x00000066 -
The target received a message of invalid length. 9
0x00000068 Reserved for legacy (Rockwell Automation).
0x00000069
0x0000006a -
Unsupported encapsulation protocol revision. 10
0x0000ffff Reserved for future expansion.
11
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol CIP Errors

Panel Error Code

(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
12
Description
PLC-497 Hex Value
0x010100 Connection Manager: Connection in Use or Duplicate Forward Open. 13
0x010103 Connection Manager: Transport Class and Trigger combination not supported.
0x010106
0x010107
Connection Manager: Ownership Conflict.
Connection Manager: Connection not found at target application.
14
0x010108 Connection Manager: Invalid connection type (problem with type or priority).
0x010109 Connection Manager: Invalid connection size. A
0x010110 Connection Manager: Device not configured.
0x010111
0x010113
Connection Manager: RPI not supported. Could also be problem with inactivity timeout.
Connection Manager: Connection Manager cannot support any more connections.
B
0x010114 Connection Manager: Either the vendor ID or the Product Code in the key segment did not match the

0x010115
device.
Connection Manager: Product Type in the key segment did not match the device.
C
0x010116 Connection Manager: Major or minor revision information in the key segment did not match the device.
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for ControlLogix,
D
CompactLogix, and FlexLogix continued on the next page.)

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A13

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

A ControlLogix, CompactLogix, & FlexLogix (contd)
2 PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol CIP Errors
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code
3 PLC-497 Hex Value Description
0x010117 Connection Manager: Invalid connection point.
4 0x010118
0x010119
Connection Manager: Invalid configuration format.
Connection Manager: Connection request fails since there is no controlling connection currently open.
0x01011a Connection Manager: Target application cannot support any more connections.
5 0x01011b Connection Manager: RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit Time.
0x010203 Connection Manager: Connection cannot be closed since the connection has timed out.
6 0x010204
0x010205
Connection Manager: Unconnected Send timed out waiting for a response.
Connection Manager: Parameter error in Unconnected send service.
0x010206 Connection Manager: Message too large for Unconnected message service.
7 0x010207 Connection Manager: Unconnected acknowledge without reply.
0x010301 Connection Manager: No buffer memory available.
8 0x010302
0x010303
Connection Manager: Network Bandwidth not available for data.
Connection Manager: No Tag filters available.
0x010304 Connection Manager: Not configured to send real-time data.
9 0x010311 Connection Manager: Port specified in Port segment not available.
0x010312 Connection Manager: Link address specified in port segment not available.
10 0x010315
0x010316
Connection Manager: invalid segment type or segment value in path.
Connection Manager: Path and Connection not equal in close.
0x010317 Connection Manager: Ether Segment not present or Encoded Value in Network Segment is invalid.
11 0x010318 Connection Manager: Link address to self invalid.
0x010319 Connection Manager: Resources on Secondary unavailable.
12 0x01031a
0x01031b
Connection Manager: Connection already established.
Connection Manager: Direct connection already established.
0x01031c Connection Manager: Miscellaneous.
13 0x01031d Connection Manager: Redundant connection mismatch.
0x01031e Connection Manager: No more consumer resources available in the producing module.
14 0x01031f
0x010320 -
Connection Manager: No connection resources exist for target path.

0x0107ff Connection Manager: Vendor specific.

A 0x020000
0x030000
Resource unavailable: Connection Manager resources are unavailable to handle service request.
Invalid parameter value.
Path segment error: The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the
B 0x040000 processing node.
Path destination unknown: The path is referencing an object class, instance or structure element that is not
0x050000 known or is not contained in the processing node.
C 0x060000 Partial transfer: Only part of the expected data was transferred.
0x070000 Connection lost: The messaging connection was lost.

D (PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for ControlLogix,
CompactLogix, and FlexLogix continued on the next page.)

A14 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

ControlLogix, CompactLogix, & FlexLogix (contd) A
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol CIP Errors
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
2
Panel Error Code
PLC-497 Hex Value Description 3
0x080000 Service not supported: The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this Object

0x090000
Class/Instance.
Invalid attribute value: Invalid attribute data detected. 4
0x0a0000 Attribute list error: An attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a non-zero

0x0b0000
status.
Already in requested mode/state: The object is already in the mode/state being requested by the service.
5
0x0c0000 Object state conflict: The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode/state.
0x0d0000
0x0e0000
Object already exists: The requested instance of object to be created already exists.
Attribute not settable: A request to modify non-modifiable attribute was received.
6
0x0f0000
0x100000
Privilege violation: A permission/privilege check failed.
Device state conflict: The device's current mode/state prohibits the execution of the requested service.
7
0x110000 Reply data too large: The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allocated response

0x120000
buffer.
Fragmentation of a primitive value: The service specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive
8
data value. For example, trying to send a 2 byte value to a REAL data type (4 byte).
0x130000
0x140000
Not enough data: The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified operation.
Attribute not supported: The attribute specified in the request is not supported.
9
0x150000 Too much data: The service supplied more data than was expected.
0x160000 Object does not exist: The object specified does not exist in the device. 10
0x170000 Service fragmentation sequence not in progress: The fragmentation sequence for this service is not
currently active for this data.
0x180000 No stored attribute data: The attribute data of this object was no saved prior to the requested service. 11
0x190000 Store operation failure: The attribute data of this object was not saved due to a failure during the attempt.
0x1a0000 Routing failure, request packet too large: The service request packet was too large for transmission on a
network in the path to the destination. 12
0x1b0000 Routing failure, response packet too large: The service reponse packet was too large for transmission on a

0x1c0000
network in the path from the destination.
Missing attribute list entry data: The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that was 13
needed by the service to perform the requested behavior.
0x1d0000 Invalid attribute value list: The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status information for
those attributes that were invalid. 14
0x1e0000 Embedded service error: See Service Packet error list (PLC-498 Error codes) below:
0x1f0000 Vendor specific error: A vendor specific error has been encountered. This occurs when none of the
specified errors relate to the error in the device. A
0x200000 Invalid parameter: A parameter associated with the request was invalid. This code is used when a

0x210000
parameter does meet the requirements defined in an Application Object specification.
Write-once value or medium already written: An attempt was made to write to a write-once-medium that B
has already been written or to modify a value that cannot be change once established.
0x220000 Invalid Reply Received: An invalid reply is received (example: service code sent doesn't match service code
received.). C
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for ControlLogix,
CompactLogix and FlexLogix continued on the next page.) D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A15

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

A ControlLogix, CompactLogix, & FlexLogix (contd)
2 PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol CIP Errors
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code
3 PLC-497 Hex Value Description
0x230000 Reserved by CIP for future extensions.
4 0x240000 Reserved by CIP for future extensions.
Key failure in path: The key segment was included as the first segment in the path does not match the
0x250000 destination module. The object specific status shall indicate which part of the key check failed.
5 0x260000 Path Size Invalid: The size of the path which was sent with the Service Request is either not large enough
to allow the Request to be routed to an object or too much routing data was included.
0x270000 Unexpected attribute in list: An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set at this time.
6 0x280000 Invalid Member ID: The Member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified
Class/Instance/Attribute.
0x290000 Member not settable: A request to modify a non-modifiable member was received.
7 0x2a0000
Group 2 only server general failure: This error code may only be reported by DeviceNet group 2 only
servers with 4K or less code space and only in place of Service not supported, Attribute not supported and
Attribute not settable.
8 0x2b0000 -
0xcf0000 Reserved by CIP for future extensions.
Reserved for Object Class and service errors: This range of error codes is to be used to indicate Object
9 0xd00000 -
0xff0000 Class specific errors. Use of this range should only be used when errors in this table don't accurately reflect
the error encountered.

10 PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol Service Packet Errors

(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
11 Panel Error Code Description
PLC-498 Hex Value
12 0x040000 This general status codes that the tag name could not be deciphered. This could mean that the tag name
was entered incorrectly or does not exist in the PLC.
0x050000 The particular item referenced (usually instance) could not be found.
13 0x060000
0x0a0000
The amount of data requested would not fit into the response buffer. Partial data transfer has occurred.
An error has occurred trying to process one of the attributes.
0x130000 Not enough command data/parameters were supplied in the command to execute the service requested.
14 0x1c0000 An insufficient number of attributes were provided compared to the attribute count.

A
B
C
D

A16 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

MicroLogix 1100 & SLC 5/05, both via native Etherent port; A
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5/03/04/05,all via ENI Adapter 2
The following PLC error code tables cover possible errors that are detected by the panel from
Allen-Bradley PLCs using the EtherNet/IP protocol. This includes MicroLogix 1100 & SLC 3
5/05, both using their native Ethernet port, and MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1500, SLC
5/03, 5/04 and 5/05 using an Allen-Bradly ENI Adapter.
4
Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panels screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-496
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for additional information.
5
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol Encapsulation Errors 6
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code
PLC-496 Hex Value Description 7
0x00000001 The sender issued an invalid or unsupported encapsulation command.
0x00000002 Insufficient memory resources in the receiver to handle the command. You can get this error if the 1761-
NET-ENI cannot connect to the PLC serially.
8
0x00000003 Poorly formed or incorrect data in the data portion of the encapsulation message.
0x00000004 -
0x00000063 Reserved for legacy (Rockwell Automation).
9
0x00000064 An orginator used an invalid session handle when sending an encapsulation message to the target.
0x00000065 The target received a message of invalid length. 10
0x00000066 - Reserved for legacy (Rockwell Automation).
0x00000068
0x00000069 Unsupported encapsulation protocol revision. 11
0x0000006a - Reserved for future expansion.
0x0000ffff
12
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol CIP Errors
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.) 13
Panel Error Code Description
PLC-497 Hex Value
0x010100 Connection Manager: Connection in Use or Duplicate Forward Open.
14
0x010103 Connection Manager: Transport Class and Trigger combination not supported.
0x010106 Connection Manager: Ownership Conflict. A
0x010107 Connection Manager: Connection not found at target application.
0x010108
0x010109
Connection Manager: Invalid connection type (problem with type or priority).
Connection Manager: Invalid connection size.
B
0x010110 Connection Manager: Device not configured.
0x010111 Connection Manager: RPI not supported. Could also be problem with inactivity timeout. C
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for MicroLogix 1100,
SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter continued on the next page.)
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A17

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

A MicroLogix 1100 & SLC 5/05, both via native Etherent port;
2 MicroLogix1000,1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5/03/04/05,allviaENIAdapter
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol CIP Errors
3 (Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code Description
4 PLC-497 Hex Value
0x010113 Connection Manager: Connection Manager cannot support any more connections.
Connection Manager: Either the vendor ID or the Product Code in the key segment did not match the
5 0x010114
0x010115
device.
Connection Manager: Product Type in the key segment did not match the device.
0x010116 Connection Manager: Major or minor revision information in the key segment did not match the device.
6 0x010117 Connection Manager: Invalid connection point.
0x010118 Connection Manager: Invalid configuration format.
7 0x010119
0x01011a
Connection Manager: Connection request fails since there is no controlling connection currently open.
Connection Manager: Target application cannot support any more connections.
0x01011b Connection Manager: RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit Time.
8 0x010203 Connection Manager: Connection cannot be closed since the connection has timed out.
0x010204 Connection Manager: Unconnected Send timed out waiting for a response.
9 0x010205
0x010206
Connection Manager: Parameter error in Unconnected send service.
Connection Manager: Message too large for Unconnected message service.
0x010207 Connection Manager: Unconnected acknowledge without reply.
10 0x010301 Connection Manager: No buffer memory available.
0x010302 Connection Manager: Network Bandwidth not available for data.
11 0x010303
0x010304
Connection Manager: No Tag filters available.
Connection Manager: Not configured to send real-time data.
0x010311 Connection Manager: Port specified in Port segment not available.
12 0x010312 Connection Manager: Link address specified in port segment not available.
0x010315 Connection Manager: invalid segment type or segment value in path.
13 0x010316
0x010317
Connection Manager: Path and Connection not equal in close.
Connection Manager: Ether Segment not present or Encoded Value in Network Segment is invalid.
0x010318 Connection Manager: Link address to self invalid.
14 0x010319 Connection Manager: Resources on Secondary unavailable.
0x01031a Connection Manager: Connection already established.
A 0x01031b
0x01031c
Connection Manager: Direct connection already established.
Connection Manager: Miscellaneous.
0x01031d Connection Manager: Redundant connection mismatch.
B 0x01031e Connection Manager: No more consumer resources available in the producing module.
0x01031f Connection Manager: No connection resources exist for target path.
C 0x010320 -
0x0107ff Connection Manager: Vendor specific.

(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for MicroLogix 1100,
D SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter continued on the next page.)

A18 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

MicroLogix 1100 & SLC 5/05, both via native Etherent port; A
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5/03/04/05,all via ENI Adapter 2
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol CIP Errors
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.) 3
Panel Error Code Description
PLC-497 Hex Value
0x020000 Resource unavailable: Connection Manager resources are unavailable to handle service request.
4
0x030000 Invalid parameter value.
0x040000 Path segment error: The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the
processing node.
5
Path destination unknown: The path is referencing an object class, instance or structure element that is not
0x050000
0x060000
known or is not contained in the processing node.
Partial transfer: Only part of the expected data was transferred.
6
0x070000
0x080000
Connection lost: The messaging connection was lost.
Service not supported: The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this Object 7
Class/Instance.
0x090000
0x0a0000
Invalid attribute value: Invalid attribute data detected.
Attribute list error: An attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a non-zero
8
status.
0x0b0000
0x0c0000
Already in requested mode/state: The object is already in the mode/state being requested by the service.
Object state conflict: The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode/state.
9
0x0d0000 Object already exists: The requested instance of object to be created already exists.
0x0e0000 Attribute not settable: A request to modify non-modifiable attribute was received. 10
0x0f0000 Privilege violation: A permission/privilege check failed.
0x100000
0x110000
Device state conflict: The device's current mode/state prohibits the execution of the requested service.
Reply data too large: The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allocated response
11
buffer.
0x120000 Fragmentation of a primitive value: The service specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive
data value. For example, trying to send a 2 byte value to a REAL data type (4 byte). 12
0x130000 Not enough data: The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified operation.
0x140000
0x150000
Attribute not supported: The attribute specified in the request is not supported.
Too much data: The service supplied more data than was expected.
13
0x160000 Object does not exist: The object specified does not exist in the device.
0x170000 Service fragmentation sequence not in progress: The fragmentation sequence for this service is not
currently active for this data.
14
0x180000
0x190000
No stored attribute data: The attribute data of this object was no saved prior to the requested service.
Store operation failure: The attribute data of this object was not saved due to a failure during the attempt. A
0x1a0000 Routing failure, request packet too large: The service request packet was too large for transmission on a

0x1b0000
network in the path to the destination.
Routing failure, response packet too large: The service reponse packet was too large for transmission on a
B
network in the path from the destination.
0x1c0000 Missing attribute list entry data: The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that was
needed by the service to perform the requested behavior. C
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for MicroLogix 1100,
SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter continued on the next page.) D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A19

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

A MicroLogix 1100 & SLC 5/05, both via native Etherent port;
2 MicroLogix1000,1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5/03/04/05,allviaENIAdapter
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol CIP Errors
3 (Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code
4 PLC-497 Hex Value Description
Invalid attribute value list: The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status information for
0x1d0000 those attributes that were invalid.
5 0x1e0000 Embedded service error: See Service Packet error list (PLC-498 Error codes) below:
Vendor specific error: A vendor specific error has been encountered. This occurs when none of the
0x1f0000 specified errors relate to the error in the device.
6 0x200000 Invalid parameter: A parameter associated with the request was invalid. This code is used when a
parameter does meet the requirements defined in an Application Object specification.
Write-once value or medium already written: An attempt was made to write to a write-once-medium that
7 0x210000 has already been written or to modify a value that cannot be change once established.
Invalid Reply Received: An invalid reply is received (example: service code sent doesn't match service code
0x220000 received.).
8 0x230000
0x240000
Reserved by CIP for future extensions.
Reserved by CIP for future extensions.
Key failure in path: The key segment was included as the first segment in the path does not match the
9 0x250000 destination module. The object specific status shall indicate which part of the key check failed.
Path Size Invalid: The size of the path which was sent with the Service Request is either not large enough
0x260000 to allow the Request to be routed to an object or too much routing data was included.
10 0x270000 Unexpected attribute in list: An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set at this time.
0x280000 Invalid Member ID: The Member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified
Class/Instance/Attribute.
11 0x290000 Member not settable: A request to modify a non-modifiable member was received.
Group 2 only server general failure: This error code may only be reported by DeviceNet group 2 only
0x2a0000 servers with 4K or less code space and only in place of Service not supported, Attribute not supported and
12 Attribute not settable.
0x2b0000 - Reserved by CIP for future extensions.
0xcf0000
13 0xd00000 - Reserved for Object Class and service errors: This range of error codes is to be used to indicate Object
Class specific errors. Use of this range should only be used when errors in this table don't accurately reflect
0xff0000 the error encountered.
14
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for MicroLogix 1100,
A SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter continued on the next page.)

B
C
D

A20 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

MicroLogix 1100 & SLC 5/05, both via native Etherent port; A
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5/03/04/05,all via ENI Adapter 2
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol Service Packet Errors
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.) 3
Panel Error Code
PLC-498 Hex Value
0x010000 DST Node is out of buffer space.
Description
4
0x020000 Cannot guarantee delivery; link layer (The remote node specified does not ACK command).
0x030000 Duplicate token holder detected. 5
0x040000 Local port is disconnected.
0x050000
0x060000
Application layer timed out waiting for response.
Duplicate node detected.
6
0x070000 Station is offline.
0x080000 Hardware fault. 7
0x100000 Illegal command or format. Typical error received from PLC when addressed requested to the PLC does

0x200000
not exist. Usually occurs if memory map has not been expanded in PLC to the range requested from panel.
Host has a problem and will not communicate.
8
0x300000 Remote node host is missing, disconnected, or shut down.
0x400000
0x500000
Host could not complete function due to hardware fault.
Addressing problem or memory protected rungs.
9
0x600000
0x700000
Function not allowed due to command protection selection.
Processor is in Program Mode.
10
0x800000 Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem.
0x900000
0xA00000
Remote node cannot buffer command.
Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full).
11
0xB00000
0xC00000
Not used.
Not used.
12
0xD00000 Error code in the EXT STS byte. See the error code table below.
0xE00000
0xF00300
Fewer levels specified in address than minimum for any address.
More levels specified in address than system supports.
13
0xF00400
0xF00500
Symbol not found.
Symbol is of improper format.
14
0xF00600 Address does not point to something usable.
0xF00700
0xF00800
File is wrong size.
Cannot complete request, situation has changed since start of the command.
A
0xF00900
0xF00900
Data or file size is too large.
Transaction size plus word address is too large.
B
0xF00B00 Access denied; improper privilege. This will occur if data file is set to constant or protected.
0xF00C00
0xF00D00
Condition cannot be generated; resource is not available.
Condition already exists; resource is readily available.
C
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for MicroLogix 1100, D
SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter continued on the next page.)

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A21

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

A MicroLogix 1100 & SLC 5/05, both via native Etherent port;
2 MicroLogix1000,1100, 1200, 1500, SLC 5/03/04/05,allviaENIAdapter
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol Service Packet Errors
3 (Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code
4 PLC-498 Hex Value
0xF00E00 Command cannot be executed.
Description

0xF00F00 Histogram overflow.

5 0xF01000 No access.
0xF01100 Illegal data type.
6 0xF01200
0xF01300
Invalid parameter or invalid data.
Address reference exists to deleted area.
0xF01400 Command execution failure for unknown reason; possible histogram overflow.
7 0xF01500 Data conversion error.
0xF01600 Scanner not able to communicate with 1771 rack adapter.
8 0xF01700
0xF01800
Type mismatch.
1771 module response was not valid.
0xF01900 Duplicated label.
9 0xF02200 Remote rack fault.
0xF02300 Timeout.
10 0xF02400
0xF01A00
Unknown error.
File is open; another node owns it.
0xF01B00 Another node is the program owner.
11 0xF01C00 Reserved.
0xF01D00 Reserved.
12 0xF01E00
0xF01F00
Data table element protection violation.
Temporary internal problem.

13
14
A GenericOnlyEtherNet IP Protocol PLC Error Codes
errors as listed in the Touch Panel Error Code Table shown on page A-3 can occur when
using the Generic Ethernet IP protocol, there are no PLC generated errors.
B
C
D

A22 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE Fanuc 90-30 Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation

The PLC-499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC.
The PLC-499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value embedded in the message.
A
This value can be looked up in the specific PLCs error tables to determine the cause of the
error.The possible PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30 communication protocol 2
is represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following message example.
GE Fanuc 90-30 Error Code PLC-499 Message Example: 3
4
Error code 0013 returned from
PLC
5
6
7
Panel error code PLC-499 8
showing a hexadecimal value
of 0013 indicates an Port
configurator error. PLC error.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A23

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables

A The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the GE Fanuc 90-30 PLC when
using the SNPX protocol.
2 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panels screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
3 message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for additional information.

PLC Errors for GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Major)

4 Panel Error Code Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
5 No error Successful completion. (This is the expected completion value in the COMMREQ Status Word.)
Insufficient Privilege. For Series 90-70 PLC, the minor error code contains the privilege level required for
0x0002 the service request.
6 0x0004
0x0005
Protocol Sequence Error. The CPU has received a message that is out of order.
Service Request Error, the minor error code contains the specific error code.
0x0006 Illegal Mailbox Type. Service request mailbox type is either undefined or unexpected.
7 0x0007 The PLC CPUs Service Request Queue is full. The master should retry later. It is recommended that the
master wait a minimum of 10 msec before sending another service request.

8 0x000A SNP DOS Driver Error. The minor error code contains the specific error code.
Illegal Service Request. The requested service is either not defined or not supported. (This value is returned
0x000B in lieu of the actual 01h value passed in the SNP error message, to avoid confusion with the normal
successful COMMREQ completion.)
9 Local SNP/SNP-X Error. An error occurred within the SNP task in the CMM module in this PLC.
0x000C This error may occur in either an SNP master or an SNP slave. The minor error code contains the specific
error code.
10 0x000D Remote SNP Error. An error occurred within the SNP slave task in the CMM module in the remote PLC. The
minor error code contains the specific error code.
Autodial Error. An error occurred while attempting to send a command string to an attached external
11 0x000E modem. The minor error code contains the specific error code.
SNP-X slave error. An error occurred within the SNPX task in the remote slave device. The minor error
0x000F code contains the specific error code.
12 0x0013 Port configurator error.
0x0050 Problem with sending mail to the slave Service Request task.
(Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)
13 0x0051 Problem with getting mail from the slave Service Request task.
(Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)
Slave SNP task timed out before receiving an SRP response.
14 0x0055 (Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)
Slave SNP task could not find the requested datagram connection.
0x0056 (Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)
A 0x0057 Slave SNP task encountered an error in trying to write the datagram.
(Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)
0x0058 Slave SNP task encountered an error in trying to update the datagram.
B (Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)

(PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next
C page.)

A24 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables (contd)

PLC Errors for GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (contd) A
Panel Error Code Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
PLC Error 0x010C WAIT-type COMMREQ is not permitted; must use NOW AIT-type.
2
PLC Error 0x010E Not used

PLC Error 0x010F The service request code in an X-Request message is unsupported or invalid at this time. This error may 3
occur if an SNP-X communication session has not been success fully established at the slave device.
PLC Error 0x020C
PLC Error 0x020E
COMMREQ command is not supported.
The modem command string length exceeds 250 characters.
4
Insufficient privilege level in the slave PLC CPU for the requested SNP-X service.
PLC Error 0x020F Password protection at PLC CPU may be preventing the requested service. 5
Unsupported COMMREQ. These errors are only generated when there is no protocol currently being run on
PLC Error 0x0213 a port, and the port receives a COMMREQ.
(The port may be disabled or an error has occurred in processing a new configuration).
SNP communication is not active. Must initiate a new SNP communication by sending an Attach or Long
6
PLC Error 0x030C Attach COMMREQ.
PLC Error 0x030E COMMREQ Data Block Length is too small.
Output command string data is missing or incomplete.
7
PLC Error 0x030F Invalid slave memory type in X-Request message.
PLC Error 0x0313 Invalid COMMREQ length. 8
PLC Error 0x040C SNP slave did not respond to Attach message from master.

PLC Error 0x040E Serial output timeout. The CMM module was unable to transmit the modem autodial output from the serial
port. (May be due to missing CTS signal when the CMM is configured to use hardware flow control.)
9
PLC Error 0x040F
PLC Error 0x0413
Invalid slave memory address or range in X-Request message.
Invalid COMMREQ status word location.
10
PLC Error 0x050C Unable to write SNP Status Word to local PLC memory;

PLC Error 0x050E

may be due to invalid Status Word memory type or address.
Response was not received from modem. Check modem and cable.
11
Invalid data length in X-Request message.
PLC Error 0x050F
PLC Error 0x0513
Data length must be non-zero, and may not exceed decimal 1000 bytes.
Invalid COMMREQ data.
12
PLC Error 0x060C Master device memory type is not valid in this PLC.

PLC Error 0x060E

Modem responded with BUSY.
Modem is unable to complete the requested connection. The remote modem is already in use; retry the
13
connection request at a later time.

PLC Error 0x060F

X-Buffer data length does not match the service request in X-Request message.
The X-Buffer message length is obtained from the Next Message Length field in the X-Request message;
14
the length of the data within the buffer message is always the message length.
PLC Error 0x070C Master device memory address or length is zero. A
Modem responded with NO CARRIER.
PLC Error 0x070E Modem is unable to complete the requested connection.
Check the local and remote modems and the telephone line.
Queue Full indication from Service Request Processor in slave PLC CPU.
B
The slave is temporarily unable to complete the service request.
PLC Error 0x070F The master should try again later. It is recommended that the master wait at least 10 msec before repeating
the X-Request.
C
(PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next
page.) D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A25

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables (contd)

A PLC Errors for GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (contd)
Panel Error Code Description
2 PLC-499 Hex Value
0x080C Unable to read or write master device memory locations specified in COMMREQ. Usually caused by invalid
memory address for this PLC. SNP message exchange may have taken place.
3 0x080E Modem responded with NO DIALTONE. Modem is unable to complete the requested connection. Check the
modem connections and the telephone line.
Service Request Processor response exceeds 1000 bytes;
4 0x080F the SNP-X slave device cannot return the data in an X-Response message.
(This error applies to CMM module only.)

0x090C Master device memory data length exceeds maximum data size of CMM module (2048 bytes). Must use a
5 smaller data length. Use multiple COMMREQs if total data length exceeds this maximum value.
Modem responded with ERROR. Modem is unable to complete the requested command. Check the modem
0x090E command string and modem.
6 0x0A0C Slave device memory type is missing or not valid.
0x0A0E Modem responded with RING, indicating that the modem is being called by another modem. Modem is
unable to complete the requested command. Retry the modem command at a later time.
7 0x0B0C Slave device memory address is missing or zero.
An unknown response was received from the modem. Modem is unable to complete the requested
8 0x0B0E command. Check the modem command string and modem. The modem response is expected to be either
CONNECT or OK.
COMMREQ Data Block Length is too small.
0x0C0C (When expected COMMREQ length is 6 words or less. An improper length may cause other minor error
9 codes 6-11.)
0x0D0C Invalid Diagnostic Status Word (DSW) starting word or length.

10 0x0E0C Invalid maximum SNP message data size.

Must be an even value from 42 to 2048.
0x0F0C Invalid Privilege Level. Must be 0 through 4 or -1.
11 0x100C Invalid Fault Table selector.
Must be 1 for I/O Fault Table, or 2 for PLC Fault Table.
Unexpected Service Request Processor error.
12 0x100F (This error applies to CMM module only; the unexpected SRP error code is saved in the Diagnostic Status
Words in the CMM module.)
0x110C Invalid Fault Table starting index.
Must be 1-32 for I/O Fault Table, or 1-16 for PLC.
13 0x120C Invalid fault count. Must be 1-32 for I/O Fault Table, or 1-16 for PLC Fault Table.
0x130C Invalid Set PLC Date/Time mode. Must be 1-4.
14 0x140C
0x150C
Invalid Set PLC Date/Time date, time, or day-of-week value.
Unable to retrieve master device PLC time/date from PLC CPU.
Requested service is not permitted in a Broadcast request. The master must direct the X-Request message
A 0x150F to a specific SNP-X slave device.
Invalid slave PLC type.
0x160C Must be 0 for Series 90-70, or 1 for Series 90-30 or Series 90-20.
B 0x170C Invalid datagram type.
Must be 01h for normal datagram, or 81h (129) for permanent datagram.
0x180C Missing or too many datagram point formats. Must be 1-32.
C 0x190C Invalid datagram point format data.

(PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next
D page.)

A26 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables (contd)

PLC Errors for GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (contd) A
Panel Error Code Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
0x1A0C Datagram area size is too small to include data for all specified point formats.
2
0x1B0C Invalid number of Control Program Names. Must be 1-8.
0x1C0C SNP-X Request exceeds maximum data size (1000 bytes).
Must use a smaller data length. Use multiple COMMREQs if necessary.
3
0x1D0C Invalid SNP-X communication session type.
Must be 0 for a single slave device, or 1 for multiple slave devices.
Illegal destination SNP ID specified for SNP-X slave. Must be 0-7 ASCII characters, plus a terminating null
4
0x1E0C character (00h). The Null SNP ID (eight bytes of 00h) may be used to specify any single device. The
Broadcast SNP ID (eight bytes of FFh) may be use to specify all slave devices on the serial link.
Destination SNP ID does not match SNP-X session type.
5
0x1F0C The Broadcast SNP ID is not permitted in a single-slave SNP-X session.

0x200C
The Null SNP ID is not permitted in a multiple-slave SNP-X session.
Inactivity timeout (T3). The SNP slave has not received any new SNP messages within the configured T3 6
time interval.
0x200F Invalid Message Type field in a received X-Request message.
The message type of an X-Request message must be 58h = X. 7
0x210C A Parity error has occurred on an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime Datagram message.
Communications have not been established.
Invalid Next Message Type or Next Message Length field in a received X Request message. If this request
does not use a buffer (0-2 bytes of data), the Next Message Type must be zero. If this request will be
8
0x210F followed with a buffer message (more than 2 byte.)), the Next Message Type must be 54h = T, and the
Next Message Length must specify the length of the X-Buffer message. Valid X-Buffer message lengths are
9-1008 bytes (data length plus 8 bytes).
9
A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime
0x220C Datagram message. Communications have not been established.
Invalid Message Type field in a received X-Buffer message.
10
0x220F The message type of an X-Buffer message must be 54h = T.
0x230C A Framing or Overrun serial error has occurred on an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime
Datagram message. Communications have not been established.
11
0x230F Invalid Next Message Type field in a received X-Buffer message. Since an X-Buffer message is never

0x240C
followed by another message, the Next Message Type must always be zero.
An invalid SNP message type was received when an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime
12
Datagram message was required. Communications have not been established.
0x250C An invalid next message length value was specified in an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime
Datagram message. Communications have not been established. 13
0x260C An unexpected SNP message type was received when an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime

0x270C
Datagram was required. Communications have not been established.
Another Break was received while SNP slave was waiting for an Attach or Update Realtime Datagram 14
message.

0x280C
An SNP message has been sent and retried the maximum number of times.
A maximum of two retries are permitted.
A retry is caused by a NAK from from the remote SNP device.
A
A received SNP message has been NAKed the maximum number of two times.
0x290C The NAKed message may be retransmitted a maximum of two times. B
(PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next
page.) C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A27

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables (contd)

A PLC Errors for GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (contd)
Panel Error Code Description
2 PLC-499 Hex Value
0x2A0C An unknown message was received when an acknowledge (ACK or NAK) was required.
0x2B0C Sequence Error. An unexpected SNP message type was received.
3 0x2C0C Received SNP message contains bad next message length value.
Acknowledge timeout. An acknowledge (ACK or NAK) was not received within the configured T2 time
0x2D0C interval. A slave device may generate this error if the master device has aborted after maximum response
4 NAKs and does not NAK the next response retry.
Response timeout. The SNP Master did not receive an SNP Response message within the configured T5
0x2E0C time interval.
5 0x2F0C Buffer message timeout. An expected Text Buffer or Connection Data message was not received within the
configured T5 time interval.
Serial output timeout. The CMM module was unable to transmit a Break, an SNP message, or SNP
6 0x300C acknowledge (ACK or NAK) from the serial port. (May be due to missing CTS signal when the CMM
module is configured to use hardware flow control.)
0x310C SNP slave did not receive a response from the Service Request Processor in the PLC CPU.
7 0x320C COMMREQ timeout.
The COMMREQ did not complete within the configured time interval.
0x330C An SNP Request or Response was aborted prior to completion due to reception of a Break.
8 0x340C PLC backplane communications error
0x350C Invalid Piggyback Status data memory type or address.
Communications have not been established.
9 0x360C Invalid SNP Slave SNP ID. Must be a 0-7 ASCII characters, plus a terminating null character (00h). The Null
SNP ID (eight bytes of 00h) may be used to specify any single slave device.
The SNP master has received a response message containing an unexpected data length. Usually indicates
10 0x370C a problem with the remote SNP slave device. May occur when Series 90-70 commands (Task Memory or
Program Block Memory Read/Write) are issued to a Series 90-30 slave device.
Response code in received SNP-X response message does not match expected value. (Response code
11 0x380C must equal the request code +80h.)
SNP-X Response message exceeds maximum data size (decimal 1000 bytes).
0x390C Data in the Response is ignored.
12 0x400C A parity error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new SNP-X
communication session. Communications have not been established.
0x400D The requested service is not supported by the SNP slave.
13 0x400F Serial output timeout. The slave was unable to transmit an SNP-X message from the serial port. (May be
due to missing CTS signal when the CMM module is configured to use hardware flow control.)

14 (PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next
page.)
A
B
C
D

A28 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables (contd)

PLC Errors for GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (contd) A
Panel Error Code Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
A framing or overrun error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new SNP- 2
0x410C X communication session.
Communications have not been established.
0x410D SNP slave on CMM module requires PLC CPU privilege level 2 to operate. The SNP slave has rejected a 3
request to change to a higher or lower privilege level.
0x410F An SNP-X request was aborted prior to completion due to reception of a Break.
A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new 4
0x420C SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established.
SNP Request or Response message exceeds maximum data length of the CMM module. (Total data length 5
0x420D for Mailbox and all following Buffer messages is 2048 bytes.) The master must use a smaller data length.
Use multiple requests if total data length exceeds the maximum value.
0x420F An X-Buffer message was received containing greater than 1000 bytes of data. The data is ignored. 6
An invalid message type was received when an X-Attach Response was required when establishing a new
0x430C SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established. 7
Improper Write Datagram message format. Series 90-70 slave devices use a different format for this
0x430D
message than Series 90-30 or Series 90-20 slave devices. The master must use the proper message
format for this SNP slave device. (The SNP master in the CMMmodule sends this message as part of the
Establish Datagram COMMREQ command. The datagram has been partially established, but is not usable;
8
the datagram should be cancelled by using the Datagram ID returned by the COMMREQ.)
0x430F The SNP-X slave did not receive a response from the Service Request Processor in the PLC CPU. 9
An invalid next message type value was detected in an X-Attach Response message when establishing a
0x440C new SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established. 10
0x440D A datagram error occurred in a Series 90-70 slave device (dual-port error).
0x440F PLC backplane communications error.
An invalid response code was detected in an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new SNP-X
11
0x450C communication session.
Communications have not been established.
An expected X-Attach Response message was not received within the response timeout interval when
12
0x460C establishing a new SNP-X communication session. The master has retried the X-Attach message twice
without receiving a response.
Communications have not been established. 13
A parity error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an existing SNP-X
0x500C communication session.
Communications have not been established. 14
0x500F A parity error has occurred in a received X-Attach message.

0x510C
A framing or overrun error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an
existing SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established.
A
0x510F A framing or overrun error has occurred in a received X-Attach message.
A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an B
0x520C existing SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established.
0x520F A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred in a received X-Attach message. C
(PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next
page.) D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A29

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables (contd)

A PLC Errors for GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (contd)
Panel Error Code Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
2 An invalid message type was received when an X-Attach Response was required when re-establishing an
0x530C existing SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established.
3 0x530F An invalid Message Type was received when an X-Attach message was required. (For an X-Attach message,
the message type must be 58h = T.)

4 0x540C
An invalid Next Message Type value was detected in an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing
an existing SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established.
An invalid Next Message Type value was detected in a received X-Attach message. (For an X-Attach
5 0x540F message, the Next Message Length must be zero.)
An invalid response code was detected in an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an existing
0x550C SNP-X communication session.
6 0x550F
Communications have not been established.
An invalid request code was detected in a received X-Attach message.
An expected X-Attach Response message was not received within the response timeout interval when re-
7 0x560C establishing an existing SNP-X communication session. The master has retried the X-Attach message twice
without receiving a response. Communications have not been established.
0x600C A parity error has occurred on an X-Response message.
8 0x600F A parity error has occurred in a received X-Request message.
0x610C A framing or overrun error has occurred on an X-Response message.
9 0x610F
0x620C
A framing or overrun error has occurred in a received X-Request message.
A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an X-Response message.
0x620F A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred in a received X-Request message.
10 0x630C An invalid message type was received when an X-Response message was required.
0x640C An invalid next message type value was detected in an X-Response message.
11 0x650C
0x660C
An invalid response code was detected in an X-Response message.
An expected X-Response message was not received within the response time.
0x700C A parity error has occurred on an Intermediate Response message.
12 0x700F A parity error has occurred in a received X-Buffer message.
0x710C A framing or overrun error has occurred on an Intermediate Response message.
13 0x710F
0x720C
A framing or overrun error has occurred in a received X-Buffer message.
A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an Intermediate Response message.
0x720F A BCC(Block Check Code) error has occurred in a received X-Buffer message.
14 0x730C An invalid message type was received when an Intermediate Response message was required.
0x730F An expected X-Buffer message was not received.
A 0x740C
0x750C
An invalid next message type value was detected in an Intermediate Response message.
An invalid response code was detected in an Intermediate Response message.
0x760C An expected Intermediate Response message was not received within the response timeout interval.
B
(PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next
C page.)

A30 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables (contd)

PLC Errors for GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (contd) A
Panel Error Code Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
0x8D0A Bad DOS Version. Must have DOS 2.0, or later, to support the SNP DOS Driver.
2
0x8E0A PC Serial port configured for SNP Master driver is not open; no communication can take place.
0x8F0A OutofSequence SNP message. SNP message type received was not the type expected.
Bad SNP BCC encountered. Transmission was aborted after maximum retries due to a bad Block Check
3
0x900A Code.
0x910A Bad SNP communication. Transmission was aborted after maximum retries due to serial errors (that is,
parity, overrun, or framing errors).
4
No SNP communication. Either communication has been lost or a communication session has not been
0x920A
0xC105
established.
Invalid block state transition.
5
0xC205 The OEM key is NULL (inactive).
0xC305 Text length does not match traffic type. 6
0xC405 Verify with FA Card or EEPROM failed.
0xC505
0xC605
No tasklevel Rack/Slot configuration to read or delete.
Control Program (CP) tasks exist but requestor not logged into main CP.
7
0xC705 Passwords are set to inactive and cannot be enabled or disabled.
0xC805 Password(s) already enabled and can not be forced inactive. 8
0xC905 Login using nonzero buffer size required for block commands.
0xCA05
0xCB05
Device is writeprotected.
A comm or write verify error occurred during save or restore.
9
0xCC05 Data stored on device has been corrupted and is no longer reliable.
0xCD05 Attempt was made to read a device but no data has been stored on it. 10
0xCE05 Specified device has insufficient memory to handle request.
0xCF05
0xD005
Specified device is not available in the system (not present).
One or more PLC modules configured have unsupported revision.
11
0xD105 Packet size or total program size does not match input.
0xD205 Invalid write mode parameter. 12
0xD305 User Program Module (UPM) read or write exceeded block end.
0xD405
0xD505
Mismatch of configuration checksum.
Invalid block name specified in datagram.
13
0xD605 Total datagram connection memory exceeded.
0xD705 Invalid datagram type specified. 14
0xD805 Point length not allowed.
0xD905
0xDA05
Transfer type invalid for this Memory Type selector.
Null pointer to data in Memory Type selector.
A
0xDB05 Invalid Memory Type selector in datagram.
0xDC05 Unable to find connection address. B
0xDD05 Unable to locate given datagram connection ID.
0xDE05
0xDF05
Size of datagram connection invalid.
Invalid datagram connection address.
C
(PLC generated error codes for the GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next D
page.)

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A31

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables (contd)

A PLC Errors for GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (contd)
Panel Error Code Description
2 PLC-499 Hex Value
0xE005 Service in process cannot login.
0xE105 No I/O configuration to read or delete.
3 0xE205
0xE305
IOS could not delete configuration, or bad type.
CPU revision number does not match.

4 0xE405
0xE505
Memory Type for this selector does not exist.
DOS file area not formatted.
0xE605 CPU model number does not match.
5 0xE705
0xE805
Configuration is not valid.
No user memory is available to allocate.

6 0xE905
0xEA05
Memory Type selector not valid in context.
Not logged in to process service request.
0xEB05 Task unable to be deleted.
7 0xEC05
0xED05
Task unable to be created.
VME bus error encountered.

8 0xEE05
0xEF05
Could not return block sizes.
Programmer is already attached.
0xF005 Request only valid in stop mode.
9 0xF105
0xF205
Request only valid from programmer.
Invalid program cannot log in.

10 0xF305
0xF405
I/O configuration mismatch.
Invalid input parameter in request.
0xF505 Invalid password.
11 0xF605
0xF705
Invalid sweep state to set.
Required to log in to a task for service.

12 0xF805
0xF905
Invalid Task Name referenced.
Task address out of range.
0xFA05 Cannot replace I/O module.
13 0xFB05
0xFC05
Cannot clear I/O configuration.
I/O configuration is invalid.

14 0xFD05
0xFE05
Unable to perform auto configuration.
No privilege for attempted operation.
0xFF05 Service Request Error has been aborted.
A
B
C
D

A32 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Mitsubishi FX Protocol PLC Error Codes

Only errors as listed in the Touch Panel Error Code Table shown on page A-3 can occur when A
using the Mitsubishi FX protocol, there are no PLC generated errors.
2
Omron Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation 3
The PLC-499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC.
The PLC-499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value embedded in the message.
This value can be looked up in the specific PLCs error tables to determine the cause of the error. 4
The possible PLC generated error codes for the Omron Host Link and FINS communication
protocol is represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following message example. 5
Omron Error Code PLC-499 Message Example:
6
Error code 0011 returned from
PLC 7
8
9
10
Panel error code PLC-499
showing a hexadecimal value
of 0011 indicates an Framing
11
error. PLC error.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 A33

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Omron Host Link & FINS Protocol PLC Error Code Table
A The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the Omron PLC when using the
Host Link or FINS protocol.
2 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panels screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
3 message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturers documentation for additional information.

4 Panel Error Code

PLC Error Codes for Omron Host Link & FINS
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
5 0x00
0x01
Normal Completion.
Not executable in RUN mode.

6 0x02
0x03
Not executable in MONITOR mode.
Not executable with PROM mounted.
0x04 Address over (data overflow).
7 0x0B
0x0C
Not executable in PROGRAM mode.
Not executable in DEBUG mode.

8 0x0D
0x10
Not executable in LOCAL mode.
Parity error.
0x11 Framing error.
9 0x12
0x13
Overrun.
FCS error.

10 0x14
0x15
Format error (parameter length error).
Entry number data error (parameter error, data code error, data length error).
0x16 Instruction not found.
11 0x18
0x19
Frame length error.
Not executable (due to Un-executable error clear, non-registration of I/O table, etc.).

12 0x20 I/O table generation impossible (unrecognized remote I/O unit, channel over, duplication of optical
transmitting I/O unit).
0xA0 Abort due to parity error in transmit data under process.

13 0xA1
0xA2
Abort due to framing error in transmit data under process.
Abort due to overrun in transmit data under process.
0xA3 Abort due to FCS error in transmit data under process.
14 0xA4 Abort due to format error in transmit data under process.
0xA5 Abort due to frame length error in transmit data under process.

A 0xA8
0xB0
Abort due to entry number data error in transmit data under process.
Un-executable due to program area capacity other than 16k bytes.

B
C
D

A34 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

TOUCH PANEL APPENDIX
RUNTIME ERRORS
B
In This Appendix...
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B2
Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B3
 Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors

Introduction
1 The C-more touch panels have diagnostics built-in to the operating system that monitor various
runtime functions that will display an error message on the panels display indicating that a
B particular error has occurred and what the error represents. The Error Message(s) is displayed
in the upper left area of the display screen. The Runtime Errors are also logged into the panels
Error log under the Information tab in the panels System Setup Screens. The Error Log Code,
3 such as RTE-031, is how the error is identified in the error log. See Chapter 5: System Setup
Screens for additional details. The tables that follow show the possible Runtime Errors and
4 include the error message, log error code, tag error code value, cause, etc.
The user can include in their touch panel project the use of this diagnostic information by using
5 the system tag name SYS ERR ERRORCODE to control displayed screens, operator messages,
etc., and also communicate error information to the PLC or controlling device. If a runtime
error occurs, the SYS ERR ERRORCODE system tag will contain the numeric value shown
6 under the Tag Code Error Value. For example, if a Low Battery runtime error is indicated, then
the screen display will show Low Battery and the SYS ERR ERRORCODE system tag will
7 contain the value 2031. The value of the last runtime error detected will remain in the SYS ERR
ERRORCODE.
If you have difficulty determining the cause of the error, refer to Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
8 for additional help or contact our technical support group at 770-844-4200

9
Error Message
10 Low Battery

11
12
13 Ethernet
Hub or Switch
10/100 Base-T
14 T/
10/
0
T/
AC 10
LN
K
10/
0
T/
AC 10
LN
K
10/
0 Up

5U
T/
AC 10
K
LN Port
link
10/
0
PW
R

AC 10
0
SW
K
LN
10/

E
T/ 0
AC 10
K

H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100 C-more
A
LN

3
2

Ethernet Module Ethernet

R
1

PW
R
PW
+

Touch Panel Port

B
(Bottom View)
C DL06 PLC

D Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru

B2 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors

Runtime Errors
If there is more than one Runtime Error, then the Error Message displayed at the top of the 1
panels screen will display for 3 seconds, then be off for 2 seconds. The next Error Message will
display for the same time increments, continue through any other active runtime error
messages, and then start over. When only one Runtime Error is active, then that message will
B
continuously be displayed until it is no longer active.
3
Tag System
Error Error
No. Log Error Message
Located at upper left of screen Message Error
Code
Screen
Info > Cause 4
Code Tag Value Error
Log Error
5
1 RTE-001 Log Failed. SYS ERR
Not enough Memory Space in %Device% ERRORCODE 2001
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
Error Code
The size of the destination
memory is not large
6
RTE-001 enough to store the data.

MM/DD/YY 7
2 RTE-002 Log Failed.
%Device% cannot be found
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE 2002 HH/MM/SS
Error Code
No device available or
the device is defective.
RTE-002 8
MM/DD/YY Logging the data has
RTE-003 Log Failed. SYS ERR HH/MM/SS failed due to a problem
3 Can not write file - %file% ERRORCODE 2003 Error Code
RTE-003
such as the memory write
protect is enabled.
9
4 RTE-004 Log cache memory is full SYS ERR
ERRORCODE 2004
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
Error Code
The data log buffer in the
SRAM memory is full.
10
RTE-004
Screen Capture 11
MM/DD/YY
1 RTE-011 Capture Failed. SYS ERR
Not enough Memory Space in %Device% ERRORCODE 2011 HH/MM/SS
Error Code
The size of the destination
memory is not large 12
RTE-011 enough to store the data.

MM/DD/YY 13
2 RTE-012 Capture Failed.
%Device% cannot be found
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE 2012 HH/MM/SS
Error Code
No device available or
the device is defective.
RTE-012
MM/DD/YY Logging the data has
14
RTE-013 Capture Failed. SYS ERR HH/MM/SS failed due to a problem
3 Can not write file - %file% ERRORCODE 2013 Error Code
RTE-013
such as the memory write
protect is enabled.
A
Table continued on next page.
B
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 B3

 Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors

Runtime Errors (contd)

1 Error Error Tag System
Error Message Error Screen
No. Log Message Cause
B Code Located at upper left of screen Tag Code
Value
Info >
Error

3 Handshake
A communications
timeout occurred when
4 1 RTE-021 Handshake Timeout Error SYS ERR 2021
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
either a Recipe or
Numeric Entry Object, in
ERRORCODE Error Code which Notification and
RTE-021 Handshake signals are
5 used, failed to complete
the responses.

6 Battery
MM/DD/YY The panels backup battery
SYS ERR HH/MM/SS voltage level has fallen
7 1 RTE-031 Low Battery ERRORCODE 2031 Error Code
RTE-031
below 1.8 VDC and should
be replaced.
e-mail
8 MM/DD/YY An incorrect SMTP
1 RTE-041 E-mail Connection Error %Address% SYS ERR 2041 HH/MM/SS address has been entered
9 ERRORCODE Error Code
RTE-041
into the Touch Panel
Network dialog screen.
MM/DD/YY An incorrect email
10 2 RTE-042 Send E-mail Error %Address% SYS ERR
ERRORCODE 2042 HH/MM/SS
Error Code address has been entered
into the Address Book.
RTE-042
11 Send FTP
MM/DD/YY An incorrect FTP Service
12 1 RTE-051 FTP Connection Error
%Address%&%ID%
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE 2051 HH/MM/SS
Error Code
has been assigned into
the Touch Panel Network
RTE-051 dialog screen.

13 MM/DD/YY Permission to write to the

FTP folder has not been
2 RTE-052 Send FTP Error
%Address%&%ID%
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE 2052 HH/MM/SS
Error Code authorized. The FTP site
may require a user ID and
14 RTE-052 password.
SRAM Error
A SYS ERR
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS Memory in Panel has
1 RTE-500 SRAM Check Sum Error ERRORCODE 2500 Error Code been Corrupted by Power
B RTE-500 Loss, etc.

C
D

B4 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

MOUNTING CLIPS APPENDIX
PRIOR APRIL 2006
C
In This Appendix...
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C2
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C & T6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C3
EA7-T8C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C5
EA7-T10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C7
EA7-T12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C9
EA7-T15C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C11
 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

Introduction
1 The mounting clips supplied with C-more touch panels after April 2006 are slightly different
than the original clips. Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006 has been included in the
2 Hardware User Manual for the end user to have a reference to the drawings and information
pertaining to the original mounting clips. The enclosure mounting thickness range and screw
torque range has remained the same for each type of touch panel. The basic physical
C construction and use of the mounting clips remains the same, as does the various touch panel
cutout dimensions.
4 The 6 touch panels use two long style mounting clips. The new 6 mounting clips have been
redesigned to increase rigidity and also the screw position height has been increased to allow
5 easier placement in the touch panel slots on thicker enclosures.
The 8-15 touch panels, depending on the panels size, use either 6 or 8 smaller style mounting
clips. The new 8-15 mounting clips have been made shorter in height to allow easier
6 installation. Their rigidity remains the same.

7
8 Original Original
6 Mounting Clips 8-15 Mounting Clip
9
10
11
12
13 Newer Newer
6 Mounting Clips 8-15 Mounting Clip
14
A
B
C
D

C2 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C

Original Mounting Clips 1
Dimensions: 2
7.402
[188.0] C
1.500
[38.1]
Gasket
4
0.197
Mounting Clip
(2) places
5
[5.0] Units: inches[mm]
8.047
[204.4]
6
7
8
6.140
[156.0] 5.458
[138.6]
9
10
11
12
13
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges 14
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip A
Enclosure Mounting Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
Thickness Range
6 lower mounting
clip position
0.039 - 0.24 inch
[1 6 mm]
35 ~ 50 oz-in
[0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]
B
6 upper mounting 0.20 - 0.63 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
clip position [5 16 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm] C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 C3

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C

1 Original Mounting Clips
2 Cutout Dimensions:
C 7.460 +0.04
-0.0 Mounting Clip
(2) places
[189.5 +1.0
-0.0]
0.866
4 [22.0]

0.294
5 0.315
[8.0]
[7.5]

0.294
6 5.512 +0.04
-0.0
[7.5] CUTOUT
[140.0 +1.0
-0.0 ] Bezel Outline
7 Cutout Outline
0.315
[8.0] Units: inches[mm]
8
0.866
9 [22.0]

6.413 0.591
10 0.591
[162.9] [15.0]
[15.0]

11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

C4 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T8C
Original Mounting Clips 1
Dimensions: 2
9.159
[232.6] C
Gasket
1.738
[44.1]
4
5
0.315 Units: inches[mm]
[8.0]
10.894
[276.7]
Mounting Clip
(6) places 6
7
8
8.748 6.993
9
[222.2] [177.6]
10
11
12
13
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges 14
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip
A
Screw Torque
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque B
0.039 - 0.20 inch 42 ~ 57 oz-in
8, 10, 12 & 15 [1 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 C5

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T8C
1 Original Mounting Clips
2 Cutout Dimensions:
C 0.394
[10.0]
9.250 +0.04
-0.0
[235.0 +1.0
-0.0]
0.394
[10.0]
0.394
4 0.822
[20.9]
4.625
[117.5]
0.822
[20.9] [10.0]

5
6 Mounting Clip
(6) places
CUTOUT 0.837
7 [21.3]
7.075 +0.04
-0.0
8 Cutout Outline
[179.7 +1.0
-0.0 ]

9 Bezel Outline Units: inches [mm] 3.537

[89.9]

10
11
0.837 0.394
12 [21.3] [10.0]

13
14
A
B
C
D

C6 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T10C
Original Mounting Clips 1
Dimensions: 2
11.820
[300.2] C
Gasket
1.685
[42.8]
4
5
0.394 Units: inches [mm]
[10.0]
13.661
6
[347.0]
Mounting Clip
(6) places 7
8
9
10.669
[271.0] 8.828
[224.2]
10
11
12
13
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
14
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque A
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch
Panel Size
Enclosure
Thickness Range
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
B
Thickness Range

8, 10, 12 & 15 0.039 - 0.20 inch

[1 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm] C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 C7

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T10C
1 Original Mounting Clips
2 Cutout Dimensions:
0.394 11.908 +0.04 0.394
C [10.0]
-0.0
[302.5 +1.0
-0.0] [10.0]

5.954 0.877
4 0.877
[22.3] [151.2] [22.3]

0.876
5 Mounting Clip
(6) places
[22.3]
0.394
[10.0]

6
7
CUTOUT
8
8.917 +0.04
-0.0

9 Cutout Outline
[226.5 +1.0
-0.0 ]

4.459
10 Units: inches [mm]
[113.2]

Bezel Outline
11
12
0.876 0.394
13 [22.3] [10.0]

14
A
B
C
D

C8 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T12C
Original Mounting Clips 1
Dimensions: 2
12.430
[315.7] Gasket C
1.681 4
[42.7]

5
0.394 Units: inches [mm]
Mounting Clip
[10.0]
13.366 (6) places 6
[339.5]
7
8
9
10.088
11.024
[280.0] [256.2] 10
11
12
13
14
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque A
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip B
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
8, 10, 12 & 15 0.039 - 0.20 inch
[1 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
C
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 C9

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T12C
1 Original Mounting Clips
2 Cutout Dimensions:
C 0.354
[9.0]
12.579 +0.04
-0.0
[319.5 +1.0
-0.0 ]
0.354
[9.0]

4 0.394
[10.0]
6.289
[159.7]
0.394
[10.0] 0.354
[9.0]
5
6
Mounting Clip
7 (6) places
CUTOUT
0.394
[10.0]

8 10.236 +0.04
-0.0
[260.0 +1.0
-0.0]

9
10 Units: inches [mm]
5.118
[130.0]
Cutout Outline
11
Bezel Outline
12
0.394 0.354
13 [10.0] [9.0]

14
A
B
C
D

C10 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T15C
Original Mounting Clips 1
Dimensions: 2
14.892
[378.3] C
Gasket
1.654
4
[42.0]
5
0.394 Units: inches[mm]
[10.0]
16.748
6
[425.4] Mounting Clip
(8) places 7
8
9
13.000 11.230
10
[330.2] [285.2]
11
12
13
14
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges A
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip
B
Screw Torque
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque C
0.039 - 0.20 inch 42 ~ 57 oz-in
8, 10, 12 & 15 [1 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
D

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 C11

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T15C
1 Original Mounting Clips
2 Cutout Dimensions:
C 0.395
[10.0]
14.960 +0.04
-0.0
[380.0 +1.0
-0.0 ]
0.395
[10.0]

0.894 7.480 0.894

4 [22.7] [190.0] [22.7] 0.406
[10.3]

5
6 Mounting Clip
(8) places
0.864
[21.9]
7 CUTOUT

11.276 +0.04
8 -0.0
[286.4 +1.0
-0.0 ]

9 Cutout Outline
5.638
[143.2]
Units: inches[mm]
10 Bezel Outline

11
12 0.864
[21.9]
0.406
[10.3]

13
14
A
B
C
D

C12 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

INDEX

6 Adapter Plate, 49
6 Adapter Plate Assembly, 318
6 Adapter Plate Cutout Dimensions, 317, 410
6 Adapter Plate Dimensions, 317, 410
6 Adapter Plate Installation, 318

A
AC Wiring Diagram, 414
AC/DC power adapter, 14, 35
AC/DC Power Adapter Dimensions, 37
AC/DC Power Adapter Installation, 38
AC/DC Power Adapter Specifications, 36
AC/DC Power Adapter Wiring, 35
Accessing the System Setup Screens, 53
no project loaded, 53
System Setup Screens (no password enabled), 55
System Setup Screens (password enabled), 55
with project loaded, 54
Accessories, 32
Accessories at a glance, 34
Accessories Overview, 33
Adapter Plate, 317
Agency Approvals, 412
Analog touch screen, 14
Available Models, 22

B
backlight, 14
Index

C
CF Card Interface Module, 312
CF Card Interface Module Installation, 313
Chemical Compatibility, 224
Comm Port Adapter, 319
Communications Ports, 219
CompactFlash Memory, 314
CompactFlash Memory Card Installation, 315
Conventions Used, 13
Cutout Dimensions, 44
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C, 44
EA7-T8C, 45
EA7-T10C, 46
EA7-T12C, 47
EA7-T15C, 48
cutout template, 43

D
Data Logging Function, 223
Date Code, 15
DC Wiring Diagram, 413
Dimensions, 28
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C, 28
EA7-T8C, 210
EA7-T10C, 212
EA7-T12C, 214
EA7-T15C, 216

E
EA-AC, 114
E-mail client, 14
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48
Error Log Code, B2
Error Message(s), B2
Ethernet Port, 219

i2 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Index

PLC Port, 220

Sound Interface (Audio Line Out), 220
USB Port A, 220
Event Manager, 14
Expansion Assembly, 39
Expansion Assembly Details, 39
Expansion Assembly Dimensions, 39
Expansion Assembly Installation, 310
External Memory Devices, 222
EZTouch, 49
EZTouch Conversion and Mounting, 16
EZTouch Touch Panel Cross Reference to C-more, 17

F
FTP client/server, 14

I
Installation and Wiring, 43
Introduction, 43

L
LED Status Indicator, 413
Logging Media, 223

M
Maintenance, 72
Adjust Touch Panel, 74
Check Error Log, 74
Check Memory Usage, 74
Check Physical Conditions, 73
Check Project Functionality, 75
Check/Adjust Display Brightness or Contrast, 74
Checks from C-more Programming Software, 76
Cleaning the Display Screen, 75
CPU LED indicator, 72

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 i3

Index

Operating Environment, 72
Operating Voltage, 72
Power LED (PWR) indicator, 72
Project Backup, 72
Replace Battery Periodically, 75
Run Tests under System Setup Screens, 73
Status Indicators, 72
Test Beeper/Sound, 73
Test Comm. Port, 73
Test Display, 73
Test Touch Panel, 73
TxD and RxD LED, 72
Marine Use, 412
Memory, 52
Memory Menu, 537
Backup Panel -> Storage, 539
Clear Memory, 547
Project Executed from CompactFlash (CF Slot #1), 538
Reset to Factory Default, 553
Restore Storage -> Panel, 543
Memory Organization, 221
Model Specifications, 23
Mounting Clearances, 218, 411
6 Adapter Plate Assembly, 49
air flow, 411
Mounting Clip Screw Torque, 28, 210, 212, 214, 216, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48
Mounting Clips, 13, 43
New Style, 13
Mounting Clips Prior April 2006, C2
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C, C3
EA7-T10C, C7
EA7-T12C, C9
EA7-T15C, C11
EA7-T8C, C5
Mounting Thickness Ranges, 28, 210, 212, 214, 216

i4 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Index

P
Panel Depth, 32, 37, 39, 319
AC/DC Power Adapter Installed, 37
Expansion Assembly Installed, 39
Panel & PLC error code tables, A2
Allen-Bradley Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation, A7
Allen-Bradley DF1 Protocol PLC Error Code Tables, A8
Allen-Bradley DH485 Protocol PLC Error Code Tables, A10
Allen-Bradley Panel Error Code PLC-496, 497 & 498 Explanation, A12
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol ControlLogix, CompactLogix, and FlexLogix Error Code Tables,
A13
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol MicroLogix 1100, SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter Error Code Tables,
A17
C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table, A3
DirectLOGIC Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation, A4
DirectLOGIC K-Sequence Protocol PLC Error Code Table, A5
DirectLOGIC DirectNET Protocol PLC Error Codes, A5
DirectLOGIC Modbus (Koyo) Protocol PLC Error Code Table, A5
DirectLOGIC ECOM Protocol PLC Error Codes, A6
GE Fanuc 90-30 Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation, A23
GE Fanuc 90-30 SNPX Protocol PLC Error Code Tables, A24
Generic EtherNet IP Protocol PLC Error Codes, A22
Mitsubishi FX Protocol PLC Error Codes, A33
Modbus RTU Protocol PLC Error Code Table, A6
Modbus TCP/IP Protocol PLC Error Code Table, A6
Omron Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation, A33
Omron Host Link & FINS Protocol PLC Error Code Table, A34Part Number Key, 15
PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams, 64
PLC Compatibility Table, 63
PLCs and protocols, 62
Allen-Bradley, 618
DirectLOGIC PLCs RS-232C Serial, 66
DirectLOGIC PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A, 68
DirectLOGIC Universal Converter, p/n F2-UNICON, 613
DirectLOGIC Universal Isolated Network Adapter, p/n FA-ISOCON, 612
GE Fanuc, 622
Mitsubishi, 623

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 i5

Index

Modicon Micro Series, 625

Modicon Modbus RS-232, 625
Modicon Modbus with RJ45, 625
Omron, 624
Ports & Memory Expansion, 29, 211, 213, 215, 217
Power Fault, 414
Power Loss Detection, 223
Power Retention Period, 223
Product Overview, 14
Products with CE marks, 42
Providing Power to the Touch Panel, 413

Q
Quick Start Steps, 19
Step 1 Unpack and Inspect, 19
Step 2 Assemble Temporary Support Stand, 110
Step 3 Install Optional Hardware Accessories, 111
Step 4 Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports, 112
Step 5 Connect Touch Panel to Computer, 113
Step 6 Provide Power to the Touch Panel, 114
Step 7 Access the Touch Panel Setup Screens, 115
Step 8 Choose Touch Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables, 116
Step 9 Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project, 118
Step 10 Connect Touch Panel to PLC, 119

R
Replacement Parts, 91
6 Adapter Plate Gasket Replacement EA-6-ADPTR-GSK, 914
Gasket Replacement Instructions, 914
6 Panel Mounting Clip Replacements EA-BRK-1, 95
Installation Instructions, 95
6-15 Panel Gasket Replacements EA-xx-GSK, 911
Installation Instructions, 911
8-15 Panel Backlight Bulb Replacements EA-xx-BULB, 98
Installation Instructions Example, 98
8-15 Panel Bezel Replacement EA-xx-BEZEL, 912

i6 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Index

Replacement Instructions Example, 912

815 Panel Mounting Clip Replacements EA-BRK-2, 96
Installation Instructions, 96
AC Power Adapter Connector Replacement EA-AC-CON, 97
Battery Replacement D2-BAT-1, 93
Battery Replacement Instructions, 93
DC Panel Power Connector Replacement EA-DC-CON, 97
Replacement Parts at a Glance, 92
Replacement Parts Overview, 92
Runtime Errors, B3
Introduction, B2

S
Safety Guidelines, 42
Screen Covers, 322
Non-glare, 322
Serial Number, 15
Setting, 52
Setting Menu, 518
Adjust Clock, 519
Adjust Display, 520
Adjust Touch Panel, 521
Beeper, 523
IP Address Setting, 524
Specification, 24
12 and 15 Full Feature Models, 27
6 Base Feature Models, 24
6 Full Feature Models, 25
8 and 10 Full Feature Models, 26
Supplemental Manuals, 12
SYS ERR ERRORCODE, B2
System Setup Screens, 51
Error tab, 517
Flowchart, 512
General tab, 514
Information, 52, 514, 515, 516, 517
Introduction, 52

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 i7

Index

Main Menu, 513

Memory tab, 515
Ports tab, 516

T
Tag Code Error Value, B2
Technical Support, 12
Terminal Block Adapter, 320
Test Menu, 52, 525
Ethernet Port Test, 533
PLC Enquiry Test: Ethernet Connection, 534
PLC Enquiry Test: Serial Connection, 531
Serial Port Test, 530
Test Beep/Sound, 535
Test Communication Ports: Ethernet, 532
Test Communication Ports: Serial, 529
Test Display, 527
Test Touch Panel, 526
Troubleshooting, 82
Data not Logging Problems, 816
Display is Blank, 83
Display is Dim, 84
Electrical Noise Problems, 817
IP Address in System Setup Screens displays 0.0.0.0, 813
Loss of Date/Time and Retentive Data, 816
No Communications between Panel and PC, 86
No User Program, 85
Panel Constantly Displays Initializing when Powering up, 816
PLC Protocol Error Codes, 814
Touch Panel does not Power up, 82
Touch Panel Runtime Errors, 815

U
USB Pen Drive, 323
USB Programming Cable, 113

i8 Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07

 Index

W
WARNING, 34
Web server, 14
Wiring Guidelines, 412

Hardware User Manual, 1st Ed., Rev. C, 08/07 i9

 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

FUENTES DE
ALIMENTATION

WESTECH ENGINEERING INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

INTERRUPTOR DE
ETHERNET

WESTECH ENGINEERING INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

AUTOMATAS
PROGRAMABLES
PLCS

WESTECH ENGINEERING INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
ABB Automation products | 2
Status LED Display
CPU Operation and onboard I/O status

Run / Stop Switch

Control CPU operation

Ethernet CPU (In selected models)

With RJ45 Port

COM1
Online access, Modbus RTU master/slave, CS31-Bus
master, ACSII

Integrated onboard I/O

Convenient cost effective solution

ABB Automation products | 3

ABB Automation products | 4
 Click on
Documentation

Opens new
window

Choose AC500 +
CoDeSys

ABB Automation products | 5

 Select open

Select Index Type PM564-T-ETH

and press ENTER

ABB Automation products | 6

 Menu Bar Tool Bar Workspace

Object Message
Organizer Window

ABB Automation products | 7

ABB Automation products | 8
ABB Automation products | 9
ABB Automation products | 10
ABB Automation products | 11
 By default

ABB Automation products | 12

If Internet access is existing CBP shows
by default ABB homepage

ABB Automation products | 13

 1 Choose the
type of CPU

Select where do you

2 want to store the
project

3 Select OK to start.

2 The IO tab will be open on your right

st
window with 2 child tabs. The 1 tab is
nd
IO configuration, Click on the 2 tab for
IO Mapping

To create IO variable for the CPU, go

1 to expand OBIO and then double click
on the IO (Onboard IOs) selection

ABB Automation products | 14

 Click on I/O mapping tab

Click to expand.

Click to expand.

Double click on the cell and give the name

of the IOs as shown.

Double click on the cell and give the name

of the IOs as shown.

ABB Automation products | 15

ABB Automation products | 16
ABB Automation products | 17
 2. Click on the BOX icon

1. Click this field

ABB Automation products | 18

Select ???, and press
F2, the Input assistant
window below will appear

ABB Automation products | 19

 Right click here and
select Assign

ABB Automation products | 20

ABB Automation products | 21
ABB Automation products | 22
ABB Automation products | 23
ABB Automation products | 24
-
-

ABB Automation products | 25

 4 Key in your desired IP address
and subnet mask then click OK

1 Select Local Area

Connection

Select Internet Protocol Choose Properties

2 Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)
3

ABB Automation products | 26

 2 Activate Force IP
settings

Enter now the new IP

3 address, subnet mask
and standard gateway
1 here

ABB Automation products | 27

 Choose
Online

Select Communication
Parameters

Select
Gateway

Choose
Local

ABB Automation products | 28

 Select
New

Define a name for

the connection

Select driver
TCP/IP then click
OK

Enter the new parameters:

IP address: xx.xx.xx.xx
Port: 1201
Motorola byte order: Yes

Then press ENTER and OK

ABB Automation products | 29

 Click on
2 Control Panel

Click on Windows
1 Start Button

ABB Automation products | 30

Select Online

ABB Automation products | 31

 Choose Communication
Parameters

Select
Gateway

Choose Local

Click
Define a name for New
the connection

Select driver Serial

then click OK

ABB Automation products | 32

 Enter the new parameters:

Port: COM number in PC

Baudrate: 19200
Parity: No
Stop bits: 1
Motorola byte order: Yes
Flow Control: Off

Then press ENTER and OK

Select
Online

ABB Automation products | 33

ABB Automation products | 34
Double click on the FALSE state, you will see a blue indication
of TRUE on the right. This information indicates that you want
to set the value to TRUE.

ABB Automation products | 35

ABB Automation products | 36
ABB Automation products | 37
ABB Automation products | 38
 Click
Visualization

ABB Automation products | 39

 Click
icon

ABB Automation products | 40

To put the variable, put your cursor in the
blank and press F2

ABB Automation products | 41

 Similarly, press F2 to bring up the Input
Assistant

ABB Automation products | 42

Click
icon

To bring up the Input Assistant, put your

cursor in the blank and press F2, then
choose the desired variables from the list.

ABB Automation products | 43

ABB Automation products | 44
ABB Automation products | 45
 Type
here

ABB Automation products | 46

 Click on
1 Project

Click on
2 Options
5 Click OK

3 Click on
Desktop

Select the
4 preferred
language

ABB Automation products | 47

ABB Automation products | 48
ABB Automation products | 49
 Right click on AC500 and
select Create Config

ABB Automation products | 50

Click icon

Click icon

ABB Automation products | 51

 Uncheck this box to
view the different
function blocks in
alphabetical order.

ABB Automation products | 52

Click icon

ABB Automation products | 53

 Click icon

ABB Automation products | 54

 Set Coil

Reset Coil

Parallel Contact

ABB Automation products | 55

ABB Automation products | 56
 3 Click on
Diagshow all

Click on PLC
2 Browser

Click on
1 Resource Tab

ABB Automation products | 57

ABB Automation products | 58
ABB Automation products | 59
 Note:

ABB Automation products | 60

 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MEDIDOR DE
FLUJO
MAGNTICO

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex

Overview Design
The sensor is built up of a stainless steel pipe, 2 coils, 2 elec-
trodes, an isolated liner, a housing and one of different flange
connections.
Ex ATEX version for hazardous areas (MAG 3100 Ex only)
High temperature sensor for applications with temperatures
up to 180 C (356 F)
Approvals for PTB, OIML R75 and OIML R117
Meets EEC directives: PED, 97/23/EC pressure directive for
EN1092-1 flanges
Build-in length according to ISO 13359
Individually calibrated on UKAS ISO 17025 accredited cali-
bration facility with a 0.1% uncertainty.
Simple on-site upgrade to IP68/NEMA 6P of a standard sen- 4
sor.

Mode of operation
The flow measuring principle is based on Faradays law of elec-
tromagnetic induction were the sensor converts the flow into an
electrical voltage proportional to the velocity of the flow.

Integration
The complete flowmeter consists of a flow sensor and an asso-
The SITRANS F M MAGFLO MAG 3100 is an electromagnetic
ciated transmitter SITRANS F M MAGFLO MAG 5000, 6000 and
flow sensor in a large variety that meets almost every flow appli-
6000 I.
cation.
The flexible communication concept USM II simplifies integra-
Benefits tion and update to a variety of fieldbus systems such as HART,
PROFIBUS DP & PA, DeviceNet, CANopen, MODBUS
Wide range of sizes: DN 15 ... DN 2000 ( ... 78) RTU/RS485.
Wide pressure range: PN 6 ... PN 100
ANSI Class 150 / 300, AS 2119. On request up to 690 bar
(10000 psi)
Technical specifications
Measuring principle Electromagnetic induction
Wide range of electrode and liner material to fit even the most
extreme process media Excitation frequency
Fully welded construction provides a ruggednes that suits the MAGFLO MAG 3100 DN 15 ... 65 ( 2):
toughest applications and environments 12.5 Hz
Easy commissioning, the SENSORPROM unit automatically DN 80 ... 150 (3 ... 6): 6.25 Hz
updates settings. DN 200 ... 1200 (8 ... 48):
Designed to allow patented MAGFLO in-situ verification using 3.125 Hz
the SENSORPROM fingerprints. DN 1400 ... 2000 (54 ... 78):
1.57 Hz

Application MAGFLO MAG 3100 Ex DN 15 ... 65 ( 2):

6.25 Hz
The main applications of the SITRANS F M MAGFLO electro- DN 80 ... 100 (3 ... 4):
magnetic flow sensors can be found in the following fields: 3.125 Hz
Process industry DN 125 ... 300 (5 ... 12):
1.063 Hz
Chemical industry
DN 350 ... 1200 (14 ... 48):
Steel industry 3.125 Hz
Mining DN 1400 ... 2000 (54" ... 78"):
Utility 1.57 Hz
Power generation & distribution Input
Oil & gas / HPI Nominal size DN 15 DN 2000 (" 78")
Water & waste water Flanges
Standard EN 1092-1, Raised face DN 15 ... 50 ( 2): PN 40
(EN 1092-1, DIN 2501 & BS 4504 (580 psi)
have the same mating dimen- DN 65 ... 150 (2 6): PN 16
sions) (232 psi)
DN 200 ... 1000 (8 40):
PN 10 (145 psi)
DN 1100 ... 2000 (8 78):
PN 6 (87 psi)

Siemens FI 01 2005 4/63

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex

Technical specifications (continued) Test pressure 1.5 x PN (nominal pressure)

Medium conditions
Option DN 25 ... 350 (1 14):
PN 100 (1450 psi) Temperature of medium
DN 50 ... 400 (2 16): PN 63 MAGFLO MAG 3100
(913 psi) Liner
DN 65 ... 1000 (2 40): - Neoprene 0 70 C (32 158 F)
PN 6 (87 psi)
- EPDM (with WRc (Water Re- -10 +95 C (14 203 F)
DN 65 ... 150 (2 6): PN 16 search Council, UK) approval
(232 psi)
- Linatex (rubber) (for tempera- -40 +70 C (-40 +158 F)
DN 65 ... 600 (2 25): tures below 10C (15F) AISI
PN 40 (580 psi) 304 or 316 flanges must be
DN 200 ... 600 (8 24): used)
PN 25 (362 psi) - Ebonite 0 95 C (32 203 F)
DN 200 ... 2000 (8 78):
- PTFE -20 +100 C (-4 +212 F)
4 PN 16 (232 psi)
DN 1200 ... 2000 (48 78): - PTFE high temperature -20 +180 C (-4 +356 F)
PN 10 (145 psi) MAGFLO MAG 3100 Ex
ANSI B16.5 (~BS 1560) ... 24: Class 150 (20 bar Liner (Tx = Temperature classification)
(290 psi)) - Neoprene T3, T4, T5, T6: 0 70 C
... 24: Class 300 (50 bar (32 158 F)
(725 psi))
Higher ratings on request - EPDM (with WRc (Water Re- T3 and T4 : -10 +95C
search Council, UK)) approval (14 203F)
AWWA C-207 28 ... 78: Class D (10 bar)
T5: -10 +90C (14 194F)
AS 2129 ... 48: Table D/E
T6 : -10 +75C
AS 4087 Class 14 (DN 50 ... 1200, 14 bar (-14 +167F)
(203 psi))
- Linatex (rubber) (for tempera- T3, T4, T5, T6: -20 +70C
Class 21 (DN 50 ... 600, 21 bar tures below 10C (15F) AISI (-4 +158F)
(304 psi)) 304 or 316 flanges must be
Class 35 (DN 50 ... 600, 35 bar used)
(508 psi)) - Ebonite T3 and T4: 0 95C
Rated operating conditions (32 203F)
Ambient conditions T5: 0 90C (32 194F)
Ambient temperature T6: 0 75C (32 167F)
Remote transmitter -40 +100 C (-40 +212 F) - PTFE T3 and T4: -20 +100C
(-4 +212F)
Compact transmitter
T5: -20 +90C (-4 +194F)
- MAG 5000/MAG 6000 -20 +50 C (-4 +122 F)
T6: -20 +75C (-4 +167C)
- MAG 6000 I -20 ... +60 C (-4 ... +140 F)
EMC 89/336 EEC
Operating pressure [abs. bar]
(maximum operating pressure Design
decreases with increasing operat- Weight See Dimensional drawings
ing temperature and with stainless
steel flanges) Material
Liner Flange and housing
Neoprene 0.01 ... 100 bar (0.15 ... 1450 psi) - Standard Carbon steel, corrosion resistant
two component coating
EPDM 0.01 ... 40 bar (0.15 ... 580 psi) (min. 150 m)
Linatex 0.01 ... 40 bar (0.15 ... 580 psi) - Option AISI 304 (1.4301) flanges and
Ebonite 0.01 ... 100 bar (0.15 ... 1450 psi) carbon steel housing, coating as
standard
PTFE Teflon
MAGFLO MAG 3100 AISI 316 L (1.4404) flanges and
housing
- DN 15 ... 600 ( 24) Max. 100 C (212 F):
0.3 ... 50 bar (4 ... 725 psi) Measuring pipe AISI 304 (1.4301)
- DN 15 ... 300 ( 12) Max. 180 C (356 F): Electrodes
0.6 ... 50 bar (9 ... 725 psi) - Standard AISI 316 Ti (1.4571)
PTFE Teflon - Option Hastelloy C-276, Platinum/Iridium,
MAGFLO MAG 3100 Ex Titanium, AISI 316 Ti ceramic
- DN 15 ... 600 ( 24) 0.3 40 bar (4580 psi) coated, Tantalum
Mechanical load 18 1000 Hz random, 3.17 G Grounding electrodes Material as measuring electrodes
rms in all directions to except units with PTFE liner
EN 60068-2-36 Cable entries 4 x Pg 13.5
For compact installation with the Certificates and approvals
MAG 6000 I, transmitter to be
supported to avoid tension on Ex-approval sensor DN 15 ... 300: EEx d [ia] [ib] IIB
sensor part. T4 - T6
DN 350 ... 2000: EEx e [ia] IIC T3
Enclosure rating - T6
Standard IP67/NEMA 4X/6 to EN 60529, Conforms to PED 97/23 EC
1 mH2O for 30 min
FM Class 1 Div 2
Option IP68/NEMA 6P to EN 60529,
10 mH2O cont.

4/64 Siemens FI 01 2005

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex

Dimensional drawings
Sensor MAG 3100 compact/remote, MAG 3100 Ex remote

131(5.16) 155(6.10)

PG 13,5

A1
A
4

D1
B
D L TE TC

DN A1) A1 B D1 L2) TC3) TE3) Weight4)

EN 1092-1-201 BS 1560/ AS 2129 E AWWA
ANSI 16.5 AS 4087 C-207
PN 6, PN PN PN PN Class Class Class 14-21- Class D
10, 16 25 40 64 100 150 300 35
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
15 187 338 59 104 200 200 200 - - 200 200 200 - - 6 4
25 187 338 59 104 200 200 200 - 260 200 200 200 - 1.2 6 5
40 197 348 82 124 200 200 200 - 280 200 200 200 - 1.2 6 8
50 205 356 72 139 200 200 200 276 300 200 200 200 - 1.2 6 9
65 212 363 72 154 200 200 200 320 350 200 272 200 - 1.2 6 11
80 222 373 72 174 200 272 272 323 340 272 272 200 - 1.2 6 12
100 242 393 85 214 250 250 250 380 400 250 310 250 - 1.2 6 16
125 255 406 85 239 250 250 250 420 450 250 335 250 - 1.2 6 19
150 276 427 85 282 300 300 300 415 450 300 300 300 - 1.2 6 27
200 304 455 137 338 350 350 350 480 530 350 350 350 - 1.2 8 40
250 332 483 137 393 450 450 450 550 620 450 450 450 - 1.2 8 60
300 357 508 137 444 500 500 500 600 680 500 500 500 - 1.6 8 80
350 362 513 270 451 550 550 550 700 800 550 550 550 - 1.6 8 110
400 387 538 270 502 600 600 600 750 - 600 600 600 - 1.6 10 125
450 418 569 310 563 600 600 600 - - 600 640 600 - 1.6 10 175
500 443 594 350 614 625 625 680 - - 680 730 625 - 1.6 10 200
600 494 645 430 715 750 750 750 - - 820 860 750 - 1.6 10 300
700 544 695 500 816 875 - - - - - - 875 875 2.0 - 350
750 571 722 556 869 - - - - - - - 937 937 2.0 - 380
800 606 757 560 927 1000 - - - - - - 1000 1000 2.0 - 475
900 653 804 630 1032 1125 - - - - - - 1125 1125 2.0 - 560
1000 704 906 670 1136 1250 - - - - - - 1250 1250 2.0 - 700
1100 755 906 770 1238 1375 - - - - - - - - 2.0 - 1200
1200 810 961 792 1348 1500 - - - - - - 1500 1500 2.0 - 1250
1400 925 1076 1000 1675 1750 - - - - - - - - 2.0 - 1753
1500 972 1123 1020 1672 - - - - - - - 1875 1875 3.0 - 2600
1600 1025 1176 1130 1915 2000 - - - - - - - - 3.0 - 2341
1800 1123 1274 1250 1974 2250 - - - - - - - - 3.0 - 3253
2000 1223 1374 1375 2174 2500 - - - - - - - - 3.0 - 4060
1) 13 mm shorter with AISI terminal box (Ex and high temperature)
2) When earthing flanges are used, the thickness of the earthing flange must be added to the build-in length
3) TC = Type C grounding ring, TE = Type E grounding ring
4) Weights are approx. and for PN 16 without transmitter
- Means not available
D = Outside diameter of flange, see flange tables

Siemens FI 01 2005 4/65

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex
Sensor MAG 3100 compact/remote, MAG 3100 Ex remote
Size A1) A1 B D1 L2) TC3) TE3) Weight4)
EN 1092-1-201 ANSI 16.5 AWWA
C-207
PN 6, PN PN PN PN Class Class Class D MAG MAG
10, 16 25 40 64 100 150 300 3100 3100 Ex
[inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [lb] [lb]
7.36 13.31 2.32 4.09 7.87 7.87 7.87 - - 7.87 7.87 - - 0.24 11 24
1 7.36 13.31 2.32 4.09 7.87 7.87 7.87 - 10.24 7.87 7.87 - 0.05 0.24 13 28
1 7.76 13.70 3.23 4.88 7.87 7.87 7.87 - 11.02 7.87 7.87 - 0.05 0.24 17 37
2 8.07 14.01 2.83 5.47 7.87 7.87 7.87 10.87 11.81 7.87 7.87 - 0.05 0.24 28 62
2 8.35 14.29 2.83 6.06 7.87 7.87 7.87 12.60 13.78 7.87 10.71 - 0.05 0.24 30 66
3 8.74 14.69 2.83 6.85 7.87 10.71 10.71 12.72 13.39 10.71 10.71 - 0.05 0.24 33 73
4 4 9.53 15.47 3.35 8.43 9.84 9.84 9.84 14.96 15.75 9.84 12.20 - 0.05 0.24 44 97
5 10.04 15.98 3.35 9.41 9.84 9.84 9.84 16.54 17.72 9.84 13.10 - 0.05 0.24 55 121
6 10.87 16.81 5.39 11.10 11.81 11.81 11.81 16.34 17.72 11.81 11.81 - 0.05 0.24 66 145
8 11.97 17.91 5.39 13.31 13.78 13.78 13.78 18.90 20.87 13.78 13.78 - 0.05 0.31 110 242
10 13.07 19.02 5.39 15.47 17.72 17.72 17.72 21.65 24.41 17.72 17.72 - 0.05 0.31 155 342
12 14.05 20.00 5.39 17.48 19.69 19.69 19.69 23.62 26.77 19.69 19.69 - 0.06 0.31 176 388
14 14.25 20.20 10.63 17.76 21.65 21.65 21.65 27.56 31.50 21.65 21.65 - 0.06 0.31 242 533
16 15.24 21.18 10.63 19.76 23.62 23.62 23.62 29.53 - 23.62 23.62 - 0.06 0.39 275 606
18 16.45 22.40 12.20 22.16 23.62 23.62 23.62 - - 23.62 25.20 - 0.06 0.39 385 849
20 17.44 23.39 13.78 24.17 24.61 24.61 26.77 - - 26.77 28.70 - 0.06 0.39 440 970
24 19.45 25.39 16.93 28.15 29.53 29.53 29.53 - - 32.28 33.80 - 0.06 0.39 660 1455
28 21.42 27.36 19.69 32.13 34.45 - - - - - - 34.5 0.08 - 770 1698
30 22.48 28.43 21.89 34.21 - - - - - - - 36.9 0.08 - 880 1940
32 23.86 29.80 22.05 36.50 39.37 - - - - - - 39.4 0.08 - 1045 2304
36 25.71 31.65 24.80 40.63 44.29 - - - - - - 44.3 0.08 - 1233 2718
40 27.72 35.67 26.38 44.72 49.21 - - - - - - 49.2 0.08 - 1541 3397
42 27.72 35.67 26.38 44.72 49.21 - - - - - - 49.2 0.08 - 1541 3397
44 29.72 35.67 30.31 48.74 - - - - - - - 59.1 0.08 -
48 31.89 37.83 31.18 53.07 59.06 - - - - - - 59.1 0.08 - 2751 6065
54 36.42 42.36 39.37 65.94 68.90 - - - - - - 68.9 0.12 - 3211 7079
60 38.27 44.21 40.15 65.83 - - - - - - - 73.8 0.12 - 3731 8225
66 40.35 46.30 44.49 75.39 78.74 - - - - - - 78.7 0.12 - 4257 9385
72 44.21 50.16 49.21 77.72 88.58 - - - - - - 88.5 0.12 - 5291 11665
78 48.15 54.09 54.13 85.59 98.43 - - - - - - 98.4 0.12 - 7492 16517
1) 0.512 inch shorter with AISI terminal box (Ex and high temperature)
2) When earthing flanges are used, the thickness of the earthing flange must be added to the build-in length
3) TC = Type C grounding ring, TE = Type E grounding ring
4) Weights are for ANSI 150 without transmitter
- Means not available
D = Outside diameter of flange, see flange tables

4/66 Siemens FI 01 2005

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex

 

 

3*

$

$
4

'
%
' / 7( 7
&

DN A1) A1 5)
B D1 L2) TC3) TE3) Weight
4)
EN 1092-1-201 BS 1560/ AS 2129 E AWWA
ANSI 16.5 AS 4087 C-207
PN 6, PN PN PN PN Class Class Class 14-21- Class D
10, 16 25 40 64 100 150 300 35
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kg]
15 187 336.4 59 104 200 200 200 - - 200 200 200 - - 6 4
25 187 336.4 59 104 200 200 200 - 260 200 200 200 - 1.2 6 5
40 197 346.4 82 124 200 200 200 - 280 200 200 200 - 1.2 6 8
50 205 354.4 72 139 200 200 200 276 300 200 200 200 - 1.2 6 9
65 212 361.4 72 154 200 200 200 320 350 200 272 200 - 1.2 6 11
80 222 371.4 72 174 200 272 272 323 340 272 272 200 - 1.2 6 12
100 242 391.4 85 214 250 250 250 380 400 250 310 250 - 1.2 6 16
125 255 404.4 85 239 250 250 250 420 450 250 335 250 - 1.2 6 19
150 276 425.4 85 282 300 300 300 415 450 300 300 300 - 1.2 6 27
200 304 453.5 137 338 350 350 350 480 530 350 350 350 - 1.2 8 40
250 332 481.4 137 393 450 450 450 550 620 450 450 450 - 1.2 8 60
300 357 506.4 137 444 500 500 500 600 680 500 500 500 - 1.6 8 80
350 362 511.1 270 451 550 550 550 700 800 550 550 550 - 1.6 8 110
400 387 536.4 270 502 600 600 600 750 - 600 600 600 - 1.6 10 125
450 418 567.4 310 563 600 600 600 - - 600 640 600 - 1.6 10 175
500 443 592.4 350 614 625 625 680 - - 680 730 625 - 1.6 10 200
600 494 643.4 430 715 750 750 750 - - 820 860 750 - 1.6 10 300
700 544 693.4 500 816 875 - - - - - - 875 875 2.0 - 350
750 571 720.4 556 869 - - - - - - - 937 937 2.0 - 380
800 606 755.4 560 927 1000 - - - - - - 1000 1000 2.0 - 475
900 653 802.4 630 1032 1125 - - - - - - 1125 1125 2.0 - 560
1000 704 853.4 670 1136 1250 - - - - - - 1250 1250 2.0 - 700
1100 755 904.4 770 1238 1375 - - - - - - - - 2.0 - 1200
1200 810 959.4 792 1348 1500 - - - - - - 1500 1500 2.0 - 1250
1400 925 1074.4 1000 1675 1750 - - - - - - - - 2.0 - 1753
1500 972 1121.4 1020 1672 - - - - - - - 1875 1875 3.0 - 2600
1600 1025 1174.4 1130 1915 2000 - - - - - - - - 3.0 - 2341
1800 1123 1272.4 1250 1974 2250 - - - - - - - - 3.0 - 3253
2000 1223 1372.4 1375 2174 2500 - - - - - - - - 3.0 - 4060
1) 13 mm shorter with AISI terminal box (Ex and high temperature) 5) Ex version 8 mm higher
2) When earthing flanges are used, the thickness of the earthing flange must - Means not available
be added to the build-in length D = Outside diameter of flange, see flange tables
3) TC = Type C grounding ring, TE = Type E grounding ring
4) Weights are approx. and for PN 16 without transmitter

Siemens FI 01 2005 4/67

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex
Sensor MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex, integral or remote mount and separate
Size A1) A15) B D1 L2) TC3) TE3) Weight4)
EN 1092-1-201 ANSI 16.5 AWWA
C-207
PN 6, PN PN PN PN Class Class Class D MAG MAG
10, 16 25 40 64 100 150 300 3100 3100 Ex
[inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [inch] [lb] [lb]
7.36 13.31 2.32 4.09 7.87 7.87 7.87 - - 7.87 7.87 - - 0.24 11 24
1 7.36 13.31 2.32 4.09 7.87 7.87 7.87 - 10.24 7.87 7.87 - 0.05 0.24 13 28
1 7.76 13.70 3.23 4.88 7.87 7.87 7.87 - 11.02 7.87 7.87 - 0.05 0.24 17 37
2 8.07 14.01 2.83 5.47 7.87 7.87 7.87 10.87 11.81 7.87 7.87 - 0.05 0.24 28 62
2 8.35 14.29 2.83 6.06 7.87 7.87 7.87 12.60 13.78 7.87 10.71 - 0.05 0.24 30 66
3 8.74 14.69 2.83 6.85 7.87 10.71 10.71 12.72 13.39 10.71 10.71 - 0.05 0.24 33 73
4 4 9.53 15.47 3.35 8.43 9.84 9.84 9.84 14.96 15.75 9.84 12.20 - 0.05 0.24 44 97
5 10.04 15.98 3.35 9.41 9.84 9.84 9.84 16.54 17.72 9.84 13.10 - 0.05 0.24 55 121
6 10.87 16.81 5.39 11.10 11.81 11.81 11.81 16.34 17.72 11.81 11.81 - 0.05 0.24 66 145
8 11.97 17.91 5.39 13.31 13.78 13.78 13.78 18.90 20.87 13.78 13.78 - 0.05 0.31 110 242
10 13.07 19.02 5.39 15.47 17.72 17.72 17.72 21.65 24.41 17.72 17.72 - 0.05 0.31 155 342
12 14.05 20.00 5.39 17.48 19.69 19.69 19.69 23.62 26.77 19.69 19.69 - 0.06 0.31 176 388
14 14.25 20.20 10.63 17.76 21.65 21.65 21.65 27.56 31.50 21.65 21.65 - 0.06 0.31 242 533
16 15.24 21.18 10.63 19.76 23.62 23.62 23.62 29.53 - 23.62 23.62 - 0.06 0.39 275 606
18 16.45 22.40 12.20 22.16 23.62 23.62 23.62 - - 23.62 25.20 - 0.06 0.39 385 849
20 17.44 23.39 13.78 24.17 24.61 24.61 26.77 - - 26.77 28.70 - 0.06 0.39 440 970
24 19.45 25.39 16.93 28.15 29.53 29.53 29.53 - - 32.28 33.80 - 0.06 0.39 660 1455
28 21.42 27.36 19.69 32.13 34.45 - - - - - - 34.5 0.08 - 770 1698
30 22.48 28.43 21.89 34.21 - - - - - - - 36.9 0.08 - 880 1940
32 23.86 29.80 22.05 36.50 39.37 - - - - - - 39.4 0.08 - 1045 2304
36 25.71 31.65 24.80 40.63 44.29 - - - - - - 44.3 0.08 - 1233 2718
40 27.72 35.67 26.38 44.72 49.21 - - - - - - 49.2 0.08 - 1541 3397
42 27.72 35.67 26.38 44.72 49.21 - - - - - - 49.2 0.08 - 1541 3397
44 29.72 35.67 30.31 48.74 - - - - - - - 59.1 0.08 -
48 31.89 37.83 31.18 53.07 59.06 - - - - - - 59.1 0.08 - 2751 6065
54 36.42 42.36 39.37 65.94 68.90 - - - - - - 68.9 0.12 - 3211 7079
60 38.27 44.21 40.15 65.83 - - - - - - - 73.8 0.12 - 3731 8225
66 40.35 46.30 44.49 75.39 78.74 - - - - - - 78.7 0.12 - 4257 9385
72 44.21 50.16 49.21 77.72 88.58 - - - - - - 88.5 0.12 - 5291 11665
78 48.15 54.09 54.13 85.59 98.43 - - - - - - 98.4 0.12 - 7492 16517
1) 0.512 inch shorter with AISI terminal box (Ex and high temperature)
2) When earthing flanges are used, the thickness of the earthing flange must be added to the build-in length
3) TC = Type C grounding ring, TE = Type E grounding ring
4) Weights are for ANSI 150 without transmitter
- Means not available
D = Outside diameter of flange, see flange tables

4/68 Siemens FI 01 2005

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex
Selection and Ordering data Order No. Selection and Ordering data Order No.
Flowsensor SITRANS F M Flowsensor SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100 7 ME 6 3 1 0 - MAGFLO MAG 3100 7 ME 6 3 1 0 -
77777 - 77A 0 777 77777 - 77A 0 777
Diameter Flange material
DN 15 () } 1V Carbon steel flanges } 1
DN 25 (1) } 2D Stainless steel flanges, AISI 304 2
DN 40 (1) } 2R Stainless steel flanges and sensor body, 3
AISI 316L, polished
DN 50 (2) } 2Y
DN 65 (2) } 3F Liner material
DN 80 (3) } 3M Neoprene 1
DN 100 (4) } 3T EPDM 2
}
DN 125 (5)
DN 150 (6)
} 4B
} 4H
PTFE (DN 300, PN 50 bar /
12, PN 725 psi),
PTFE (350 DN 600, PN 40 bar /
3
4
DN 200 (8) } 4P 14 DN 24, PN 580 psi)
DN 250 (10) } 4V
Ebonite 4
DN 300 (12) 5D
Linatex (PN 40 bar(580 psi)) 5
DN 350 (14) 5K
Electrode material
DN 400 (16) 5R (grounding electrodes not for PTFE lined)
DN 450 (18) 5Y
AISI 316 TI 1
DN 500 (20) 6F Hastelloy C276 } 2
DN 600 (24) 6P Platinum (no PE electrodes) 3
DN 700 (28) 6Y
Titanium 4
DN 750 (30) 7D Tantalum (no PE electrodes) 5
DN 800 (32) 7H
DN 900 (36) 7M Transmitter

DN 1000 (40) 7R No transmitter } A

DN 1050 (42) 7U MAG 6000 industry, 18 ... 220 V, standard C
DN 1100 (44) 7V } Available ex stock.
DN 1200 (48) 8B
DN 1400 (54) 8F
Additional information Order code
DN 1500 (60) 8K
Please add -Z to Order No. and specify Order
DN 1600 (66) 8P code(s) and plain text.
DN 1800 (72) 8T
Customer specific converter setup Y20
DN 2000 (78) 8Y
Tag name made, stainless steel fixed with SS wire Y17
Flange norm and pressure rating
(add plain text)
to EN 1092-1
Tag name plate, plastic (self adhesive) Y18
PN 6 (DN 65 ... 2000 (2 ... 78)) A
PN 10 (DN 200 ... 2000 (8 ... 78)) } B Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.1 C15
PN 16 (DN 65 ... 2000 (2 ... 78)) } C Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.2 C14
PN 16, non PED (DN 700 ... 2000 D Power cable wired, specify cable order no. Y40
(28 ... 78))
PN 25 (DN 200 ... 600 (8 ... 24)) E Junction box IP68 NEMA 4X/6P with wired cable Y41
PN 40 (DN 15 ... 600 ( ... 24)) F Customer specific test Y90
PN 63 (DN 50 ... 400 (2 ... 16)), not PTFE G Special version with order no/date (add desired text) Y99
PN 100 (DN 25 ... 350 (1 ... 12)), not PTFE H
to ANSI B16.5 Description Order No. Symbol
class 150 ( ... 24) J HART (for MAG 6000 I/Ex) FDK:085U0321
class 300 ( ... 24) K
MODBUS RTU/RS485 FDK:085U0234
to AWWA C207
PROFIBUS PA FDK:085U0232
class D (28 ... 78) L
PROFIBUS DP FDK:085U0230
to AS
2129 M CANopen FDK:085U0228
4087, class 14 (DN 50 ... 1200 (2 ... 48)) N DeviceNet FDK:085U0229
4087, class 21 (DN 50 ... 600 (2 ... 24)) P
4087, class 35 (DN 50 ... 600 (2 ... 24)) Q

Siemens FI 01 2005 4/69

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex

Ordering Data Order No. Additional information Order code

Flowsensor SITRANS F M Please add -Z to Order No. and specify Order
code(s) and plain text.
MAGFLO MAG 3100 High Temperature 7 ME 6 3 2 0 -
PTFE lined Tag name made, stainless steel fixed with SS wire Y17
77777 - 7AA 0 777 (add plain text)
Diameter Tag name plate, plastic (self adhesive) Y18
DN 15 () 1V Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.1 C15
DN 25 (1) 2D
Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.2 C14
DN 40 (1) 2R
Power cable wired, specify cable order no. Y40
DN 50 (2) 2Y
DN 65 (2) 3F Junction box IP68 NEMA 4X/6P with wired cable Y41
DN 80 (3) 3M Customer specific test Y90
DN 100 (4) 3T Special version with order no/date (add desired text) Y99
4 DN 125 (5)
DN 150 (6)
4B
4H
DN 200 (8) 4P
DN 250 (10) 4V
DN 300 (12) 5D
Flange norm and pressure rating
to EN 1092-1
PN 10 (DN 200 ... 300 (8 ... 12)) B
PN 16 (DN 65 ... 300 (2 ... 12)) C
PN 25 (DN 200 ... 300 (8 ... 12)) E
PN 40 (DN 15 ... 300 ( ... 12)) F
to ANSI B16.5
class 150 ( ... 12) J
class 300 ( ... 12) K
to AS
2129 M
4087, class 14 (DN 50 ... 300 (2 ... 12)) N
4087, class 21 (DN 50 ... 300 (2 ... 12)) P
4087, class 35 (DN 50 ... 300 (2 ... 12)) Q
Flange material
Carbon steel flanges 1
Stainless steel flanges, AISI 304 2
Stainless steel flanges and sensor body, 3
AISI 316L, polished
Liner material
PTFE (DN 300 (12), PN 50 bar (725 psi)) 3
Electrode material
Grounding electrodes not for PTFE lined
AISI 316 TI 1
Hastelloy C276 2
Platinum (No PE electrodes) 3
Titanium 4
Tantalum (No PE electrodes) 5

4/70 Siemens FI 01 2005

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex
Selection and Ordering data Order No. Selection and Ordering data Order No.
Flowsensor SITRANS F M Flowsensor SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100 Ex, ATEX 7 ME 6 3 3 0 - MAGFLO MAG 3100 Ex, ATEX 7 ME 6 3 3 0 -
77777 - 777 0 777 77777 - 777 0 777
Diameter Flange material
DN 15 () 1V Carbon steel flanges 1
DN 25 (1) 2D Stainless steel flanges, AISI 304 2
DN 40 (1) 2R Stainless steel flanges and sensor body, 3
AISI 316L, polished
DN 50 (2) 2Y
DN 65 (2) 3F Liner material
DN 80 (3) 3M Neoprene 1
DN 100 (4) 3T EPDM 2
DN 125 (5)
DN 150 (6)
4B
4H
PTFE (DN 300, PN 50 bar /
12, PN 725 psi),
PTFE (350 DN 600, PN 40 bar /
3
4
DN 200 (8) 4P 14 DN 24, PN 580 psi)
DN 250 (10) 4V
DN 300 (12) 5D Ebonite 4
Linatex (PN 40 bar(580 psi)) 5
DN 350 (14) 5K
DN 400 (16) 5R Electrode material
(grounding electrodes not for PTFE lined)
DN 450 (18) 5Y
AISI 316 TI 1
DN 500 (20) 6F
Hastelloy C276 2
DN 600 (24) 6P
Platinum (no PE electrodes) 3
DN 700 (28) 6Y
Titanium 4
DN 750 (30) 7D
Tantalum (no PE electrodes) 5
DN 800 (32) 7H
DN 900 (36) 7M Transmitter
DN 1000 (40) 7R No transmitter A
DN 1050 (42) 7U MAG 6000 industry, 18 V ... 30 V DC, ATEX D
DN 1100 (44) 7V MAG 6000 industry, 115 V ... 230 V, ATEX (E)
(pending)
DN 1200 (48) 8B
Communication
DN 1400 (54) 8F
DN 1500 (60) 8K No communication A
DN 1600 (66) 8P HART B
DN 1800 (72) 8T PROFIBUS PA C
DN 2000 (78) 8Y
Flange norm and pressure rating Additional information Order code
Please add -Z to Order No. and specify Order
to EN 1092-1
code(s) and plain text.
PN 6 (DN 65 ... 2000 (2 ... 78)) A
PN 10 (DN 200 ... 2000 (8 ... 78)) B Customer specific converter setup Y20
PN 16 (DN 65 ... 2000 (2 ... 78)) C Tag name made, stainless steel fixed with SS wire Y17
PN 16, non PED (DN 700 ... 2000 (add plain text)
D
(28 ... 78)) Tag name plate, plastic (self adhesive) Y18
PN 25 (DN 200 ... 600 (8 ... 24)) E
PN 40 (DN 15 ... 600 ( ... 24)) F Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.1 C15

PN 63 (DN 50 ... 400 (2 ... 16)), not PTFE G Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.2 C14
PN 100 (DN 25 ... 350 (1 ... 12)), not PTFE H Power cable wired, specify cable order no. Y40
to ANSI B16.5 Junction box IP68 with wired cable Y41
class 150 ( ... 24) J Customer specific test Y90
class 300 ( ... 24) K
Special version with order no/date (add desired text) Y99
to AWWA C207
class D (28 ... 78) L
to AS
2129 M
4087, class 14 (DN 50 ... 1200 (2 ... 48)) N
4087, class 21 (DN 50 ... 600 (2 ... 24)) P
4087, class 35 (DN 50 ... 600 (2 ... 24)) Q

Siemens FI 01 2005 4/71

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex

Selection and Ordering data

Options and accessories for Sensors MAGFLO MAG 3100
AISI 304 Earthing and protection flanges type C for all liners except
PTFE
EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
DN PN 06 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 40
Order No. Order No. Order No. Order No. Order No.
DN 25 FDK:083N8361
DN 40 FDK:083N8362
DN 50 FDK:083N8344
DN 65 FDK:083N8345 FDK:083N8345 FDK:083N8345
DN 80 FDK:083N8347 FDK:083N8347 FDK:083N8347

4 DN 100
DN 125
FDK:083N8070
FDK:083N8071
FDK:083N8025
FDK:083N8071
FDK:083N8025
FDK:083N8071
DN 150 FDK:083N8072 FDK:083N8008 FDK:083N8008
DN 200 FDK:083N8074 FDK:083N8011 FDK:083N8011 FDK:083N8011 FDK:083N8075
DN 250 FDK:083N8078 FDK:083N8013 FDK:083N8013 FDK:083N8013 FDK:083N8079
DN 300 FDK:083N8080 FDK:083N8012 FDK:083N8012 FDK:083N8081 FDK:083N8082
DN 350 FDK:083N8083 FDK:083N8039 FDK:083N8039 FDK:083N8084 FDK:083N8085
DN 400 FDK:083N8099 FDK:083N8100 FDK:083N8100 FDK:083N8101 FDK:083N8102
DN 450 FDK:083N8103 FDK:083N8103 FDK:083N8104 FDK:083N8104 FDK:083N8105
DN 500 FDK:083N8107 FDK:083N8107 FDK:083N8108 FDK:083N8108 FDK:083N8109
DN 600 FDK:083N8111 FDK:083N8111 FDK:083N8112 FDK:083N8112
DN 700 FDK:083N8300 FDK:083N8294 FDK:083N8294
DN 800 FDK:083N8303 FDK:083N8304 FDK:083N8304
DN 900 FDK:083N8306 FDK:083N8307 FDK:083N8307
DN 1000 FDK:083N8309 FDK:083N8310 FDK:083N8310
DN 1100 - FDK:083N8367 FDK:083N8367
DN 1200 FDK:083N8312 FDK:083N8313 FDK:083N8313

Selection and Ordering data Selection and Ordering data Order No.
Option and accessories for Sensors MAGFLO MAG 3100 Option and accessories for Sensors
MAGFLO MAG 3100
AISI 304 Earthing and protection flanges type C for all liners except
PTFE AISI 304 Earthing and protection flanges type
C for all liners except PTFE
Size ANSI
AS2129, Table E
Class 150 Class 300
DN 25 FDK:083N8361
Order No. Order No.
DN 40 FDK:083N8362
1 FDK:083N8361 FDK:083N8361 DN 50 FDK:083N8344
1 FDK:083N8362 FDK:083N8362
DN 65 FDK:083N8346
2 FDK:083N8344 FDK:083N8344
DN 80 FDK:083N8347
2 FDK:083N8345 FDK:083N8345 DN 100 FDK:083N8025
3 FDK:083N8347 FDK:083N8347
DN 125 FDK:083N8071
4 FDK:083N8025 FDK:083N8025
DN 150 FDK:083N8008
5 FDK:083N8071 FDK:083N8071 DN 200 FDK:083N8011
6 FDK:083N8008 FDK:083N8073
DN 250 FDK:083N8013
8 FDK:083N8011 FDK:083N8076
DN 300 FDK:083N8012
10 FDK:083N8013 FDK:083N8079 DN 350 FDK:083N8039
12 FDK:083N8012 FDK:083N8082
DN 400 FDK:083N8100
14 FDK:083N8039 FDK:083N8085
DN 450 FDK:083N8104
16 FDK:083N8100 FDK:083N8102 DN 500 FDK:083N8108
18 FDK:083N8104 FDK:083N8106
DN 600 FDK:083N8113
20 FDK:083N8107 FDK:083N8110
DN 750 FDK:083N8366
24 FDK:083N8113 FDK:083N8114
DN 1100 FDK:083N8367

4/72 Siemens FI 01 2005

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex

Selection and Ordering data

Option and accessories for Sensors MAGFLO MAG 3100
AISI 316 Earthing and protection flanges type E for all PTFE liners
EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
DN PN 06 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 40
Order No. Order No. Order No. Order No. Order No.
DN 15 FDK:083N8365
DN 25 FDK:083N8271
DN 40 FDK:083N8278
DN 50 FDK:083N8282
DN 65 FDK:083N8284 FDK:083N8285 FDK:083N8286
DN 80 FDK:083N8288 FDK:083N8289 FDK:083N8290
DN 100
DN 125
FDK:083N8116
FDK:083N8120
FDK:083N8117
FDK:083N8121
FDK:083N8118
FDK:083N8122
4
DN 150 FDK:083N8124 FDK:083N8125 FDK:083N8126
DN 200 FDK:083N8129 FDK:083N8130 FDK:083N8130 FDK:083N8131 FDK:083N8132
DN 250 FDK:083N8135 FDK:083N8136 FDK:083N8137 FDK:083N8138 FDK:083N8139
DN 300 FDK:083N8144 FDK:083N8144 FDK:083N8145 FDK:083N8146 FDK:083N8147
DN 350 FDK:083N8152 FDK:083N8153 FDK:083N8154 FDK:083N8155 FDK:083N8156
DN 400 FDK:083N8160 FDK:083N8161 FDK:083N8162 FDK:083N8163 FDK:083N8164
DN 450 FDK:083N8168 FDK:083N8169 FDK:083N8170 FDK:083N8171 FDK:083N8172
DN 500 FDK:083N8177 FDK:083N8178 FDK:083N8179 FDK:083N8180 FDK:083N8181
DN 600 FDK:083N8186 FDK:083N8187 FDK:083N8188 FDK:083N8189
Protection of PTFE liner use 2 pcs.
Earthing of PTFE lined flowmeter use 1 pcs.

Selection and Ordering data Selection and Ordering data Order No.
Option and accessories for Sensors MAGFLO MAG 3100 Option and accessories for Sensors
MAGFLO MAG 3100
AISI 316 Earthing and protection flanges type E for PTFE liners
AISI 316 Earthing and protection flanges type
Size ANSI E for PTFE liners
Class 150 Class 300 AS2129, Table E
Order No. Order No. DN
FDK:083N8365 FDK:083N8365 DN 15 FDK:083N8365
1 FDK:083N8272 FDK:083N8272 DN 25 FDK:083N8272
1 FDK:083N8279 FDK:083N8279 DN 40 FDK:083N8280
2 FDK:083N8283 FDK:083N8283 DN 50 FDK:083N8281
2 FDK:083N8287 FDK:083N8287 DN 65 FDK:083N8284
3 FDK:083N8291 FDK:083N8292 DN 80 FDK:083N8293
4 FDK:083N8118 FDK:083N8119 DN 100 FDK:083N8117
5 FDK:083N8122 FDK:083N8123 DN 125 FDK:083N8121
6 FDK:083N8126 FDK:083N8127 DN 150 FDK:083N8128
8 FDK:083N8370 FDK:083N8133 DN 200 FDK:083N8134
10 FDK:083N8140 FDK:083N8141 DN 250 FDK:083N8143
12 FDK:083N8148 FDK:083N8149 DN 300 FDK:083N8151
14 FDK:083N8157 FDK:083N8158 DN 350 FDK:083N8153
16 FDK:083N8165 FDK:083N8166 DN 400 FDK:083N8161
18 FDK:083N8173 FDK:083N8174 DN 450 FDK:083N8176
20 FDK:083N8182 FDK:083N8183 DN 500 FDK:083N8185
24 FDK:083N8190 FDK:083N8191 DN 600 FDK:083N8193
Protection of PTFE liner use 2 pcs. Protection of PTFE liner use 2 pcs.
Earthing of PTFE lined flowmeter use 1 pcs. Earthing of PTFE lined flowmeter use 1 pcs.

Siemens FI 01 2005 4/73

 SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
MAGFLO MAG 3100/ MAG 3100 Ex

Further Designs Order No.

SITRANS FM MAGFLO
Calibrations and Recalibrations
Recalibration
Std. prod. cal. matched pair
3 ... 65 (3 ... 2 inch) FDK:085F7302
80 ... 150 (3 ... 6 inch) FDK:085F7303
200 ... 500 (8 ... 20 inch) FDK:085F7304
600 ... 1200 (24 ... 48 inch) FDK:085F7305
Customer specified, matched pair
3 ... 65 (3 ... 2 inch) FDK:085F7377
80 ... 150 (3 ... 6 inch) FDK:085F7378
200 ... 500 (8 ... 20 inch) FDK:085F7379
4 600 ... 1200 (24 ... 48 inch)
Accredited Siemens, EN 45 001 1), matched
FDK:085F7380

pairs
3 ... 65 (3 ... 2 inch) FDK:085F7387
80 ... 150 (3 ... 6 inch) FDK:085F7388
200 ... 500 (8 ... 20 inch) FDK:085F7389
600 ... 1200 (24 ... 48 inch) FDK:085F7390
Accredited Delft, EN 45 001 1), matched pairs
80 ... 150 (3 ... 6 inch) FDK:085F7393
200 ... 500 (8 ... 20 inch) FDK:085F7394
600 ... 1200 (24 ... 48 inch) FDK:085F7395
Add on
Witness
3 ... 65 (3 ... 2 inch) FDK:085F7361
80 ... 150 (3 ... 6 inch) FDK:085F7361
200 ... 500 (8 ... 20 inch) FDK:085F7361
600 ... 1200 (24 ... 48 inch) FDK:085F7361
1)
ISO 17025 Accredation is used as norm for NKO (Netherlands), UKAS
(Great Britain) and DANAK (Denmark)

For recalibration return document must be attached.

Other flowmeter marks and principles on enquiry ( Typically + 30 % ).
For calibration of more meters with the same dimension discount can be
granted.

4/74 Siemens FI 01 2005

 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

SENSOR DE
NIVEL
ULTRASNICO

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 Water & Wastewater

Royce Interface Level Analyzer

and Sensors
 Model 2511A Interface Level Analyzer
The Model 2511A is capable of having the ultrasonic speed of sound
signal from its transducers changed by the user in applications where
liquid mediums other than water are in use. It also has four
setpoint relays which can each be used as either a high or low
setpoint. A serial output is available for the purpose of tying a
number of the units to a central process control computer.

APPLICATIONS
Waste Treatment Clarifiers; Primaries, Secondaries,
Gravity Thickeners
Petroleum/Asphalt Separation Tanks
Pulp & Paper Liquor Tanks
Potable Water Clarifiers
Raw Water Clarifiers
Lamella Clarifiers
Precious Metal Separators
Any Tank with a Liquid/Solid Interface
MODEL 2511A ANALYZER Mining Clarifiers
Brine Tanks
The Royce Interface Level Analyzer makes it possible to reliably
Slurry Tanks
monitor and control the solid/liquid interfaces in settling tanks and
clarifiers regardless of the size of the plant, process or budgetary Settling Tanks
constraints. The analyzer measures and outputs clarity as well.
FEATURES
The Royce Interface Level Analyzer uses an ultrasonic ranging Measures both interface and Clarity
technique to measure the depth of interfaces within the tank. No Moving parts, no maintenance, no recalibration required
The 25 series sensors are available in polyurethane for standard
Surface skimmer friendly
applications and Kynar for high temperature or chemical applications.
The sensor is mounted just below the surface of the water. Royce Microprocessor based electronics
offers a hinged bracket sensor mounting option that accommodates Back-Lit LCD displays
surface skimmer passage automatically with the rotation of the rake. Full featured set point relays available
Simple user friendly menu driven programming
Numerical and graphical displays

2
 MODEL 2511A

The graphical display on the Model 2511A provides at least three relays, and remote outputs are all under direct microprocessor
very useful functions: control. As a result, data is scaled easily to suit the specific needs
of the customer.
1. During start up, the customer is instructed, step by step,
through the programming parameters which make the Separate back lit, digital and graphical displays provide the
analyzer operable numerical location of the desired solids interface, as well as a
profile of the entire clarifier in real time. This profile visually depicts
2. Profiles the entire liquid column of the tank, showing all solids each interface in the clarifier and labels their individual levels.
interfaces. This will continually update stored information as The amount of ultrasonic energy required for the reading is also
sounding data is revised shown on the graphical display; this informs the user of the
relative signal absorption present in the clarifier at the time
3. A trend of the interface level of interest, covering up to the of the reading.
last 24 hours, will continually be updated and available to the
graphical display with the press of a button. The fiberglass NEMA 4X instrument enclosure can be mounted
on a vertical or horizontal handrail, or a wall. The ultrasonic sensor
The microprocessor in the instrument is also used to provide with 25 feet of cable mounts on either a fixed support or a swing
a flexible, convenient customer interface with simplified setup, out bracket. A number of different sensor designs are available
calibration, and troubleshooting procedures. The displays, setpoint for applications in harsh environment clarifiers and washers.

MODEL 2511A SPECIFICATIONS

Tank Level Ranges: Enclosures:

1 to 99 feet, in feet, meters, % depth NEMA 4X

Dead Zones: Cabling Limitations:

1 foot from sensor and 2 inches above tank bottom Sensor to Transceiver distance, 75 feet, maximum
Transceiver to instrument distance, 750 feet, shielded cable
Level Resolution:
0.1 feet to 25 depth Outputs:
0.2 feet to 50 depth 4 20 mA isolated, can be scaled to any range
0.3 feet to 75 depth 4 20 mA isolated, relative clarity of top four feet of tank
0.4 Feet to 100 depth Digital Serial Interface either RS 232 or RS 485.

Stability: Relays:
0.1% per degree centigrade Up to 4 Standard setpoint relays with programmable
hysteresis form C rated 250 VAC at 6 Amps resistive
Sensor Ambient Conditions:
Temperature, -30 to 80C Additional Features:
High Temperature Sensor, -30 to 105C Microprocessor controlled
Programmable digital display
Instrument Ambient Conditions: Self test and automatic calibration
Temperature, -10 to 50C Help Screens and graphic display
with heater, -40 to 50C Compensation for nonstandard speed of sound
Relative Humidity, 5 to 100%, non-condensing

Power Requirements:
115/230 VAC 15%, 50/60 HZ

3
 HOW IT WORKS

The Series 25 Sensor is mounted so that it is suspended just below This profile is created on an averaging basis so that the incidental
the surface of the tank liquid. (See SENSOR AND TRANSCEIVER reflections from passing debris or a passing skimmer will not
MOUNTING). cause false readings. The analyzer interprets these arithmetic
profiles to determine the position of all the layers in the tank.
The dual crystal sensor, Model 25DN, uses one transducer to send Once the instruments software identifies the interface of interest
and one transducer to receive. This gives the highest resolution (programmed by the operator during setup) the depth of that
and minimum dead band. All the single crystal sensors operate by interface is digitally displayed on the numerical LCD display.
both transmitting and receiving. In both cases, the crystal(s) operate
under the analyzers control emitting a directional burst of ultrasonic At the same time, the graphical display is updated to show the
energy towards the bottom of the tank. profile of the entire tank depth. In these profiles, a peak in the
reflected energy indicates the position of an interface, between
Energy reflected back and captured by the sensor is amplified by density layers. The size of each peak is a function of the relative
the receiver circuitry and digitized by the analyzer. In this way, the density of the layers. Thus the lighter fluff layers, which might
system builds a complete tank profile in the processors memory be suspended above the main blanket, will appear as smaller
which contains the magnitude of the reflected signal for every (shorter), often broader peaks on the profile. In any case, the
1/10th foot increment in depth. position of all the interfaces in the tank are detectable.

Automatic, continuous, self-diagnostics

with a dedicated set of alarm contacts.

Backlit LCD Profile Display showing Backlit LCD display of desirable

ALL interfaces. The most prominent interface in feet, meters or % of
being the most dense. The profile tank depth.
is updated with each numerical
display update.

Can be switched to view up to

a 24 hour trend graph of the
displayed level.
Operation simple and
straight forward.

Profile is automatically scaled

to the tank being measured.

Sensor energy required for each Programming the analyzer for your
reading is displayed. specific requirements is a simple
matter of reading questions on the
profile display and responding with
a single push of a button.

4
Ultrasonic Sensors for the 2511A MODEL 99 REPLACEABLE CARTRIDGE DO SENSOR

Interface Level Analyzers

MODEL 25DN MODEL 25SN

The standard ultrasonic, dual crystal sensor used with the 2511A Designed specifically for the Model 2511A analyzer, this economical
Interface Level Analyzer for all normal aqueous, non-chemical sensor uses a single crystal to both transmit and receive. Constructed
conditions, where maximum temperatures do not exceed 175F of the same material as the 25DN; it is used in non-chemical
(80C). It incorporates a 3/4 316 Stainless Steel nipple for applications where the maximum temperatures do not exceed
customer supplied pipe mounting. 175F (80C). Its physical size allows the sensor to be inserted
into a pipe with an I.D. of 3 inches. It incorporates a 3/4 316
2.80 Stainless Steel nipple for customer supplied pipe mounting.

3/4 PVC
FEMALE COUPLING

1.00

3.08

1.31
2.50
DIA
3/4 NPT
1.62

2.19

6.13

5
 1.32 1 NPT

5.0

2.90
MODEL 25SHE

For generally harsh environment applications, this solid, Kynar

sensor is made of chemically inert epoxy. It incorporates a 1
Kynar pipe nipple for customer supplied pipe mounting. All cables
are high temperature Teflon jacketed. It can be used in chemical
solutions of temperatures to 220F (105C).

TR-25 & REAR RAIL MOUNT MOUNTED ON HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL RAIL

8.5 4.9

TR-25 TRANSCEIVER

U-BOLT FOR
2 DIA HANDRAIL
(2 SUPPLIED)

6
 MODEL 2511A ANALYZER SENSOR DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING

10.50
8.30

1/420 UNC
TECHNOLOGIES MODEL 2511A INSERT, 4 PLCS
0.31 CLEARANCE
DRILL
9.37 6.30
1024X
(4) 1/420 X 0.500 LONG 18.5
1.00 LG S.S. RUN PGM TEST
PAN HEAD SCREWS
PAN HEAD PREV NEXT SUPPLIED WITH
SCREW PAGE PAGE
MOUNTING KIT
INTERFACE LEVEL ANALYZER

FRONT VIEW BACK VIEW

NOTES:
1. CONSTRUCTION POLYCARBONATE NEMA 4X ENCLOSURW
2. APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 6 LBS. SIDE VIEW
0.00
13.00

DOOR SWING OUT

18.5
REQUIRED FOR TECHNOLOGIES MODEL 2511A
MAINTENANCE

12.0
RUN PGM TEST

PREV NEXT
PAGE PAGE

INTERFACE LEVEL ANALYZER

UBOLT FOR
2 HAND RAIL
(2 SUPPLIED)
13.5 14.0
REQUIRED FOR
MAINTENANCE

SWING OUT MOUNGING STATIONARY MOUNGING

TO TRANSCREWER BOX TO TRANSCREWER BOX PROBE PIPE MOUNTING

ON 2511A ANALYZER ON 2511A ANALYZER BRACKET KIT
QUICK RELEASE
ROYCE MOUNTING UNIT LOADING PIN

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
3/4PIPE, STAINLESS
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED HANDRAIL HANDRAIL
KEEP ANGLE STEEL OR GALVANIZED
3/4PIPE, STAINLESS (1-1/2 STD) (1-1/2 STD)
SMALL STEEL OR GALVANIZED

BRIDGE DECK
2.0
ROYCE SWING UNIT
BRIDGE DECK

SKIMMER
2

MODEL 25DN/25SHE WITH DEFLECTOR

(2.0 MIN DEPTH) 2.0 MODEL 25DN

7
What can ITT Water & Wastewater do for you?

Integrated solutions for fluid handling are offered by ITT Water & Wastewater as
a world leader in transport and treatment of wastewater. We provide a complete range
of water, wastewater and drainage pumps, equipment for monitoring and control units
for primary and secondary biological treatment, products for filtration and disinfection,
and related services. ITT Water & Wastewater, headquartered in Sweden, operates in
some 140 countries across the world, with plants in Europe, China and North and
South America. The company is wholly owned by the ITT Corporation of White Plains,
New York, supplier of advanced technology products and services.

To find ITT Water & Wastewater products near you please visit:

www.us.ittwww.com

ITT Water & Wastewater Toll Free: 800-347-3505 Fax: 704-409-9899

14125 So. Bridge Circle Phone: 704-409-9898 Email: royce@itt.com
Charlotte, NC 28273

08/2009 This brochure has been printed on chlorine-free paper

 A higher level of performance

Data Sheet

- Sonar Sludge Level System

Sonar Interface
Sludge Level Monitoring
Principle of Operations
The ORCA Sonar Series transducer emits a high powered
acoustic pulse, which is reflected from the interface
density selected. The reflected signal is processed using
specially developed software algorithms, that eliminate
lighter floating densities and stratified layers, allowing
measurement of RAS or BED levels. It can be calibrated
to measure lighter densities like FLOC or one of the
outputs could be used for a CLARITY output, similar to a
basic turbidity transmitter measuring solids in suspension.

By choosing the correct sonar transducer frequency, the

Orca sonar guarantees the optimized performance when
measuring both light and heavy density interfaces.

Primary Areas of Applications Features:

Sewage & Wastewater
Dual independent analogue outputs to track two
Primary Sedimentation Blanket level.
Secondary and final Clarifiers RAS Blanket and fluff/ different interfaces, or clarity simultaneously, with
pin floc layer. the one sonar sensor.
Thickeners and DAF Bed level and clarity of water. Full range of sonar transducers to optimize
Sequential Batch Reactors Blanket monitoring (floating detection of heavy and light density interfaces.
sonar). Widest range of sonar frequencies to optimize
Lagoons Bed sludge level.
performance.
Lamella Clarifier Bed level and floc level.
Mining / Process Easy calibration to track specific density inter-
Clarifiers, thickeners, CCDs, settling ponds/lagoons, faces. eg: RAS blanket - 4g/l, floc/fluff layer - 1g/l.
water treatment, carbon columns. Industrial scum cleaning mechanisms, that do not
require maintenance.
Function No wiper blade assemblies.
The ORCA Series Sonar, sludge blanket and interface con- Control room graphics of tanks and interfaces.
troller, consists of a microprocessor based transmitter, with
Wide range of communications:
easy menu driven programming via keypad, PC combina-
tions or GSM modem, COMMS, GSM interface. The Orca Devicenet, GosHawk, HART, Modbus, Profibus DP
controller works together with appropriate sonar transducer Foundation Fieldbus and Profibus PA
and transducer cleaning mechanism. CDMA/GSM remote support capability for calibra-
tion, commissioning or technical back-up.
Relay alarms
Cutting Edge Sonar Technology

Comparison between First Generation and Third Generation Sonar Technology

There are two major innovative changes between the First to the Thickening area. This ensures that the RAS Blanket is
Generation instruments and the current Third Generation not over pumped (over scavenged) and that we do not reduce
ORCA Hawk sonar range. the retention time in aeration by pumping in lower density
biomass.
1. Sonar Transducer Frequencies
All other existing sonar transmitters are described as be- b. The second interface that we need to monitor is the Fluff
ing First Generation technology. They utilize only one sonar Layer and we calibrate this density at 600 milligram/L. Under
transducer frequency and therefore have severe limitations normal operating conditions in the Secondary Clarifier, the
in where they can be used successfully. An understanding of Fluff Layer at 600 milligrams/L sits about 1500mm above
the Basic Physics of Sound Transmission, indicates that sound the RAS Density of 4g/L. By monitoring the two analogue
transmission through a liquid or gas, varies, based on the outputs in the PLC we can identify how well the Secondary
wavelength of the frequency transmitted. Clarifier is operating, because the two signals should rise and
fall on the trend simultaneously if the tank is settling well.
When transmitting sound pulses through air, that may con- When a process problems occurs, perhaps caused by chang-
tain steam, condensation, dust etc the rule is to use a lower ing industrial effluent entering the plant, causing a biological
frequency, longer wavelength transducer to diffract the signal instability, bulking and settling problems occur. The RAS
around particles in suspension. Its called the fog horn prin- Blanket density is heavy enough not to rise, but the lighter
ciple. Fluff Layer interface will be hydraulically lifted in the tank.
The second analogue will indicate a change in settling pat-
The same principle applies to transmitting sound through a terns and an alarm can be raised in the PLC that the tank is
liquid. When monitoring an interface in a process tank, like experiencing settling problems.
a secondary clarifier, the interface for controlling the RAS
pumps, resides lower in the tank than the grey interface Fluff c. This ensures that we not only control and optimize the RAS
Layer. The First Generation sonar tries to stay on this heavier and the WAS densities, but we also provide early feedback to
density RAS blanket by utilizing software algorithms. The the process engineers and operators that one or more tanks
problem is that as soon as the secondary tank has settling and have a process problem.
bulking problems, the First Generation sonar monitors the
interface going to the surface, so using software algorithms is
not the total answer.

In our Third Generation Sonar range, the ORCA has seven

different sonar transducer frequencies to choose from. De-
pending on the application at the Waste Treatment Plant, we
select the appropriate sonar transducer frequency, according
to the density of the interface we want to control and monitor
off.

This means that instead of having small signals (300milli-

volts) reflecting off the desired density interface, the ORCA
range has signals as large as 2500millivolts, almost 10 times
greater, because of optimizing the sonar transducer frequen-
cy. It also means, that when the secondary clarifier has bulk-
ing and settling problems, the instrument continues to control
off the RAS Blanket density, which still is at the bottom of
the tank. It is only the lighter densities that are hydraulically
lifted towards the launders at the top of the tank.

So we use a different sonar transducer frequency for each

of the main applications at the Wastewater Treatment plant,
Primary Sedimentation Tanks, Secondary/Final Clarifiers,
Thickeners, and DAF Tanks.

Each ORCA sonar transducer has smart capability. They

can be driven to output two different frequencies.

a. The Secondary Clarifier has two interfaces that are needed

for optimizing the efficiency of the tank. The first is the RAS
Blanket, that we generally monitor at a density of 4g/L, which
guarantees a quality biomass return to the aeration lanes and

Orca Sonar Series 

2. Special algorithms for controlling sonar
interfaces, special scum cleaning capabili-
ties
a. Secondary Clarifiers can suffer with stratified interfaces,
when process stability is lost. These stratified interfaces can
confuse First Generation sonar transmitters into believing
that the interface is higher in the tank than it really is. Our
algorithms delete the stratified interface from being detected.

b. Some Secondary Clarifier tanks suffer from hydraulic

imbalance to their inflow, when compared to other tanks close
by. This causes a change in settling and monitoring of the
interfaces, which the ORCA can handle with the minimum
of calibration change. This is all the more reason that each
Secondary Clarifier Tank should be treated as a sole stand
alone process tank.

c. We have also developed a range of scum cleaners that are

totally controlled by the ORCA transmitter. These cleaning
mechanisms are an absolute necessity to our performance
warranty. There is no known instrument that can survive,
immersed in sewage media, that will work reliably without
cleaning.

Glossery of Terms
RAS Return Activated Sludge
WAS Waste Activated Sludge
DAF Dissolved Air Floatation
Lamella Type of clarifier design
Fluff Layer Light density interface secondary clarifier
SBR Sequential Batch Reactor
Pinfloc Particles in suspension
Clarity Clearness of liquid
CCD Type of thickener-mining
Floc Dosing Chemical dosing to improve settling

 Orca Sonar Series

Typical Applications

Area Functions
Water Treatment Plant
Primary Sedimentation Tank Floc level / sludge blanket level
Sludge Thickener Tank Sludge bed level / clarity suspended solids / floc level
Calcium Hydroxide Reactor Sand/pellet bed level
Sodium Hydroxide Reactor Sand/pellet bed level
Sewage Treatment Plant
Primary Sedimentation Tank Sludge blanket level
Secondary / Final Clarifier RAS blanket level / rag/pinfloc layer / clarity suspended solids
Sludge Thickener Tank Sludge bed level / clarity suspended solids
DAF Tank Sludge bed level / floating sludge level
Sequential Batch Reactor (SBR) Settling bed level / RAS blanket level
Industrial (food, paper etc.)
Primary Sedimentation Tank Sludge blanket level
Secondary Clarifier Tank RAS blanket level / clarity suspended solids / rag/pinfloc layer
Thickener Tank Sludge bed level / clarity suspended solids / floc level
DAF Tank Sludge bed level / floating sludge level
Sequential Batch Reactor (SBR) Settling blanket level / RAS bed level
Carbon Column Carbon bed level
Mining/Mineral processing
Clarifier Tank Blanket level / clarity suspended solids / stratified floc layers
Thickener Tank Sludge bed level / clarity suspended solids / stratified floc layers
CCDs Tank Sludge bed level / clarity suspended solids / stratified floc layers
Settling Ponds Sludge bed level

Transducer Selection Guidelines

Typically, the most difficult task when wanting to determine The higher the transducer frequency, the easier it becomes
the level of an interface, lies in the correct selection of the to see smaller particle sizes. The disadvantage, is the lack of
transducer frequency. penetration and a higher likelihood of air bubbles forming
on the sensor face, creating impedance to the transmit and
There are many other variables to consider. They include received signals.
particle size, flow, velocity, material, air bubble retention etc.
Lower transducer frequencies will not see such small
In general, the following should be undertaken: particles, but will see a more clearly defined interface.
It is recommended always to use an automated cleaner. The frequency selection should be based upon the % solids,
1. Identify a position away from direct inflow, where plus a logical position for the placement of the sensor.
turbulence is minimized. Please consult your local distributor for correct transducer
2. If air bubbles are present within heavy suspended solids, selection.
use the scum cleaner.
3. Position sonar transducer 1/3 radius from circumference All sonar transducers will be affected by air bubble
of the tank away from the influence of the feed well. accumulation on the sensor face. If the auto cleaner is used,
the system will operate to ensure accumulation of air bubble
4. Submerge the face of the selected transducer by a
interface does not cause operational problems.
minimum of 20mm (0.79).

Orca Sonar Series 

 Special Application

Monitoring Settling Blanket in a SBR

(Sequent Batch Reactor)

Application problem
The client had blanket carry-over problems, which affected
his EPA licence. The decant range was 0-1500 mm (0-60)

Wastewater treatment plant

250 megalitre/day (65 million gallons/day

Comments
We installed our floating sonar transmitter, with auto scum
cleaner, close to one of seven launders in the tank. During
aeration the sonar transmitter detected a high level blanket in
suspension. Once the aeration period had stopped, the blanket
settling was detected. Once the blanket had settled 1 m (3.2
ft) below the liquid height, the launders were introduced and
decanting started.

Solution
Using the ORCA floating sonar stopped carry-over into the
launders. Automating the decant phase, based on the blanket
settling, increased efficiency and saved time during the set-
tling phase.

Ordering information
Part numbers
OSIRDYX - Transmitter
OSIRT003S4XC6 - Sonar transducer
OSIRSCD - Sonar Cleanser/Float/Brackets
OSIRME - L5 - Sonar Transducer SS Pole 5 m (16.5 ft)

 Orca Sonar Series

Dimensions

SONAR IMPACT PLATE SONAR ACTUATOR CLEANER FLOATING SONAR SENSOR

379.60mm (14.9)
156* mm (6.1) 423mm (16.6)
156*mm (6.1)
512.6mm (20.1)
156*m (6.1)

762.5mm (30)
570mm (22.4)
762.5mm (30)
570mm (22.4)

570mm (22.4)
831mm (32.7)
X
X

X
o
42.5

o
42.5

= Decant Range

X
X - Pipe length to suit
* distance from safety rail or Bridge
may be varied
Note: Advise physical dimension of surface
scum rake.

OSIRT Transducer OSIRT Fibreglass Transducer

1" BSP Nipple 1" BSP Nipple

135 mm (5.3)

330mm (12.9)

75mm (2.9)

75mm (2.9)

Orca Sonar Series 

 FRONT

165mm (6.5)
190mm (7.5)
Knock outs
Radio link option

3 x 20mm, 1x16 mm
RAIL BASE PLATE

DIN Rail or screw mountable

REMOTE ENCLOSURE
160mm (6.3)
100.75mm (3.9) 127.50mm (5) 111.50mm (4.3) 111.50 m (4.3) R 5mm (0.2)
59.25mm (2.3) 41.50mm
29.25 (1.6) 28.75 19.25
2x 8.50 20 (0.7)
19.25
(0.7)

(1.1) (1.1) (0.7)

160mm (6.3)

BACK
62mm (2.4)
111.50mm (4.3)

51mm (2.0)

5mm
(0.2)
5mm
(0.2)

150mm (5.9)
51mm (0.2)

111.50mm (4.3)
5mm (0.2) 5mm (0.2)

R 4.25
60mm (2.3)
211.50mm (8.3) (0.1)
4.00

19.25 (0.7)
(0.1)
570mm (22.4)


151mm (5.9)
190mm (7.5)
145mm (5.7)
54mm (2.1) 106mm (4.2)

SIDE
107mm (4.2)

69mm (2.7)

Orca Sonar Series

Dimensions
Communication Network Overview

Modbus and Profibus

Gladiator Gladiator
Admittance Admittance
Switch Switch

Gladiator
Gladiator
Admittance
Admittance
Switch
Switch
Sultan Acoustic Sultan Acoustic
Wave Transmitter Wave Transmitter
Slurries Floatation Cells

Gladiator
Microwave Microwave Vibration
Low Level Low Level Switch

Sultan Acoustic Wave Transmitter

Silo, bin levels, coal, plastic powder,
woodchip, sawdust, cement,
clinker, iron ore, lime etc. SULTAN 234

Gladiator
Conductivity
Switch Sultan Smart Transducer
Farm Tanks, Grain Terminals

Orca Sonar Interface SULTAN 234

Thickener, CCD
Gladiator
Conductivity
Sultan Acoustic
Switch Wave Switch
Blocked Chute Detection

Orca Sonar Interface GSM Network

Clarifier or
CDMA Network

Sultan Master/Slave Positioning System Sultan Acoustic Wave Transmitter

Stockpiles, Stackers,
Reclaimers

GSM or CDMA Network

Typically up to 31 transmitters or switches per string.
Maximum 250 transmitters or switches.
Using GSM/CDMA network, transmitters and switches can be Laptop or PC Communications
monitored, calibrated remotely. or PLC / DCS with
Alarm status, diagnostics can be monitored. MODBUS RTU Port
Support from factory engineering for customer application problems. GosHawk Software for
inventory monitoring on PC

(Limited Modbus query rate for Switches only)

Orca Sonar Series 

 Wiring Diagrams

OSIR SONAR SERIES TRANSMITTER

Remote Version (3 Relays) (2 Analogues)

RELAY1 RELAY2 RELAY3

SONAR 234 REMOTE TRANSMITTER

COM

COM
COM

NO

NO
NC

NC
NO
NC
RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 ACTUATOR
SHLD
COM

COM

COM

GRN
BRN
BLU
BLK

YEL
NO

NO

NO
NC

NC

NC

TOP

4-20mA TRANSDUCER COMMS DC-IN AC-IN

ANALOG2 ANALOG1 TRANSDUCER COMMS DC-IN AC-IN
BOTTOM

- Is - -
A

+
WHT
+

RED
BLK
BLU

Test
B

N
L1

+
+
+

Is

Test in
RED

BLK

BLUE

WHITE

L1
4-20mA 4-20mA 12-30VDC 90-265 VAC

N
B
A
4-20mA 4-20m A
Motor Cable
Pot Cable
Transducer Cable

Junction
Box Modulating 90 - 260vac
4-20mA from
24vdc
PLC input

Driving 4-20mA from

ORCA to user PLC

Belden 3084A cable

Max 700 m (2000ft)

Refer to Graph 1 for cable selection

(See instruction manual)
SONAR 234 REMOTE TRANSMITTER
RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 ACTUATOR

TRANSDUCER
SHLD
COM

COM

COM

GRN
BRN
BLU
BLK

YEL
NO

NO

NO
NC

NC

NC

TOP

ANALOG2 ANALOG1 TRANSDUCER COMMS DC-IN AC-IN

BOTTOM

- Is - -
A
WHT
+

RED
BLK
BLU

Test
B

N
L1
+
+

4-20mA 4-20mA 12-30VDC 90-265 VAC

Transducer Cable

TRANSDUCER

 Orca Sonar Series

Part Numbering

ORCA Sonar Electronics

Model
OSIR ORCA Sonar Level Transmitter with 1 or 2 analogue outputs and 3 relay alarms
Power Supply
B 24 Vdc
D 90-250Vac and 24Vdc
Output Configuration (PC comms GosHawk standard)
X 1 x 4-20mA analogue output modules with Modbus Comms
Y 2 x 4-20mA analogue output modules with Modbus Comms
I 1 x 4-20mA analogue output modules with Modbus and HART Comms***
J 2 x 4-20mA analogue output modules with Modbus and HART Comms***
W Modbus comms only
P Profibus DP*
A Profibus PA
F Foundation Fieldbus
E Ethernet
D Devicenet
Z Special Request
Internal HawkLink Modem**
X Not Required
G2 GSM Frequency 800/1900 MHz/19200 Baud for USA, Canada
G4 GSM Frequency 900/1800 MHz/192 Baud for Australia, Europe

OSIR D Y X Notes:
* Can not be used with internal HawkLink. Can be used with remote HawkLink.
** Internal HawkLink cannot be used in Zone 0 / 20
*** Contact factory

ORCA Remote Transducer

Model
OSIRT ORCA Remote Sonar Transducer
Number of Crystals
0 1 Crystal
3 3 Crystals Array
7 7 Crystals Array
Transducer Blanking
02 (150kHz) 450mm
03 (300kHz) 450mm
04 (450kHz) 450mm
05 (700kHz) 450mm
07 (30kHz) 600mm
Temperature and Facing material selection
S Standard Temperature Version
H Fibreglass High Temperature Version
Transducer Housing Material
4 Polypropylene
H Fibreglass High Temperature Housing, must be used with fibreglass face
Z Special
Approval Standard
A0 ATEX Cat1 EEx_ia (Zone 0)
A1 SAA Ex_m ( Zone 1)
X Not Required
Connection
C IP68 Sealed unit with 6 metre cable
Cables
6 6m cable (Standard)
15 15m cable
30 30m cable
50 50m cable

OSIRT 0 02 S 4 X C 6

Orca Sonar Series 10

 Part Numbering

Orca Accessories

Mounting Extension

Model
OSIRME Mounting Extention Stainless Steel Pipe***
Length
L2 2 Meters (6.6ft)
L3 3 Meters (9.8ft)
*** Pole length must be specified. For example 1m (3.3ft) pole, L1.


OSIRME L2

Automatic Scum Cleaner

Model
OSIRSC Automatic Scum Cleaner
Type
A 24Vdc Electric Actuator with Mounting Accessories
B Pneumatic Actuator (Please consult the factory)
C Rotary Scum Brush Cleaner
D Floating Sonar with 24Vdc Electric Actuator with Mounting Accessories
E Impact Plate plus Mounting Bracket with Mounting Accessories

OSIRSC A

Complete Part Number

Electronics Transducer Accessories
OSIR D Y X + OSIRT 002 S 4 X C 6 + OSIRSC A

Radio Link
Model
OSIRRL Radio Link Region
R1 USA,Canada
R2 Australia, Europe
R3 Japan
R4 China

OSIRRL R1

11 Orca Sonar Series

Specifications

OSIR Transmitter OSIRT Transducer

Measurement Range Transducer Selection

0 to 30 metres (0-98.4ft) See sonar transducer selection guidelines. (P2)

OSIRT002 150kHz
Minimum Density Range OSIRT003 300kHz
<100mg/l OSIRT004 450kHz
OSIRT005 700kHz
Accuracy OSIRT007 30kHz
0.25% of span Please consult your local distributor for correct transducer selection.

Temperature Housing
-20C to 70C Polypropylene, Fiberglass, PVDF (Kynar), Teflon and PVC
(-4F to 158F)
Sealing
Display IP68 (Fully encapsulated)
2 x 8 digit LCD display.
Special Blanking
Echo Processing 150mm (5.9) minimum
Advanced Sparrow Hawk Algorithms
Temperature Sensor
Outputs Internal (max. 70C (158F) Standard)
2 x Analog 4-20mA (Isolated) max. 750 ohms High temperature 150C (302F) with external pre-amp.
Relays: 3 x SPDT 0.5Amp
Power driver for Auto scum cleaner Mounting
GosHawk, HART, Modbus, Profibus DP, DeviceNet 1.00 inch BSP/NPT nipple
Foundation Fieldbus & Profibus PA
Multidrop mode can address 1-250 units over 4 wire
Cable
Belden 3084A
Diagnostics
Full operational diagnostics display
Weight

All company or product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.
3.5kg (7.7lb)
Sealing
IP65
Approvals
SAA. Class 1 Zone 1
Option ATEX Cat.1 (Intrinsic Safe)
Reduced blanking distances
Sun hood
Auto Scum Cleaner
Operating Voltage Construction
90 - 260Vac 50/60Hz, 24Vdc Stainless Steel
Power Consumption Mounting
<18VA @ 240Vac, peak power 180VA during actuator operation Base mount x 4 holes. (See drawing)
<12VA @ 115Vac, peak power 170VA during actuator operation
<3W @ 24Vdc, peak power of 130W during actuator operation
Actuator
Electric 24Vdc
Pneumatic - Contact factory
Brush Cleaner
Impact Plate

Weight
5Kg (11lb)

Additional product warranty and application guarantees upon request. Technical data subject to change without notice.
Contact

Represented by:
Hawk Measurement Systems (Head Office) Hawk Measurement
15-17 Maurice Court 3911 W. Van Burren STE B-7
Nunawading VIC 3131 Phoenix, Arizona 85009
Australia USA
Phone: +61 3 9873 4750 Phone +1 888 HAWKLEVEL (1-888-429-5538)
Fax: +61 3 9873 4538 Fax: +1 602 353 1707
info@hawk.com.au info@hawkmeasure.com
www.hawk.com.au www.hawkmeasure.com

Orcarepresentatives
Global Sonar Series on www.hawkmeasure.com
12
Rev 1.2, May 2008
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

SENSOR DE
PRESIN

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P
measuring instruments
for pressure

2/2 Product overview 2/133 Remote seals for transmitters and

pressure gauges
2/4 Transmitters for gage and absolute 2/133 Introduction
pressure
2/139 Pancake type diaphragm seal with
2/4 Z series for gage and absolute pressure
flexible capillary tube
2/9 ZD series for gage and absolute pres-
2/140 Flange-type diaphragm seal
sure
directly connected
2/12 Transmitters for food, pharma- 2/143 Diaphragm seal flanged off-line
ceuticals and biotechnology low-pressure type, directly connected
2/12 SITRANS P Compact for gage 2/144 Flange-type diaphragm seal with
and absolute pressure flexible capillary tube
2/146 Diaphragm seal flanged off-line type
2/19 Transmitters for gage and absolute
pressure 2/148 Diaphragm seal flanged off-line
low-pressure type
2/19 SITRANS P300
2/150 Flushing rings
2/35 Transmitters for gage pressure for 2/152 Diaphragm seal with quick connection
paper industry 2/155 Inline diaphragm seal with
SITRANS P300 and DS III series with quick connection
PMC connection 2/157 Diaphragm seal threaded design
2/35 Technical description 2/158 Diaphragm seal threaded,
Technical specifications, ordering low-pressure design
data, dimensional drawings 2/160 Inline diaphragm seal, wafer for
2/40 - DS III series with PMC connection pressure
2/46 - SITRANS P300 with PMC connection 2/162 Diaphragm seal, saddle
2/164 Measuring setups
2/51 Transmitters for gage, absolute and 2/165 - with remote seals
differential pressure, flow and level 2/167 - without remote seals
DS III, DS III PA and DS III FF series 2/169 Questionnaire
2/51 Technical description 2/171 Fittings
Technical specifications, ordering 2/171 Technical description, Selection aid
data, dimensional drawings 2/172 Double shut-off valves
2/58 - for gage pressure 2/174 2-, 3- and 5-spindle valve manifolds
2/67 - for gage pressure with front-flush DN 5
diaphragm 2/177 Oval flange
2/75 - for absolute pressure (gage
construction)
2/84 - for absolute pressure
(differential construction)
2/93 - for differential pressure and flow
2/109 - for level

2/119 SITRANS P Accessories

2/119 Supplementary electronics for 4-wire
connection
2/121 Accessories/spare parts for SITRANS P
P300 and DS III series
2/126 Factory-mounting of valve manifolds on
SITRANS P transmitters
You can download all instructions, cata-
2/130 Transmitters for hydrostatic level
logs and certificates for SITRANS P free
2/130 MPS series (submersible sensor)
of charge at the following Internet
address:
www.siemens.com/sitransp

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Product overview

Overview
2 Application Description Page Software for
Parameterization
SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure, absolute pressure, differential pressure, flow and level
Two-wire transmitters for mea- SITRANS P, Z series 2/4
suring gage and absolute pres- Compact single-range transmitters
sure
Analog electronics, available ex stock

Two-wire transmitters for mea- SITRANS P, ZD series 2/9

suring gage and absolute pres- 5 : 1 Turn down
sure
Digital display
Charger

Transmitters for gage and abso- SITRANS P Compact 2/12

lute pressure for food, pharma- Single-range transmitters in 2-wire system
ceuticals and biotechnology
Sanitary design with various aseptic connections
according to EHEDG, FDA and GMP recommenda-
tions.

Two-wire transmitters for mea- SITRANS P300 2/19 SIMATIC PDM

suring gage and absolute pres- 100 : 1 Turn down
sure
Sanitary design with various aseptic connections
according to EHEDG, FDA and GMP recommenda-
tions
Parameterization using 3 buttons and HART or
PROFIBUS PA
Process connection G, -NPT and flange con-
nection available
Two-wire transmitters for mea- SITRANS P300 and DS III series with PMC con- 2/35 SIMATIC PDM
suring gage pressure nection for the paper industry
100 : 1 Turn down
Process connections for the paper industry
Parameter assignment over 3 buttons and HART,
PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus

Two-wire transmitters for mea- SITRANS P, DS III series 2/51 SIMATIC PDM
suring: SITRANS P, DS III PA series SIMATIC PDM
Gage pressure, SITRANS P, DS III FF series
Absolute pressure 100 : 1 Turn down
Differential pressure and Parameterization using:
Flow or 3 pushbuttons and HART for DS III series
Level 3 pushbuttons and PROFIBUS-PA for DS III PA se-
ries
3 buttons and FOUNDATION Fieldbus for DS III FF
series
Available ex stock
Supplementary electronics for Output: 0 or 4 to 20 mA 2/119
adaptation of two-wire transmit- Power supply: 24 V AC/DC, 230 V AC
ters for four-wire connections

2-wire transmitter for measuing SITRANS P, MPS series (submersible sensor) 2/130
hydrostatic levels For measuring liquid levels in wells, tanks, channels,
dams etc.

2/2 Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Product overview

Application Description Page Software for

Remote seals for measuring Remote seals in pancake and flange designs 2/133
Parameterization

2
viscous, corrosive or fibrous Quick-release remote seals for the food industry
media (as well as media at
extreme temperatures) Wide range of diaphragm materials and filling liq-
uids available

Shutting off the lines for the Shut-off fittings and valve manifolds available in 2/171
medium and differential pres- steel, brass or stainless steel
sure Valve manifolds available for the various process
Mounting of transmitter on valve connections of the SITRANS P transmitters
manifold or shut-off fitting

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/3

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
Technical description

Overview
2

SITRANS P pressure transmitters, DS III series, are digital pres- Infinitely adjustable span from 0.01 bar to 400 mbar ( 0.15 psi
sure transmitters featuring extensive user-friendliness and high to 5800 psi) for DS III with HART communication
accuracy. The parameterization is performed using control keys, Nominal measuring range from 1 to 400 bar (14.5 to 5800 psi)
over HART communication, PROFIBUS-PA or FOUNDATION for DS III PA (PROFIBUS PA) and FF (FOUNDATION Fieldbus)
Fieldbus interface.
High measuring accuracy
Extensive functionality enables the pressure transmitter to be Parameterization over control keys and HART communication,
precisely adapted to the plants requirements. Operation is very PROFIBUS PA communication or FOUNDATION Fieldbus in-
simple in spite of the numerous setting options. terface.
Transmitters with type of protection "Intrinsic safety" and "Explo-
sion-proof" may be installed within potentially explosive atmo-
spheres (zone 1) or in zone 0. The transmitters are provided with
Application
an EC type examination certificate and comply with the corre- The pressure transmitters of the DS III series, can be used in in-
sponding harmonized European standards (ATEX). dustrial areas with extreme chemical and mechanical loads.
Electromagnetic compatibility in the range 10 kHz to 1 GHz
The transmitters can be equipped with various designs of re- makes the DS III pressure transmitters suitable for locations with
mote seals for special applications such as the measurement of high electromagnetic emissions.
highly viscous substances.
Pressure transmitters with type of protection "Intrinsic safety" and
Various versions of the DS III pressure transmitters are available "Explosion-proof" may be installed within potentially explosive at-
for measuring: mospheres (zone 1) or in zone 0. The pressure transmitters are
Gage pressure provided with an EC type examination certificate and comply
Absolute pressure with the corresponding harmonized European standards
(ATEX).
For differential pressure transmitters
Filling level Pressure transmitters with the type of protection "Intrinsic safety"
for use in zone 0 may be operated with power supply units of cat-
Mass level egory "ia" and "ib".
Volume level
The transmitters can be equipped with various designs of re-
Volume flow mote seals for special applications such as the measurement of
Mass flow highly viscous substances.
The pressure transmitter can be operated locally over 3 control
Benefits keys or programmed externally over HART communication or
High quality and long life over PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface.
High reliability even under extreme chemical and mechanical
loads
For aggressive and non-aggressive gases, vapors and liquids
Extensive diagnosis and simulation functions
Separate replacement of measuring cell and electronics with-
out recalibration
Minimum conformity error
Small long-term drift
Wetted parts made of high-grade materials (e.g. stainless
steel, Hastelloy, gold, Monel, tantalum)

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/51

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
Technical description
Pressure transmitter for gage pressure
Design
2 Measured variable: Gage pressure of aggressive and non-ag-
gressive gases, vapors and liquids.
Span (infinitely adjustable)
for DS III HART: 0.01 ... 400 bar g (0.145 ... 5802 psi g)
Nominal measuring range
for DS III PA and FF: 1 ... 400 bar g (14.5 ... 5802 psi g)
Pressure transmitters for absolute pressure
Measured variable: Absolute pressure of aggressive and non-
aggressive gases, vapors and liquids.
Span (infinitely adjustable)
for DS III HART: 8.3 mbar a ... 100 bar a (0.12 ... 1450 psi a)
Nominal measuring range
for DS III PA and FF: 250 mbar a ... 100 bar a
(3.63 ... 1450 psi a)
There are two series:
- Gage pressure series
- Differential pressure series
Pressure transmitters for differential pressure and flow
Measured variables:
- Differential pressure
- Small positive or negative pressure
- Flow q ~ p (together with a primary differential pressure
device (see Chapter "Flow Meters"))
Span (infinitely adjustable) Front view
for DS III HART: 1 mbar ... 30 bar (0.0145 ... 435 psi)
The transmitter consists of various components depending on
Nominal measuring range the order. The possible versions are listed in the ordering infor-
for DS III PA and FF: 20 mbar ... 30 bar (0.29 ... 435 psi) mation. The components described below are the same for all
transmitters.
Pressure transmitters for level
Measured variable: Level of aggressive and non-aggressive The rating plate (3, Figure "Front view") with the Order No. is lo-
liquids in open and closed vessels. cated on the side of the housing. The specified number together
with the ordering information provide details on the optional de-
Span (infinitely adjustable) sign details and on the possible measuring range (physical
for DS III HART: 25 mbar ... 5 bar (0.363 ... 72.5 psi) properties of built-in sensor element).
Nominal measuring range
for DS III PA and FF: 250 mbar ... 5 bar (3.63 ... 72.5 psi) The approval label is located on the opposite side.
Nominal diameter of the mounting flange The housing is made of die-cast aluminium or stainless steel pre-
- DN 80 or DN 100 cision casting. A round cover is screwed on at the front and rear
- 3 inch or 4 inch of the housing. The front cover (6) can be fitted with a viewing
pane so that the measured values can be read directly on the
In the case of level measurements in open containers, the low- digital display. The inlet (4) for the electrical connection is lo-
pressure connection of the measuring cell remains open (mea- cated either on the left or right side. The unused opening on the
surement "compared to atmospheric"). opposite side is sealed by a blanking plug. The protective earth
In the case of measurements in closed containers, the lower- connection is located on the rear of the housing.
pressure connection has to be connected to the container in or- The electrical connections for the power supply and screen are
der to compensate the static pressure. accessible by unscrewing the rear cover. The bottom part of the
The wetted parts are made from a variety of materials, depend- housing contains the measuring cell with process connection
ing on the degree of corrosion resistance required. (1). The measuring cell is prevented from rotating by a locking
screw (8). As the result of this modular design, the measuring
cell and the electronics can be replaced separately from each
other. The set parameter data are retained.
At the top of the housing is a plastic cover (5), which hides the
input keys.

2/52 Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
Technical description
Mode of operation of the DS III PA electronics
Function
Mode of operation of the DS III HART electronics 9
2
8
0 0 00 0
M 00
9
8
0 0 00 0
M 00 2 3 4 5 7
mC PA
10 interface
2 3 4 5 Power supply
10

PROFIBUS-PA
mC IA, UH
Power

PROFIBUS-DP
7 EEPROM supply
6 unit
HART interface Coup-
ler

Electronics
EEPROM 11
6 Bus-
1 6 Master
12
Electronics

EEPROM
1 6 Sensor
EEPROM

Sensor pe
Measuring cell

Pe
Measuring cell 1 Measuring cell sensor 8 Three input keys
2 Instrument amplifier (local operation)
3 Analog-to-digital converter 9 Digital display
1 Measuring cell sensor 4 Microcontroller 10 Power supply
2 Instrument amplifier 5 Electrical isolation 11 DP/PA coupler or link
3 Analog-to-digital converter 6 One non-volatile memory 12 Bus master
4 Microcontroller each in the measuring cell
5 Digital-to-analog converter and electronics pe Input variable
6 One non-volatile memory each in the measuring cell and electronics 7 PROFIBUS-PA interface
7 HART interface
8 Three input keys (local operation)
9 Digital display
10 Diode circuit and connection for external ammeter
IA Output current Function diagram of the electronics
UH Power supply
Pe Input variable The bridge output voltage created by the sensor (1, Figure
"Function diagram of the electronics") is amplified by the instru-
ment amplifier (2) and digitized in the analog-to-digital converter
(3). The digital information is evaluated in the microcontroller, its
Function diagram of the electronics linearity and temperature response corrected, and provided on
the PROFIBUS PA through an electrically isolated PA interface
The bridge output voltage created by the sensor (1, Figure
(7).
"Function diagram of the electronics") is amplified by the instru-
ment amplifier (2) and digitized in the analog-to-digital converter The data specific to the measuring cell, the electronics data, and
(3). The digital information is evaluated in a microcontroller, its the parameter data are stored in the two non-volatile memories
linearity and temperature response corrected, and converted in (6). The first memory is linked with the measuring cell, the sec-
a digital-to-analog converter (5) into an output current of 4 to ond with the electronics. This modular design means that the
20 mA. electronics and the measuring cell can be replaced separately
from one another.
The diode circuit (10) protects against incorrect polarity.
Using the three input keys (8) you can parameterize the pressure
The data specific to the measuring cell, the electronics data, and
transmitter directly at the point of measurement. The input keys
the parameter data are stored in the two non-volatile memories
can also be used to control the view of the results, the error mes-
(6). The one memory is coupled to the measuring cell, the other
sages and the operating modes on the digital display (9).
to the electronics. As the result of this modular design, the elec-
tronics and the measuring cell can be replaced separately from The results with status values and diagnostic values are trans-
each other. ferred by cyclic data transmission on the PROFIBUS PA. Param-
eterization data and error messages are transferred by acyclic
Using the 3 input keys (8) you can parameterize the pressure
data transmission. Special software such as SIMATIC PDM is re-
transmitter directly at the point of measurement. The input keys
quired for this.
can also be used to control the view of the results, the error mes-
sages and the operating modes on the digital display (9).
The HART modem (7) permits parameterization using a protocol
according to the HART specification.
The pressure transmitters with spans 63 bar measure the input
pressure compared to atmosphere, transmitters with spans
160 bar compared to vacuum.

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/53

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
Technical description
Mode of operation of the DS III FF electronics Mode of operation of the measuring cells
2 9
Measuring cell for gage pressure
8
0 0 00 0
M 00

2 3 4 5 7
5
mC FF
interface 4
Power supply 3
10 1 1 Measuring cell
2 Process connection
Power 3 Seal diaphragm
EEPROM supply
6 unit 4 Filling liquid
Coup- 5 Silicon pressure sensor
ler pe Pressure as input variable
Electronics
2
1 6
p
e
EEPROM

Sensor

Measuring cell for gage pressure, function diagram

pe
Measuring cell The pressure pe is applied through the process connection (2,
Figure "Measuring cell for gage pressure, function diagram) to
the measuring cell (1). This pressure is subsequently transmitted
1 Measuring cell sensor 8 Three input keys further through the seal diaphragm (3) and the filling liquid (4) to
2 Instrument amplifier (local operation)
3 Analog-to-digital converter 9 Digital display the silicon pressure sensor (5) whose measuring diaphragm is
4 Microcontroller 10 Power supply then flexed. This changes the resistance of the four piezo-resis-
5 Electrical isolation tors fitted in the diaphragm in a bridge circuit. This change in re-
6 One non-volatile memory pe Input variable
each in the measuring cell sistance results in a bridge output voltage proportional to the in-
and electronics put pressure.
7 FF interface

Measuring cell for gage pressure, with front-flush diaphragm for

paper industry
Function diagram of the electronics
The bridge output voltage created by the sensor (1, Figure
"Function diagram of the electronics") is amplified by the instru-
ment amplifier (2) and digitized in the analog-to-digital converter
(3). The digital information is evaluated in the microcontroller, its
linearity and temperature response corrected, and provided on
the FOUNDATION Fieldbus through an electrically isolated 5
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Interface (7). 4

The data specific to the measuring cell, the electronics data, and 1 1 Measuring cell
the parameter data are stored in the two non-volatile memories 2 Process connection
(6). The one memory is coupled to the measuring cell, the other 3 Seal diaphragm
4 Filling liquid
to the electronics. As the result of this modular design, the elec-
5 Silicon pressure sensor
tronics and the measuring cell can be replaced separately from pe Pressure as input variable
each other.
Using the three input keys (8) you can parameterize the pressure 2
transmitter directly at the point of measurement. The input keys 3
p
can also be used to control the view of the results, the error mes- e
sages and the operating modes on the digital display (9).
The results with status values and diagnostic values are trans- Measuring cell for gage pressure, with front-flush diaphragm for paper in-
ferred by cyclic data transmission on the FOUNDATION dustry, function diagram
Fieldbus. Parameterization data and error messages are trans-
ferred by acyclic data transmission. Special software such as The pressure pe is applied through the process connection (2,
National Instruments Configurator is required for this. Figure "Measuring cell for gage pressure, with front-flush dia-
phragm for paper industry, function diagram") to the measuring
cell (1). This pressure is subsequently transmitted further
through the seal diaphragm (3) and the filling liquid (4) to the sil-
icon pressure sensor (5) whose measuring diaphragm is then
flexed. This changes the resistance of the four piezo-resistors fit-
ted in the diaphragm in a bridge circuit. This change in resis-
tance results in a bridge output voltage proportional to the input
pressure.

2/54 Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
Technical description
Measuring cell for absolute pressure from gage pressure series Measuring cell for differential pressure and flow
2
2 3 4

1 Seal diaphragm
2 O-ring
5
3 Overload diaphragm
4 4 Silicon pressure sensor
1 - + 1 5 Process flange
3
5 6 Body of measuring cell
1 7 Filling liquid
1 Measuring cell
2 Process connection
3 Seal diaphragm 7 6
4 Filling liquid
5 Silicon absolute pressure sensor
pe Absolute pressure as input variable
Measuring cell for differential pressure and flow, function diagram
2
pe The differential pressure is transmitted through the seal dia-
phragms (1, Figure "Measuring cell for differential pressure and
flow, function diagram") and the filling liquid (7) to the silicon
pressure sensor (4).
The measuring diaphragm is flexed by the applied differential
Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the pressure series, function pressure. This changes the resistance of the four piezo-resistors
diagram fitted in the diaphragm in a bridge circuit. This change in resis-
The absolute pressure pe is transmitted through the seal dia- tance results in a bridge output voltage proportional to the abso-
phragm (3, Figure "Measuring cell for absolute pressure from the lute pressure.
gage pressure series, function diagram") and the filling liquid (4) An overload diaphragm is installed to provide protection from
to the silicon absolute pressure sensor (5) whose measuring di- overloads. If the measuring limits are exceeded, the overload di-
aphragm is then flexed. This changes the resistance of the four aphragm (2) is flexed until the seal diaphragm rests on the body
piezo-resistors fitted in the diaphragm in a bridge circuit. This of the measuring cell (7), thus protecting the silicon pressure
change in resistance results in a bridge output voltage propor- sensor from overloads.
tional to the input pressure.
Measuring cell for level
Measuring cell for absolute pressure from differential pressure
series
3 4 5 6 7

2
2 3 4 1 Reference vacuum 8
2 Overload diaphragm
+
3 Silicon pressure sensor -
4 O-ring
5 5 Process flange
6 Seal diaphragm 1 10
1 pe 7 Body of measuring cell 9
6 8 Filling liquid
pe Absolute pressure as
input variable 1 Flange with tube 6 Silicon pressure sensor
8 7 2 Seal diaphragm on 7 O-ring
mounting flange 8 Process flange
3 Seal diaphragm 9 Filling liquid
4 Body of measuring cell 10 Capillary with filling liquid
5 Overload diaphragm of mounting flange

Measuring cell for absolute pressure from differential pressure series,

function diagram
The input pressure pe is transmitted through the seal diaphragm Measuring cell for level, function diagram
(6, Figure "Measuring cell for absolute pressure from differential The input pressure (hydrostatic pressure) acts hydraulically on
pressure series, function diagram") and the filling liquid (8) to the the measuring cell through the seal diaphragm on the mounting
silicon pressure sensor (3). flange (2, Figure "Measuring cell for level, function diagram").
The difference in pressure between the input pressure pe and This differential pressure is subsequently transmitted further
the reference vacuum (1) on the low-pressure side of the mea- through the measuring cell (3) and the filling liquid (9) to the sil-
suring cell flexes the measuring diaphragm. The resistance of icon pressure sensor (6) whose measuring diaphragm is then
the four piezo-resistors fitted in the diaphragm in a bridge circuit flexed.
thus changes. This change in resistance results in a bridge out- This changes the resistance of the four piezo-resistors fitted in
put voltage proportional to the absolute pressure. the diaphragm in a bridge circuit.
An overload diaphragm is installed to provide protection from This change in resistance results in a bridge output voltage pro-
overloads. If the measuring limits are exceeded, the overload di- portional to the differential pressure.
aphragm (2) is flexed until the seal diaphragm rests on the body An overload diaphragm is installed to provide protection from
of the measuring cell (7), thus protecting the silicon pressure overloads. If the measuring limits are exceeded, the overload di-
sensor from overloads. aphragm (2) is flexed until the seal diaphragm rests on the body
of the measuring cell (7), thus protecting the silicon pressure
sensor from overloads.

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/55

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
Technical description
Parameterization DS III Diagnostic functions for DS III HART
2 Depending on the version, there are a range of options for pa-
rameterizing the pressure transmitter and for setting or scanning
Zero correction display
Event counter
the parameters. Limit transmitter
Parameterization using the pushbuttons (local operation) Saturation alarm
With the input keys you can easily set the most important param- Min/Max registers
eters without any additional equipment. Simulation functions
Parameterization using HART communication Maintenance timer
Parameterization using HART communication is performed with Available physical units of display for DS III HART
a HART communicator or a PC.
Table style: Technical specifications 2
Physical variable Physical dimensions
+
Pressure (setting can also Pa, MPa, kPa, bar, mbar, torr, atm, psi,
be made in the factory) g/cm2, kg/cm2, inH2O, inH2O (4 C),
SITRANS P 230 ... 1100 W Power supply mmH2O, ftH2O (20 C), inHg, mmHg
transmitter
Level (height data) m, cm, mm, ft, in
HART Volume m3, dm3, hl, yd3, ft3, in3, US gallon, lmp.
communicator gallon, bushel, barrel, barrel liquid
Mass g, kg, t, lb, Ston, Lton, oz
Volume flow m3/d, m3/h, m3/s, l/min, l/s, ft3/d, ft3/min,
Communication between a HART communicator and a pressure transm.
ft3/s, US gallon/min, US gallon/s
When parameterizing with the HART communicator, the connec- Mass flow t/d, t/h, t/min, kg/d, kg/h, kg/min, kg/s, g/d,
tion is made directly to the 2-wire system. g/h, g/min, g/s, lb/d, lb/h, lb/min, lb/s,
LTon/d, LTon/h, STon/d, STon/h, STon/min
Temperature K, C, F, R
Miscellaneous %, mA
SITRANS P 230 ... 500 W Power supply Parameterization through PROFIBUS PA interface
transmitter
PC or Fully digital communication through PROFIBUS PA, profile 3.0, is
HART laptop particularly user-friendly. The PROFIBUS puts the DS III PA is in
modem connection with a process control system, e.g. SIMATIC PSC 7.
Communication is possible even in a potentially explosive envi-
RS 232 ronment.
For parameterization through PROFIBUS you need suitable soft-
ware, e.g. SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager).
HART communication between a PC communicator and a pressure
transmitter Parameterization through FOUNDATION Fieldbus Interface
When parameterizing with a PC, the connection is made through Fully digital communication through FOUNDATION Fieldbus is
a HART modem. particularly user-friendly. Through the FOUNDATION Fieldbus
The signals needed for communication in conformity with the the DS III FF is connected to a process control system. Commu-
HART 5.x or 6.x protocols are superimposed on the output cur- nication is possible even in a potentially explosive environment.
rent using the Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) method.
For parameterization through the FOUNDATION Fieldbus you
Adjustable parameters, DS III HART need suitable software, e.g. National Instruments Configurator.
Parameters Pushbut- HART com- Adjustable parameters for DS III PA and FF
tons (DS III munication
HART) Parameters Pushbut- PROFIBUS PA and
tons (DS III FOUNDATION
Start of scale x x HART) Fieldbus interface
Full-scale value x x Electrical damping x x
Electrical damping x x
Zero adjustment (correction of x x
Start-of-scale value without application x x position)
of a pressure ("Blind setting")
Key and/or function disabling x x
Full-scale value without application of a x x
pressure ("Blind setting") Source of measured-value dis- x x
play
Zero adjustment x x
Physical dimension of display x x
Current transmitter x x
Fault current x x Position of decimal point x x
Disabling of keys, write protection x x1) Bus address x x
Type of dimension and actual dimension x x Adjustment of characteristic x x
Characteristic (linear / square-rooted) x2) x2) Input of characteristic x
Input of characteristic x Freely-programmable LCD x
Freely-programmable LCD x
Diagnostics functions x
Diagnostics functions x
1)
Cancel apart from write protection
2) Only differential pressure

2/56 Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
Technical description
Diagnostic functions for DS III PA and FF
Event counter
Min/Max registers
2
Maintenance timer
Simulation functions
Display of zero correction
Limit transmitter
Saturation alarm
Physical dimensions available for the display
Physical variable Physical dimensions
Pressure (setting can also MPa, kPa, Pa, bar, mbar, torr, atm, psi,
be made in the factory) g/cm2, kg/cm2, mmH2O, mmH2O (4 C),
inH2O, inH2O (4 C), ftH2O (20 C),
mmHg, inHg
Level (height data) m, cm, mm, ft, in, yd
Volume m3, dm3, hl, yd3, ft3, in3, US gallon, lmp.
gallon, bushel, barrel, barrel liquid
Volume flow m3/s, m3/min, m3/h, m3/d, l/s, l/min, l/h, l/
d, Ml/d, ft3/s, ft3/min, ft3/h, ft3/d, US gal-
lon/s, US gallon/min, US gallon/h, US gal-
lon/d, bbl/s, bbl/min, bbl/h, bbl/d
Mass flow g/s, g/min, g/h, g/d, kg/s, kg/min, kg/h,
kg/d, t/s, t/min, t/h, /t/d, lb/s, lb/min, lb/h,
lb/d, STon/s, STon/min, STon/h, STon/d,
LTon/s, LTon/min, LTon/h, LTon/d
Total mass flow t, kg, g, lb, oz, LTon, STon
Temperature K, C, F, R
Miscellaneous %

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/57

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
for gage pressure

Technical specifications
2 SITRANS P, DS III series for gage pressure
HART PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Input
Measured variable Gage pressure
Spans (infinitely adjustable) or Span Max. perm. test pres- Nominal measuring Max. perm. test pres-
nominal measuring range and sure range sure
max. permissible test pressure
0.01 ... 1 bar g 6 bar g 1 bar g 6 bar g
(0.145 ... 14.5 psi g) (87 psi g) (14.5 psi g) (87 psi g)
0.04 ... 4 bar g 10 bar g 4 bar g 10 bar g
(0.58 ... 58 psi g) (145 psi g) (58 psi g) (145 psi g)
0.16 ... 16 bar g 32 bar g 16 bar g 32 bar g
(2.23 ... 232 psi g) (464 psi g) (232 psi g) (464 psi g)
0.6 ... 63 bar g 100 bar g 63 bar g 100 bar g
(9.14 ... 914 psi g) (1450 psi g) (914 psi g) (1450 psi g)
1.6 ... 160 bar g 250 bar g 160 bar g 250 bar g
(23.2 ... 2320 psi g) (3626 psi g) (2320 psi g) (3626 psi g)
4.0 ... 400 bar g 600 bar g 400 bar g 600 bar g
(58 ... 5802 psi g) (8700 psi g) (5802 psi g) (8700 psi g)
Lower measuring limit
Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 30 mbar a (0.435 psi a)
Measuring cell with inert filling liquid 30 mbar a (0.435 psi a)
Upper measuring limit 100% of max. span (max. 160 bar g (2320 psi g) with oxygen measurement and inert liquid)
Output
Output signal 4 ... 20 mA Digital PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
signal
Lower limit (infinitely adjustable) 3.55 mA, factory preset to 3.84 mA -
Upper limit (infinitely adjustable) 23 mA, factory preset to 20.5 mA or optionally set -
to 22.0 mA
Load
Without HART communication RB (UH - 10.5 V)/0.023 A in , -
UH : Power supply in V
With HART communication RB = 230 ... 500 (SIMATIC PDM) or -
RB = 230 ... 1100 (HART Communicator)
Physical bus - IEC 61158-2
With polarity reversal protection - Yes
Accuracy To EN 60770-1
Reference conditions Increasing characteristic, start-of-scale value 0 bar, stainless steel seal diaphragm, silicone oil filling,
room temperature 25 C (77 F)) r: Span ratio (r = max. span/set span)
Error in measurement and fixed-point setting
(including hysteresis and repeatability)
Linear characteristic 0,075%
- r 10 (0.0029 r + 0.071)%
- 10 < r 30 (0.0045 r + 0.071)%
- 30 < r 100 (0.005 r + 0.05)%
Long-term drift (temperature change 30 C (0.25 r)% every 5 years 0.25% every 5 years
(54 F))
Influence of ambient temperature
at -10 ... +60 C (14 ... 140 F) (0.08 r + 0.1)% 0,3%
at -40 ... -10 C and +60 ... +85 C (0.1 r + 0.15)%/10 K 0.25%/10 K
(-40 ... +14 F and 140 ... 185 F)
Measured Value Resolution - 3 10-5 of nominal measuring range

2/58 Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
for gage pressure
SITRANS P, DS III series for gage pressure
HART PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus 2
Rated operating conditions
Degree of protection (to EN 60529) IP65
Process temperature
Measuring cell with silicone oil filling -40 ... +100 C (-40 ... +212 F)
Measuring cell with inert filling liquid -20 ... +100 C (-4 ... +212 F)
In conjunction with dust explosion protec- -20 ... +60 C (-4 ... +140 F)
tion
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
- Digital indicators -30 ... +85 C (-22 ... +185 F)
Storage temperature -50 ... +85 C (-58 ... +185 F)
Climatic class
- Condensation Permissible
Electromagnetic compatibility
- Emitted interference and interference To EN 61326 and NAMUR NE 21
immunity
Design
Weight (without options) 1.5 kg ( 3.3 lb)
Housing material Low copper die-cast aluminium, GD-AlSi12 or stainless steel precision casting, mat. No. 1.4408
Wetted parts materials
Connection shank Stainless steel, mat. No. 1.4404/316L or Hastelloy C4, mat. No. 2.4610
Oval flange Stainless steel, mat. No. 1.4404/316L
Seal diaphragm Stainless steel, mat. No. 1.4404/316L or Hastelloy C276, mat. No. 2.4819
Measuring cell filling Silicone oil or inert filling liquid (max. 160 bar (2320 psi g) with oxygen measurement)
Process connection Connection shank GA to DIN EN 837-1, female thread -14 NPT or oval flange (PN 160
(MWP 2320 psi g)) to DIN 19213 with mounting thread M10 or 7/16-20 UNF to EN 61518
Power supply UH Supplied through bus
Terminal voltage on transmitter 10.5 ... 45 V DC -
10.5 ... 30 V DC in intrinsically-safe mode
Separate 24 V power supply necessary - No
Bus voltage
Not Ex - 9 ...32 V
With intrinsically-safe operation - 9 ...24 V
Current consumption
Basic current (max.) - 12.5 mA
Startup current basic current - Yes
Max. current in event of fault - 15.5 mA
Fault disconnection electronics (FDE) avail- - Yes
able

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/59

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
for gage pressure
SITRANS P, DS III series for gage pressure
2 HART PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Certificate and approvals
Classification according to pressure equip- For gases of fluid group 1 and liquids of fluid group 1; complies with requirements of Article 3, para-
ment directive (DRGL 97/23/EC) graph 3 (sound engineering practice)
Explosion protection
Intrinsic safety "i" PTB 99 ATEX 2122
- Identification Ex II 1/2 G EEx ia/ib IIB/IIC T6
- Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +85 C (-40 ... +185 F) temperature class T4;
-40 ... +70 C (-40 ... +158 F) temperature class T5;
-40 ... +60 C (-40 ... +140 F) temperature class T6
- Connection To certified intrinsically-safe circuits with maxi- FISCO supply unit:
mum values: Uo = 17.5 V, Io = 380 mA, Po = 5.32 W
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA, Linear barrier:
Pi = 750 mW; Ri = 300 Uo = 24 V, Io = 250 mA, Po = 1.2 W
- Effective internal inductance/capacitance L i = 0.4 mH, Ci = 6 nF L i = 7 H, Ci = 1.1 nF
Explosion-proof "d" PTB 99 ATEX 1160
- Identification Ex II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T4/T6
- Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +85 C (-40 ... +185 F) temperature class T4;
-40 ... +60 C (-40 ... +140 F) temperature class T6
- Connection To circuits with values: UH = 10.5 ... 45 V DC To circuits with values: UH = 9 ... 32 V DC
Dust explosion protection for zone 20 PTB 01 ATEX 2055
- Identification Ex II 1 D IP65 T 120 C
Ex II 1/2 D IP65 T 120 C
- Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +85 C (-40 ... +185 F)
- Max.surface temperature 120 C (248 F)
- Connection To certified intrinsically-safe circuits with maxi- FISCO supply unit:
mum values: Uo = 17.5 V, Io = 380 mA, Po = 5.32 W
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA, Linear barrier:
Pi = 750 mW, Ri = 300 Uo = 24 V, Io = 250 mA, Po = 1.2 W
- Effective internal inductance/capacitance L i = 0.4 mH, Ci = 6 nF L i = 7 H, Ci = 1.1 nF
Dust explosion protection for zone 21/22 PTB 01 ATEX 2055
- Identification Ex II 2 D IP65 T 120 C
- Connection To circuits with values: UH = 10.5 ... 45 V DC; To circuits with values: UH = 9 ... 32 V DC;
Pmax = 1.2 W Pmax = 1.2 W
Type of protection "n" (zone 2) TV 01 ATEX 1696 X Planned
- Identification Ex II 3 G EEx nA L IIC T4/T5/T6 -
Explosion protection to FM Certificate of Compliance 3008490
- Identification (XP/DIP) or (IS); (NI) CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; CL I, ZN 0/1 AEx ia IIC T4...T6; CL I,
DIV 2, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III
Explosion protection to CSA Certificate of Compliance 1153651
- Identification (XP/DIP) or (IS) CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; Ex ia IIC T4...T6; CL I, DIV 2, GP ABCD
T4...T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III

2/60 Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
for gage pressure

HART communication Communication FOUNDATION Fieldbus

HART communication 230 ... 1100 Function blocks 3 function blocks analog input,
1 function block PID
2
Protocol HART Version 5.x
Analog input
Software for computer SIMATIC PDM
- Adaptation to customer-specif- Yes, linearly rising or falling char-
PROFIBUS PA communication ic process variables acteristic

Simultaneous communication with 4 - Electrical damping T63 , adjust- 0 ... 100 s

master class 2 (max.) able

The address can be set using Configuration tool or local opera- - Simulation function Output/input (can be locked within
tion (standard setting address the device with a bridge)
126) - Failure mode Can be parameterized (last good
Cyclic data usage value, substitute value, incorrect
value)
Output byte 5 (one measuring value) or
10 (two measuring values) - Limit monitoring Yes, one upper and lower warning
limit and one alarm limit respec-
Input byte 0, 1, or 2 (register operating mode tively
and reset function for metering)
- Square-rooted characteristic Yes
Internal preprocessing for flow measurement
Device profile PROFIBUS PA Profile for Process PID Standard FF function block
Control Devices Version 3.0,
Class B Physical block 1 Resource block

Function blocks 2 Transducer blocks 1 transducer block Pressure with

calibration, 1 transducer block
Analog input LCD
- Adaptation to customer-specif- Yes, linearly rising or falling char- Pressure transducer block
ic process variables acteristic
- Can be calibrated by applying Yes
- Electrical damping T63 , adjust- 0 ... 100 s two pressures
able
- Monitoring of sensor limits Yes
- Simulation function Input /Output
- Simulation function: Measured Constant value or over parameter-
- Failure mode Can be parameterized (last good pressure value, sensor temper- izable ramp function
value, substitute value, incorrect ature and electronics tempera-
value) ture
- Limit monitoring Yes, one upper and lower warning
limit and one alarm limit respec-
tively
Register (totalizer) Can be reset, preset, optional
direction of counting, simulation
function of register output
- Failure mode Can be parameterized (summation
with last good value, continuous
summation, summation with incor-
rect value)
- Limit monitoring One upper and lower warning limit
and one alarm limit respectively
Physical block 1
Transducer blocks 2
Pressure transducer block
- Can be calibrated by applying Yes
two pressures
- Monitoring of sensor limits Yes
- Characteristics Max. 30 points
- Square-rooted characteristic Yes
for flow measurement
- Gradual volume suppression Parameterizable
and implementation point of
square-root extraction
- Simulation function for mea- Constant value or over parameter-
sured pressure value and sen- izable ramp function
sor temperature

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/61

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
for gage pressure, with front-flush diaphragm

Dimensional drawings
2
DSSUR[

+ DSSUR[

6SDFHIRUURWDWLRQ
RIKRXVLQJ

 3URFHVVFRQQHFWLRQVHHIODQJHWDEOHV
 %ODQNLQJSOXJ
 (OHFWULFDOFRQQHFWLRQ
 VFUHZHGJODQG0[
 VFUHZHGJODQG137
 7HUPLQDOVLGH
 (OHFWURQLFVVLGHGLJLWDOGLVSOD\ORQJHURYHUDOOOHQJWKIRUFRYHUZLWKZLQGRZ  $OORZDSSUR[PPLQFK
 3URWHFWLYHFRYHURYHUNH\V  WKUHDGOHQJWKLQDGGLWLRQ
 6FUHZFRYHUVDIHW\EUDFNHWRQO\IRUH[SORVLRQSURRIHQFORVXUH  PPLQFKIRUPLQLPXPGLVWDQFH
 QRWVKRZQLQWKHGUDZLQJ  WRSHUPLWURWDWLRQZLWKLQGLFDWRU

SITRANS P pressure transmitters, DS III series for gage pressure, with front-flush diaphragm, dimensions in mm (inch)

The diagram shows a SITRANS P DS III with an example of a H2 = Height of the flange up to this defined cross-section
flange. In this drawing the height is subdivided into H1 and H2.
Only the height H2 is indicated in the dimensions of the flanges.
H1 = Height of the SITRANS DS III up to a defined cross-section

Flanges to EN and ASME NuG and pharmaceutical connections

Flanges to EN Connections to DIN
EN 1092-1 DIN 11851 (Dairy connection)
DN PN D H2
DN PN D H2
50 25 92 mm (3.6) Approx.
25 40 115 mm (4.5) Approx. 52 mm (2)
+

+

25 100 140 mm (5.5) 52 mm (2) 80 25 127 mm (5.0)

40 40 150 mm (5.9)
'
40 100 170 mm (6.7) '
50 16 165 mm (6.5)
50 40 165 mm (6.5)
Tri-Clamp according DIN 32676
80 16 200 mm (7.9)
DN PN D H2
80 40 200 mm (7.9)
50 16 64 mm (2.5) Approx.
52 mm (2)
+

65 16 91 mm (3.6)
Flanges to ASME
ASME B16.5
DN class D H2 '

1 150 110 mm (4.3) Approx. Other connections

+

1 300 125 mm (4.9) 52 mm (2)

Varivent connection
1 150 130 mm (5.1)
' DN PN D H2
1 300 155 mm (6.1)
2 150 150 mm (5.9) 40 ... 125 40 84 mm Approx.
(3.3) 52 mm (2)
+

2 300 165 mm (6.5)

3 150 190 mm (7.5)
3 300 210 mm (8.1) '
4 150 230 mm (9.1)
4 300 255 mm (10.0)

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/73

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
for level

Technical specifications
SITRANS P, DS III series for level
2
HART PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Input
Measured variable Level
Spans (infinitely adjustable) or Span Maximum working Nominal measuring Maximum working
nominal measuring range and pressure range pressure
max. permissible working pressure
25 ... 250 mbar g See "Mounting flange" 250 mbar g See "Mounting flange"
(0.36 ... 3.63 psi g) (3.63 psi g)
25 ... 600 mbar g See "Mounting flange" 600 mbar g See "Mounting flange"
(0.36 ... 8.7 psi g) (8.7 psi g)
53 ... 1600 mbar g See "Mounting flange" 1600 mbar g See "Mounting flange"
(0.77 ... 23.2 psi g) (23.2 psi g)
160 ... 5000 mbar g See "Mounting flange" 5000 mbar g See "Mounting flange"
(2.32 ... 72.5 psi g) (72.5 psi g)
Lower measuring limit
Measuring cell with silicone oil filling -100% of max. span or 30 mbar (0.435 psi a), depending on mounting flange
Upper measuring limit 100% of max. span 100% of the max. nominal measuring range
Output
Output signal 4 ... 20 mA Digital PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
signal
Lower limit (infinitely adjustable) 3.55 mA, factory preset to 3.84 mA -
Upper limit (infinitely adjustable) 23 mA, factory preset to 20.5 mA or optionally -
set to 22.0 mA
Load
Without HART communication RB (UH - 10.5 V)/0,023 A in , -
UH : Power supply in V
With HART communication RB = 230 ... 500 (SIMATIC PDM) or -
RB = 230 ... 1100 (HART Communicator)
Physical bus - IEC 61158-2
With polarity reversal protection - Yes
Accuracy To EN 60770-1
Reference conditions Increasing characteristic, start-of-scale value 0 bar, stainless steel seal diaphragm, silicone oil fill-
ing, room temperature 25 C (77 F)) r: Span ratio (r = max. span / set span)
Error in measurement and fixed-point setting
(including hysteresis and repeatability)
Linear characteristic 0,075%
- r 10 0,15%
- 10 < r 30 0,3%
- 30 < r 100 (0.0075 r + 0.075)%
Long-term drift (temperature change 30 C (0.25 r)% every 5 years (0.25% every 5 years
(54 F)) static pressure max. 70 bar g (1015 psi g) static pressure max. 70 bar g (1015 psi g)
Influence of ambient temperature
at -10 ... +60 C (14 ... 140 F)
- 250-mbar (3.63 psi) measuring cell (0.5 r + 0.2)% 0,7%
(0.4 instead of 0.2 with 10 < r 30)
- 600-mbar (8.7 psi) measuring cell (0.3 r + 0.2)% 0,5%
(0.4 instead of 0.2 with 10 < r 30)
- 1600 and 5000 mbar (23.2 and 72.5 psi) (0.25 r + 0.2)% (0.4 instead of 0.2 with 10 < r 0,45%
measuring cells 30)
at -40 ... -10 C and +60 ... +85 C
(-40 ... +14 F and 140 ... 185 F)
- 250 mbar (3.63 psi) measuring cell (0.25 r +0.15)%/10 K 0.4%/10 K
double values with 10 < r 30
- 600 mbar (8.7 psi) measuring cell (0.15 r +0.15)%/10 K 0.3%/10 K
double values with 10 < r 30
- 1600 and 5000 mbar (23.2 and 72.5 psi) (0.12 r +0.15)%/10 K 0.27%/10 K
measuring cells double values with 10 < r 30

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/109

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
for level
SITRANS P, DS III series for level
2 HART PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Influence of static pressure
on the zero point
- 250 mbar (3.63 psi) measuring cell (0.3 r)% per nominal pressure 0.3% per nominal pressure
- 600 mbar (8.7 psi) measuring cell (0.15 r)% per nominal pressure 0.15% per nominal pressure
- 1600 and 5000 mbar (23.2 and 72.5 psi) (0.1 r)% per nominal pressure 0.1% per nominal pressure
measuring cells
on the span (0.1 r)% per nominal pressure 0.1% per nominal pressure
Measured Value Resolution - 3 10-5 of nominal measuring range
Rated operating conditions
Degree of protection (to EN 60529) IP65
Process temperature Note: Always take into account assignment of max. permissible working temperature to max. per-
missible working pressure of the respective flange connection!
Measuring cell with silicone oil filling -40 ... +100 C (-40 ... +212 F)
- High-pressure side pabs 1bar: -40 ... +175 C (-40 ... +347 F)
pabs 1bar: -40 ... +80 C (-40 ... +176 F)
- Low-pressure side -40 ... +100 C (-40 ... +212 F)
-20 ... +60 C (-4 ... +140 F) in conjunction with dust explosion protection
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
- Digital indicators -30 ... +85 C (-22 ... +185 F)
Storage temperature -50 ... +85 C (-58 ... +185 F)
Climatic class
- Condensation Permissible
Electromagnetic compatibility
- Emitted interference and interference immu- To EN 61326 and NAMUR NE 21
nity
Design
Weight (without options)
To EN (pressure transmitter with mounting 11 ... 13 kg ( 24.2 ... 28.7 lb)
flange, without tube)
To ASME (pressure transmitter with mounting 11 ... 18 kg ( 24.2 ... 39.7 lb)
flange, without tube)
Wetted parts materials Low copper die-cast aluminium, GD-AlSi12 or stainless steel precision casting, mat. No. 1.4408
Housing material
High-pressure side
Seal diaphragm of mounting flange Stainless steel, mat. No. 1.4404/316L, Monel, mat. No. 2.4360, Hastelloy B2, mat. No. 2.4617,
Hastelloy C276, mat. No. 2.4819, Hastelloy C4, mat. No. 2.4610, tantalum, PTFE, ECTFE
Measuring cell filling Silicone oil
Process connection
High-pressure side Flange to EN and ASME
Low-pressure side Female thread -18 NPT and flange connection with mounting thread M10 to DIN 19213 or
7
/16-20 UNF to EN 61518
Power supply UH Supplied through bus
Terminal voltage on transmitter 10.5 ... 45 V DC -
10.5 ... 30 V DC in intrinsically-safe mode
Separate 24 V power supply necessary - No
Bus voltage
Not Ex - 9 ...32 V
With intrinsically-safe operation - 9 ...24 V
Current consumption
Basic current (max.) - 12.5 mA
Startup current basic current - Yes
Max. current in event of fault - 15.5 mA
Fault disconnection electronics (FDE) available - Yes

2/110 Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
for level
SITRANS P, DS III series for level
HART PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus 2
Certificate and approvals
Classification according to pressure equipment For gases of fluid group 1 and liquids of fluid group 1; complies with requirements of Article 3,
directive (DRGL 97/23/EC) paragraph 3 (sound engineering practice)
Explosion protection
Intrinsic safety "i" PTB 99 ATEX 2122
- Identification Ex II 1/2 G EEx ia/ib IIB/IIC T6
- Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +85 C (-40 ... +185 F) temperature class T4;
-40 ... +70 C (-40 ... +158 F) temperature class T5;
-40 ... +60 C (-40 ... +140 F) temperature class T6
- Connection To certified intrinsically-safe circuits with maxi- FISCO supply unit:
mum values: Uo = 17.5 V, Io = 380 mA, Po = 5.32 W
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA, Linear barrier:
Pi = 750 mW; Ri = 300 Uo = 24 V, Io = 250 mA, Po = 1.2 W
- Effective internal inductance/capacitance L i = 0.4 mH, Ci = 6 nF L i = 7 H, Ci = 1.1 nF
Explosion-proof "d" PTB 99 ATEX 1160
- Identification Ex II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T4/T6
- Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +85 C (-40 ... +185 F) temperature class T4;
-40 ... +60 C (-40 ... +140 F) temperature class T6
- Connection To circuits with values: UH = 10.5 ... 45 V DC To circuits with values: UH = 9 ... 32 V DC
Dust explosion protection for zone 20 PTB 01 ATEX 2055
- Identification Ex II 1 D IP65 T 120 C
Ex II 1/2 D IP65 T 120 C
- Permissible ambient temperature -40 ... +85 C (-40 ... +185 F)
- Max.surface temperature 120 C (248 F)
- Connection To certified intrinsically-safe circuits with maxi- FISCO supply unit:
mum values: Uo = 17.5 V, Io = 380 mA, Po = 5.32 W
Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA, Linear barrier:
Pi = 750 mW, Ri = 300 Uo = 24 V, Io = 250 mA, Po = 1.2 W
- Effective internal inductance/capacitance L i = 0.4 mH, Ci = 6 nF L i = 7 H, Ci = 1.1 nF
Dust explosion protection for zone 21/22 PTB 01 ATEX 2055
- Identification Ex II 2 D IP65 T 120 C
- Connection To circuits with values: UH = 10.5 ... 45 V DC; To circuits with values: UH = 9 ... 32 V DC;
Pmax = 1.2 W Pmax = 1.2 W
Type of protection "n" (zone 2) TV 01 ATEX 1696 X Planned
- Identification Ex II 3 G EEx nA L IIC T4/T5/T6 -
Explosion protection to FM Certificate of Compliance 3008490
- Identification (XP/DIP) or (IS); (NI) CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; CL I, ZN 0/1 AEx ia IIC T4...T6; CL I,
DIV 2, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III
Explosion protection to CSA Certificate of Compliance 1153651
- Identification (XP/DIP) or (IS) CL I, DIV 1, GP ABCD T4...T6; CL II, DIV 1, GP EFG; CL III; Ex ia IIC T4...T6; CL I, DIV 2, GP ABCD
T4...T6; CL II, DIV 2, GP FG; CL III

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/111

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
for level

HART communication Communication FOUNDATION Fieldbus

2 HART communication 230 ... 1100 Function blocks 3 function blocks analog input,
1 function block PID
Protocol HART Version 5.x
Analog input
Software for computer SIMATIC PDM
- Adaptation to customer-specif- Yes, linearly rising or falling char-
PROFIBUS PA communication ic process variables acteristic

Simultaneous communication with 4 - Electrical damping T63 , adjust- 0 ... 100 s

master class 2 (max.) able

The address can be set using Configuration tool or local opera- - Simulation function Output/input (can be locked within
tion (standard setting address the device with a bridge)
126) - Failure mode Can be parameterized (last good
Cyclic data usage value, substitute value, incorrect
value)
Output byte 5 (one measuring value) or
10 (two measuring values) - Limit monitoring Yes, one upper and lower warning
limit and one alarm limit respec-
Input byte 0, 1, or 2 (register operating mode tively
and reset function for metering)
- Square-rooted characteristic Yes
Internal preprocessing for flow measurement
Device profile PROFIBUS PA Profile for Process PID Standard FF function block
Control Devices Version 3.0,
Class B Physical block 1 Resource block

Function blocks 2 Transducer blocks 1 transducer block Pressure with

calibration, 1 transducer block
Analog input LCD
- Adaptation to customer-specif- Yes, linearly rising or falling char- Pressure transducer block
ic process variables acteristic
- Can be calibrated by applying Yes
- Electrical damping T63 , adjust- 0 ... 100 s two pressures
able
- Monitoring of sensor limits Yes
- Simulation function Input /Output
- Simulation function: Measured Constant value or over parameter-
- Failure mode Can be parameterized (last good pressure value, sensor temper- izable ramp function
value, substitute value, incorrect ature and electronics tempera-
value) ture
- Limit monitoring Yes, one upper and lower warning
limit and one alarm limit respec-
tively Mounting flange
Register (totalizer) Can be reset, preset, optional Nom. diam. Nom. press.
direction of counting, simulation
function of register output To EN 1092-1

- Failure mode Can be parameterized (summation - DN 80 PN 40

with last good value, continuous - DN 100 PN 16, PN 40
summation, summation with incor-
rect value) To ASME B16.5

- Limit monitoring One upper and lower warning limit - 3 inch Class 150, class 300
and one alarm limit respectively - 4 inch Class 150, class 300
Physical block 1
Transducer blocks 2
Pressure transducer block
- Can be calibrated by applying Yes
two pressures
- Monitoring of sensor limits Yes
- Characterizer Max. 30 points
- Square-rooted characteristic Yes
for flow measurement
- Gradual volume suppression Parameterizable
and implementation point of
square-root extraction
- Simulation function for mea- Constant value or over parameter-
sured pressure value and sen- izable ramp function
sor temperature

2/112 Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Transmitters for gage, absolute and differential pressure, flow and level
DS III series
for level

Selection and Ordering data Order No. 1)

Not together with Electrical connection Screwed gland Pg 13.5 and
SITRANS P pressure transmitters for level
series DS III HART
7MF 4 6 3 3 - 2)
Han7D plug.
Without cable gland, with blanking plug.
2
77 Y77 - 7777 3) With enclosed cable gland EEx ia and blanking plug.
4)
Measuring cell filling Measuring cell Not together with type of protection "Explosion-proof" and type of protection
cleaning "Ex nA".
5)
Not together with types of protection "Explosion-proof" or "Intrinsic safety
Silicone oil Standard 1 and explosion-proof"
Span F) Subject to export regulations AL: 9I999, ECCN: N.
25 ... 250 mbar (0.36 ... 3.63 psi) D
25 ... 600 mbar (0.36 ... 8.70 psi) E
53 ... 1600 mbar (0.8 ... 23.2 psi) F
0.16 ... 5 bar (2.3 ... 72.5 psi) G
Process connection of low-pressure side
Female thread -18 NPT with flange connection
Mounting thread M10 to DIN 19213 0
Mounting thread 7/16-20 UNF to EN 61518 2
Non-wetted parts materials
Process flange screws Electronics housing
Stainless steel Die-cast aluminium 2
Stainless steel Stainless steel precision 3
casting1)
Version
Standard version 1
International version, English label inscriptions, 2
documentation in 5 languages on CD
Explosion protection
Without A
With ATEX, Type of protection:
- "Intrinsic safety (EEx ia)" B
- "Explosion-proof (EEx d)"2) F) D
- "Intrinsic safety and explosion-proof F) P
enclosure (EEx ia + EEx d)"3)
- "Ex nA/nL (zone 2)" E
- "Intrinsic safety, explosion-proof enclosure F) R
and dust explosion protection (EEx ia +
EEx d + Zone 1D/2D)"3)
With FM + CSA, Type of protection:
- "Intrinsic safety and explosion-proof F) NC
(is + xp)"2)
Electrical connection / cable entry
Screwed gland Pg 13.54) A
Screwed gland M20x1.5 B
Screwed gland -14 NPT C
Han 7D plug (plastic housing) incl. mating F) D
connector4)
M12 connectors (metal)5) F
Display
without (digital indicator hidden, setting: mA) 1
With visible digital indication 6
With customer-specific digital indication (setting 7
as specified, Order code "Y21" or required)
Ordering information:
1st order item: Pressure transmitter 7MF4633-...
2nd order item: Mounting flange 7MF4912-3...
Ordering example:
Item line 1: 7MF4633-1EY20-1AA1-Z
B line: Y01
C line: Y01: 80 to 143 mbar (1.16 to 2.1 psi)
Item line 2: 7MF4912-3GE01
Power supply units see "SITRANS I power supply units and isolation
amplifiers".
Included in delivery of the device:
Brief instructions (Leporello)
CD-ROM with detailed documentation
Sealing plug(s) or sealing screw(s) for the process flanges(s)

Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition 2/113

 Siemens AG 2007

SITRANS P measuring instruments for pressure

Remote seals for transmitters and pressure gauges
Flange-type diaphragm seal
directly connected

Selection and Ordering data Order No. Order code Selection and Ordering data Order No. Order code
2 Mounting flange Mounting flange at High-Side, Flange-Type
Seal, w/o extension Flange-type seal via
directly mounted at SITRANS P for Level C) 7 M F 4 8 1 2 - capillary extension on low-side without
7MF46 7 7 (order separately) extension
3 7777 777
Flange Size Class for SITRANS P for differential pressure C) 7 M F 4 8 1 3 -
7MF44 7 7 (order separately)
ANSI B16.5 2 inch 150 L 1 7777 - 7B 777
300 M Flange Size Class
3 inch 150 Q
300 R ANSI B16.5 2 inch 150 L
4 inch 150 T 300 M
300 U 3 inch 150 Q
Special design, customer information to be Z J1Y 300 R
supplied 4 inch 150 T
300 U
Materials and wetted parts Special design, customer information to be Z J1Y
SST 316L A supplied
SST 316L with carbon pigmented Teflon lined E0
diaphragm (good upto 500 F) Materials and wetted parts
Monel 400, mat. No. 2.4360 G SST 316L A
Hastelloy C276, mat. No. 2.4819 J SST 316L with carbon pigmented Teflon lined E
Tantal K diaphragm (good upto 500 F)
Special design, customer information to be Z K1Y Monel 400, mat. No. 2.4360 G
supplied Hastelloy C276, mat. No. 2.4819 J
Tantal K
Extension length Special design, customer information to be Z K1Y
Without extension (standard version, 0 mm) 0 supplied
2" 50 mm 1
4" 100 mm 2 Extension length
6" 150 mm 3 Without extension (standard version, 0 mm) 0
8" 200 mm 4 2" 50 mm 1
Special design, customer information to be 9 L1Y 4" 100 mm 2
supplied 6" 150 mm 3
8" 200 mm 4
System fill Special design, customer information to be 9 L1Y
Silicone oil DC 200-10 1 supplied
Silicone oil DC 200-50 2
High temperature oil 3 System fill
Halocarbon (for O2-application) 4 Silicone oil DC 200-10 1
Silicone oil M5 5 Silicone oil DC 200-50 2
Syltherm 800 6 High temperature oil 3
DC704 silicone oil 7 Halocarbon (for O2-application) 4
Fluorolube 8 Silicone oil M5 5
Special design, customer information to be 9 M1 Y Syltherm 800 6
supplied DC704 silicone oil 7
Fluorolube 8
Further designs Special design, customer information to be 9 M1 Y
Please add -Z to Order No. and specifiy supplied
Order code
Capillary length at low-side
Integrated flame path restriction A01
3 ft 2
Rotatable Flange B01 5 ft 3
Certificates: 10 ft 4
Certification of calibration N.I.S.T. (20% steps) C11 15 ft 5
20 ft 6
Material conformance certificate C12
25 ft 7
Vacuum service (must be specified with HT oil) V04 30 ft 8
Calculation of span of transmitter (completed Y05 Special design, customer information to be 9
questionnaire to be attached) supplied
C) Subject to export regulations AL: N, ECCN: EAR99. Further designs
Please add -Z to Order No. and specifiy
Order code
Integrated flame path restriction A02
Rotatable Flange B01
Certification of calibration N.I.S.T. (20% steps) C11
Material conformance certificate C12
Vacuum service (must be specified with HT oil) V04
Calculation of span of transmitter (completed Y05
questionnaire to be attached)
C) Subject to export regulations AL: N, ECCN: EAR99.

2/142 Siemens FI 01 2008 US Edition

 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

MEDIDOR DE
DENSIDAD

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
Excellence in Monitoring

Ronan Model X96S Series Density System

For more than 27 years Ronan has provided the process control industry with
unsurpassed products in the harshest environments. With a philosophy of designing new
products to be backward compatible, our customers have the confidence of an installed
base of thousands of systems. A worldwide network of dealers, 24-hr factory certified
Field Service Engineers and an experienced staff of Applications Engineers are ready to
assist with your measurement needs.

Product Information Applications

Ideal for Liquid Processes where Traditional

Contact Technologies Cannot be Used
Measurement Not Affected By:
Internal Obstructions
Extreme Process Temperatures
Caustic Products
Slurries
Violent Product Flow
Sterile Process
Changing Process
Mounts External to Existing Pipes with No
By-Pass Lines
Display in Customer-Specified Units
Most Applications can be Solved with Low
Energy Sources
Push Button to Calibrate
Empty Pipe Monitor
Mass Flow Capability

Features and Benefits

Single Computer, Compatible with all Ronan

Detectors. Easily Expandable to Accurately
Measure the Most Complex Processes.
Excellent Measurement Reliability due to
Proprietary Filtering Technology
Lowest Level Sources on the Market
Automatic Decay Compensation
Low Maintenance / No Component Wear
Auto-Calibration

Ronan Measurements Division 8050 Production Drive Florence, KY 41042

(859) 342-8500 FAX (859) 342-6426
www.ronanmeasure.com E-Mail: ronan@ronanmeasure.com
Excellence in Monitoring

The X96S Density System is designed to deliver outstanding performance in a wide

range of difficult applications and process conditions. The system utilizes a single
computer compatible with all Ronan detectors, which is easily expandable to accurately
measure the most complex processes. These include the most dangerous materials such
as caustic, toxic, corrosive, explosive, and carcinogenic irrespective of their solids
content, viscosity and temperature. The modular design is ideal to upgrade older systems
while keeping the existing sources.

Measurement Principle
Each system consists of a gamma source, detector and microprocessor. The gamma
source, mounted external to the pipe emits energy through the walls and the process in a
direction towards the detector mounted on the opposite side to the source. The detector
measures the level of energy reaching it and sends a proportional signal to the
microprocessor. The X96 microprocessor filters and correlates this signal to a
density/percent solids measurement, the user can select from a list of units of measure for
the desired reading.

The entire system is mounted external to the pipe via clamps and can be easily installed
and maintained while the process is runningwithout expensive down time, pipe
modifications or chance of accidental release. The system can also be installed on a
variety of pipe materials.

FRP Pipe
PVC Pipe
Carbon Steel
Stainless Steel
Glass Lined Pipe
Rubber Lined Pipe

Z-Axial sections or spool pieces are available for small measurement ranges and small
diameter pipes where increased accuracy and repeatability is desired.

2
Ronan Measurements Division 8050 Production Drive Florence, KY 41042
(859) 342-8500 FAX (859) 342-6426
www.ronanmeasure.com E-Mail: ronan@ronanmeasure.com
Excellence in Monitoring

X96S Density System

Source Holders
Ronan pioneered the development of ultra-low level sources to greatly improve safety,
and eliminate the requirement for surveys, wipe tests, inspections and much of the
documentation. They are so safe the NRC permits their removal and installation without
a licensed person being present, translating into significant cost savings for the user.

The RLL-1 ultra low source utilizes very small quantities of radioactive materials. RLL
is a Ronan Engineering term that stands for "Radiation Low Level." RLL technology
utilizes up to a total of 0.9 mCi (0.033 GBq) of cesium source. In comparison, some
conventional density gamma gauges use source sizes with a hunderd times more activity
to make the same measurement. Because of these very low-levels of activity, and their
simplicity of design, Ronan systems are the safest gamma gauges on the market. The
NRC recognized this in 1999 when Ronan Engineering attained certification for the first
RLL source design.

Ronan understands that installation costs of instrumentation is a major factor when

choosing a technology or vendor. To minimize the need to make changes to your
existing installation, Ronan offers a wide variety of source holder designs including small
physical sizes where space is limited.

Whatever the installation requirements, Ronan can work with you to install the safest
source and source holder for the application.

RLL-1 Low level SA-1 Source Holder

Source Holder
3
Ronan Measurements Division 8050 Production Drive Florence, KY 41042
(859) 342-8500 FAX (859) 342-6426
www.ronanmeasure.com E-Mail: ronan@ronanmeasure.com
Excellence in Monitoring

X96S Microprocessor
The X96S Process Measurement Computers are the most advanced, featuring the fastest
processors in the radiametric density gauge industry. The modular design allows for low-
cost expansion of outputs and measurement variables. Calibration and configuration is in
a simplified format and can be achieved locally through push buttons on an liquid crystal
graphic display, or remotely through industry standard protocols. The X96S is
compatible with all models of Ronan detectors and can accommodate multiple detector
inputs for longer measurements.

Features
For Use in the Following Measurements:
Density
Mass Flow
Level
Level with Density Compensation
Mold Level
Weight
System Integration via:
HART
Foundation Fieldbus
PROFIBUS PA
Local Display Shown in HART Format
Optional Local and/or Remote Eight Line Display
Flexible, Modular Design Permits Customization
Multiple Detector Capability
State of the Art Dynamic Filtering
Isolated Digital and Analog I/O, Software Settable
NEMA-4, 4X, Enclosure or Rack Mount Chassis
4
Ronan Measurements Division 8050 Production Drive Florence, KY 41042
(859) 342-8500 FAX (859) 342-6426
www.ronanmeasure.com E-Mail: ronan@ronanmeasure.com
Excellence in Monitoring

Specifications
Power: 90 -240 VAC. or 24 VDC
Compatible with all Ronan Detector Offerings
Outputs:
HART 4-20mA,
Foundation Fieldbus
PROFIBUS PA
Up to 4 Form C Relay Outputs
Up to 4 Isolated Open Collector Outputs Capable of Switching 4.5 to 30 volts
Up to 8 Digital Inputs which can be Configured (Individually) as Dry or Live Contacts,
Quadrature, Encoders or Pulse Counters
Pressure Input: Support for Process Pressure from 0-10 volts, or 4-20 mA
Temperature Input: Nickel or Platinum RTD
Diagnostics: On-Board Modular Self-Test Watchdog Timer and Status LEDs.
Calibration: Available Through LOI, PC Based Software or Communicator / DCS
RS-232/RS-485 Optional
Ronan Quality Manufacturing - Backed by a Three Year Limited Warranty

Ronan Scintillation Detector

Ronan pioneered the use of solid crystal scintillation detectors more than 20 years ago,
and now has an installed base in the thousands across a wide variety of applications
worldwide. Ronan employs two types of crystals. Scintillating Plastic Crystals for
standard applications and Sodium Iodide scintillating crystals for ultra low-level fields.

5
Ronan Measurements Division 8050 Production Drive Florence, KY 41042
(859) 342-8500 FAX (859) 342-6426
www.ronanmeasure.com E-Mail: ronan@ronanmeasure.com
Excellence in Monitoring

Features
High Detector Efficiency
Spring Tension of PM Tube. Maintains Integrity of the Signal Path Under Vibration
Lowest Gamma Fields in Industry
Ronan Quality Manufacturing-Backed by a Three Year Limited Warranty

Specifications
Construction: Electronics - Stainless Steel
Housing - Schedule 40 Carbon Steel, Epoxy Painted
- 304 Stainless Steel or PVC Optional
Scintillation Crystal: Plastic or Sodium Iodide
System Accuracy: +/- 1 % span (typical)
Power Requirements: 24 VDC @ .035 A,
Ratings: UL, Cenelec/Atex
Class 1, Div 1
Nema 4, Nema 4X
Operating Temperature: -10 to +60 C
Heater Blankets Available for Low Temperatures and Small Measurement Ranges

Ronan Ion Chamber Detector

First introduced in the 1970s, the ion chamber detector has been in constant use due to
the reliability and robustness of the design. It can withstand intense vibration, while
delivering accurate and repeatable measurements even on narrow density ranges.

6
Ronan Measurements Division 8050 Production Drive Florence, KY 41042
(859) 342-8500 FAX (859) 342-6426
www.ronanmeasure.com E-Mail: ronan@ronanmeasure.com
Excellence in Monitoring

Features
Rugged Design
Spring Tension of PM Tube. Maintains Integrity of the Signal Path Under Vibration
Ronan Quality Manufacturing-Backed by a Five Year Limited Warranty

Specifications
Construction: Electronics 4 Diameter, 6 Length in Stainless Steel Housing
Housing - Schedule 40 Carbon Steel, Epoxy Painted
- 304 Stainless Steel or PVC Optional
System Accuracy: +/- 1 % span (typical)
Power Requirements: 24 VDC @ .035 A,
Ratings: UL, Cenelec/Atex
Class 1, Div 1
Nema 4, Nema 4X
Operating Temperature: -40 to +60 C
Heater Blankets Available for Low Temperatures and small Measurement Ranges

7
Ronan Measurements Division 8050 Production Drive Florence, KY 41042
(859) 342-8500 FAX (859) 342-6426
www.ronanmeasure.com E-Mail: ronan@ronanmeasure.com
Excellence in Monitoring

8
Ronan Measurements Division 8050 Production Drive Florence, KY 41042
(859) 342-8500 FAX (859) 342-6426
www.ronanmeasure.com E-Mail: ronan@ronanmeasure.com
Excellence in Monitoring

9
Ronan Measurements Division 8050 Production Drive Florence, KY 41042
(859) 342-8500 FAX (859) 342-6426
www.ronanmeasure.com E-Mail: ronan@ronanmeasure.com
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

ANEXOS

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

TARGETA DE
LNEA DE
PRODUCTOS

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 PRODUCT LINE CARD

Anaerobic Digestion Equipment Grit Removal Equipment

Steel Covers Aerated Grit Chambers
Sludge Heating Systems Grit Classifiers
Draft Tube Mechanical Sludge Mixers Rake Collectors
Vortex Grit Separators
Biological Treatment
Aeration Installation and Erection Services
Slow Speed Surface Aerators
Landox Oxidation Aeration System Laboratory and Pilot Plant Test Equipment
Bench Scale Testing
Combined Processes Pilot Plant Testing
STM-Aerotor Plant Process Audits

Trickling Filters (Rotary Distributors) Mixing

Motor Driven BioDoc MixTec Mixers
HydroDoc Extreme Duty Mixers

Chemical Feed Systems Oil/Water Separators

API Separator
Clarifiers DNF Clarifiers
C.O.P. Clarifier Spiral Blades
Conventional Scraper Blades Parts & Service Support
Flocculating Drive Components
Rim Drive Filter Cloths
Solids Contact Skimmer Parts
Suction Header Wear Parts
Suction Pipe
Rectangular Basin Skimming
Dissolved Air Flotation Rotating Scum Pipes
Clarifiers & Thickeners Helical Scum Skimmers
Rectangular & Circular
Screens
Drives Channel Mitt Shaftless Fine Screen
Replacement Drives for CleanFlo Continuous Belt (Element) Screen
Thickeners and Clarifiers CleanFlo Perforated Plate Belt Screen
CleanFlo Step Screen
Filters Clean Wash Screenings Washer/Compactor
Continuous Backwash
Granular Media Gravity Filters Sludge Blenders
Multi-Media Pressure Filters
Membrane Filters (see WATER listing) Tankage
Supply and Erection
Filter Presses
Thickeners
Electrical Controls Center Feed or Side Feed
UL Listed Panels (UL508A/CSA) Rake Lifting Devices
PLC Based Controls
Vacuum Filters
Flocculators Horizontal Belt Filter
Horizontal Paddle Precoat Drum Filter
Vertical Paddle & Mixer Drum Filters and Disc Filters with Scraper
Axial Flow Discharge, Roll Discharge, Belt Discharge

WesTech Engineering Inc., 3625 South West Temple, Salt Lake City, Utah 84115 (801) 265-1000
An Employee-Owned Company
 PRODUCT LINE CARD
WATER

Aeration/Degassifiers Granular Media Filtration

Forced Draft Vertical Pressure Filters

Induced Draft Horizontal Pressure Filters
Cascade Multi-Cell Greenleaf Filters
Dissolved Air Flotation Clari-Cell Two Stage Filters
Circular Steel Filters
Electrical Controls Self Stored Backwash Gravity Filters
Technasand Continuous Backwash Filters
UL Listed Panels (UL508A/CSA) Concrete Gravity Filter Components
PLC Based Controls Pyramed Media Retention Underdrain
ModTech Cluster Filters
Flocculators Iron & Manganese Removal Units

Horizontal and Vertical Paddle Flocculators Gravity Thickening

Axial Flow
Lime Sludge Thickening
Intake Screens Clarifier Underflow Thickening
Rake Lifting Devices
CleanFlo
Package Plants
Ion Exchange
Buoyant and Non-buoyant Media
MIEX Organic Removal System
Zeolite Softeners Sludge Dewatering

Mixing Lime Mud Filters

Rotary Drum Vacuum Filters
MixTec Mixers Plate and Frame Filter Presses

Sedimentation Services

Backwash Clarifiers Lab and Pilot Plant Testing

Decant Clarifiers Replacement Clarifier & Thickener Drives
Flocculating Clarifiers Plant Process Audits
Inclined Plate Settlers Rental Equipment
Raw Water Clarifiers
Solids Contact Clarifiers Tankage

Membranes Supply and Erection

WesTech Ultrafiltration Systems

featuring the Polymem Modules

WesTech Engineering Inc., 3625 South West Temple, Salt Lake City, Utah 84115 (801) 265-1000
An Employee-Owned Company
 MINING AND METALLURGICAL EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT LINE CARD

Bateman Flotation Cells Tankage

Carbon Retention Screens Supply and Erection

Anchor Channel Tanks
In-tank NKM Screens Elevated Tanks
Steel Bottom at Grade
Clarifiers
Pin Bed Thickeners
Solids Contact
Inclined Plate Settlers Tailings
Vertical Pressure Filters Concentrate
Horizontal Pressure Filters HiFlo High Rise Rate Thickener
Ultra Sep Ultra High Rate Thickener
Filter Presses Center Feed or Side Feed
Rake Lifting Devices
Automatic Recessed Chamber Replacement Drives
Semi-automatic Recessed Chamber Sludge Dewatering Pickets
Paste Thickeners
Linear Screens
Vacuum Filters
Mixing
MixTec Mixers Horizontal Belt Filter
Precoat Drum Filter
Permroll Magnetic Separators Drum Filters and Disc Filters with Scraper
Discharge, Roll Discharge, Belt Discharge
Services

Lab and Pilot Plant Testing

Replacement Clarifier & Thickener Drives
Plant Process Audits
Rental Equipment

WesTech Engineering Inc., 3625 South West Temple, Salt Lake City, Utah 84115 (801) 265-1000
An Employee-Owned Company
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

DISEOS DEL
MECANISMO

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

DISEOS DEL
TANQUE

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115
 AN EMPLOYEE OWNED COMPANY

ELCTRICA, PLC Y
PI&D

WESTECH ENGINEERING, INC. 3665 SOUTH WEST TEMPLE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 84115